JP7388496B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, regarding slot machines, when the start lever is operated while medals are being bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is carried out, the reels begin to rotate, and the reels stop while they are rotating. When the button is operated, the reels stop rotating. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the internal lottery result, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-323750

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines , it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard .

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming .

The present invention
a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
an accepting means for accepting gaming media or virtual gaming media;
a bet number setting unit that grasps that the gaming media or virtual gaming media have been accepted by the accepting unit and sets the number of bets for the game with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a lottery means that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
The lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result corresponding to shifting to a specific state in which the probability of winning a predetermined role in the lottery by the lottery means changes compared to before the transition, and a transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific state when the symbol combination is stopped;
A gaming machine comprising:
The number of bets set by the number of bets setting means includes a first number of bets and a second number of bets that is different from the first number of bets,
a first control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a second control means that performs control so that a performance corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed;
Equipped with
The first control means is configured to satisfy a specific condition that can be satisfied without winning the transition result in a game played in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets. comprising a condition determining means for determining whether or not the
The gaming machine is
A predetermined number of bets in a game played in a situation in which the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. a first performance means capable of executing a first specific performance using the performance means;
In a game that is played in a situation where the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. a second performance means capable of executing a second specific performance different from the first specific performance using a predetermined performance means;
means capable of notifying a specific notification that the specific condition has been met using the predetermined presentation means;
In a situation where the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means, the game can be executed in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets. Features.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game .

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. (a) is a perspective view showing the bottom of the casing, and (b) is a partially enlarged view taken along the line AA in (a). It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is a top view of an auxiliary tank. 14 is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 13. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along line CC with the auxiliary tank in a downward position. 14 is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 13. FIG. It is an explanatory view when using an auxiliary tank in correspondence with manual collection. It is an explanatory view when using an auxiliary tank in correspondence with automatic recovery. (a) is a perspective view of the bottom cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the bottom cover. It is a side view of a bottom cover. 15 is a partially enlarged view of a cross section taken along line DD in FIG. 14. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing how rotation of a bottom cover is restricted. It is an explanatory view showing a support structure of a bottom cover. It is an explanatory view showing a method of removing a bottom cover. It is an explanatory view showing an example of installation of an auxiliary tank. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal game state. It is a flow chart showing reel control processing. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is an explanatory view for explaining stop control of a reel. 3 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. It is a flowchart which shows bonus state processing. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition relations of each state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart showing the first specific combination processing. It is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing. It is a flowchart showing the third specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode transition notification. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of press order notification. It is a flowchart which shows push order processing. It is a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows the number of games management process. 3 is a flowchart showing end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for specialized zones. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process by the display control apparatus of the sub side. It is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of bet. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows the press order notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of a stop. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus notification. It is a flowchart showing specific winning combination notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows continuous production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of continuous production. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between active lines and stopped symbols in the normal game mode and in a specific mode as a free mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the prize winning mode and the bonus provided in a specific mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the prize winning mode and the bonus provided in a specific mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the prize winning mode and the bonus provided in a specific mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing stopping symbols of each combination in a specific mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing stopping symbols of each combination in a specific mode. It is a diagram showing a lottery table for a normal game state in a specific mode. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect when switching game modes. It is a flowchart showing a specific mode bet effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process at the time of a start for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the winning combination correspondence process for specific modes. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination process for specific modes. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing for specific modes. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination process for specific modes. It is a flowchart which shows the push order process for specific modes. It is a flowchart which shows specialized zone processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the performance setting process at the time of a stop for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management process for specific modes. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence process for specific modes. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end process for specific modes. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display section. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display section. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display section. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display section. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display section. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the normal game mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the normal game mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game in a specific mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game in a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus notification for specific modes. It is a flowchart which shows the specific winning combination notification process for specific modes. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous production setting process for specific modes. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship of continuous effects in each mode. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the display performance during the bonus and each game during the bonus. It is a diagram showing a lottery table during bonus carryover in a specific mode. 7 is a flowchart showing counting processing by a sub-side display control device. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of display of the number of acquisitions on the auxiliary display section. 7 is a flowchart showing specific mode switching processing by the sub-side display control device. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect when switching modes by an auxiliary display section. 12 is a flowchart showing specific mode setting processing by the sub-side display control device. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect when a specific mode is set by the auxiliary display section. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect when a specific mode is set by the auxiliary display section. It is a diagram showing a modification of the lottery table for the normal game state in a specific mode. It is an explanatory view showing a modification of the relationship between the display effect during the bonus and each game during the bonus. (a) is a flowchart showing a modification of the specific mode continuous performance setting process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a modification of the end determination process. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lottery table for bonus states in a specific mode. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect when a specific mode is set by the auxiliary display section. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect for a mobile-linked service by an auxiliary display unit. 3 is a flowchart showing information input/output processing by a sub-side display control device. It is a flow chart which shows processing for advantageous sections by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of specific mode switching processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect when switching modes by an auxiliary display section. It is a flowchart showing MAX bet switching processing by the main controller. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a modification of identification display of a specific mode. FIG. 7 is a front view of a slot machine in a second embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state in a specific mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of special addition. It is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing. It is a figure showing a special addition occurrence table. It is a flowchart showing the third specific combination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for specialized zones. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result corresponding processing. It is an explanatory view showing various addition tables. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the difference between normal addition and special addition. 3 is a flowchart showing bet operation processing performed by the main controller. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the difference between normal addition and special addition. It is a flowchart which shows payout determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for payout. It is a flowchart showing processing for re-gaming. It is an explanatory view showing a modification of various types of additional tables. It is a diagram showing a modification of the lottery table for the normal game state in a specific mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure for explaining the outline of the modification of special addition. It is an explanatory view showing a modification of various types of additional tables. It is a flowchart showing a modification of the process for bet operation. It is a figure which shows the modification of a credit input switch and a start lever. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the auxiliary tank according to the third embodiment in a downward posture. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank corresponding to the cross section taken along line FF in FIG. 150. FIG. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged view of the bottom of the auxiliary tank in an upward position. It is an explanatory view showing how a lower opening part opens and closes. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged sectional view showing the configuration of an auxiliary tank according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged sectional view showing the configuration of an auxiliary tank according to a second modification of the third embodiment. It is a top view of the auxiliary tank based on 4th Embodiment. (a) is a perspective sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 156, and (b) is a perspective sectional view taken along line GG of the tank body. 156 is a sectional view taken along the line HH and an enlarged view of essential parts. (a) is a perspective view of the bottom cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the bottom cover. 157 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank corresponding to the cross section taken along line HH in FIG. 156. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a state before engagement. It is an explanatory view showing an engaged state. It is an explanatory view showing a state where engagement is released. It is an explanatory view when using an auxiliary tank in correspondence with automatic recovery. It is a perspective view of the bottom cover concerning modification 1 of a 4th embodiment. It is a top view of a tank main body. (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the extension plate when closed, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the state of the extension plate when opened. It is an explanatory view showing how movement of an auxiliary tank is regulated. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an installation state of an auxiliary tank 54 according to a second modification of the fourth embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank concerning modification 3 of a 4th embodiment. (a) is a perspective view of the lower sensor part and its surroundings, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower sensor part. (a) is a perspective sectional view of the auxiliary tank, and (b) is a perspective sectional view of the tank body. FIG. 3 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the auxiliary tank. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state before engagement, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an engaged state. It is an explanatory view showing a state where engagement is released.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention applied to a reel-type gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, and specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is the front side. 5 is a front view of the casing 11, FIG. 6(a) is a perspective view showing the bottom of the casing 11, and FIG. be.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 6, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a, 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. . Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a 504-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulse), and this excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has rotated once is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, the main controller 101 changes the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

A plurality of symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control can be performed such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 7 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include the "Red Bell" symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), the "1st Replay" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L), and the "Red 7" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 32L). ), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., 17th on left reel 32L), "White Bell" symbol (e.g., 12th on left reel 32L), "2nd Replay" symbol (e.g., 11th on left reel 32L) , "White 7" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 5th on left reel 32L), "Youth" There are 10 types of symbols (for example, number 0 on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 7, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are reported using combinations of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, a combination of these three symbols is, for example, as shown in FIG. 8, by connecting the upper symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1, the combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the lower symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol on the right reel 32R, the lower symbol on the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the bending line L6 is a line that bends in the middle when the symbols are lined up. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line other than the bending line L6, but their explanation will be omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, lines that are activated and lines that are not activated are set depending on the number of bets on medals, and when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line, As a result of winning a prize, the player is given a privilege in which a predetermined number of medals as game media are paid out, or a privilege in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no prize is won and the above benefits are not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 9(a), only the downward-sloping line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 9(b), two lines, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4, There are cases where the combination line is an effective line, and cases where only the bending line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 9(c). More specifically, when the game is started with 3 medals bet, only the lower right line L4 is considered as the valid line, and when the game is started with 2 medals bet, the lower right line L4 is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are taken as valid lines. Further, when the game is started after one medal is bet, only the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, middle line L2, and right-sloping line L5 are not set as valid lines. Below, a game started with three medals bet is called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is called a 2-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is called a 2-bet game. Also called a 1-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, the gameplay assumes that a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game is normally played. Therefore, the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game are sometimes referred to as the normal game mode, and the 1-bet game is sometimes referred to as the specific mode.

FIGS. 10 to 12 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits awarded in the case of winning in the normal game mode.

In the normal game mode, the minor prizes for which medals are paid out include the 1st minor prize to the 32nd minor prize.

When the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, The first small role prize. When the first small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 2nd minor prize winning to the 17th minor prize winning, the combination of winning symbols is different, but in a 3-bet game, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M A winning mode in which the "red bell" symbol and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stops on the upper line L1. It is. For example, the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L will stop at the top, the "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M will stop at the middle, and the "Second Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop at the bottom. If it stops, it will be the 5th small role prize. As shown in FIG. 7, on the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol (numbers 11 and 14) and the "red bell" symbol are arranged at positions adjacent to the upstream side (numbers 12 and 15). On the right reel 32R, a "red bell" symbol is arranged at a position one symbol away from the "second replay" symbol (numbers 0, 3) upstream (numbers 2, 5). For this reason, when the 5th minor winning is achieved on the downward-sloping line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 17th minor winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 18th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower row. When the 18th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The "Red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R have stopped on the active line. In this case, it will be the 19th small winning prize. When the 19th small winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 20th minor winning combination to the 24th minor winning winning, if the winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, 3 medals will be paid out, and in a 2-bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

Similar to the 18th minor prize winning, the 25th minor prize winning is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower row. In the case of winning the 18th small role, the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R may stop in the middle row only if it has been won twice with BB (the "Second Replay" symbol, If the combination of "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol) wins the 25th small prize, the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop in the middle regardless of whether BB is won or not. It is possible. When the 25th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "Watermelon" symbol or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 26th small win It will be a prize. When the 26th small winning combination is established, five medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and five medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 27th small prize will be won if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. This is a winning mode in which the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on the active line, resulting in a so-called watermelon tenpai off-stop roll. When the 27th minor winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right If the "red bell" symbol on reel 32R stops on the active line, the 28th small winning combination will be won. As shown in FIG. 7, the left reel 32L has "red bell" symbols (numbers 3, 7, 15, 20) and adjacent positions on the downstream side (numbers 2, 6, 14, 19). ), and a "second replay" symbol is placed at a position adjacent to the "white bell" symbol (number 12) on the downstream side (number 11). On the right reel 32R, there are "Red Bell" symbols (No. 2, 5, 10, 15, 20) and "No. A ``1 Replay'' symbol or a ``2nd Replay'' symbol is arranged. For this reason, when the 28th small prize is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "bell" symbol appears on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, except when the "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row. While the symbol and the "replay" symbol are tenpai, the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tenpai failure. When the 28th small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 29th small prize is won. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the No. 9 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the top or middle row, if the 29th small prize winning is established, the left The "white bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the middle line L2. When the 29th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, He won the 30th small role prize. Although the details will be described later, the 30th small winning combination is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 30th small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

If the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 31 small roles won. Although details will be described later, the 31st small winning combination is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 31st small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

If the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White 7" symbol or "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 32nd small It will be a prize. When the 32nd small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Prizes for which a replay benefit that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals include the 1st replay win to the 8th replay win. Furthermore, if the second re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, and if the third re-gaming winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-gaming win is achieved. If a winning or a fifth re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. The 1st re-game winning to 8th re-gaming winning is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game.

State transition winnings in which only a gaming state transition is performed include a 1st BB winning, a 2nd BB winning, and a CB winning.

If the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, you will win the 1st BB, and if the "White 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line. If the "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Second Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 2nd BB prize will be awarded. . When these BB wins are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Also, if the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, , won the CB prize. If a CB win is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although different from winning, there is a stop result in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, and "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right When the "watermelon" symbol on the reel 32R stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In addition, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "first replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R. Also when the symbols, "White 7" symbol, "Second Replay" symbol, and "Cherry" symbol stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combination of the above symbols will be referred to as a transition roll.

In addition, in the specific mode as a 1-bet game, the correspondence between the symbol combinations that result in winnings and the benefits that will be awarded in the case of winning will be explained in detail later.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped. In this case, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 45 involves an operation in which the player directly inserts medals, it can be said that the medal slot 45 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back side of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided from a medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 50 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The dispensing device 53 discharges the medals into an opening 48a provided in the discharging passage 48 by rotating a medal dispensing rotating plate (not shown), and dispensing the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharging passage 48. It has become. The hopper device 51 is attached to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 by being attached to a metal hopper attachment plate 22 (see FIG. 6(a)). The hopper mounting plate 22 is screwed and fixed to the bottom plate 11a, and includes a plurality of locking claws 22a that can lock the hopper device 51 (lower end portion of the dispensing device 53). By engaging the hopper device 51 with these locking claws 22a, the hopper device 51 is fixed.

An auxiliary tank 54 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 51 to prevent medals from being stored in the storage tank 52 in excess of a predetermined amount. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, when medals are stored at a height higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, surplus medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are stored in the auxiliary tank 54.

The medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 can be collected by an employee of the game hall. That is, the auxiliary tank 54 is housed inside the housing 11 while being placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 (see FIG. 5), and when the front surface of the housing 11 is opened, it is placed on the front side (front side). ), it can be taken out from the housing 11. Hereinafter, the collection method of taking out the auxiliary tank 54 and collecting medals may be referred to as manual collection.

The medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 can be collected not only manually but also by an automatic collection device installed in the game hall. That is, as shown in FIG. 6(a), the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with a medal discharge hole 15 for discharging the medals to the outside of the slot machine 10. The collected medals are supplied to an automatic collection device located below the slot machine 10. The medal ejection hole 15 passes through the bottom plate 11a in the thickness direction, and is arranged to correspond to the falling position of the medal falling from the guide plate 52a. Hereinafter, a collection method for collecting medals using an automatic collection device may be referred to as automatic collection.

Note that whether the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are collected manually or automatically depends on the equipment of the gaming hall where the slot machine 10 is installed, that is, the gaming hall supports automatic collection. It can be used depending on whether it is available or not.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are removed. It is designed to be returned through a discharge port 49.

At the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a first credit input switch 56 is provided for inputting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. Further, a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit input switch 56, and a third credit input switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56. The second credit input switch 57 is for inputting one virtual medal, and the third credit input switch 58 is for inputting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit input switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal input slot 45. Also, it should be noted that whereas the medal slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit input switches 56 to 58 only involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

More specifically, regarding each of the credit input switches 56 to 58, the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57 are formed with a larger operating surface that can be operated by hand or the like than the third credit input switch 58. ing. Therefore, the operability of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57 is improved. In other words, the second credit input switch 57 that can be used in a 1-bet game as a specific mode has the same operability as the first credit input switch 56 that can be used in a 3-bet game as a normal game mode. It can be said that there are.

A first performance switch 66 is provided between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, which is operated when a performance occurs. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the first production switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the first production switch 66. is provided. As mentioned above, the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game are set as the normal game mode, and the 1-bet game is set as the specific mode, but depending on the positional relationship of the corresponding credit input switches 56 to 58, the normal game mode and the specific mode can be changed. It can be said that they are differentiated.

Further, on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and to the right of each stop switch 42 to 44, a second production switch 67 used for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is provided. . The second effect switch 67 will be explained in detail later.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment switch 59 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, if we focus on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display section 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that have been credited, and a remaining payout section that displays the number of remaining medals that will be paid out before the BB state ends. A number display section 61 and a payout number display section 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are constructed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display section 62, a press order notification section 68 is provided to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. There is. The press order notification section 68 is composed of three LED lamps corresponding to the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44, respectively. Note that the press order notification unit 68 can also be replaced with a liquid crystal display, etc., and an LED lamp may be provided inside the stop switches 42 to 44 so that the stop switches 42 to 44 emit light, or .about.44 may be provided with LED lamps adjacent to each of them.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that play various sound effects and notify the player of the game status as the game progresses. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for providing various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be based on the main display section, in this embodiment, It is called an auxiliary display section 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary display section 65.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and also includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by a hall manager or the like inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. Note that the reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 is attached to the housing 11 for overall management of the game.

<About the auxiliary tank 54>
Here, the auxiliary tank 54 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. 13 is a plan view of the auxiliary tank, FIG. 14 is a perspective sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 13, FIG. 15 is a perspective sectional view taken along line CC with the auxiliary tank 54 in a downward position, and FIG. It is a sectional view taken along the line BB.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the auxiliary tank 54 includes a bottomed tank body 501 that is substantially box-shaped and has an upwardly open top. The tank body 501 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. The tank body 501 has a bottom plate portion 501a that is substantially rectangular in plan view, and a front wall portion 501b, a rear wall portion 501c, a right side wall portion 501d, and a left side wall portion 501e that stand up from the bottom plate portion 501a so as to surround the bottom plate portion 501a. An upper opening 502 that opens upward and has a substantially rectangular shape in plan view is formed at the upper part of the opening 502 .

The right side wall portion 501d and the left side wall portion 501e are inclined so that the distance between them increases as they go upward. In this case, the upper opening 502 can be expanded compared to the case where both walls 501d and 501e are upright. As a result, even if a large amount of medals go to the auxiliary tank 54 at once, for example, when the medals in the storage tank 52 are manually scraped out and moved to the auxiliary tank 54, the medals will not spill and scatter on the housing 11. is suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16, a handle portion 503 is integrally formed at the upper part of the front wall portion 501b of the tank body 501. The handle portion 503 includes a flat plate-shaped extension portion 503a extending forward from the upper end of the front wall portion 501b, and a hanging portion 503b hanging downward from the front end of the extension portion 503a. Connecting portions 503c connecting the hanging portion 503b and the front wall portion 501b are provided at both left and right ends of the hanging portion 503b, increasing the rigidity of attachment of the hanging portion 503b to the tank body 501. The handle portion 503 opens downward and is configured such that a finger or hand can be inserted between the hanging portion 503b and the front wall portion 501b from below the handle portion 503.

Since the handle portion 503 is provided, the auxiliary tank 54 can be pulled out from inside the housing 11 forward by hooking a finger or hand on the hanging portion 503b. When the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out from the housing 11, the user can hold the auxiliary tank 54 stably by inserting the fingertip between the hanging portion 503b and the front wall portion 501b. Therefore, the series of operations of pulling out the auxiliary tank 54 forward from inside the housing 11 and lifting it up can be performed continuously and smoothly.

An upper sensor insertion hole 505a and a lower sensor insertion hole 505b each having a circular shape are formed in the rear wall portion 501c of the tank body 501 so as to be vertically aligned. When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 6(a) ) is inserted. These sensor rods 16a and 16b are for detecting the accommodation state of medals in the auxiliary tank 54, and are electrically connected to the main control device 101. As shown in FIG. 6(a), both sensor rods 16a and 16b are vertically spaced apart from each other and form a pair, each having its base end fixed to the back plate 11b of the housing 11 and extending toward the front. It extends parallel to the bottom plate 11a.

Each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b of the tank body 501 is formed at a position corresponding to each sensor rod 16a, 16b in the rear wall portion 501c. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, each sensor rod 16a, 16b passes through each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b from the rear of the auxiliary tank 54, and the tip of each sensor rod 16a, 16b is located inside the tank body 501. Each of the sensor rods 16a, 16b is made of a conductive metal material, and when the amount of medals (conductive) stored in the auxiliary tank 54 reaches a predetermined amount, the medals are interposed between the sensor rods 16a, 16b. When this happens, both sensor rods 16a and 16b are electrically connected through the medal. Thereby, the main control device 101 knows that the predetermined amount of medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, that is, that the auxiliary tank 54 is full.

If the main control device 101 determines that the hall is full, an external signal indicating that the hall is full is output to the gaming hall management device (hall computer) through an external centralized terminal board 121, which will be described later. . Thereafter, the full state of the auxiliary tank 54 is notified to an employee of the game hall through a predetermined communication terminal, and the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 are collected by the employee.

<About the configuration to support both manual collection and automatic collection>
By the way, when collecting medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 by automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 becomes an obstacle and it becomes necessary to take them out from the housing 11. However, if the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out from the housing 11, it becomes necessary to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank 54 in the game hall, which is inconvenient. In addition, if the auxiliary tank 54 is lost or confused with one from another model of slot machine, this may cause inconvenience when the slot machine 10 is recirculated as a used machine.

Therefore, the auxiliary tank 54 according to the present embodiment is compatible with both manual collection and automatic collection methods, and with the auxiliary tank 54 installed inside the housing 11, the storage tank 52 It is configured to automatically collect overflowing medals. Hereinafter, the configuration for this purpose will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18 as well. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram when the auxiliary tank 54 is used for manual collection, FIG. 18(a) is an explanatory diagram when the auxiliary tank 54 is used for automatic collection, and FIG. FIG.

As already explained, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed, each sensor rod 16a, 16b is inserted into the tank body 501, but in this embodiment, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is turned upside down, each sensor rod 16a, 16b is inserted into the tank body 501. 16a, 16b can be inserted into each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b.

That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed with the bottom plate portion 501a facing upward, the upper sensor rod 16a is inserted into the upper sensor insertion hole 505a, and the lower sensor rod 16b is inserted into the lower sensor insertion hole 505b. On the other hand, if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward position with the bottom plate portion 501a facing upward, the upper sensor rod 16a is inserted into the lower sensor insertion hole 505b, and the lower sensor rod 16b is inserted into the upper sensor insertion hole 505a. The opening diameter and height position of each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b with respect to each sensor rod 16a, 16b are set so as to be able to do so.

Specifically, in relation to the lower sensor rod 16b, the distance Lb1 from the lower end position of the bottom plate part 501a to the lower end position of the lower sensor insertion hole 505b (see FIG. 16), and the upper end position of the rear wall part 501c. and the distance La1 from the upper end position of the upper sensor insertion hole 505a are less than or equal to the distance from the bottom plate 11a to the lower end position of the lower sensor rod 16b (the lower end position of the part inserted into each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b) It becomes. On the other hand, in relation to the upper sensor rod 16a, the distance Lb2 from the lower end position of the bottom plate part 501a to the upper end position of the upper sensor insertion hole 505a, and the lower end position of the lower sensor insertion hole 505b from the upper end position of the rear wall part 501c. Both of the distance La2 from the bottom plate 11a to the upper end position of the upper sensor rod 16a (the upper end position of the part inserted into each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b) are greater than or equal to the distance from the bottom plate 11a to the upper end position of the upper sensor rod 16a. In this embodiment, the opening diameter of each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b and the distance La1, Lb1 are approximately equal, and each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b is It is set to be substantially vertically symmetrical with respect to the center line 510.

With this configuration, the auxiliary tank 54 can be installed in the housing 11 not only in an upward position but also in a downward position with its top and bottom reversed.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the auxiliary tank 54 has a bottom that can be opened and closed. Specifically, the tank body 501 includes a lower opening 512 provided in the bottom plate portion 501a, and a bottom lid 514 that opens and closes the lower opening 512. The bottom cover 514 is rotatably supported by a support portion 504 (see FIG. 16) provided at a connecting portion between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e.

The lower opening 512 passes through the bottom plate portion 501a in the thickness direction, and has a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The lower opening 512 is arranged at the center of the bottom plate part 501a, and has a size that allows a plurality of medals to pass through at the same time.

The bottom cover 514 serves as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the lower opening 512, and has two positions: a closed position (see FIG. 14) where the lower opening 512 is covered and closed from above, and a closed position where the lower opening 512 is closed from above. 501 to open the lower opening 512 (see FIG. 15). The bottom cover 514 has a substantially flat plate shape, and has a substantially rectangular shape in plan view corresponding to the shape of the lower opening 512. Each dimension of the bottom cover 514 in the longitudinal direction and the width direction is larger than the lower opening 512 and smaller than the bottom plate part 501a. It is possible to close the lower opening 512 while avoiding interference with the portion 501c, the right side wall 501d, and the left side wall 501e.

The support section 504 includes a front support section 515a, a rear support section 515b, and an intermediate support section 515c. These support portions 515a to 515c are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the tank body 501 at the connection portion between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e, and are arranged at predetermined intervals from each other. Note that the detailed structure of each of the support parts 515a to 515c and the connection structure with the bottom cover 514 will be explained in detail later.

In this embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is used for manual collection, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in an upward position and the bottom cover 514 is placed in the closed position, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 16. The side opening 512 is closed. In this state, as shown in FIG. 17, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, and the guide plate 52a (see FIG. 5) of the hopper device 51 is positioned above the upper opening 502.

With this installation mode, medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 fall into the auxiliary tank 54, and the medals can be stored in the auxiliary tank 54. At this time, as shown in FIG. 16, since the bottom cover 514 rests on the surface of the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501, the downward rotation of the bottom cover 514 is restricted, and the bottom cover 514 is placed in the closed position. It is suppressed from rotating downward beyond this point. This prevents the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 from falling out due to the weight of the medals when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out or lifted from the housing 11.

On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is used for automatic recovery, as shown in FIG. 512 is opened. In this state, as shown in FIG. 18(a), the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, the guide plate 52a is positioned above the lower opening 512, and the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11. is positioned above the medal ejection hole 15 (see FIG. 6(a)).

With this installation mode, the lower opening 512, the upper opening 502, and the medal discharge hole 15 communicate with each other, and medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 pass through the auxiliary tank 54 and enter the medal discharge hole 15. It becomes possible to move. Thereby, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed, the medals from the storage tank 52 can be guided to the medal discharge hole 15, and the medals can be automatically collected.

Here, when switching the auxiliary tank 54 from automatic recovery to manual recovery, it is necessary to forget to close the lower opening 512 and move the auxiliary tank 54 in an upward position with the lower opening 512 open. In some cases, the device may be installed inside the housing 11. In this case, since the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 has fallen out, when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out from the housing 11, the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 will fall out and be scattered inside the housing 11. As a result, an employee of the game hall will have to manually remove the medals one by one, which may result in a great deal of effort.

Furthermore, when switching the auxiliary tank 54 from manual recovery to automatic recovery, the user forgets to open the lower opening 512 and the auxiliary tank 54 remains closed with the bottom cover 514. It is assumed that the device is installed in the housing 11 in a downward facing position. In this case, since the movement path of the medals to the medal discharge hole 15 is blocked by the bottom cover 514, when a game is played in such a state, some medals from the guide plate 52a accumulate on the bottom back of the tank body 501. Afterwards, this will lead to a situation where the liquid spills out one after another. In this case, not only will the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 not be automatically collected properly, but the medals will also be scattered within the housing 11.

Therefore, in this embodiment, an employee of the game hall can switch the form of the auxiliary tank 54 between manual collection and automatic collection without being conscious of closing or opening the bottom cover 514. The configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 is devised. This configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, along with a detailed explanation of the bottom cover 514. 19(a) is a perspective view of the bottom cover 514, (b) is a rear perspective view of the bottom cover 514, FIG. 20 is a side view of the bottom cover 514, and FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged view taken along the line DD in FIG. 14. , FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing how the rotation of the bottom cover 514 is restricted.

The bottom lid 514 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 19, includes a lid main body 521 in the shape of a flat plate and a shaft portion 522 in the shape of a substantially round bar. The lid main body 521 has a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and its longitudinal and lateral dimensions are larger than those of the lower opening 512. Therefore, when the bottom lid 514 is in the closed position, the entire lower opening 512 is closed by the lid main body 521, and around the lower opening 512, the back surface 521b of the lid main body 521 and the tank The surface of the bottom plate portion 501a of the main body 501 contacts in a circumferential manner.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), a plurality of protrusions 523 are provided on the back surface 521b of the lid main body 521. The protrusions 523 extend along the longitudinal direction of the lid body 521, and are arranged parallel to each other at predetermined intervals in the lateral direction of the lid body 521. The provision of these protrusions 523 reinforces the strength and bending rigidity of the lid main body 521, increasing the durability of the bottom lid 514.

The shaft portion 522 is integrally formed with the lid body 521 at one long side portion 521c of the lid body 521, and extends along the extending direction of the long side portion 521c. The shaft portion 522 includes a front support shaft 524 and a rear support shaft 525 provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the long side portion 521c, and an intermediate support shaft 526 provided at an intermediate portion between the support shafts 524 and 525. It is equipped with These front support shaft 524, rear support shaft 525, and intermediate support shaft 526 correspond to the front support portion 515a, rear support portion 515b, and intermediate support portion 515c (see FIG. 13) provided in the tank body 501. . That is, the front support shaft 524 and the rear support shaft 525 are connected to the front support part 515a and the rear support part 515b, respectively, and the intermediate support shaft 526 is connected to the intermediate support part 515c.

In the lid body 521, a front notch 530 and a rear notch 531, which are cut out in a rectangular shape, are formed at both ends in the axial direction of the shaft portion 522. Further, a support opening 532 is formed at a location corresponding to the intermediate support shaft 526. By forming these front notch 530, rear notch 531, and support opening 532, a predetermined gap is secured between the lid main body 521 and each of the support parts 515a to 515c, and the bottom lid 514 is Interference with each support portion 515a to 515c during rotation is avoided.

The shaft portion 522 is provided with a plurality of notch grooves 533 that are formed by cutting out a portion of the shaft portion 522 in the radial direction of the shaft portion 522 . These cutout grooves 533 have one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of ribs 506 (see FIGS. 14 and 16) provided at the connection portion between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e in the tank body 501. When the bottom cover 514 is attached to the tank body 501, as shown in FIG. 21, each rib 506 is inserted into and engaged with each notch groove 533, and the shaft portion 522 moves relative to the tank body 501. is regulated.

In this embodiment, when the bottom cover 514 is located in the closed position, the rotational position of the bottom cover 514 is not fixed or held. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward position, the lid body 521 of the bottom lid 514 is merely maintained in the closed position by resting on the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501, and the bottom lid 514 is in a state where it can freely rotate toward the open position.

Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is turned upside down from an upward position to a downward position, the bottom cover 514 rotates under its own weight toward the open position, and the lower opening 512 is naturally opened. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in a downward position, the lower opening 512 is opened accordingly. Therefore, the lower opening 512 can be opened in conjunction with the reversing operation of the auxiliary tank 54, and a separate manual opening operation is not required. This prevents the lower opening 512 from remaining closed, and allows it to always be in a proper state without being conscious of whether it is open or not.

Furthermore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in a downward position, the shaft portion 522 of the bottom cover 514 is covered from above by the bottom plate portion 501a. This prevents the medals from the storage tank 52 from colliding with the shaft portion 522 and hindering support. At this time, by configuring the shaft portion 522 to be covered by the bottom plate portion 501a, there is no need to provide a dedicated part as a covering member, and the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 can be simplified.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), a protrusion 535 is integrally formed on the surface 521a of the lid body 521. The protrusion 535 is arranged at the center of the lid body 521 in the longitudinal direction, and is adjacent to the support opening 532 in the lateral direction. The protruding portion 535 protrudes from the surface 521a of the lid body 521 at a predetermined height, and is formed into a substantially triangular shape when viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 522 (see FIG. 20).

As shown in FIG. 22(a), when the bottom cover 514 is rotated in the first direction 537 from the closed position to the open position, the top 535a of the protrusion 535 is By coming into contact with , rotation of the bottom cover 514 in the first direction 537 is restricted. Thereby, the rotation end position of the bottom cover 514 is defined, and the upper limit of the rotation angle in the first direction 537 is limited to the predetermined rotation angle α.

In this case, the predetermined rotation angle (maximum rotation angle in the first direction 537) α of the bottom cover 514 is, as shown in FIG. 22(b), when the bottom cover 514 The rotation angle is such that the bottom cover 514 is inclined toward the closed position with respect to a virtual vertical line 540 passing through the rotation axis 538 of the bottom cover 514 . In other words, the rotation angle is such that the center of gravity of the bottom cover 514 does not cross the virtual vertical line 540 and does not exceed the virtual vertical line 540 in the first direction 537. Specifically, the predetermined rotation angle α is less than 90°, and in this embodiment is 85°. With this configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward position, the center of gravity of the bottom cover 514 is located on the closed position side with respect to the virtual vertical line 540, and the bottom cover 514 is moved by its own weight. Try to lean towards the closed position.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the bottom cover 514 is located at the open position, the rotational position of the bottom cover 514 is not fixed or held. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward position, the protrusion 535 of the bottom cover 514 contacts the left side wall 501e of the tank body 501, and the bottom cover 514 merely leans against the left side wall 501e. First, the bottom cover 514 is in a state where it can freely rotate toward the closed position.

Therefore, when the bottom cover 514 is about to tilt toward the closed position as described above, the bottom cover 514 easily rotates toward the closed position, and the lower opening 512 is naturally closed. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in an upward position, the lower opening 512 is closed accordingly. Therefore, the lower opening 512 can be closed in conjunction with the reversing operation of the auxiliary tank 54, and a separate manual closing operation is not required. This prevents the lower opening 512 from remaining open, and allows it to always be in a proper state without being conscious of whether it is closed or not.

Incidentally, when the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in a downward position, the bottom cover 514 tends to remain in a balanced position where the center of gravity of the bottom cover 514 is located directly below the rotation axis 538; however, in this embodiment, the protrusion 535 comes into contact with the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501, thereby restricting the rotation of the bottom cover 514 before the above-mentioned balance position. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward position, the bottom cover 514 is maintained at a position rotated in the first direction 537 by the predetermined rotation angle α from the closed position, and this position is the open position. It will be equivalent to .

As shown in FIG. 20, the protruding portion 535 includes a first inclined portion 535b located on the shaft portion 522 side with the top portion 535a in between, and a second inclined portion 535c located on the opposite side to the shaft portion 522 side. We are prepared. The first inclined portion 535b slopes upward from the shaft portion 522 side toward the top portion 535a, and the second sloped portion 535c slopes downward from the top portion 535a toward the side opposite to the shaft portion 522 side. The angle of inclination of the second inclined part 535c is smaller than that of the first inclined part 535b.

With this configuration, it is possible to keep the amount of protrusion (height in the protrusion direction) of the protrusion 535 small and ensure the strength of the protrusion 535. That is, the degree of restriction of the rotational range of the bottom cover 514 is determined by the amount of protrusion of the protruding portion 535, and if the inclination angle of the second inclined portion 535c is larger than that of the first inclined portion 535b, the top portion 535a The position of the bottom cover 514 moves away from the rotation axis 538 of the bottom cover 514, and it becomes necessary to increase the amount of protrusion of the protrusion 535. In this case, the strength of the protruding portion 535 decreases, and the protruding portion 535 becomes easily damaged due to collision of medals, etc.

Here, in this embodiment, the bottom cover 514 is tilted at a predetermined rotation angle (specific rotation angle) between the closed position and the open position, and in that state, the bottom cover 514 is tilted in a predetermined removal direction. By moving the bottom cover 514 to the tank body 501, the connection between the bottom cover 514 and the tank body 501 can be released. The configuration for this purpose will be described below with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, along with a detailed description of the front support part 515a, the rear support part 515b, and the intermediate support part 515c. FIG. 23 is an explanatory view showing the support structure of the bottom cover 514, and FIG. 24 is an explanatory view showing a method for removing the bottom cover 514.

As already explained, in the bottom cover 514, the front support shaft 524, the rear support shaft 525, and the intermediate support shaft 526 of the shaft portion 522 are connected to the front support portion 515a, the rear support portion 515b, and the intermediate support portion of the tank body 501. 515c, it is connected to the tank body 501. Note that since the connection structures between each of the support shafts 524 to 526 and each of the support parts 515a to 515c are the same, the combination of the front support shaft 524 and the front support part 515a will be described here as an example.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), the front support portion 515a includes a support upright portion 551 that stands up upward from the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501, and a support upright portion 551 that protrudes from the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501 toward the support upright portion 551 side. A supporting protrusion 552 is provided.

The height dimension of the support upright portion 551 is larger than the shaft diameter of the front support shaft 524, and a protrusion portion 551b that protrudes toward the left side wall portion 501e is formed at the upper portion of the support upright portion 551. . The support protrusion 552 is arranged at a height corresponding to the protrusion 551b, and faces the protrusion 551b in the radial direction of the front support shaft 524. An elongated slit portion 554 is formed between the protrusion portion 551b and the support protrusion portion 552, and is open vertically and extends in the axial direction of the front support shaft 524. A space 553 into which the front support shaft 524 can be inserted is formed below the slit 554, and wall surfaces 551a and 552a of the protrusion 551b and the support protrusion 552 that define the upper part of the space 553 are formed below the slit 554. , are curved in an arc shape so that the distance between them narrows as they move upward.

On the other hand, the front support shaft 524 has a shape in which a part of a round bar is chamfered into a planar shape. Specifically, it includes a pair of flat surfaces 561 that are parallel to each other, and a sliding surface 562 that has an arcuate cross section and connects these flat surfaces 561. The interval (width in the radial direction) M between both flat surfaces 561 is the same as or smaller than the opening width Ld of the slit portion 554 (opening width in the same direction as the above direction).

As shown in FIG. 20, the flat surface 561 is formed at an angle of inclination that is obtained by rotating a predetermined angle about the rotation axis 538 with respect to a virtual plane that is flush with the lid body 521 of the bottom lid 514. has been done. This angle of inclination is such that, as shown in FIG. 24, when the bottom cover 514 is inclined at a predetermined specific rotation angle β between the closed position and the open position, both flat surfaces 561 stand upright (in other words, Then, the angle is set such that the sliding surface 562 faces the slit portion 554.

Therefore, by tilting the bottom cover 514 at the specific rotation angle β, the width of the front support shaft 524 becomes the distance M between the flat surfaces 561, and can be made equal to or less than the opening width Ld of the slit portion 554. Therefore, by moving the bottom cover 514 toward the upper opening 502 while maintaining the same position, the front support shaft 524 passes through the slit portion 554 and can be removed from the front support portion 515a. Incidentally, when the bottom cover 514 is moved upward while being tilted at a specific rotation angle β, the rear support shaft 525 and the intermediate support shaft 526 are also removed from the rear support portion 515b and the intermediate support portion 515c, respectively. This makes it possible to remove the bottom cover 514 from the tank body 501.

In this way, since the bottom cover 514 is configured to be removable from the tank body 501, if the bottom cover 514 is damaged, it is not necessary to replace the entire auxiliary tank 54, and it is possible to deal with the problem by replacing the bottom cover 514. Become. Furthermore, when attaching the bottom cover 514 to the tank body 501, it can be easily attached by pushing the bottom cover 514 downward from above each of the support parts 515a to 515c while tilting the bottom cover 514 at a specific rotation angle β. , the work of assembling the auxiliary tank 54 can be facilitated.

On the other hand, when the bottom cover 514 is located in the closed position (see FIG. 23(a)) or the open position (see FIG. 23(b)), the width of the front support shaft 524 is larger than the interval M between the slit parts 554. As a result, the front support shaft 524 cannot pass through the slit portion 554. Therefore, even if the bottom cover 514 is moved toward the upper opening 502 at those positions, it cannot be removed from the tank body 501. As already explained, in this embodiment, when supporting automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward position, and in that case, the bottom cover 514 is suspended from the tank body 501 and the protruding portion 535 remains in the rotational position (open position) where it abuts against the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501. Even in such a case, the predetermined rotation angle α (opening position) defined by the protrusion 535 and the specific rotation angle β at which the bottom cover 514 can be removed are different, so that the bottom cover 514 can be removed from the tank body. 501 and falling is suppressed.

<About the configuration for fixing the auxiliary tank 54>
Incidentally, from the viewpoint of suppressing the loss of the auxiliary tank 54 when transporting the slot machine 10, it is desirable to transport the slot machine 10 with the auxiliary tank 54 housed in the housing 11. However, when manually collecting the medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54, it is necessary to take out the auxiliary tank 54 from inside the housing 11, so the auxiliary tank 54 is required to be installed in a free state without being fixed. Therefore, if the slot machine 10 is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank 54 moves within the housing 11 and collides with surrounding members such as the hopper device 51, causing damage.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the configuration is devised so that the auxiliary tank 54 is in a fixed state when the slot machine 10 is transported, but can be in a free state when used for manual recovery. There is. This configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6 and 13 to 18.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 17, the upper end of the tank body 501 of the auxiliary tank 54 is provided with a plate-shaped flange portion 571 that projects outward. The flange portion 571 is integrally formed with the tank body 501, and includes a front flange portion 571a, a rear flange portion 572b, a right flange portion 571c, and a left flange portion 571d. Each of these flange portions 571a to 571d is continuously formed in a frame shape so as to surround the upper opening 502. By providing the flange portion 571 in this way, the bending rigidity of the tank body 501 is reinforced, and deformation of the auxiliary tank 54 is suppressed when the auxiliary tank 54 is lifted up with medals stored therein. Note that the front flange portion 571a also serves as the extension portion 503a of the handle portion 503.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 6(a) and 18(a), on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in a downward position, An engaging portion 574 that engages with the flange portion 571c is provided. The engaging portion 574 is integrally formed with the hopper mounting plate 22, and is formed by bending a part of the hopper mounting plate 22. Specifically, in the hopper mounting plate 22, a mounting plate protrusion 575 is formed so as to protrude rightward from the right end of the mounting plate main body 22b, and the mounting plate protrusion 575 is bent into a crank shape. By this, an engaging portion 574 is formed. As shown in FIG. 6(b), the engaging portion 574 includes a standing portion 577 that stands upward from the mounting plate protrusion 575, and a tension portion that extends from the upper end of the standing portion 577 toward the installation area of the auxiliary tank 54. An exit portion 578 is provided.

The lower surface 578a of the overhanging portion 578 is substantially parallel to the surface of the bottom plate 11a, and the length of the overhanging portion 578 in the overhanging direction is smaller than the length of the right flange portion 571c in the overhanging direction. ing. The height of the upright portion 577 is set such that the gap dimension Le between the overhanging portion 578 and the bottom plate 11a is slightly larger than or equal to the thickness dimension of the right flange portion 571c. Further, the distance Lh (see FIG. 6(a)) between the inner wall surface 577a of the upright portion 577 and the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 is slightly larger than or equal to the width dimension Lf of the auxiliary tank 54 (see FIG. 13). It is set so that As shown in FIG. 18(a), the engaging portion 574 is disposed at a position that is a predetermined distance backward from the front end portion 11d of the bottom plate 11a, and has a predetermined length shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the right flange portion 571c. It extends in the front-back direction.

With this configuration, the auxiliary tank 54 in a downward facing position is placed on the bottom plate 11a in front of the engaging portion 574, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid from this state toward the back plate 11b. By doing so, the right flange portion 571c can be inserted into the gap between the overhang portion 578 and the bottom plate 11a, as shown in FIG. 18(b). As a result, the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 can be engaged with each other, and the protruding portion 578 can prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from floating (upward movement).

Therefore, by installing the auxiliary tank 54 as described above when transporting the slot machine 10, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from moving upward within the housing 11 and colliding with the upper guide plate 52a or the like. Furthermore, if the auxiliary tank 54 moves upward, the auxiliary tank 54 will get caught in the interference position with the locking device 20 inside the housing 11, and the lock cannot be unlocked even if the unlocking operation is performed through the key cylinder 21. Although this may occur, by restricting the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

When the right side flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 are engaged, not only the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted, but also the auxiliary tank 54 is arranged between the upright portion 577 and the right side plate 11c. By doing so, it is also possible to restrict movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the left and right direction. In this case, when transporting the slot machine 10, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from reciprocating from side to side and repeatedly colliding with the right side plate 11c and the hopper device 51.

Here, when manually collecting the medals, when the auxiliary tank 54 is removed from the housing 11 by lifting a part or the whole of the auxiliary tank 54, the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 are removed. In the engaged state, the above-mentioned removal operation becomes difficult. That is, in this embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in a downward position to engage the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574, the hanging portion 503b stands up and the handle portion 503 opens upward. state. In this case, it becomes difficult to insert fingers or hands from below, so if the employee habitually tries to take out the medals after transporting them to the game hall where they are being collected manually (or after setting them up), It also becomes easier to hesitate. Thereby, forced removal operation in the engaged state is suppressed, and damage to the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), a regulating plate 579 that regulates the amount of forward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is provided at the front end 11d of the bottom plate 11a. The regulating plate 579 is constituted by a metal flat plate having a predetermined thickness, and forms an upward step between the regulating plate 579 and the bottom plate 11a at its rear end.

The length of the regulation plate 579 in the front-rear direction (the sliding direction of the auxiliary tank 54) is such that when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid to a predetermined installation position, the rear end of the regulation plate 579 is in front of the auxiliary tank 54. The length is set to the position. That is, the distance between the rear end of the regulating plate 579 and the back plate 11b is longer than the longitudinal dimension Lg of the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, after the auxiliary tank 54 is installed at a predetermined installation position, even if the auxiliary tank 54 moves forward, it is caught by the restriction plate 579 and further forward movement is restricted. This prevents the auxiliary tank 54 from colliding with the back surface of the front door 12 during transportation of the slot machine 10, thereby suppressing damage to the auxiliary tank 54 and the front door 12.

The thickness of the regulating plate 579 is determined by the thickness of the lower end 12a of the front door 12 (see FIG. 4), which is located above the bottom plate 11a when the front door 12 is closed. It is advisable to make sure that the height of the vehicle (the part where the vehicle becomes) is at a height that allows you to ride on it. Thereby, the gap between the front door 12 and the bottom plate 11a can be filled with the regulating plate 579. That is, the regulation plate 579 can also function as a fraud prevention plate that prevents unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10 by inserting a foreign object such as a wire through the gap.

Here, the predetermined installation position is set at a position where the guide plate 52a is placed above the lower opening 512 provided in the bottom plate portion 501a of the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, when transporting to the game hall for automatic collection, if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward with the bottom cover 514 in the open position, the auxiliary tank 54 It can be used as is without the need for removal or position adjustment.

However, during transportation, the bottom cover 514 does not necessarily need to be in the open position. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the auxiliary tank 54 may be installed with the bottom cover 514 placed on the upper sensor rod 16a. In this case, the rotation of the bottom cover 514 to the open position can be restricted by abutting the upper sensor rod 16a at a position on the way to the open position. As a result, the upper limit of the rotation of the bottom cover 514 from the closed position is defined as the predetermined rotation angle γ, and even if a foreign object or a hand enters the medal ejection hole 15 and an attempt is made to rotate the bottom cover 514 to the open position, This is blocked by the upper sensor rod 16a. As a result, the lower opening 512 is prevented from being completely opened, making it difficult for unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine.

Here, in this embodiment, the rotation shaft 538 and the upper sensor rod 16a are arranged such that the predetermined rotation angle γ is smaller than the specific rotation angle β (see FIG. 24) at which the bottom cover 514 can be removed. The positional relationship is set. In this case, even if a foreign object or a hand enters the medal ejection hole 15 and the bottom cover 514 is rotated, the bottom cover 514 cannot be rotated or cannot be rotated until the specific rotation angle β, making it difficult to remove the bottom cover 514. This makes it possible to suppress the act of attempting to completely open the lower opening 512 by removing the bottom cover 514.

On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position, the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574 are not engaged with each other, and the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a free state, as shown in FIG. Therefore, when manually collecting medals, the auxiliary tank 54 can be easily taken out from inside the housing 11.

Note that the distance between the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 corresponds to the width dimension Lf of the auxiliary tank 54, and specifically, it is slightly larger than the width dimension Lf. There is. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position, the auxiliary tank 54 is sandwiched between the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c, and the flange portion 571 comes into contact with the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c. , movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the left and right directions is restricted.

As already explained, in this embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward position, the left side wall 501e and the right side wall 501d of the tank body 501 are inclined so that the distance between them increases as they move upward. It is formed. Among these, the left side wall portion 501e is a wall portion that faces the engaging portion 574 when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position. can be easily separated from the engaging portion 574. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position, a space can be secured between the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging part 574, and interference with the engaging part 574 will prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from becoming difficult to install. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as tilting.

Incidentally, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position, the regulation plate 579 is located in front of the auxiliary tank 54, and the auxiliary tank 54 can come into contact with the regulation plate 579 when the auxiliary tank 54 is removed. . Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a bulging portion 581 having a semicircular cross section is provided on the back surface of the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501.

The bulging part 581 is integrally formed with the tank body 501, and is arranged at the front part of the tank body 501 on the back surface of the bottom plate part 501a. This reduces the chance of the tank body 501 getting caught on the regulating plate 579, making it possible to smoothly pull out the auxiliary tank 54. In this case, by making the height of the bulging portion 581 larger than the thickness of the regulating plate 579, it becomes easier for the bulging portion 581 to first come into contact with the regulating plate 579 when pulling out the auxiliary tank 54. It becomes possible to suitably exhibit the effect of reducing catching.

When releasing the engagement between the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574, the engagement can be released by pulling out the auxiliary tank 54 forward (toward the near side) from the state shown in FIG. 18(a). . When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward position, the hanging part 503b of the handle part 503 stands up and opens upward, so that the hanging part 503b cannot be touched from above the handle part 503 with a finger or You can easily pull out the drawer by hooking your hand. At this time, in order to prevent the restriction plate 579 from getting caught, an inclined surface may be provided at the rear upper end of the restriction plate 579 or at the front upper end 571e (see FIG. 17) of the extension 503a (front flange 571a). good.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b extend in a direction parallel to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 (in the height direction, they extend in the same direction as the tank installation surface). ), by sliding the auxiliary tank 54 in the front-back direction, each sensor rod 16a, 16b can be taken in and out of the upper sensor insertion hole 505a and the lower sensor insertion hole 505b.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in an upward facing position and medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 is relatively heavy, so it is difficult for an employee to remove the auxiliary tank 54. When the auxiliary tank 54 is removed, it is considered that the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out by sliding on the bottom plate 11a from the front opening side of the casing 11. In this case, each sensor rod 16a, 16b inserted into each insertion hole 505a, 505b is pulled out from the auxiliary tank 54 without receiving excessive force.

On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward position, the auxiliary tank 54 is empty and its weight is relatively light. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out, it is conceivable that the front end of the auxiliary tank 54 is tilted so that it can be lifted. In this case, there is a concern that each sensor rod 16a, 16b may receive excessive force from the auxiliary tank 54. In this regard, since the engagement state is released by sliding the auxiliary tank 54 in the front-rear direction, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from being pulled out in an inclined position, and each sensor rod 16a, 16b can be prevented from receiving excessive force. In other words, each sensor rod 16a, 16b can be protected.

According to the configuration detailed above, the following excellent effects can be achieved.

The bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 is opened and closed by changing the direction of the auxiliary tank 54 between the upper and lower sides. This allows switching between manual collection and automatic collection by simply turning the auxiliary tank 54 upside down, simplifying the switching operation. Moreover, since the switching between the closed state and the open state is associated with the attitude of the auxiliary tank 54, it is easy to understand which mode it is in. For example, in the case of a device that only switches between opening and closing when facing upward, it is difficult to determine which state it is in unless you look into the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, there is a risk that the device may be used in an incorrect manner, such as being used in an open state when it should be used in a closed state. In this regard, in this configuration, the appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 can be made different between the closed state and the open state, so that it is possible to notice the difference in state at a glance. In particular, since the auxiliary tank 54 is configured to be in an open state when the bottom is on the upper side, it becomes easier to notice that the bottom is empty, and it is possible to prevent incorrect use.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is changed from an upward attitude to a downward attitude, the bottom cover 514 is configured to rotate by its own weight toward the open position. In this case, in addition to suppressing forgetting to open the lower opening 512, a drive unit for rotating the bottom cover 514 toward the open position, a sensor for detecting the attitude of the auxiliary tank 54, and a sensor for detecting the attitude of the auxiliary tank 54 are provided. This eliminates the need for a control configuration for controlling the drive unit in accordance with the detection results, and it becomes possible to simplify the configuration and reduce costs.

The upper limit of the rotation range of the bottom cover 514 toward the open side is limited to a predetermined rotation angle α, and the bottom cover 514 is configured to rotate toward the closed position due to its own weight when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward position. And so. In addition to suppressing the possibility of forgetting to close the lower opening 512, there is no need for a drive unit or the like to rotate the bottom cover 514 toward the closing side, resulting in a simpler configuration and lower costs. It becomes possible.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward position, the right flange part 571c and the engaging part 574 are engaged with each other, and when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position, they are not engaged. This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation of the slot machine 10 while avoiding any adverse effects on the operation of taking out the auxiliary tank 54 during manual recovery.

In particular, since the presence or absence of engagement is associated with the attitude of the auxiliary tank 54, the appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 can be made different between the engaged state and the non-engaged state. For example, if the engaged part is a blind spot when viewed from the employees of the game hall, they may forcefully remove the part without noticing that it is in the engaged state, and remove the right flange part 571c, the engaging part 574, etc. There is a risk of damage. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the difference in the appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 makes it possible to notice the difference in condition at a glance. In this case, for example, if the employee is notified in advance that when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position, it is in a fixed state, it will be easy to tell which of the above states it is in without having to check the engagement point. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary removal operations.

The configuration is such that upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by engagement between the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574. If the auxiliary tank 54 moves upward during transportation, it is assumed that the auxiliary tank 54 will get caught in a position where it interferes with the locking device 20, and the lock cannot be unlocked even if an unlocking operation is performed later. In this regard, in the above configuration, the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by the engagement between the right side flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

The engaging portion 574 is provided on the surface of the bottom plate 11a (the installation surface of the auxiliary tank 54), and is configured to engage with the flange portion 571 of the auxiliary tank 54. In this case, it becomes unnecessary to provide a special part for engagement in the auxiliary tank 54, and the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 can be simplified.

In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the flange portion 571 is engaged, the distance between the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574 can be increased when the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in an upward position. This makes it possible to suppress the inconvenience that when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position, the auxiliary tank 54 is unintentionally engaged and the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted. Furthermore, considering that the hopper device 51 and the auxiliary tank 54 are provided side by side in the housing 11, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position, the flange portion 571 allows the hopper device 51 and the housing 11 to The position of the auxiliary tank with respect to the right side plate 11c is regulated. Therefore, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is not engaged in the upward position, it is possible to control the displacement of the auxiliary tank 54.

Focusing on the characteristic that the removal operation of the auxiliary tank 54 is not required during automatic retrieval, the downward posture of the auxiliary tank 54, which is unsuitable for manual retrieval, is adopted as a common posture when transporting the slot machine 10 and during automatic retrieval. Moreover, the auxiliary tank 54 is fixed to the housing 11 only in the case of a common posture. Further, since a lower opening 512 is provided in the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501 and can be opened and closed by the bottom cover 514, inconveniences during transportation can be eliminated while suppressing adverse effects on automatic collection. That is, according to the present embodiment, by simply changing the attitude of the auxiliary tank 54, it is possible to adapt to the three usage environments of transportation, automatic collection, and manual collection, which increases convenience. can be significantly improved.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 26 and 27.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the input switch 58, a payment detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the payment switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a, an upper sensor rod 16a, and a lower sensor rod 16b are connected to detect when a setting key is inserted and turned on, and signals from these various sensors are sent to input/output ports. The data is output to the CPU 102 via 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply section 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the state of power interruption and generates a power failure signal not only in the event of a power outage but also in the event of power interruption by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, which in this example is 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. It is configured so that a power outage signal is output. The power outage signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes power outage processing to be described later by recognizing this power outage signal. Further, this power outage signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main controller 101 to perform power outage processing.

On the output side of the main control device 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit card The input/output port 104 includes a display section 60, a remaining payout number display section 61, a payout number display section 62, a press order notification section 68, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. connected via.

The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106, which is not shown, as is well known, there are various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing lottery results of winning combinations, and stop information used to control the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing game conditions such as a BB state, a state information storage area 106c for storing game states such as BB state, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff (including power cutoff due to operation of the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Yes, when the power outage is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is turned off by power outage processing (see FIG. 28), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed during the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 27, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. It has built-in RAM 183 for securing the memory.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), and the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-platform that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main platform that centrally manages the games. That is, by providing a sub-board for audio, lamps, and displays related to indirect games, the burden on the main board is reduced.

On the input side of the display control device 81, there is a first effect switch 66 (more specifically, a first effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the first effect switch 66) and a second effect switch 67 (more specifically, the second effect switch 67). A second performance switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance switch 67 is connected. Note that the various display sections 60 to 62 and 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be explained. The processing of the CPU 102 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power outage signal sent to the NMI terminal. There is also an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of . Below, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 28 to 55.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved to the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, an outline of the power outage process will be explained.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, the main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power outage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, by calculating a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved and storing it in a backup area, subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, considering the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, for example, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal continues to be output, an infinite loop will continue. Incidentally, even under an infinite loop, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, the process moves to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor, which is the respective drum drive motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 26) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read results are normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to transmit various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, remaining payout number display section 61, and payout number display section 62, respectively. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display sections 60 to 62 and corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. are displayed. In step S113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are restored to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, the normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like complete initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S213 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any re-game winnings were achieved in the previous game. If any re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically input virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, when a re-play winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and when a re-play winning is achieved in a 1-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Performs processing to automatically insert medals. By the way, in this embodiment, re-play winnings are not established in 2-bet games, but if it is modified so that re-play winnings are established in 2-bet games, 2 coins will be generated in this automatic insertion process. It is recommended that the virtual medals can be automatically inserted.

In addition, in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without subtracting the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60. In other words, if any re-game winning is achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If any re-gaming winnings have not been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated or not, and when the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals. I do.

After the end of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or credit input switches 56 to 58 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Furthermore, if neither medals nor credit input switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process ends, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of bets for medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number of CB states, and gaming states other than the CB state (specifically, normal gaming state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB "1" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the state). In other words, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "2", and in other than the CB state, the condition is that the number of bets is "1" or "3". An affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if no medals have been bet, or if a bet has been made but the number of bets is "2", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and among the processes, the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such transition notification processing will be explained in detail later.

After performing the process in step S206, a bet command including information on the process result in step S206 and information on the number of bets for which an affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. Set as the output target. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process in step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, the configuration is such that the game can be started if the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, a valid line setting process is performed in which the combination line corresponding to the bet number is set as the valid line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an active line, and in a 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as active lines. Furthermore, in a 1-bet game, the bending line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the RT status process in step S214, and the bonus status process in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 30.

In step S301, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table is selected for determining the validity of the winning combination. This slot machine 10 has six types of gaming states in the normal gaming mode: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. Furthermore, there are three types of gaming states in the specific mode: a normal gaming state in the specific mode, a BB state in the specific mode, and a CB state in the specific mode.

This slot machine 10 has a gaming feature in which the above-mentioned six or three types of gaming states change based on the lottery results of the lottery process and the stop results of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The specific mode in this embodiment is a mode that imitates the gameplay of the normal game mode. Therefore, first, the gameplay of the normal game mode will be explained, and later the specific mode will be explained in detail.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. . For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state of the normal gaming mode, and the normal gaming state is set. Select the lottery table for In addition, in this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set which winning probability is based on which internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 31 is a normal game state lottery table selected in the normal game state of "Setting 3" in the normal game mode. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, the determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process advances to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=20, in step S306, a winning flag indicating that the 1st to 5th minor roles and the 14th to 17th minor roles have been won is set. The winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

By the way, the set winning flag is a winning flag indicating that the 1st BB was won (hereinafter referred to as "1st BB winning flag") or a winning flag indicating that the 2nd BB was winning (hereinafter referred to as "2nd BB winning flag"). ), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games. In addition, in step S306 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB has been won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB winning flag is set. If a winning combination other than CB has not been won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV. By the way, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in Figure 31, the probability of winning in normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/7.3, and the probability of winning in the normal replay is about 1/7. The probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 13) is approximately 1/263, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 14) is approximately 1/183. be. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is approximately 1/154, and the probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 16) is approximately 1/252. , the probability of winning in chance B (probability of winning when IV=17) is approximately 1/252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 18) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning the no question bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is approximately 1 in 32,800. It is 1. The probability of winning for order push bell 1, order push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 20 to 23) is approximately 1/164, middle push bell 1, The probability of winning the middle push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=24 to 27) is about 1/16.4. The probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 31) is approximately 1/1770, and the probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is approximately 1/1770. Approximately 1 in 4680, the probability of winning weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is approximately 1 in 3280, the probability of winning weak cherry duplication 2 (when IV = 34) The probability of winning is approximately 1/6550. The probability of winning watermelon stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is approximately 1/3280, and the probability of winning watermelon stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is approximately 6550. It is 1/1. The probability of winning Chance A overlap 1, Chance A overlap 2, Chance B overlap 1, and Chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=37 to 40) is approximately 1/3280. The probability of winning middle bell duplication 1 and middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV=41, 42) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning the 1st BB and the 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV=43, 44) is about 1/65,500, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=45) is approximately 1/19.9. Furthermore, the probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/1.94.

Note that in the normal game state lottery table in the normal game mode, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 12, 28 to 30, and 46 to 49. Therefore, in the normal gaming state in the normal gaming mode, winnings cannot be won at these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there is no object to be judged, it means that the judgment of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process advances to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect in which the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are invalidated for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, lottery result handling processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for determining whether to shift the gaming state or not depending on the lottery results in steps S301 to S309, processing for notifying the winning combination, etc. are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand the result of determining whether the winning combination is correct or not. However, in the normal process, various commands such as the above lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no commands are transmitted to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is performed to set stop information for reel stop control, and the lottery process is ended. In the stop information setting process, if a plurality of roles among the small role, replay, and bonus roles have been won, the stop information is set in the priority order shown below. Stop information is set so that when a small role win and a bonus are won, the small role win is established with priority, and so that a bonus win is established when the small role win cannot be established. When winning a re-game and a bonus, stop information is set so that the re-game winning is established with priority.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 32.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation performance process is a process for performing a performance using reel control during the invalid period based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if it has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and the rotation start process ends. Furthermore, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Notify players, etc.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. do. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol. If they are equal, reel stop processing to stop the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop roll of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, if you win when IV=20 to 27, that is, sequential push bell 1, sequential push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bells") are won (see FIG. 31), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command are activated. A second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode established depending on the order of operations.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. For example, if the middle push bell 1 has been won, the stop information is set so that the second minor prize winning or the fifth minor prize winning is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, and the middle stop switch 43 Stop information is set so that the first minor prize winning is established when is operated for the first time, and the second minor prize winning or the fifth minor prize winning is established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Set stop information. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly explained. In this slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state in the normal game mode, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by a maximum of 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, It can be stopped, and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as a valid line. Therefore, if the same type of symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol will be activated when it becomes a winning symbol regardless of the timing of operating the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with regard to the symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by five or more symbols, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order to stop the symbols on the active line.

An example will be explained in which the middle press bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in the order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to achieve the second minor winning combination or the fifth minor winning combination.

The second small role symbols on the left reel 32L are a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. Furthermore, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as the fifth minor role symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged such that the interval between the second minor role symbols (fifth minor role symbols) is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped at the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the No. 8 "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the bottom row, as shown in FIG. 34(a), the No. 12 "White Bell" The pattern stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for the second minor prize winning or the fifth minor prize winning to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4.

The second small winning symbol on the middle reel 32M is the “Red 7” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "Red 7" symbol is placed only at the 18th position. Furthermore, the fifth small winning symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols are arranged at the 11th and 14th positions. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor role symbol or the fifth minor role symbol may stop on the active line, or both the second minor role symbol and the fifth minor role symbol may stop on the effective line. It may not stop.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 13th "1st replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the 5th small role symbol The barrel "cherry" pattern stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the fifth small winning combination to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "cherry" symbol to the 17th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 34(b), The "Red 7" symbol, which is the second small winning symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding for 4 symbols, the second small role symbol and the fifth small role symbol may not be stopped in the middle row. Can not. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the No. 2 "BAR" symbol or the No. 6 "White Bell" symbol stops at the middle row.

When the second small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the second small role winning can be realized.

The second small role symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "Red 7" symbol is placed only at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "Watermelon" symbol No. 14 to the "Red 7" symbol No. 18 has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 34(c). As such, the "Red 7" symbol, which is the second small winning symbol, stops at the lower row. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the number 13 "cherry" symbol has reached the bottom row, the number 14 "watermelon" symbol will move to the bottom row as shown in FIG. 34(d). Stop. The combination of the "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 12.

When the fifth minor role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the fifth minor role winning can be realized.

The 5th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a "second replay" symbol. On the right reel 32R, "second replay" symbols are arranged at positions 0 and 3. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the fifth small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 17th "BAR" symbol to the 3rd "Second Replay" symbol reaches the lower row, the 5th small role symbol The "Second Replay" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the fifth small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 12.

If the 2nd small role symbol and the 5th minor role symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, that is, if the "BAR" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the stop information 2nd In the setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower row.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation. The combination of the "white bell" design, "BAR" design, and "watermelon" design from the left, and the combination of the "white bell" design, "white bell" design, and "watermelon" design from the left, are as shown in Figure 12. The result is a transition roll.

In this way, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the second minor prize winning will be established, and the fifth minor prize will be won. There will be either a case where the winning is established or a case where the transition number stops.

Next, an example will be explained in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the first small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "red bell" symbols, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol stops at the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are first minor prize symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first minor prize symbols is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped on the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, "Red Bell" symbols, which are the first minor winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between "Red Bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated thirdly, the "red bell" symbol stops at the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the first small winning combination is achieved regardless of the timing of the operation.

If the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small role prize will be established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established, or the transition number will stop on the active line. By the way, if you win the middle bell, you will win the 29th small role regardless of the operation order and timing, and if you win the no question bell, you will win the 29th small role regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 small win prize is established.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process that sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one condition being that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the active line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the bottom of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved on the active line. judge. If the winning combination is established, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result corresponding process, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result corresponding process will be explained in detail later.

After performing the winning result corresponding process, in step S415, a winning result command is set to cause the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is ended.

Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be explained.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been achieved. In such a case, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any of the first to eighth replay winnings has been achieved. If any replay winnings have not been achieved, the medal payout process is immediately terminated, and if any replay winnings have been achieved, a replay setting process is performed to change the gaming state to the replaying state. , ends the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) explained earlier, when it is determined that the current gaming state is a re-gaming state, automatic insertion processing is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is It is displayed on the credit display section 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. The medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 via the outlet 49. In addition, in the medal payout process, processing is also performed to change the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61 is subtracted. .

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 35.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition number has stopped on the active line. If the transition number has stopped, the process advances to step S502, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition roll has not stopped on the active line, the process advances to step S504, and the second re-game winning is determined based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether it is established. If the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process ends. In addition, if the rolled number stops moving on the active line under a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process returns to step S503. Then, the first RT setting flag is set, and this process ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 36 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 31), the first RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the normal gaming state, and the probability of winning when IV = 1 The probability of winning is approximately 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1/32.8. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 36, if you win when IV=1, it will be a normal replay win, and if you win when IV=2, it will be a first promotion replay 1 win, and IV If you win when IV = 3, you will win 1st promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win 1st promotion replay 3, and if you win when IV = 5, you will win 1st promotion replay 3. In this case, you will win the 1st promotion replay 4. The probability of winning when IV=1 to 5 is approximately 1/7.30. The normal replay winning probability under normal gaming conditions is also approximately 1/7.30. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, each role type of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as in the normal gaming state, and the winning mode will be such that the replay benefit is granted. changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state is realized, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-gaming winning, the third re-gaming prize that shifts to the second RT state is realized. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S412), a stop command is issued not only when the above-mentioned push order bell is won, but also when first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won. Stop information is set in order to change the winning mode achieved depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 37(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win the first promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, unlike the case where you win the push order bell, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay prize or The third re-game winning is guaranteed. For 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, the 3rd replay is associated with one of the 6 operation orders, and the 1st replay is associated with the other operation orders. It is attached.

In addition, in the first promoted replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, seventh replay, and eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th re-game to 8th re-game are not associated with any of the above six operation orders. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth regames, even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won, no prize is won regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is assigned the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, the 1st promoted replay 3 is distributed with the 7th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promoted replay 4 is distributed. Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, no matter which of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replay is the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations for achieving the third replay win. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation order corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally achieved. This is because it may be possible to do so. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship between first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established. If the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the second RT state lottery table is selected. do.

FIG. 38 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 36), the second RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV=11 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and the probability of winning when IV=1 The probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1/13.2, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is approximately 1/10.5 and IV = 9. , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/7.00. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/150. That is, when moving to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first replay win that does not shift the gaming state, the second replay win that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth replay win that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth replay win that shifts to the third RT state. A prize is won.

In the stop information second setting process (step S412), in addition to the case where the winner is won in the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 described above, the fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, and the Even when winning the 2 promotion replay 2, stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

FIG. 37(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. In the case of a win in Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3, the first re-game win or the second re-game win is always achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. If you win the 2nd promotion replay 1, regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either the 1st replay win, the 4th replay win, or the 5th replay win will always be achieved. . If the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first replay win or the fourth replay win will definitely be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In addition, the number attached to the fourth re-game in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth re-game winning is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a random number, "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a unique 7 symbol mid-row stop, and "3" represents a symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and BAR mid-row stop. "4" corresponds to a symbol combination of white 7, white 7, and BAR middle stop (see FIG. 12). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when winning the second promotion replay 1, the winning symbol combination will stop and the fourth replay winning will be established, or the unique 7 The symbol combination that results in the symbol middle stop stops and the fourth re-game winning is established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-gaming winning has been achieved. If the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-gaming winning have not been achieved, the process is immediately terminated. If the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process ends.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the third RT state lottery table is selected. do.

FIG. 39 is a third RT state lottery table selected in the third RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the second RT state lottery table (see FIG. 38), the third RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 49 is equal to the probability of winning each in the second RT state, and the probability of winning when IV = 9, 10 When IV=11 and 12, the probability of winning is approximately 1/7.00. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/150. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and the prize winning mode in which the replay benefit is granted. changes to a state different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state and the 2nd re-gaming winning that moves to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state, and the 6th re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state. The 7th re-game win, the 8th re-game win, and the 3rd re-game win that moves to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S412), even if a prize is won in BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2, the winning mode is changed depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command. Set the stop information accordingly.

FIG. 37(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win BAR Replay 1, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 7th replay win, or 3rd replay win. always holds true. If you win BAR Replay 2, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 8th replay win, or 3rd replay win. always holds true.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 40.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not a bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether any of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag, special first BB flag, and special second BB flag is set. The special first BB flag and the special second BB flag are flags corresponding to the special first BB and special second BB that can be won in a specific mode. The special 1st BB and the special 2nd BB are bonus combinations corresponding to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB in the normal game mode. If any of the winning flags is set, the process advances to step S603, and it is determined whether or not a CB winning combination has been achieved based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB win is established, a CB setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter provided in the status information storage area 106c for counting the remaining number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state. By performing the processing of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly explained.

If the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, CB It will be a prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, if a CB is won, the CB is won regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The main control device 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of the normal process, it is determined whether the number of medal bets has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the effective line setting process (step S207), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are determined. Set as the valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV = 1 to 45, and "16384" is set as the point value PV for IV = 46 to 49. is set (see FIG. 31 etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small/medium winning combination 1 (probability of winning when IV=46) is approximately 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small/medium winning combination 2 (IV=47). The probability of winning when IV = 48) is approximately 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB Small and Medium Role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is approximately 1/4.00, The probability of winning the small/medium winning combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=49) is approximately 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 41(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, even if you win any of CB small/medium winnings 1 to CB small/medium winnings 4, any small winning will occur regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, if the 1st minor role is won, the 18th minor role is won, the 19th minor role is won, and the 25th minor role is won, 15 medals are paid out, and the 15th medal is paid out. When winning the 2nd minor role to winning the 17th minor role and winning the 20th minor role to winning the 24th minor role, 14 medals are paid out. In other words, when transitioning to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, CB is won only in the normal game mode, and not won in the specific mode.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been established, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and the 1st BB prize, 2nd BB prize, special 1st BB prize, or special 2nd BB prize is established in step S609. Determine whether or not.

If any BB winning is achieved, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. In step S612, it is determined whether the current BB winning is a special first BB winning or special second BB winning in a specific mode. If a negative determination is made in step S612 and the current BB win is the first BB win or second BB win in the normal game mode, in step S613, the remaining payout number counter is set to 216, and the remaining payout number is A process of displaying 216 on the display unit 61 is performed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S612, a process is performed in which 24 is set in the remaining payout number counter and 24 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61 in step S614. The numerical value set in step S613 or step S614 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is ended on the condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value have been paid out in the BB state. In other words, the upper limit payout number for the 1st BB and 2nd BB in the normal game mode is set as 216, and the upper limit payout number is set as 24 for the special 1st BB and special 1st BB in the specific mode, and the upper limit payout number for the bonus in each mode is set as 216. The numbers are different.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S614, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected. .

FIG. 42 is a lottery table for the BB state that is selected in the BB state to which the game moves in the first BB or the second BB in the normal game mode. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 27 and 31 to 49, and "21845" is set as the point value for IV=28 to 30. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB medium/small combination 1 (probability of winning when IV=28) is approximately 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB medium/red 7 combination combination (IV The probability of winning when IV = 29) is approximately 1/3.00, and the probability of winning a BAR matching combination in BB (probability of winning when IV = 30) is approximately 1/3.00. becomes. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/65,500.

FIG. 41(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. As mentioned above, the first small winning combination is a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, even if you win the BB medium and small combination 1, the BB medium red 7 combination combination, and the BB medium BAR combination combination, regardless of the operating order and timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first small Any one of winning a winning role, winning a 30th minor role, or winning a 31st minor role is guaranteed. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, nine medals are paid out when the 1st minor role win, the 30th minor role win, and the 31st minor role win are established. Since the probability of losing in the BB state is approximately 1/65,500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

When the gaming state shifts to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S615. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout number counter has become 0 or not, and when it has become 0, a process of clearing the CB setting flag or BB setting flag is performed. Furthermore, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game. Note that the termination determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game returns to the gaming state when the CB winning was achieved. For example, if a CB winning is achieved under the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is returned to after the CB state ends, and if a CB winning is achieved under the 3rd RT state, the 3rd RT state is returned after the CB state ends. to return to. On the other hand, when winning the 1st BB, 2nd BB, special 1st BB, or special 2nd BB, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB winning is achieved under the second RT state, the game will shift to the normal gaming state. Incidentally, in the case of transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. In the case of transition to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 144 (=9×24−3×24) medals in the normal game mode until the BB state ends.

If none of the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, CB winning flag, special 1st BB winning flag, special 2nd BB winning flag is set (if step S602 is NO), 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning flag , CB winning, special 1st BB winning, and special 1st BB winning are not established (step S609 is NO), and a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in step S605, step S613, or step S614. In this case, and in the case where the end determination process is performed in step S615, the process advances to step S606, and a status command is set. Here, the status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the gaming status at the end of the game (that is, the gaming status of the next game), and in step S606, the status information storage area The state command corresponding to the configuration flag set in 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. After that, this process ends.

<Overview of gaming state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the game state in the normal game mode will be explained using FIG. 43. Note that illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the gaming state is the BB state, when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, the BB state ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the transition rolled number stops on the active line, and the gaming state shifts to the BB state when the BB winning is established. The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promoted replays 1 to 4, which trigger the transition to the second RT state, and the second promoted replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won. Therefore, there is no transition from the normal gaming state to the second RT state or the third RT state (see FIG. 31).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third replay win is achieved when you win any of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 37(a)). . In the lottery process using the first RT state lottery table, the second promoted replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won, so the first RT state does not transition to the third RT state.

In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB winning is achieved in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. There is no transition to the third RT state from the first RT state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-gaming win or the fifth re-gaming winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay win and the fifth replay win are achieved when you win the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (Fig. 37(b) )reference). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 37(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When a corresponding BB prize is established in a game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the third RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is achieved when the player wins BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 and operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 37(c)). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 37(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB winning is achieved in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

Incidentally, when each BB winning flag is carried over, a carryover lottery table (not shown) is used as the lottery table in the lottery process (FIG. 30). In the carryover lottery table, the PV values of IV1 to 22 are the same as the PV values of IV1 to 22 in the lottery table for normal gaming state (Figure 31), and the PV values after IV23 are set to 0. ing. In other words, in the carryover lottery table, bonuses and small winnings that overlap with bonuses are not won.

In this slot machine 10, in the normal gaming mode, the main controller 101 manages six types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. The main controller 101 manages five types of display modes: normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode (including an additional specialized zone), and BB mode.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing transitions between each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB win or the second BB win is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 medals.

When transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, a lottery to transition to the challenge mode and a lottery to transition to the attack mode are performed in the BB mode. If the lottery to enter the attack mode is won, the game shifts to the attack mode after the BB mode ends, and if the lottery to go to the challenge mode is won, the game shifts to the challenge mode after the BB mode ends. If no one wins in any transition lottery, the mode transitions to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the attack mode is changed to the BB mode, the attack mode is returned to after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is changed to the BB mode, the VB mode is returned to after the BB mode ends.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "press order replay") is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery to transition to challenge mode and a lottery to transition to attack mode are performed. If the lottery to enter challenge mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to challenge mode, and if the lottery to enter attack mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to attack mode. There is no transition to VB mode from normal mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each gaming state of a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so it is rare for the stop switches 42 to 44 to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. This almost corresponds to the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, you can expect that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The challenge mode, like the normal mode, is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. In challenge mode, a lottery will be held to switch to attack mode. However, the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, although the challenge mode is not notified of the order of operations like the normal mode, it is set as a mode in which it is easy to transition to the attack mode. If you win the lottery to shift to attack mode, you shift from challenge mode to attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times, etc.) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is transitioned to the normal mode. Does not shift to VB mode from challenge mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the challenge mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced when the press order replay is won, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and 3rd RT state, and it almost corresponds to the 1st RT state. . In challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, you can expect that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time you play one game, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, 1st attack mode to 4th attack mode, which have different probabilities of transitioning to VB mode, and in any attack mode, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher than that of normal mode. The transition probability is high. If the lottery to shift to VB mode is won, the mode shifts from attack mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, etc.) without winning a lottery, the game shifts from attack mode to normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set to have different probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for switching to VB mode is set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode is the highest in the fourth attack mode and the lowest in the first attack mode. , the third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so the player can press the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. 44 corresponds almost to the second RT state. In attack mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state, you can expect to increase the number of medals by approximately 0.61 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the 2nd RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the attack mode.

The VB mode, like the attack mode, is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that if you win 2nd promotion replay 1 or 2nd promotion replay 2, in attack mode you will be notified of the order of operations to make the 1st replay win. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is notified (see FIG. 37(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in VB mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced, and it is determined that the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. If this happens, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is announced. Therefore, the VB mode almost corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In VB mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, you can expect the medals to increase by about 0.61 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

To explain the transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by a player increases, the general flow is from normal mode to challenge mode, from challenge mode to attack mode, and from attack mode to normal mode. . In attack mode, a lottery is held to switch to VB mode, so if a loop occurs in which the player shifts from attack mode to VB mode and returns from VB mode to attack mode, players expect more medals to be owned. can.

As mentioned above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for switching to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

Furthermore, in the attack mode, a first attack mode to a fourth attack mode are set, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is different in each attack mode. When shifting from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, the mode basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transitioning to the second attack mode, you will transition to the second attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to the VB mode will increase. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transition to the third attack mode, you will transition to the third attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode will increase. In the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transitioning to the fourth attack mode, you will transition to the fourth attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when transitioning to attack mode, the attack mode is promoted from 1st attack mode → 2nd attack mode → 3rd attack mode → 4th attack mode, increasing the probability of transitioning to VB mode and attacking A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of medals he owns in the normal game mode, attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, the configuration is such that a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state change back and forth depending on the winning of each re-game or the stoppage of a transition roll. As described above, depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or the push order bell is won, the corresponding replay win is established or the transition roll is stopped. Furthermore, in the attack mode or the VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the order of operations that will make it possible to achieve the first small winning combination is announced, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

The configuration regarding the display mode will be explained below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into: (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. Below, they will be explained in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
The process related to the display mode transition lottery (1) is performed in the lottery result corresponding process (step S310) of the lottery process (FIG. 30) by the main control device 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In step S701, the current lottery results are strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, B and middle bell, strong cherry duplicate 1, 2, weak cherry duplicate 1, 2, watermelon duplicate 1, 2, chance A duplicate 1 , 2, chance B overlap 1, 2, middle bell overlap 1, 2 (for example, see Figure 31, IV = 13 to 18, 31 to 42, hereinafter these roles are collectively referred to as "specific combinations")? Determine whether or not. If the lottery result is a specific combination, the processing for shifting the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S702 to S708 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination has not been won, then in steps S709 to S712, processing for transitioning to the display mode, etc. is performed.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S701 that the specific combination has been won, it is determined in step S702 whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether or not an attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won, and is cleared when transitioning to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S703, a first specific combination process is executed in step S704.

<First specific combination processing>
The first specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46.

Here, the case where the first specific combination processing is performed is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, and the state where the attack mode has not been won. The display mode in this case corresponds to normal mode or challenge mode. In the first specific combination processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to challenge mode, and a transition lottery is also conducted to determine whether to transition to attack mode. Furthermore, in the first specific combination processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, processing for adding on the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether the current display mode is in challenge mode. The case of not being in challenge mode means that the current display mode is normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a chance mode table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for attack mode lottery in step S803. In the normal table and the chance mode table, the probability of transition to attack mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transitioning to attack mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, the probability of transitioning to attack mode is different between the normal table and the chance mode table, with the chance mode table having a higher probability of transitioning to attack mode than the normal table. It is set as follows.

After acquiring the attack mode transition lottery table in step S802 or step S803, attack mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803, thereby performing a lottery to enter the attack mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to attack mode has been won. If the lottery for entering the attack mode is won, a process of setting an attack mode winning flag is performed in step S806.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S807, a lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S808. Here, in the present embodiment, when a lottery to shift to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won as a lottery to shift display mode, the notification that the lottery to shift to that transition lottery has been won is sent after passing through the omen mode. It will be done. Therefore, the game that won the transition lottery may be different from the game that will notify you that you have won the transition lottery, and the game that won the transition lottery and the game that will notify you that you have won the transition lottery may be different. , is set as a precursor mode.

As the number of precursor games, 0 games to 32 games are set, and in step S808, one of these 1 to 32 games is randomly determined by lottery. Note that the number of precursor games to be selected may be set to vary depending on the specific combination that triggered the winning of the attack mode or the gaming state. This also applies to other lottery processes for the number of portent games.

In step S809, based on the processing result of step S808, processing is performed to input the number of precursor games into the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter becomes 0, it is announced that the omen mode has ended and that the transition lottery has been won.

In step S810, processing is executed to set the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device. The omen command includes information on the lottery result that triggered the omen mode (the display mode to which the display mode shifts after the omen mode, in the case of step S810, the attack mode) and the number of omen games. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S810, the first specific combination process ends.

Further, if the bonus winning flag is set in step S807, the first specific combination processing is ended without setting the number of portent games or the like. The case where the bonus winning flag is set means that you win a specific combination in the carryover state of the 1st BB or 2nd BB and also win the attack mode transition lottery, or you win a combination of combinations with the bonus (strong cherry overlap 1, 2nd prize) and wins the attack mode transition lottery. In this case, priority is given to the BB mode rather than the attack mode as the display mode transition destination.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for entering the attack mode has not been won, the process advances to step S811. In step S811, challenge mode lottery processing is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for the challenge mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the challenge mode lottery table, the probability of transition to challenge mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transitioning to challenge mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries.

Cases in which step S811 is implemented include a case where the display mode is challenge mode, but in this case also, challenge mode lottery processing is executed in step S811, and the lottery table is common for both normal mode and challenge mode. It's a table. Note that, as in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress.

In step S812, it is determined whether the challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S811. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If the mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, in step S814, a process is executed to set a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106.

In the following step S815, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the first specific combination processing is directly ended. If it is not set, a lottery process for the number of portent games is executed in step S816, a process for setting the number of portent games in the portent counter is executed in step S817, and a process for setting a portent command is executed in step S818. After that, the first specific combination processing is ended. The processing from step S815 to step S818 corresponds to step S807 to step S810.

If it is determined in step S813 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, then in steps S819 to S823, processing for adding on to the continuation game of the challenge mode is performed. That is, in step S819, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S820, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the term "additional" refers to adding the number of consecutive games in challenge mode or attack mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of consecutive games. In step S820, a value to be added to the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of add-on games, a table for the challenge mode add-on game number lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for drawing the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases depending on the type of specific combination. For example, in Strong Cherry, there is an 80% probability that 30 games will be added to the challenge mode, and there is a 20% probability that 50 games will be added. In addition, for weak cherry, there is an 80% probability that 5 games will be added, and there is a 20% probability that 20 games will be added.

In step S821, processing for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S820 is set in a counter for managing the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Performs addition processing. Then, in step S822, a process is performed to set the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the first specific combination process is ended. The top-up command includes information that the top-up has occurred, the number of top-up games, and the target for the top-up (challenge mode or attack mode). The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the additional commands will be described in detail later, but based on the reception of the additional commands, the display control device 81 performs additional processing as a notification of information included in these additional commands. Make announcements.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S819, the process advances to step S823. In step S823, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination processing is ended. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the condition for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Although details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition will be performed at the end of the bonus.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 45), if a negative determination is made in step S702 or an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process advances to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S706 whether the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery, and is cleared when transitioning to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S706, a second specific combination process is executed in step S707. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S705 or an affirmative determination is made in step S706, a third specific combination process is executed in step S708.

<Second specific combination processing>
The second specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

Here, the case where the second specific combination processing is performed is the second RT state and the state where the player has not won the VB mode. The display mode in this case is attack mode. In the second specific combination processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to the VB mode. In addition, in the second specific combination processing, a lottery for promoting the rank of the attack mode is performed, and a process for increasing the number of consecutive games of the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, processing is performed to understand the rank of the attack mode. As already explained, in this embodiment, four attack mode ranks, ie, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different for each rank. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined which of the first attack mode to fourth attack mode the current rank of the attack mode is.

In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the attack mode rank determined in step S901 is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transitioning to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, in the VB mode lottery table for each rank, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is different overall, and the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. Just as the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for those in the third attack mode than for those in the second attack mode, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for those in the fourth attack mode than those in the third attack mode. The transition probability is set to be high.

In step S903, a VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to a VB mode win.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process is performed in which a VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S905. Thereafter, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed in the same way as steps S807 to S810. That is, in step S906, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the second specific combination processing is directly ended. If it is not set, in step S907, a lottery process for the number of portent games is executed, in step S908, a process for setting the number of portent games in the portent counter is executed, and in step S909, a process for setting a portent command is executed. After that, the second specific combination processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not a VB mode winning, the process advances to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for promoting rank in attack mode.

In step S910, an attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. There are multiple tables for the promotion lottery depending on the rank of the attack mode, specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, and a table for the third attack mode. There are three (promotion lottery will not be held when staying in the fourth attack mode). At each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set depending on the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, in the table for each attack mode, the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode, and the table for the third attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the second attack mode. The table for attack mode is set so that the probability of promotion is lower, and as the rank of attack mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion win. If the promotion has been won, an attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In this process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the rank of the current attack mode to the rank flag one level higher. Thereafter, in step S913, processing is performed to set the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81. The promotion command includes information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like to perform an attack mode effect for the rank to which the rank is to be promoted. As the attack mode effect on the auxiliary display section 65, for example, a different background color effect is set depending on the rank of the attack mode, and the display control device 81 displays the attack mode effect when the promotion command is received. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that an attack mode effect is performed with a background color that corresponds to the rank to which the rank has been promoted.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process in step S913 is executed, processes for increasing the number of consecutive games in the attack mode are performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, an additional lottery process for the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this additional lottery process, a table for the attack mode additional lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The attack mode supplementary lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the supplementary lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, a strong cherry has an 80% probability of winning the additional lottery, and a weak cherry has a 20% probability of winning the additional lottery. Note that the probability of winning may vary depending on the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery. If it is determined that the player has not won the additional lottery, the second specific combination processing is immediately ended.

If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S917, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In this lottery process for the number of additional games, a table for the lottery for the number of attack mode additional games is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for drawing the number of additional games in the attack mode is set so that the number of additional games varies depending on the type of specific combination. For example, with strong cherry, there is a 90% probability that 20 games will be added to the attack mode, and there is a 10% probability that 80 games will be added. Furthermore, in weak cherry, there is a 95% probability that 5 games will be added, and there is a 5% probability that 100 games will be added.

In step S918, processing for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S917 is set in a counter for managing the number of consecutive games in the attack mode (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Performs addition processing. Then, in step S919, the process of setting the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific combination process is ended.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process advances to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination processing is ended. The attack mode addition flag is a flag used by the CPU 102 to determine that the attack mode addition condition for the number of games is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition will be performed at the end of the bonus.

<Third specific combination processing>
Next, the third specific combination processing executed in step S708 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

The case where the third specific combination processing is performed is the case in the third RT state, or the state in which the player is in the second RT state and has won the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to attack mode or VB mode. In the third specific combination processing, processing for adding on the number of consecutive games in attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, an attack mode game number addition lottery process is performed. This process is similar to the process in step S914. Note that the probability of winning the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1004, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, a process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed, and in step S1006, a process for setting the add-on command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the third specific combination process is ended. The processing from step S1003 to step S1006 is similar to the processing from step S916 to step S919. Note that the number of additional games may be different between the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specific combination processing is directly ended. Further, if it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third specific combination processing is ended. The attack mode additional flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 45), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of the current lottery process is not a specific winning combination, in step S709, the result of the current lottery process is It is determined whether the winning order replay or push order bell (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order winning combination") has been won. If it is a winning winning combination, the pressing winning combination process is performed in step S710, and then the lottery result handling process is ended. This push order processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing any one of steps S704, S707, S708, and S710, or after making a negative determination in step S709, the process advances to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether a specialized zone flag corresponding to the additional specialized zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the 7th replay prize, and the special zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the 7th replay prize. Indicates a state that occurs with probability. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S711, specialized zone processing is executed in step S712. The specialized zone flag, specialized zone, and specialized zone processing will be explained in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S711, or after executing the process in step S712, the main lottery result corresponding process is ended.

As described above, in the process corresponding to the lottery results, if it is determined that a specific winning combination has been won, the process will include a lottery to switch to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, and a process to add to the number of consecutive games in challenge mode or attack mode. etc. will be carried out. If you win the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, after playing the precursor game, you will be notified that you have won the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode. Therefore, the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode shift lottery will be described below.

<Processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the display mode transition lottery result>
(2) In the process for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, there is a process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won, and a notification for transitioning the gaming state. The processing to perform is performed. Therefore, first, a process related to notification of winning the transfer lottery will be explained.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 29). The mode transition notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a specified number). The mode transition notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49.

In step S1101, it is determined whether the number of precursor games is 0 or not. Counting of the number of portent games is performed in a process corresponding to winning results, which will be described later, and the number of portent games is subtracted by one each time one game is played. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is immediately ended.

If the number of portent games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1103. Then, in step S1104, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1105, a challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies the start of the challenge mode using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be explained in detail later.

Thereafter, in step S1106, counting of the number of challenge mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 10) of the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is set in a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1106, this mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by winning the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in response to winning the attack mode shift lottery. Thereafter, in step S1110, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the attack mode winning notification command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode transition lottery has been won. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After executing the process of step S1110, this mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1107 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1112. Then, in step S1113, a VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state in response to winning the VB mode shift lottery. Thereafter, in step S1114, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode winning notification command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After executing the process in step S1114, this mode transition notification process ends. Further, if it is determined in step S1111 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process is directly terminated.

That is, among the challenge mode, attack mode, and VB mode that transition through the omen mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of omen games in the omen mode becomes 0. On the other hand, for attack mode and VB mode, based on the bet operation when the number of portent games in portent mode becomes 0, only notification of winning the attack mode transfer lottery or VB mode transfer lottery is performed, and Even if the number of games reaches 0, attack mode and VB mode will not start. This is because the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve a transition to the gaming state, while the attack mode and VB mode involve a transition to the gaming state. Specifically, the attack mode does not involve a transition to the second RT state. This is due to the difference that the VB mode is started by transitioning to the third RT state.

As already explained, the second RT state is entered when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the third RT state is entered when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won. The process shifts to the case where the player wins, and the fourth and fifth re-game wins are established. Then, the case where the first promoted replay 1 to 4 is won and the third replay prize is established, or the case where the second promoted replay 1 and 2 is won and the fourth and fifth replay prize is established, This is a case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of these promotion replay wins corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, if you win a lottery to shift to attack mode or VB mode, then in the game in which you win a winning combination that will shift these gaming states, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be announced. The configuration allows the game state to be changed. Please note that from the time you are notified that you have won the transition lottery for attack mode or VB mode until the attack mode or VB mode starts (until the gaming state changes), you will not be notified as a preparation state (for example, " An announcement will be made that “Preparations are in progress”.

<Explanation regarding display mode transition>
The notification process for shifting the gaming state is performed in the push order process (step S710) in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 45). Here, prior to explaining the pressing order processing, an outline of the case where the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be explained with reference to FIG. 50.

<Summary of push order notification performance>
Notification of the operation order at the time of winning the push order combination (push order notification effect) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the push order notification section 68. Here, a case will be described as an example in which the pressing order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the button corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (in the figure, the middle stop The number 1 is added to the middle button (corresponding to the switch 43), and the button is displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display section 65, a number is displayed on the right button display to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44, and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. The number 2 is displayed and the number 3 is displayed on the left button display.

In the push order notification section 68, among the three LED lamps 68a, 68b, and 68c arranged on the left and right corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the middle LED lamp 68b lights up, and the left and right LED lamps 68a, 68c light up. goes out. This allows the player to recognize that the first stop switch to be operated in the current game is the middle stop switch 43. Note that the push order notification section 68 may also be configured to notify the winning combination together with the push order by lighting different colors of LED lamps. Further, in order to make it possible to recognize the stop switch to be operated from the second time onward, the LED lamps corresponding to the second and subsequent manipulations may be lit in different colors or may be displayed blinking.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

In the push order notification section 68, the middle LED lamp 68b turns off, and the right LED lamp 68c turns on (the left LED lamp 68a remains off). Thereby, the player can recognize that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

In the push order notification section 68, the right LED lamp 68c is turned off, and the left LED lamp 68a is turned on (the middle LED lamp 68b remains turned off). Thereby, the player can recognize that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the execution timing of the press order notification effect, during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts and reaches constant speed rotation after the acceleration period, the press order notification effect is executed. The notification effect is set to be executed. In this way, by configuring the press order notification effect to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and then the stop switches 42 to 44 are activated. 44 can be operated as desired, and the game can be played at a good tempo.

<Press order processing>
Next, the push order process executed in step S710 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 45) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 51.

In step S1201, it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 is the case where the first replay or the third replay wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1202, and it is determined whether an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery to enter the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 49). be.

If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the current display mode is in attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether an attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as flags for specifying display modes, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to a higher RT state than the attack mode (VB mode, additional specialization zone), the attack mode flag is set to the corresponding flag of that mode (VB mode flag, It is configured to coexist with the special zone flag). Therefore, in step S1203, the case where it is determined that the attack mode flag is set includes not only the attack mode but also the VB mode and the specialized zone.

If it is determined in step S1203 that the game is not in the attack mode, then in step S1204, a process for notifying the push order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 37(a)). Thereafter, in step S1205, a process is performed to set the press order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, and then the main press order process is ended. The press order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the press order notification command will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the game is in the attack mode, the operation order corresponding to the first replay winning is notified in step S1206 (see FIG. 37(a)). After that, in step S1207, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended. Note that the case where a negative determination is made in step S1203 is the case where the player wins the first promotion replay 1 to 4 even though the attack mode is in progress. For example, the game state changes to the first RT state during the attack mode. Cases such as falling are assumed. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won in the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. Therefore, a negative determination in step S1203 indicates that the attack mode is in progress and the first RT state is in effect.

In this way, if you win the first promotion replay 1 to 4 in a situation where you have won the lottery to enter attack mode, the game state will be changed by notifying you of the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning. It becomes possible to make the transition to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if you win the first promotion replays 1 to 4 without winning the attack mode, there are cases where the first replay win is achieved and cases where the third replay win is achieved. There is.

As already explained, the attack notification flag is based on the fact that you have won the lottery to enter attack mode and the number of precursor games has become 0 (the notification that you have won the lottery to enter attack mode). This is a flag that is set. Furthermore, the attack mode flag is a flag that is set based on the transition to the attack mode (transition to the second RT state). The attack notification flag and attack mode flag are cleared when the attack mode ends. Therefore, if the attack notification flag is set and the attack mode flag is not set, it means that the system is preparing to move to attack mode, and the attack notification flag is set. , and the attack mode flag is set, this indicates that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, the attack notification flag may be cleared and the attack mode flag may be set based on the transition to the attack mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1 to 3. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1205 is the case where the first replay or the second replay wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1207, a process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 37(b)). After that, in step S1208, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

In this way, if you win the first promotion replay 1 to 4 in a situation where you have won the lottery to enter the attack mode, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win will be announced, and the gaming state will be changed to the first one. It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if you win the first promotion replays 1 to 4 without winning the attack mode, there are cases where the first replay prize is established and cases where the third replay prize is established. There is.

Also, if you win Fall Replay 1 to 3 in a situation where the attack notification flag is set, the game state will shift to the 1st RT state by notifying you of the operation order corresponding to the 1st replay winning. It is possible to prevent this from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends and the attack notification flag is cleared and the display mode shifts to normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning Fall Replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

For example, in the 1st RT state, you win the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 without winning the attack mode, and the order of operations happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, and the 3rd replay win is established. Even in this case (even if the state shifts to the second RT state), the second replay prize can be established by winning Fall Replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the player happens to move to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, the player will immediately move to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether the current lottery result is either second promotion replay 1 or 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1209 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay will win depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1211 whether the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 49). be.

If the VB notification flag is set, in step S1212, a process for notifying the press order of the fourth regame or the fifth regame is executed. Specifically, among the first re-game, fourth re-game, and fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is notified (see FIG. 37(b)). After that, in step S1213, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, a process for notifying the press order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and a process for setting a press order notification command is performed in step S1208. The main push order process ends. Therefore, if you win 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 without winning VB mode, if you are in attack mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the 1st replay winning will be performed, and if you are not in attack mode, There will be no press-order notification performance.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether the current lottery result is either BAR Replay 1 or 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1214 means that depending on the operation order of the current game, any one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replay will win a prize. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, processing for notification of the push order of the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game is executed. Specifically, among the first re-gaming, third re-gaming, and sixth re-gaming to eighth re-gaming, the operation order corresponding to the sixth re-gaming winning to eighth re-gaming winning is notified (FIG. 37 ( c). After that, in step S1218, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, the process for notifying the press order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the press order notification command is performed in step S1208. The main push order processing ends. Therefore, if you win BAR Replay 1 or 2 without winning VB mode, if you are in attack mode, the press order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win will be performed, and if you are not in attack mode, press There will be no announcement performance.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the current lottery result is a push order bell win. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S1220 whether the current display mode is normal mode or challenge mode. If the mode is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, in step S1221, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed (see FIG. 33). After that, in step S1222, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the main press order process is ended without performing the press order notification process.

<Processing to shift the display mode based on winning results>
<Winning result processing>
Next, a description will be given of processing when a winning combination corresponding to the transition of the gaming state is won as a result of the notification for shifting the gaming state as described above. This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 32). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52.

In step S1301, a game number management process is executed. Although details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the aforementioned precursor mode, the number of consecutive games in challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted.

In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the current stop result indicates that the third re-game winning has been established. As described above, when the third replay winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 35), processing is performed to shift the gaming state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1304 whether the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether an attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as flags for specifying display modes, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to a higher RT state than the attack mode (VB mode, additional specialization zone), the attack mode flag is set to the corresponding flag of that mode (VB mode flag, It is configured to coexist with the special zone flag). Therefore, for example, the case where it is determined that the attack mode flag is set in step S1304 includes not only the case where the attack mode is in progress, but also the case where the case is in the VB mode and the case in the specialization zone. .

If the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, the display mode is already the attack mode, so the main prize winning result handling process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, an attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1306, an attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1307, counting of the number of attack mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of consecutive attack mode games is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1307, the main winning result corresponding process is ended.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third re-game winning has not been established, the process advances to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been established as the current stop result. As described above, when the fourth and fifth re-gaming wins are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 35), processing is performed to shift the gaming state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined whether the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, and therefore the main winning result handling process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1311 to S1313.

That is, in step S1311, a process of setting a VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that transitions through the attack mode, and the transition to the attack mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

Thereafter, in step S1312, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the VB mode start command, uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1313, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 60) of the number of consecutive games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1313, the main prize winning result corresponding process ends.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have not been established, the process advances to step S1314. In step S1314, it is determined whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established as the current stop result. In this embodiment, when the seventh re-game winning is established, that is, a BAR symbol is stopped in the middle of the left reel 32L, a BAR symbol is stopped in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and a BAR symbol is stopped in the middle of the right reel 32R. When the BAR symbol stops on the middle combination line, the system moves to the top-up special zone. In the special bonus zone, the number of consecutive games in the attack mode is increased not only for specific combinations but also for all winning combinations (push order combination, specific combinations, and bonuses) that can be won in the normal game mode. Note that the case where the 7th replay win is established is the case where the BAR Replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th replay win (Fig. 37). (c)) Furthermore, this is a case where the 7th replay out of the 1st, 6th, and 7th replay wins a lottery. The player wins the lottery in which the seventh re-game wins with a probability of 1.

If the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S1315 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, in step S1316, a specialized zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and by setting the specialized zone flag, counting of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is stopped. . In this case, the attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the specialized zone transitions into the VB mode, and also because the specialized zone always transitions to the VB mode after the specialized zone ends.

Thereafter, in step S1317, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the specialized zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1318, counting of the number of continued specialized zones is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games of the specialized zone is set in the specialized zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1318, the main prize winning result corresponding process ends. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1314 or step S1315, the winning result handling process is directly terminated.

As mentioned above, based on the winning combination (3rd to 5th replay) corresponding to the transition of the gaming state, the processing for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 35). conduct. This is to prevent attack mode etc. from being started based on a winning combination that corresponds to changing the gaming state, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. It is.

Also, when transitioning to a display mode, among those that involve transitioning to a gaming state, transitioning to a higher mode, that is, transitioning from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, or transitioning from attack mode to VB mode, Alternatively, when transitioning from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the configuration is such that the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the display mode and the game state transition are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of a transition to a lower mode, for example, when the game state is transitioned due to a second replay winning as a fall replay or a halt of the transition roll, the display mode is not transitioned. When moving to a lower mode, the gaming state is managed by winning results (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in different games.

<Number of games management process>
The number of games management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and the number of consecutive games in these display modes is 0. Based on this, processing for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, the game modes include a normal game mode that is played in a 3-bet game and a 2-bet game, and a specific mode that is played in a 1-bet game. The process in step S1401 is for determining whether the game to be ended this time is a game in the normal game mode or a game in the specific mode. Then, in step S1401, if the number of bets is 1 as a specific number, it is determined that the game to be ended this time is a game in a specific mode. If the game is in a specific mode, the game number management process is ended. That is, in games in the specific mode, the number of games in the portent mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode etc. are not counted.

If the game to be ended this time is a game in the normal game mode rather than in the specific mode, the process advances to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set or the bonus state is present. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the process of clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag is performed in step S1403, and then the present game number management process is ended. . In other words, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games such as attack mode is not counted. Note that if each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, while the attack mode flag, VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the attack notification flag and VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus ends, after going through a preparation state such as attack mode, these flags are used to notify the press order for shifting the gaming state, making it possible to return to the gaming state before the bonus.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether the number of portent games is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of portent games is subtracted by 1 in step S1405. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (not in precursor mode), or after executing the process in step S1405, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1427. .

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process advances to step S1407, and the challenge mode continuation counter is subtracted by 1, thereby subtracting the number of challenge mode continuation games. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether the challenge mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and a challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1410. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command notifies the end of the challenge mode in the current game on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. After performing the process of step S1410, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not challenge mode, the process advances to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether the current display mode is attack mode. If it is the attack mode, the process advances to step S1412, where the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby subtracting the number of games in which the attack mode can be continued. Then, in step S1413, it is determined whether the attack mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1414, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1415. Thereafter, in step S1416, an attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command notifies the end of the attack mode in the current game on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After performing the process of step S1416, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the mode is not attack mode, the process advances to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether the current display mode is VB mode. If the mode is VB mode, the process advances to step S1418, and it is determined whether the zone is an additional specialization zone. If it is not the special add-on zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1419, thereby subtracting the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1420, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1421, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1422. Thereafter, in step S1423, a VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode termination command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will be terminated in the current game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After performing the process of step S1423, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1418 that the area is in the special add-on zone, the process advances to step S1424. In step S1424, the number of continuous games in the specialized zone is subtracted by subtracting 1 from the specialized zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1425, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, the specialized zone flag is cleared in step S1426, and a specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1427. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone end command notifies the end of the specialized zone in the current game on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. Such notification may include, for example, notification of the number of games in which the game has been successfully added in total in the current specialized zone. After performing the process of step S1427, the number of games management process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1425, the number of games management process is directly ended.

<Completion judgment process>
Next, as the process when the bonus ends, the end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 40). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether the bonus termination conditions are met or not, and if the bonus is to be terminated, processing is performed to notify the winner of the attack mode, etc. where the bonus has been won in duplicate, and the attack mode in which the bonus has been won in duplicate. Perform processing to add on the number of games, etc.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been achieved. As already explained, the first small winning combination (BB medium small winning combination 1) is achieved with high probability during the bonus (FIG. 42). In addition, when winning in the BB middle red 7 matching combination (IV=29), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 30th minor winning combination (FIG. 41(b)), and further, If the 30th minor role of the 1st minor role and the 30th minor role wins a lottery, the 30th minor role is won. In the present embodiment, for example, when winning the BB, middle, and red 7 combination combination, the probability of winning the 30th minor combination is 1/100 in the lottery. When winning in the BB medium BAR winning combination (IV=30), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 31st small winning combination (FIG. 41(b)), and then the 1st small winning If the 31st minor role of the winning combination and the 31st minor role wins a lottery, the 31st minor role winning is established. In this embodiment, for example, when winning the BB medium BAR winning combination, the probability of winning the 31st small winning combination is 1/200.

If it is determined in step S1501 that a small winning combination has been achieved, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the remaining number of payouts is performed in step S1502. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after executing the process in step S1502, additional processing is executed in step S1503. The add-on process is a process for granting benefits other than payout of game media based on the result of the game during the current bonus. For example, if the current game result is the 30th small winning combination (lower 7 reds), if the display mode is normal mode or challenge mode, the attack mode will be won, and if the display mode is normal mode or challenge mode, the attack mode will be won, and if the display mode is normal mode or challenge mode. If so, the number of consecutive games in attack mode will be increased (for example, 100 games). In addition, if the 31st small prize winning (lower BAR complete) is achieved, if the display mode is normal mode or challenge mode, attack mode and VB mode will be won, and if attack mode, VB mode and specialized zone If the player is in the VB mode, the player is allowed to win the specialized zone multiple times (for example, twice), and if the player is in the specialized zone, the number of consecutive games in the attack mode is increased (for example, 300 games). In step S1503, a flag corresponding to the transition of the display mode (attack mode winning flag, etc.) is set, and a counter addition process (addition process of an attack mode continuation counter, etc.) according to the number of additional games is performed.

In the following step S1504, it is determined whether the remaining number of payouts has become zero. If it is not 0, the end determination process is directly ended. If it is 0, the bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1505, and then in steps S1506 to S1519, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, etc. Performs processing for adding on the number of consecutive games.

That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, a lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S1507, the number of portent games is set in step S1508, and a portent command is set in step S1509. The processing in steps S1507 to S1509 is similar to the processing in steps S808 to S810. After executing the process in step S1509, the end determination process ends.

That is, if the bonus ends in a situation where the player has won the attack mode, after the bonus ends, the player will be notified of the winning of the attack mode through a precursor game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while making them expect that the situation will change to an advantageous state again after the bonus ends.

Here, if a bonus is won during the portent mode before any winning notification, the number of portent games has already been set when the lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S1507. In this embodiment, even in such a case, the number of portent games is reset. In other words, regardless of the number of remaining games when the bonus is won, after the bonus ends, the number of precursor games is set again to 1 out of 1 to 32 games. By doing this, it is possible to make the player feel excited for a long time after the bonus ends.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1506, it is determined in step S1510 whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode in steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is ended. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, it is determined in step S1511 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode in steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is ended. That is, if the bonus ends in a situation where the player has also won the challenge mode or the VB mode, after the bonus ends, the winner of the challenge mode or the VB mode is notified through a precursor game.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1511, the process advances to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether the attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed in step S1513, a process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed in step S1514, and an additional command is set in step S1515. . The processing in steps S1513 to S1515 is similar to the processing in steps S917 to S919. After executing the process in step S1515, the end determination process ends.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1512, it is determined in step S1516 whether the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode add-on flag is set, a challenge mode add-on game number lottery process is performed in step S1517, a challenge mode add-on game number process is performed in step S1518, and an add-on command is set in step S1519. . The processing in steps S1517 to S1519 is similar to the processing in steps S820 to S822. If a negative determination is made in step S1516, or after executing the process in step S1519, the end determination process ends.

<Specialized zone processing>
Next, the specialized zone processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55. The specialized zone process is a process executed in step S712 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 45). As already explained, the player enters the specialized zone during the VB mode, and during the specialized zone, the number of consecutive games of attack mode is added to each game.

That is, in the specialized zone processing, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1602, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the following step S1603, processing for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1604, an additional command is set, and then the specialized zone processing ends. The processing from step S1602 to step S1604 is similar to the processing from step S917 to step S919. However, the number of games to be selected is greater in the number of additional games lottery process in step S1602 than in the number of additional games lottery process in step S917.

<Processing regarding notification performance on the sub side>
Next, various notification processes performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described as (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. As a process for various notifications, an effect setting process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56.

In the effect setting process, first in step S1701, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1702. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and read out the previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after executing the process in step S1702, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet time command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation being performed.In addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process, the bet command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on a bet operation. 49), the challenge mode start command, the attack mode winning notification command, the VB mode winning notification command, etc. If these are the bet time commands, a bet time performance setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after executing the process in step S1704, it is determined in step S1705 whether the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, as well as the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 46 to 48), push order notification commands set in the push order processing (FIG. 51), and the like. If it is one of these start time commands, start time effect setting processing is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after executing the process in step S1706, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a stop command. The stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a winning result command set in step S415 of the reel control process (FIG. 32). In addition, attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialized zone set in the winning result response process (Figure 52) There are termination commands, etc. If it is one of these stop commands, a stop effect setting process is executed in step S1708.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after executing the process in step S1708, other processes are executed in step S1709, and then the effect setting process is ended. In step S1709, a performance based on a command from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, or stopping (for example, a performance when the first reel is stopped, a performance when the second reel is stopped, a performance based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), settings for effects, etc.), settings for effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (first effect switch detection sensor, second effect switch detection sensor, etc.), settings for error notification, etc. I do.

Hereinafter, the bet time performance setting process, the start time performance setting process, and the stop time performance setting process will be explained. Note that each effect setting process will be explained with reference to the schematic diagrams of display effects shown in FIGS. 64 to 69.

<Bet performance setting process>
The bet time performance setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the bet command received this time is a bet command, and whether or not the bet command included in the bet command is a specific number bet command in which the information on the number of bets is a specific number (1). This process is a process for determining whether the game mode to be executed is a normal game mode or a specific mode, and when determining that it is a specific number bet command, the game mode to be executed this time is a specific mode. It means that. In this case, in step S1802, the specific mode bet effect setting process is executed, and then the main effect setting process is ended. This specific mode bet effect setting process will be explained in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the command is not a specific number bet command, and the game mode to be executed is the normal game mode, the process advances to step S1803. In step S1803, it is determined whether the currently received bet command includes a challenge mode start command. If a challenge mode start command is included, processing for setting a challenge mode start effect is performed in step S1804. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the characters "Challenge mode start" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the display mode to be transitioned to is likely to win the attack mode transition lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) indicating that it is a chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, ``Grasp the attack mode!'' in a deep male voice).

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the currently received bet command includes an attack mode winning notification command. If an attack mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting an attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1806. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the characters "Attack mode confirmed" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack number one!" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1805, it is determined in step S1807 whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a VB mode winning notification command. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting a VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1808. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the words "VICTORY BONUS confirmed" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" in male and female voices).

After executing any of the processes in step S1804, step S1806, and step S1808, or if a negative determination is made in step S1807, in step S1809, other bet effects are set, and then the main effect setting process is performed. end. In the process of step S1809, for example, in response to receiving a bet command, a lamp around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 for the corresponding bet number is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. For example, a process for returning from the demo mode where one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined period of time, and a lamp around the start lever 41 is lit to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Start production setting process>
Next, the start effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58.

In step S1901, it is determined whether the number of bets at the start is a specific number (1). This process is a process for determining whether the game mode to be started is a normal game mode or a specific mode, and determining that the number of bets is a specific number means that the game mode to be executed this time is a specific mode. It means something. In this case, in step S1902, a specific mode start effect setting process is executed, and then the main effect setting process is ended. This specific mode start effect setting process will be explained in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the number is not the specific number, display mode setting processing is performed in step S1903. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, and the display mode is set in the corresponding display mode. , settings are made so that the display effects on the auxiliary display section 65 are performed. Specifically, in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side, a challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag are set as flags for understanding the display mode. Areas are provided, and a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and a corresponding flag is cleared at the end of each mode. For example, in the process of setting the challenge mode start effect in step S1804, a challenge mode flag is set. In step S1903, by understanding these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the following step S1904, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a winning combination. If the pressing order winning combination is determined, a pressing order notification process is performed in step S1905. Here, the press order notification process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the start command currently received includes a press order notification command. If the press order notification command is not included, the main press order notification process is ended. If a press order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, the mode correspondence flag is checked in step S2003 to determine whether the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is not the attack mode, in step S2004, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the press order that the third re-game winning is achieved, and then the press order notification process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2003 that the attack mode is in effect, in step S2005, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the press order that the first replay winning is established, and then Finish the process.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replay 1 to 4 has not been won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is a fall replay 1 to 3. If it is a fall replay 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2005, and the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled to notify the press order that the first replay win is established, and then the process for press order notification ends. do.

If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not a fall replay 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is a second promotion replay 1 or 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notified flag indicating that the VB winning notification has been set is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The notification completed flag is cleared based on transition to VB mode. Then, in step S2007, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence of the notification flag. If the winning of the VB mode has been announced, in step S2008, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the pressing order that the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are achieved, and then the pressing order is notified. end the process. If the winning of the VB mode has not been announced, the process advances to step S2005, where the press order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the press order notification process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery result is the BAR replay 1 or 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, the mode correspondence flag is checked in step S2010 to determine whether the current display mode is VB mode. If the VB mode is in effect, in step S2011, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to notify the press order that the 6th to 8th replay winnings are achieved, and then the process for press order notification ends. do. If the VB mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S2005, where the press order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the press order notification process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. If it is a bell win, in step S2013, the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are controlled to notify the push order that the bell win is established as the first minor role, and then the push order notification process is ended. . If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the press order notification process is directly terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start performance setting process (FIG. 58), if it is determined in step S1904 that the push order winning combination has not been won, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the specific winning combination has been won. If the specific winning combination is won, specific winning notification processing is performed in step S1907. The specific winning combination notification process will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1906, or after executing the process in step S1905 or step S1907, the process advances to step S1908. In step S1908, it is determined whether an additional command has been received as the current start command. If the add-on command has been received, in step S1909, the add-on effect is set in advance so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed as "+10" on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the additional performance, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "squeaky squeakyyyy!"). Note that it is preferable to vary the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the number of additional games. Note that the additional effect may be set as the start effect.

If the add-on command is not received in step S1908, or after executing the process in step S1909, the bonus notification process is executed in step S1910, the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S1911, and then, In step S1912, other start effects are set, and then the start effect setting process is ended. The bonus notification process and the continuous performance setting process will be explained in detail later. In the process of step S1912, for example, in response to the start of the game, an effect suggesting the lottery result is set, a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc.

<Processing for setting effects when stopped>
Next, the stop effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether the number of bets for the game to be ended this time is a specific number (1). This process is a process for determining whether the game mode of the current game is the normal game mode or the specific mode, and determining that the number of bets is a specific number means that the game mode of the current game is the specific mode. It means that it was. In this case, in step S2102, a specific mode stop effect setting process is executed, and then the main effect setting process is ended. This specific mode stop effect setting process will be explained in detail later.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the number is not the specific number, the process advances to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a challenge mode end command. If a challenge mode end command is included, in step S2104, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that a challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the characters "Challenge mode end" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "Be more devoted!" in a deep male voice).

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the currently received stop command includes an attack mode start command. If an attack mode start command is included, processing for setting an attack mode start effect is performed in step S2106. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the characters "Attack mode!! Ver. 1" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the attack mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack mode start!" in a high-pitched female voice).

Incidentally, the display of "Ver. 1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. In other words, this is a display indicating that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. When the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the characters "Attack Mode!! Ver. 2" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as a promotion effect. Also, when the rank of attack mode is promoted to the 3rd attack mode, the text "Attack mode!! Ver. 3" is displayed, and when the rank of attack mode is promoted to the 4th attack mode, the text "Attack mode!! Ver. 4" is displayed. Display is performed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2105, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the currently received stop command includes an attack mode end command. If an attack mode end command is included, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed in step S2108. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. ), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in the current attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you again" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2107, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode start command. If a VB mode start command is included, processing for setting a VB mode start effect is performed in step S2110. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the characters "777 VICTORY!!" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory Bonus Start" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2109, it is determined in step S2111 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode end command. If a VB mode end command is included, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed in step S2112. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the characters "VICTORY BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the number of consecutive games of attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. Displays the number of consecutive games (including VB mode and specialized zone), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "It's still going on" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2111, it is determined in step S2113 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone start command. If a specialized zone start command is included, processing for setting a specialized zone start effect is performed in step S2114. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the words "additional challenge!!", and a special mode in which additions to the attack mode are likely to occur is displayed. Displays a character that suggests that In addition, in the specialized zone start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go!" in a boy's voice).

If the specialized zone start command is not included in step S2113, it is determined in step S2115 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone end command. If the specialized zone end command is included, in step S2116, processing for setting a specialized zone end effect is performed. In the specialized zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the current specialized zone. In addition, in the specialized zone end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "Kyukyukyukyu!"). Note that it is preferable to vary the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 depending on the total number of additional games.

If the specialized zone end command is not included in step S2115, it is determined in step S2117 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If a bonus end command is included, processing for setting a bonus end effect is performed in step S2118. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of coins paid out during the current bonus, and if the bonus is in attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, attack mode ( Displays the total number of coins paid out (including VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end performance, a performance using characters etc. that suggests these contents is performed depending on whether the attack mode is successful or not, the challenge mode is successful or not, and the number of additional games.

After executing any one of steps S2104, S2106, S2108, S2110, S2112, S2114, S2116, and S2118, or after making a negative determination in S2117, the process advances to step S2119. In step S2119, if an additional effect is set, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to execute the additional effect. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S1909 in the start effect setting process.

After that, in step S2120, other stop effects are set, and then the main effect setting process is ended. In step S2120, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. A sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notifying the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Processing for production during various games>
In this embodiment, continuous effects and bonus effects are provided as effects during various games. A continuous performance is a performance that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and is performed multiple times (four times in this embodiment). This is a performance that can be continued for a long period of time, and is a performance that informs whether or not there was an advantageous result in the final game. The mid-bonus performance is a performance performed in each game during the bonus state that is transferred based on the first BB, second BB, special first BB, or special second BB winning.

An overview of the continuous performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 69.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), at the start of the first game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of consecutive effects is displayed (in the figure, four stages are displayed corresponding to the continuous effects of four games). (Showing a nodaruma drop performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect has been set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows an effect indicating that the Daruma Drop in the first stage was successful, (This indicates that the continuous performance continues). If the continuous performance is interrupted, at the end of the first game for which the continuous performance was set, a performance will be performed to notify that the continuous performance will end midway (for example, a performance in which the first Daruma drop fails, etc.) ). The presentation regarding whether or not to continue the continuous presentation is the same for each game in the continuous presentation.

As shown in FIG. 69(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, there are three remaining Daruma doll effects). Then, at the end of the second game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue. ).

As shown in FIG. 69(c), at the start of the third game in which continuous effects have been set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, there are two remaining daruma doll drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue. ).

As shown in FIG. 69(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous performance, a display indicating that this is the final game of the continuous performance is performed (in the figure, a one-stage Daruma drop performance). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is performed to show whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the figure shows an effect indicating that the Daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous performance, the performance of the next game is set by taking over the performance of the previous game, and the performance of each game has continuity. Furthermore, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous performance (how many games there are until the end of the continuous performance).

Here, in each game of continuous performance, whether or not the continuous performance continues until the next game is set such that the more the game of continuous performance progresses, the higher the continuation rate becomes. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous performance, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous performance will be reported, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be notified. Therefore, in a continuous production, the level of interest of the player varies greatly depending on the number of the current game in the continuous production, and the level of interest of the player increases as the game progresses from the starting game to the ending game. .

The setting of the continuous performance is performed in the specific combination notification process (step S1907), the bonus notification process (step S1910), and the continuous performance setting process (step S1911) in the start performance setting process (FIG. 58). Therefore, each process will be explained in order below.

<Bonus notification processing>
First, the bonus notification process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61.

In the bonus notification process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether the game to be started is a bonus winning game based on the lottery result command received this time. If it is a bonus winning game, in step S2202, a notification game lottery process for notifying the bonus winning is executed. In this notification game lottery process, the number of games after which the bonus winning will be announced is determined by lottery. Specifically, one notification game is determined from 0 games (to be notified in the current game) to 10 games. In addition, in the lottery of the notification game, the notification game may be different depending on the winning combination that triggered the winning (whether it is a duplicate win or not, and if it is a duplicate win, the type of the overlapping small win, etc.). For example, if a bonus is won by duplicating strong cherries, a smaller number of games is likely to be selected, and if a bonus is won by duplicating weak cherries, a larger number of games may be selected.

In the following step S2203, a process is performed to set the number of consecutive performance games based on the notification game determined in the process of step S2202. Specifically, in step S2203, a continuous effect game is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous performance counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration that performs a continuous performance of four games, the continuous performance is started in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 4, and the result notification is performed in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 0. More specifically, for example, if it is determined in step S2202 to notify the bonus winning after 10 games, 10 is input into the continuous effect counter in step S2203. In this case, the continuous performance starts from the game where the continuous performance counter is 4. If it is determined in step S2202 to notify the bonus winning after 5 games, 5 is input into the continuous effect counter in step S2203. Even in this case, the continuous performance starts from the game where the continuous performance counter is 4.

Note that if less than four notification games are set in step S2202, the continuous performance is started from the middle. For example, if it is determined in step S2202 that a bonus win will be announced after two games, 2 is input into the continuous effect counter in step S2203. In this case, the continuous performance starts from the current game, and is performed from the performance of the third continuous performance game shown in FIG. 69(c).

After executing the process of step S2203, a continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S2204. The continuous performance flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that a continuous performance is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, or after executing the process in step S2204, the process advances to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether a bonus game is to be started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the next game in which the 1st BB, 2nd BB, special 1st BB or special 2nd BB is won until the end of the bonus. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2205 is the case where the 1st BB, 2nd BB, special 1st BB, or special 2nd BB winning is achieved in the previous game. In this case, in step S2206, the number of bonus effect games is set in the bonus effect counter in the various counter areas 183b in the RAM 183. The bonus performance counter is a counter for executing a performance set for each game as the bonus game progresses, and a performance corresponding to the counter is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like.

As already explained, in this embodiment, in the first BB and second BB bonus games, the winning combination is won in which 9 medals are paid out every game, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. In other words, the first BB and second BB bonus games end after 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the above-mentioned bonus effect counter is a counter for determining which game of the 24 games the effect should be performed. It is. In step S2206, the bonus effect counter is set to 24 as the number of bonus effect games, and the bonus effect counter is subtracted for each bonus game. After performing the process in step S2206, in step S2207, a bonus medium performance flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The mid-bonus performance flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the mid-bonus performance is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, or after executing the process in step S2207, this bonus notification process ends.

<Processing for notification of specific winnings>
Next, the specific winning combination notification process executed in step S1907 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the current start command. If no precursor command is included, it is determined in step S2302 whether an additional command is included as the current start command. If the bonus command is not included, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won a bonus, that is, if you have won a specific role as a lottery result, but you have not won a lottery to transition to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or an additional lottery for the number of consecutive games, If the player has not won the bonus either, a lottery process in the pseudo omen mode is executed in step S2304. Pseudo omen mode is visually difficult to distinguish from omen mode, but in omen mode, the player is notified of an advantageous result (such as winning a challenge mode) based on the completion of the number of omen games. The pseudo-harbinger mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo-harbinger games.

In step S2304, a table for the pseudo omen mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo omen mode. conduct. The table for the pseudo omen mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the pseudo omen mode lottery differs depending on the type of specific winning combination. For example, a strong cherry is more likely to win a pseudo omen mode lottery than a weak cherry. It is set so that the probability of winning the omen mode lottery is high.

In step S2305, it is determined based on the processing result in step S2304 whether or not the pseudo omen mode lottery has been won. If the player has won, in step S2306, a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo omen mode is performed. This processing corresponds to step S808 and the like on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games of 1 from 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In the following step S2307, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2306 is set in a continuous performance counter. In this embodiment, when the omen mode or pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or pseudo omen mode ends after continuous performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games into the continuous performance counter in step S2307, when the remaining number of games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of the continuous performance (4 games remaining), the continuous performance is started. That will happen.

In step S2308, a process is executed to set a pseudo flag indicating that the mode is a pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage areas 183a. In the following step S2309, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the specific winning combination notification process ends. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2301 to S2303, or if a negative determination is made in step S2305, the specific winning combination notification process is directly ended.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous performance setting process performed in step S1911 of the start time performance setting process (FIG. 58) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63.

In step S2401, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the start command currently received. If an omen command is included, in step S2402, processing is performed to input the number of omen games in the omen mode included in the omen command into a continuous performance counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the portent mode becomes one corresponding to the start of continuous performance (4 games remaining), continuous performance will be started. In the following step S2403, a continuous effect flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after executing the process in step S2403, the process advances to step S2404. In step S2404, it is determined whether the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous performance counter is performed in step S2405. Then, in step S2406, it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performance. If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not a pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2408, and the actual omen effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2409, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the main performance table for the present omen and the continuous performance counter, and the corresponding performance data is acquired from the normal game performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182. Perform processing to set it as a continuous performance. As for the performance data of the continuous performance specified from the performance table for this precursor, if the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, it is the performance data that indicates that the continuous performance will continue until the next game, and the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3. If it is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends successfully.

If it is determined in step S2407 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S2410. In step S2410, a pseudo omen effect table is obtained from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2411, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table and the continuous performance counter, and the corresponding performance data is acquired from the normal game performance data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and this time Perform the process to set it as a continuous performance. If the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the continuous performance performance data specified from the pseudo-foreshadowing performance table is performance data indicating that the continuous performance will continue until the next game or performance data indicating that the continuous performance will not continue. If the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends in failure.

Note that when the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the performance data specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table includes data for which no continuous performance is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, no continuous effect effect data is set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect will continue until the next game as shown in FIG. 69(a). When the performance data for the first game is set and the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data for the second continuous performance game is set, which indicates that the continuous performance will not continue until the next game in FIG. 69(b). By doing so, it becomes possible to set a performance in which the continuous performance is interrupted in the middle in a game in which the number of pseudo-precursor games in the pseudo-precursor mode is 0.

After performing the processing in step S2409 or step S2411, it is determined in step S2412 whether the continuous effect counter is 0 or not. If the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2413. Note that if the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2406 or step S2412, or after performing the process in step S2413, this continuous effect setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2404 that the continuous effect flag is not set, the process advances to step S2414. In step S2414, it is determined whether the bonus effect flag is set. If it has been set, in step S2415, a subtraction process is performed on the bonus performance counter. Specifically, processing is performed to subtract 1 from the bonus performance counter. In the following step S2416, a bonus effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2417, the performance data of the corresponding mid-bonus performance is specified from the bonus performance table and the bonus performance counter, the corresponding performance data is acquired from the normal game performance data storage area 182b, and the current performance data is acquired from the normal game performance data storage area 182b. Perform processing to set as a bonus performance. In step S2418, it is determined whether the bonus performance counter is 0 or not. If the bonus mid-performance counter is 0, processing to clear the bonus mid-performance flag is performed in step S2419. After that, the main continuous performance setting process is ended.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the lottery process is performed on the main controller 101 side based on the insertion of medals as game media and the starting operation of the start lever 41, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are Rotation is started, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. In the configuration in which benefits are given, a plurality of RT states are provided with different probabilities of becoming a replay as a result of the lottery process, and the RT state shifts when a prize is established in the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay. Whether or not the corresponding replay will win a prize is determined by the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the lottery, and the notification of the order of operations is made by changing the display mode according to the result of the lottery process. This is done by winning a lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell prize and win a medal. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as a gaming state where the replay probability is improved, and also to the display mode where the operation order is notified, in the RT state, the replay probability is improved. It is possible to establish a first-order prize and win a large amount of medals.

In a game with the above flow, for example, it is difficult for players who are not accustomed to the game to understand how the game state transitions and display mode transitions are performed, etc., making it difficult to fully enjoy the game. There is a possibility that you will not be able to enjoy it. Therefore, in this embodiment, a specific mode is provided in which the player can experience the game flow as described above.

<Overview of specific modes>
In contrast to the normal game mode, which is set as a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game, the specific mode is set as a 1-bet game. In the specific mode, you can simulate the gameplay of the normal game mode without reducing the number of medals. Specifically, you start one game by inserting one medal, and one medal is added at the end of each game. is paid out, and the mode is such that medals do not increase or decrease. In other words, the specific mode is a mode in which all game results result in a payout of coins equal to the bet number. Then, it is possible to experience the transition of the game state (transition to the RT state) and the transition of the display mode in the normal game mode according to each game result of equal coin payout. The mechanism of the specific mode will be explained below.

As already explained, in the 3-bet game, the straight downward-sloping line L4 is the valid line (FIG. 9(a)), while in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is the valid line (FIG. 9(c)). )). In the specific mode executed as a 1-bet game, the combination of winning symbols is different from the normal game mode executed mainly as a 3-bet game.

More specifically, if the lottery result in a 1-bet game is a predetermined result and the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at the bending line L6, which is a valid line, then in the 1-bet game, if the lottery result is a predetermined result and the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at the bending line L6, which is a valid line, then the lottery result in the 1-bet game is a downward-sloping line that is not a valid line. A specific symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination is stopped on line L4. The specific symbol combination is set as a combination that will result in a winning of the specific result if the lottery result in the 3-bet game is the specific result. In other words, when a predetermined symbol combination that results in a winning with a predetermined result in a 1-bet game stops at the bending line L6, a specific symbol combination that results in a winning with a specific result in a 3-bet game moves downward to the right. It will stop on line L4, and although visually the same symbol will stop at the same place in the 3-bet game and the 1-bet game, in the 3-bet game, the winning result will be a specific result, and in the 1-bet game, the symbol will stop at the same place. The winning results are determined by a predetermined result, and the winning results are different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a1), in a 3-bet game, the first BB is won and the "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red 7" symbol stop on the active line. The 1st BB prize is established. In the 1-bet game, a special 1st BB (1st PBB) is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 1st BB, and if the special 1st BB is won, a "Red 7" symbol and a "Red 7" symbol will be placed on the active line. The combination of symbols is set so that the special 1st BB winning prize is established when the "7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol stop. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b1), when the symbol combination that results in the special 1st BB prize stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line for the 1-bet game, the downward-sloping line that is the valid line for the 3-bet game At L4, the symbol combination that results in the first BB prize stops. However, in a 1-bet game, the downward-sloping line L4 is not a valid line, so even if the symbol combination that results in the 1st BB winning stops on the downward-sloping line L4 as described above, the 1st BB winning will not be achieved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a2), in a 3-bet game, the 26th small winning combination (watermelon) is won, and the "watermelon" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol stop on the active line. So, the 26th small role prize is established. In the 1-bet game, a 26th P minor prize is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 26th minor prize, and if the 26th P minor prize is won, a "watermelon" symbol and a "watermelon" symbol will be placed on the active line. The combination of symbols is set so that the 26th P small winning combination is established when the "red bell" symbol stops. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), when the combination of symbols that results in the 26th P small winning combination stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line for the 1-bet game, the right-sloping line is considered to be the valid line for the 3-bet game. The symbol combination that results in the 26th small winning combination stops on line L4. However, in a 1-bet game, the downward-sloping line L4 is not a valid line, so even if the symbol combination that results in the 26th minor winning combination stops on the downward-sloping line L4 as described above, the 26th minor winning combination will not be established. .

For example, as shown in Figure 70 (a3), in a 3-bet game, the second small winning combination (bell) is won, and the "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "red 7" symbol are on the active line. By stopping, the second small winning combination is established. In the 1-bet game, a 2nd P minor prize is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 2nd minor prize, and if the 2nd P minor prize is won, a "white bell" symbol and a "red" symbol will be placed on the active line. The combination of symbols is set so that the 2nd P small winning combination is established when the "7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol stop. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70 (b3), when the combination of symbols that results in the 2nd P small winning combination stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the 1-bet game, the right-sloping line is considered to be the valid line in the 3-bet game. The symbol combination that results in the second small winning combination stops on line L4. However, in a 1-bet game, the downward-sloping line L4 is not an active line, so even if the symbol combination that results in the second minor prize winning stops on the downward-sloping line L4 as described above, the second minor prize winning will not be established. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a4), in a 3-bet game, the second small winning combination (bell) is won, and the "white bell", "red 7" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol are stopped on the active line. As a result, the second minor prize is not achieved and the player loses the so-called bell. This combination of symbols is a transition roll. In the 1 bet game, if you win the 2nd P minor prize, the 2nd P minor prize is established when the "White Bell" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Red Bell" symbol stop on the active line. If you don't do it, you'll end up missing the bell. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70 (b4), if the combination of symbols that does not result in the 2nd P minor prize and results in a so-called missed bell stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line for the 1-bet game, the 3-bet game is started. The symbol combination (transition roll) that does not result in a second minor winning combination and results in a so-called missed bell is stopped on the downward-sloping line L4, which is an effective line.

In this way, in the specific mode, a winning combination is achieved with the same outcome as the winning result during the 3-bet game as the normal game mode, but different from a winning combination from the winning result during the 3-bet game.

Here, in the 3-bet game in the normal game mode, the downward-sloping line L4, which is a straight line, is set as the valid line, while in the specific mode, the bent line L6, which is a line where a bend occurs, is set as the valid line. . Since it is thought that it is easier for the player to notice that the winning combination of symbols stops on a straight line than on a curved line, for example, as shown in Fig. 70 (b1). , in a specific mode, even if the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Watermelon" symbol that will win the first PBB prize stops on the bending line L6, which is the active line, the right It is thought that the eye will first go to the "Red 7" symbol that is stopped along the descending line L4. Moreover, the stopping number where the "Red 7" symbol stops aligned with the downward-sloping line L4 is the stopping number where the 1st BB prize is established in the normal game mode.

Then, from the perspective of a player who is familiar with the stopping result, even if the first PBB winning symbol combination stopped on the bending line L6 in the specific mode, it is not set as an active line and is downward to the right. It is conceivable that the player may have been distracted by the first BB winning symbol combination stopped on line L4 and may have determined that the first BB winning has been achieved. In other words, by setting such a result, when the first PBB winning is achieved in the specific mode, it is possible to make the player think that the first BB winning is achieved instead of the first PBB winning.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), in the specific mode, the combination of "watermelon" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "red bell" symbol is stopped on the bending line L6, which is the active line. , In the specific mode, it is more eye-catching that the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the downward-sloping line L4, which is not an active line. It is possible to make the player think that the 26th small winning prize has been achieved instead of winning the winning prize.

In addition, players are more likely to win if the combination of symbols is set as a combination of symbols of the same type that results in a win, than if the combination of different symbols is set as a combination of symbols that results in a win. It is thought that it is easy to notice. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 70 (a3), even in the normal game mode, the combination of symbols that will result in the second minor prize winning is a "white bell" symbol, a "red 7" symbol, and a "red 7" symbol on the active line. Although it is set as a combination of "Red 7" symbols, at the stop roll, the "Bell" symbols of the same type ("White Bell" symbols and "Red Bell" symbols) are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. In this case, when the second minor role is won, it is determined that the Bell role has been won as the second minor role based on the symbol that stops on the line L1 above the right-down line L4, which is the effective line. It will be done. Even in the specific mode, the combination of symbols that will result in a 2nd P minor prize is set as a combination of "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol on the active line, but the winning is In the case of a successful stop result, the same type of "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1, similar to the second minor combination described above. Then, if the 2nd P small winning combination is established, it is considered that it is determined that the Bell winning combination has been won.

In other words, in this embodiment, a bent line is easier to recognize by the player than a straight line, and a winning pattern in which the same type of symbols are aligned is easier to be recognized by the player than a winning pattern in which different symbols are combined. By using this, the stopped roll in the specific mode is judged as if it were the stopped roll in the normal game mode, making it possible to reproduce a pseudo game as a more realistic one.

In addition, the bending line L6, which is set as an effective line in the specific mode, and the right-down line L4, which is set as an effective line in the normal game mode, are at a common symbol stop position (left reel The upper row of the middle reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M) are set, and different symbol stopping positions (lower row and middle row of the right reel 32R) are set on the right reel 32R. In this way, only the symbols stopped on the right reel 32R need to be different when associating the winning combinations and winning modes between the specific mode and the normal game mode. Therefore, it becomes possible to associate the winning modes between the specific mode and the normal game mode relatively easily.

Furthermore, the valid lines in the specific mode and the valid lines in the normal game mode are set so that the lines L1 to L6 do not overlap. This is because if you set a configuration in which overlapping active lines are set, if the combination of winning symbols on the overlapping active lines stops, the stopping result will be different between the specific mode and the normal game mode, This is because even though the stop rolls are made common as described above, it is clearly understood that the winning combinations are different hands if a winning result is achieved with a different stop roll.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, a description will be given of the correspondence between symbol combinations that result in winnings in a specific mode and benefits that will be awarded in the event of a winning.

In the specific mode, 1st P small winnings to 32nd P small winnings are set as winnings corresponding to the 1st small winnings to 32nd small winnings in the normal game mode.

In a specific mode, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "second replay symbol" on the right reel 32R When , stops on the bending line L6 which is the active line, the 1st P small winning combination is won. When the 1st P minor role winning is established, one medal is paid out. The 1st P minor role corresponds to the 1st minor role in the normal game mode, and if the combination of symbols that will result in the above-mentioned 1P minor role winning stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode, the 1st P minor role will be downward to the right. On line L4, a "Red Bell" symbol or a "White Bell" symbol stops at the top of the left reel 32L, a "Red Bell" symbol stops at the middle of the middle reel 32M, and a "Red Bell" symbol stops at the bottom of the right reel 32R. ” The pattern stops. That is, the "bell" symbol stops on the downward-sloping line L4.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "BAR" symbol, or "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbol stops on the bending line L6, which is an active line, the 2nd P minor winning prize to the 17th P minor winning prize. When the 2nd P minor prize winning to the 17th P minor prize winning is established, one medal is paid out. The 2nd P minor win to the 17th P minor win correspond to the 2nd minor win to the 17th minor win in the normal game mode, and the above-mentioned 2P minor win to When the combination of symbols that results in a 17P small winning combination stops, a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol stops on the right-down line L4 at the top of the left reel 32L, and a "red bell" symbol stops at the middle of the middle reel 32M. The "Bell" symbol stops, and the "Red Bell" symbol stops at the lower row of the right reel 32R. That is, the "bell" symbol stops on the upper line L1.

Of the 2nd P minor role to the 17th P minor role, the 2nd P minor role, 3rd P minor role, 6th P minor role, and 7th P minor role have the same roll, and the 4th P minor role, 5th P minor role, The 8th P minor role and the 9th P minor role have the same outcome, the 10th P minor role, the 11th P minor role, the 14th P minor role, and the 15th P minor role have the same outcome, and the 12th P minor role and the 13th P minor role have the same outcome. The winning role, the 16th P minor role, and the 17th P minor role have the same outcome. In other words, these hands with the same outcome are the same role in the specific mode. However, in the following explanation, each of the winnings will be explained as different for comparison with the normal game mode.

The 18th P small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower row. When the 18th P minor winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 18th P minor prize corresponds to the 18th minor prize in the normal game mode, and if the combination of symbols that will result in the 18th P minor prize winning stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode, the 18th P minor prize winning symbol will move downward to the right. The combination of symbols for the 18th small winning combination is stopped on line L4.

The "Red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "1st Replay" symbol or "2nd Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. If , stops on the active line, the 19th P small winning combination will be won. When the 19th P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 19th P minor win corresponds to the 19th minor win in the normal game mode, and if the combination of symbols that will result in the 19th P minor win stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode, it will move downward to the right. The combination of symbols for the 19th small winning combination is stopped on line L4.

The 20th small role to 24th small role corresponds to the 20th small role to the 24th small role in the normal game mode, and if the 20th small role to 24th small role win is established, the 1 bet game Then, one medal is paid out. Note that the 20th P minor role, the 21st P minor role, the 22nd P minor role, and the 23rd P minor role are roles with the same outcome, and are treated as the same role. However, for comparison with the normal game mode, each role will be explained as a different role.

The 25th P minor winning prize is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower row, similar to the 18th P minor winning prize. In the case of winning the 18th P minor prize, the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop in the middle row only if the special 1st BB or the special 2nd BB PBB is won twice. If you get (a combination of "Second Replay" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, or "White 7" symbol) the 25th P minor prize, the right reel 32R will be played regardless of whether or not PBB is won. The "Red 7" symbol or the "White 7" symbol may be stopped in the middle row. When the 25th P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 25th P minor prize corresponds to the 25th minor prize in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that results in the above 25P minor prize winning stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode, The combination of symbols for the 25th small winning combination is stopped on line L4.

When the "Watermelon" symbol or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the active line. will be the 26th P small winning prize. When the 26th P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 26th P minor prize corresponds to the 26th minor prize in the normal game mode, and if the combination of symbols that will result in the winning of the 26th P minor prize stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode, The combination of symbols for the 26th small winning combination is stopped on line L4.

The 27th P minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the so-called watermelon tenpai is missed and the winning result is a stop roll, and when the 27th P minor winning winning is established, one medal is paid out in the 1 bet game. The 27th P minor win corresponds to the 27th minor win in the normal game mode, and if the combination of symbols that will result in the 27th P minor win stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode, the 27th P minor win The combination of symbols for the 27th small winning combination is stopped on line L4.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the reel 32R stops on the bending line L6, which is the active line, the 28th P small winning combination is won. The 28th P minor win is a stop roll that misses the so-called double tenpai. When the 28th P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 28th P small win corresponds to the 28th small win in the normal game mode, and if the combination of symbols that will result in the above 28P small win stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode, the 28th P small win will drop downward to the right. The combination of symbols for the 28th small winning combination is stopped on line L4.

If the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line bending line L6, the 29th P small role It will be a prize. When the 29th P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 29th P minor prize corresponds to the 29th minor prize in the normal game mode, and if the combination of symbols that will result in the 29th P minor prize winning stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode, the 29th P minor prize winning symbol will move downward to the right. The combination of symbols for the 29th small winning combination is stopped on line L4.

The "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R have stopped on the bending line L6, which is the active line. In this case, the 30th P small winning prize will be awarded. When the 30th P minor winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 30th small winning combination corresponds to the 30th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and if the combination of symbols that will result in the winning of the 30th small winning combination stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode, the 30th small winning combination will move downward to the right. The combination of symbols for the 30th small winning combination is stopped on line L4.

The “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol or “white 7” symbol on the right reel 32R are valid lines. When it stops on the bending line L6, it becomes the 31st P small prize winning. When the 31st P minor winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 31st P minor prize corresponds to the 31st minor prize in the normal game mode, and if the combination of symbols that will result in the above 31P minor prize winning stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode, the 31st P minor prize winning symbol will move downward to the right. The combination of symbols for the 31st small winning combination is stopped on line L4.

When the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White 7" symbol or "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the active line. In this, he won the 32nd P small role prize. When the 32nd P minor winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 32P small role corresponds to the 32nd small role in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that results in the above 32P small role winning stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode, the 32P small role is downward to the right. The combination of symbols for the 32nd small winning combination is stopped on line L4.

Note that, similarly to the 30th minor win to the 32nd minor prize, the 30th P minor win to the 32nd minor prize are wins that can be won during the bonus.

As already explained, in the normal game mode, the 1st replay prize to the 8th replay prize are the prizes that give you the privilege of replaying, which allows you to play the next game without inserting medals. It is set. On the other hand, as a re-game in the specific mode, a special re-game win is set corresponding to the first re-game win. In the specific mode, as a win corresponding to the 2nd re-game win to the 8th re-game win, the 2nd rep small win is not a re-game, but a small role in which one medal is paid out when the winning is established. Prize winnings - 8th rep small role prizes are set.

That is, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or " When the "2nd Replay" symbol stops on the bending line L6 which is the active line, a special replay game win is achieved. If a special re-game winning is established, it becomes possible to play the next game as a re-game without inserting medals. The special re-game corresponds to the first re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 74(a), the special re-game winning symbol is placed on the bent line L6, which is the valid line in the specific mode. When the combination stops, the combination of symbols for the first re-game winning is stopped on the downward-sloping line L4. In this case, the combination of "replay" symbols stops on the middle line L2.

The “BAR” symbol or “Watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “1st Replay” symbol or “2nd Replay” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “Red Bell” symbol on the right reel 32R are valid lines. If it stops on the bending line L6, it will be a second rep small win. If the second rep small win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The second rep small win corresponds to the second replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. When the symbol combination stops, the second re-game winning symbol combination stops on the downward-sloping line L4. In this case, the combination of "replay" symbols stops on the upward-rightward line L5.

The "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "2nd Replay" symbol stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line, the 3rd replay small winning combination will be won. If the third rep small win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The third rep small win corresponds to the third replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. When the symbol combination stops, the third re-game winning symbol combination stops on the downward-sloping line L4.

The fourth repeat small win corresponds to the fourth replay in the normal game mode. When the 4th rep small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1 bet mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 74(d) to 74(g), when the combination of symbols that results in the fourth rep small prize winning stops on the bending line L6, which is the effective line of the specific mode, the downward-sloping line L4 At , the combination of symbols for the fourth re-game winning is stopped.

The “Red 7” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “Red 7” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “Red 7” symbol or “White 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the active line. or a bend where the "White 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid lines. If it stops on line L6, it will be a 5th rep small prize win. If the fifth rep small win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1 bet game. The 5th rep small win corresponds to the 5th re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIGS. 74(h) and 75(a), the above-described When the combination of symbols that results in the 5th repeat small winning combination stops, the combination of symbols that results in the 5th repeat game win stops on the downward-sloping line L4.

The "1st Replay" symbol or "2nd Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "1st Replay" symbol or the "2nd Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "Youth" symbol. If the symbol or the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bending line L6, which is the active line, the sixth rep small win will be won. If the 6th rep small win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1 bet game. The 6th rep small win corresponds to the 6th replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. When the symbol combination stops, the sixth re-game winning symbol combination stops on the downward-sloping line L4.

When the "1st Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "Youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the active line. In , he won the 7th rep small role prize. If the 7th rep small win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 7th rep small win corresponds to the 7th replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. When the symbol combination stops, the seventh re-game winning symbol combination stops on the downward-sloping line L4.

If the “1st Replay” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “BAR” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “Red Bell” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the active line, 8 rep small role wins. If the 8th rep small win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 8th rep small win corresponds to the 8th replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. When the symbol combination stops, the third re-game winning symbol combination stops on the downward-sloping line L4.

Corresponding to the 1st BB prize, 2nd BB prize, and CB prize in the normal game mode, in the specific mode, the 1st PBB prize (special 1st BB prize), 2nd PBB prize (special 2nd BB prize), and PCB prize (special CB prize) There are prize winners and SB prize winners.

The 1st PBB prize corresponds to the 1st BB prize, and as mentioned above, the "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. , stops on the bending line L6, which is an active line, the first PBB prize is won, the bonus is established, and the gaming state shifts to the special bonus state. In addition, if the "White 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is an active line, or If the "white bell" symbol on reel 32L, the "second replay" symbol on middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the active line, the second PBB A prize is won, the bonus is established, and the gaming state shifts to a special bonus state. The "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the active line. If so, it becomes a PCB win and the bonus is established, and the gaming state shifts to a special CB state. In addition, in this embodiment, it is set not to win the PCB, and the PCB prize is not established.

A special transition outcome is set in the specific mode as a stop outcome corresponding to the transition outcome in the normal game mode. The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red" symbol on the right reel 32R. "Bell" symbol stops on the bending line L6 as an active line, or "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" When the symbol or the "first replay" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, a special transition roll is made. When the special transition outcome stops, as shown in FIGS. 75(e) and 75(f), when the combination of symbols resulting in the special transition outcome stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line of the specific mode. , the combination of symbols with transitional outcomes stops on the downward-sloping line L4.

In addition, in the specific mode, a first repeat minor win and a losing minor win are provided as wins that do not correspond to the wins in the normal game mode.

The “1st Replay” symbol or “2nd Replay” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “Red Bell” symbol or “Watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “Red Bell” symbol on the right reel 32R are active lines. If it stops on a certain bending line L6, it will be the first rep small win. If the first rep small win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. As shown in FIG. 75(g), when the combination of symbols that will result in the first rep small prize winning stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line of the specific mode, basically, the “No. The "1st Replay" symbols or the "2nd Replay" symbols are aligned and stop.

A bending line L6 in which the “first replay” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “first replay” symbol or “second replay” symbol on the right reel 32R are valid lines. If it stops at the top, you will win a small winning combination. If a winning small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in a 1-bet game. As shown in FIG. 75(h), when the combination of symbols that result in the above-mentioned winning small winning combination stops on the bending line L6, which is the valid line of the specific mode, all the symbols are aligned on each of the straight lines L1 to L5. It doesn't stop, and it ends up falling apart.

The lottery table in the specific mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 76. Here, in the specific mode, unlike the normal gaming mode, each RT state is not set as a gaming state, but a normal gaming state and a bonus state (special bonus state) are set. The lottery table in FIG. 76 is a lottery table that is referred to during the normal game state in the specific mode.

Incidentally, even if a game in a specific mode is performed during each RT state in the normal gaming mode, the lottery table for the normal gaming state in the specific mode can be referred to. Further, when a game in the normal game mode is executed during the normal game state in the specific mode, a lottery table for each RT state in the normal game mode can be referred to.

In the lottery table for the specific mode, 0 is set as the point value PV for index values IV = 1 to 49, and the winning flag is not set for index values IV = 1 to 49 (affirmative determination in step S305). do not). Note that the index values IV=1 to 49 are omitted in the figure.

With the index value IV=50, the winning combinations are set as the losing winnings and the first repeating winnings. The index value IV=51 corresponds to the normal replay (IV=1) in the normal game mode, and the special replay is set as the winning combination. Index values IV=52 to 55 correspond to first promotion replays 1 to 4 (IV=2 to 5) in the normal gaming mode, and are referred to as special first promotion replays 1 to 4. In addition to the 1st rep minor win, the 3rd rep minor win, and the 6th rep minor win to the 8th rep minor win, a losing minor win is set as the winning prize. Index values IV=56 to 58 correspond to falling replays 1 to 3 (IV=6 to 8) in the normal game mode, and are referred to as special falling replays 1 to 3. In addition to the first rep small win, the second rep small win, the sixth rep small win to the seventh rep small win, a winning win is set as a winning win. Index values IV=59, 60 correspond to second promotion replays 1, 2 (IV=9, 10) in the normal game mode, and are referred to as special second promotion replays 1, 2. As the winning combination, in addition to the first rep minor prize, the fourth rep minor prize, and the fifth rep minor prize, a losing minor prize is set. Index values IV=61, 62 correspond to BAR replays 1, 2 (IV=11, 12) in the normal gaming mode, and are referred to as special BAR replays 1, 2. As winning combinations, in addition to the first rep minor prize, the third rep minor prize, the sixth rep minor prize to the eighth rep minor prize, a losing minor prize is set. The index values IV=63 to 99 correspond to each small winning combination and bonus (IV=13 to 49) in the normal game mode, and corresponding winning winning combinations are set respectively.

When determining the validity of the combination using the lottery table shown in Figure 76, the probability of winning the special replay (the probability of winning when IV = 51) is approximately 1/7.3, and the probability of winning the special replay is approximately 1/7. The probability of winning (probability of winning when IV = 63) is approximately 1/263, and the probability of winning a special weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 64) is approximately 1/183. be. The probability of winning the special watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 65) is approximately 1/154, and the probability of winning special chance A (probability of winning when IV = 66) is approximately 252 minutes. 1, the probability of winning special chance B (probability of winning when IV=67) is approximately 1/252. The probability of winning the special middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 68) is approximately 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the special no-questions bell (probability of winning when IV = 69) is approximately 65,500. It is 1/1. The probability of winning special order push bell 1, special order push bell 2, special pinch push bell 1, and special pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 70 to 73) is approximately 1/164, respectively. The probability of winning special middle push bell 1, special middle push bell 2, special right push bell 1, and special right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 74 to 77) is approximately 1/16.4. be. The probability of winning special strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 81) is approximately 1/1770, and the probability of winning special strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 82) ) is approximately 1/4680, the probability of winning special weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 83) is approximately 1/3280, and the probability of winning special weak cherry duplication 2 (IV = The probability of winning at 84) is approximately 1/6550. The probability of winning special watermelon stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 85) is approximately 1/3280, and the probability of winning special watermelon stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 86) is approximately 1/3280. It is approximately 1/6550. The probability of winning Special Chance A (1 overlap), Special Chance A (2 overlaps), Special Chance B (1 overlap), and Special Chance B (2 overlaps) (probability of winning when IV = 87 to 90) is approximately 1/3280 each. be. The probability of winning special middle bell duplication 1 and special middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV=91, 92) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning the first PBB and the second PBB alone (probability of winning when IV=93, 94) is about 1/65,500, respectively.

That is, in a specific mode, special replay, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special watermelon, special chance A, B, special middle bell, special no question bell, special order push bell 1, 2, special pinch push bell 1, 2, Special middle push bell 1, 2, special right push bell 1, 2, special strong cherry stack 1, 2, special weak cherry stack 1, 2, special watermelon stack 1, 2, special chance A stack 1, 2, special chance B stack 1, 2, special middle bell duplication 1, 2, the probability of winning the 1st PBB, 2nd PBB is during the normal game state in the normal game mode, normal replay, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, chance B, Middle bell, no question bell, sequential push bell 1, 2, sandwich push bell 1, 2, middle push bell 1, 2, right push bell 1, 2, strong cherry stack 1, 2, weak cherry stack 1, 2, watermelon stack 1 , 2, Chance A overlaps 1 and 2, Chance B overlaps 1 and 2, middle bell overlaps 1 and 2, and the probability of winning the 1st BB and 2nd BB is the same.

Although each of the above special winning combinations has the same probability of winning as each winning combination in the normal game mode, the winning probability may not be completely the same and may be slightly different. In this case, the probabilities may be such that the player cannot recognize that the winning probabilities are different.

In addition, when determining the validity of a combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. 76 in a specific mode, in addition to the above-mentioned combinations, special 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, special fall replays 1 to 3, special 2nd promotion Replays 1 and 2, special BAR replays 1 and 2, and a winning winning combination of 1 card (hereinafter referred to as "special push order replay") are won. Specifically, the probability of winning the special 1st promotion replay 1 to 4 (probability of winning when IV = 52 to 55) is approximately 1 in 8.2, and the probability of winning the special fall replay 1 to 3 is about 1/8.2. The probability of winning (the probability of winning when IV = 56 to 58) is approximately 1 in 8.2, and the probability of winning the special 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 59, 60) The probability of winning the Special BAR Replay 1 and 2 (probability of winning when IV=61, 62) is approximately 1/8.2. The probability of winning a 1-card winning combination (probability of winning when IV=50) is approximately 1/35.

As already explained, in the specific mode, the PCB is not won. Furthermore, in the specific mode, the probability of not winning any combination in the normal gaming state is 0, and any combination will definitely be won.

That is, in the specific mode of the present embodiment, each role in the normal game mode and the corresponding role will be won with the same probability, and the role (special 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, special fall replays 1 to 3, special 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2, special BAR replays 1 and 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "special transition roles") are also normal games in specific modes. Elected in the state.

As mentioned above, the winning combinations of the special transition combinations are all set to include a losing small combination. When a special transition winning combination is won, depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, whether a winning small winning combination is achieved or another winning small winning combination is achieved differs.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established.

As shown in FIG. 77(b), if the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, regardless of the timing of operating the stop switches 42 to 44, the winning of the missing small role and the winning of the first rep minor role are possible. , 3rd rep small winning combination will definitely be achieved, and which small winning combination will be achieved depends on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. As shown in FIG. 77(c), when the special fall replay 1 to 3 is won, regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the winning of the missing small winning, the winning of the 1st rep small winning, and the winning of the 1st rep small One of the 2-rep small winning combinations is always achieved, and which small winning combination is achieved depends on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In addition, if you win the special 2nd promotion replay 1 or 2, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will not be able to win the winning small role, the 4th rep small role, or the 5th rep small role. One of them is sure to be established, and which small winning combination is established depends on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. As shown in FIG. 77(d), when special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, a winning small prize, a winning small prize in the first rep, a winning prize in the first reply Any one of the 6th rep small prize win to the 8th rep minor prize win is always achieved, and which small prize win is achieved depends on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

If you win these special first promotion replays 1 to 4, special fall replays 1 to 3, special second promotion replays 1 and 2, and special BAR replays 1 and 2, operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order from the left. In both cases, the order of operations and the winning mode are related so that a winning small winning combination is achieved. In other words, in the specific mode, even if these special transition winnings are won in the normal gaming state, as long as the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in order from the left, the winnings will not be won. It is set so that a winning combination is established, and even if these special transfer winning combinations are won, unless the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is correct, various small winning combinations will not be achieved. In other words, if these special transfer winning combinations are won and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is correct, it is possible to achieve various repeat small winning combinations.

In addition, the winning winning combination in a specific mode is set to include a losing small winning combination as a winning combination, and depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, whether the winning winning combination is established or the winning winning combination is determined by the winning combination. The difference is whether the reply small role prize is established or not.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(a), if a winning winning is achieved with a winning winning of 1 card, the winning small winning winning and the 1st rip small winning winning are irrespective of the timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. One of the winning combinations will definitely be achieved, and which small winning combination will be achieved depends on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

Even in a win with one winning winning combination, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated from the left, the order of operation and the winning mode are related so that a winning small winning combination is achieved with a winning winning combination. In other words, in the specific mode, if you win a winning one-card winning combination in the normal gaming state, as long as the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in order from the left, the winning small winning combination will be established and the order of operations will match. Unless there is, the 1st rep small winning prize will not be established. In other words, in the case of winning a one-card winning combination, if the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is correct, it is possible to win the first small winning combination.

In addition, the special push order bells in the specific mode (special order push bells 1, 2, special pinch push bells 1, 2, special middle push bells 1, 2, special right push bells 1, 2) are the same as in the normal game mode. The order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated and the winning bells are different, and the corresponding winning may not be achieved depending on the timing of operating the stop switches 42 to 44.

That is, as shown in FIG. 78, for example, if the special middle push bell 1 is won, the 2nd P minor winning prize or the 5th P minor winning prize will be established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first. The stop information is set so that when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the 1st P minor winning prize is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the 2nd P minor winning prize is established. Or, the stop information is set so that the 5th P small role prize is established. If the corresponding winning is not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the special transition number will stop at the bending line L6.

<Game mode switching effect>
The normal gaming mode and the specific mode can be switched by the player by operating the second effect switch 67 when no game is being played (when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped). It has become. In this case, based on the operation of the second performance switch 67, a switching performance between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed.

When switching to a specific mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(a), as an effect when switching to the specific mode, the text "Free mode" indicating the specific mode and the fact that the specific mode is a mode for practice are displayed. For example, a message with a speech bubble is displayed by a girl character saying, "Practice with us!" to help the user understand this. In addition, in the special mode switching performance, a display is displayed instructing that the second performance switch 67 is operated again to return to the normal game mode.

When switching to the normal game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the characters "Normal Mode" indicating the normal game mode are displayed as the effect when switching to the normal game mode, and the second effect switch 67 is operated. A display will be displayed to inform you that a specific mode will be selected.

As described above, the display switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed by the second effect switch 67 connected to the sub-side display control device 81. In this slot machine 10, information is output from the main controller 101 side to the display controller 81 using various commands, etc., but information is not output from the display controller 81 side to the main controller 101. . This is to reduce the amount of information input to the main control device 101, which mainly performs processing related to the player's profits, to make it difficult for players to illegally enjoy profits. Therefore, the main control device 101 side does not specify whether or not the display control device 81 side performs a game mode switching effect. The only thing left to do is to switch. By doing so, it is possible to play different games between the normal game mode and the specific mode without significantly increasing the processing load on the main control device 101 side, which performs judgments (lottery processing) that affect the interests of players. mode is possible.

<Description of processing on the main controller 101 side when betting one coin>
The flow of processing on the main controller 101 side when the number of bets is one will be explained.

In the normal process (FIG. 29), after the start waiting process in step S204 is performed, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets is a specified number. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S205 is the case where it is determined that the number of bets has reached the specified number according to the gaming state, and in this slot machine 10, except when the gaming state is the bonus state, If the number of bets is one or three, it is determined that the specified number has been reached. That is, in step S205, the specific mode of the 1 bet mode is allowed to be executed regardless of whether or not the display control device 81 is performing a switching effect.

In the mode transition notification process of step S206, as shown in FIG. 49, if the number of precursor games is not 0 (step S1101: NO), the main notification process is ended. The counting of the number of portent games will be explained later, but if the number of bets is one, it is not counted. Therefore, the phenomenon in which the number of precursor games in the normal game mode is subtracted while playing in the specific mode is avoided. Furthermore, if the number of portent games is 0 (step S1101: YES), output settings for the challenge mode start command, attack winning notification command, and VB mode winning notification command are performed regardless of the number of bets (step S1105, step S1110). , step S1114). Therefore, if the number of precursor games becomes 0 in the previous game played in the normal game mode, this will be reliably notified at the time of bet, regardless of the number of bets in the next game.For example, in the normal game mode, If the player has won the attack mode or the like, it is possible to recognize this and play the game in the specific mode.

The bet command set in step S207 in the normal process includes information on the number of bets for the game to be started this time. That is, information that the first credit input switch 56 was operated and three bets were placed, information that the second credit input switch 57 was operated and one bet was placed, and information that the third credit input switch 57 was operated and one bet was placed. The information includes information indicating that the switch 58 was operated and two bets were placed. Since this is a one-bet game, the bet command set in step S207 includes information that one bet has been placed.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S208: YES), effective line setting processing is performed in step S209. Since this is a 1-bet game, the bending line L6 is set as a valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as valid lines.

In the lottery process in step S211, as shown in FIG. 30, in step S302, a lottery table for a specific mode (FIG. 76) corresponding to the current bet number is obtained. Then, the processing for determining the validity of steps S303 to S308 is performed based on the lottery table. In other words, the lottery table used differs depending on the number of bets, and the same process is used to determine whether or not the game is successful regardless of the number of bets.

Incidentally, in the lottery table (FIG. 31 etc.) referred to in the normal game mode, 0 is set as the point value PV for all index values IV=50 to 99. Therefore, it is set so that not only the winning combinations of the normal game mode are not won in the specific mode, but also the special winning combinations for the specific mode are not won in the normal gaming mode.

In the lottery result handling process in step S310, when betting one card, specific combinations (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, B, middle bell, strong cherry duplicate 1, 2, weak cherry duplicate 1, 2, watermelon) are selected. Duplication 1, 2, chance A duplication 1, 2, chance B duplication 1, 2, middle bell duplication 1, 2), push order role (first promotion replay 1 to 4, fall replay 1 to 3, second promotion replay 1, 2, BAR replay 1, 2, "push order replay", sequential push bells 1, 2, pinch push bells 1, 2, middle push bells 1, 2, right push bells 1, 2. ”) will not be elected. Therefore, when one bet is made, none of the first specific combination processing, second specific combination processing, third specific combination processing, and push order processing shown in FIG. 45 is performed. Also, in the specialized zone process, in the add-on lottery table in the attack mode add-on lottery process, the number of add-on games is set for a combination that does not win when betting one card. Therefore, even if the specialized zone processing is performed with a single bet, the number of games will not be increased. By the way, the number of consecutive games in the specialized zone is not counted when betting one card, so even if a game is played in a specific mode during the specialized zone, it will not affect the number of consecutive games in the specialized zone. .

In the lottery process (FIG. 30), after the lottery result corresponding process is performed, a process of setting a lottery result command is performed in step S311. Information about the current lottery result is set in the lottery result command, regardless of the number of bets. Therefore, when one bet is made, information on any of the various special combinations won at IV=50 to 99 (FIG. 76) is included in the current lottery result command.

In the normal process (FIG. 29), after the lottery process is executed, the reel control process (step S212) is performed. In the reel control process, regardless of the number of bets, a process for starting rotation (steps S401 to S402) and a process for stopping rotation (steps S403 to S412) are performed, and when all reels have stopped, (step S411) :YES), a payout determination process is performed in step S413. In the payout determination process, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is set to be paid out on the condition that the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag. When betting one medal, one medal payout is set as a benefit (FIGS. 71 to 73) associated with each winning winning combination.

In the winning result handling process, in the game number management process (FIG. 53) of step S1301, if the number of bets is 1 as the specific number in step S1401, each process (steps S1402 to S1427) is not performed. This management process ends. Therefore, when placing a single bet, the number of portent games is subtracted, the number of challenge mode continuations is subtracted, the number of attack mode continuations is subtracted, the number of VB mode continuations is subtracted, and the number of specialized zones is subtracted. do not have. In addition, since the 3rd to 5th re-game winnings and the 7th re-gaming winnings are not established when betting 1 coin, a negative determination is made in each process of step S1302, step S1308, and step S1314, and the process corresponding to the winning result is immediately terminated. .

In the reel control process (FIG. 32), after the winning result corresponding process is performed, a process of setting a winning result command is performed in step S415. Information on the current winning result is set in the winning result command, regardless of the number of bets. Therefore, when betting one coin, 1st P small role to 32nd small role, special re-game, 1st small role to 8th small role, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB, PCB, special transition result, missing small role. Information on the winning result of any of the winning combinations is included in the current winning result command.

In the normal process (FIG. 29), in the medal payout process (step S213), one medal is paid out as each benefit when one bet is made. In the RT state processing (FIG. 35) of step S214, since neither the transfer result nor the second to fifth replay winnings are established when one bet is made, each RT setting flag is not processed. In other words, the RT state does not shift when one bet is made.

In the bonus state processing (FIG. 40) of step S215, the set number of upper limit payouts in the bonus differs depending on the winning bonus. Specifically, the special BB determined in step S612 indicates the first PBB or the second PBB, and these bonuses are bonuses that can only be won when betting one coin. If it is determined in step S612 that the bonus won this time is a special BB, the remaining payout number is set to 24 in step S614. The reason why the upper limit payout numbers are different between the first BB and the second BB and the first PBB and the second PBB will be explained in detail later.

In the bonus state process, in the end determination process (FIG. 54), it is determined in step S1501 whether or not there is a small win regardless of the number of bets, and the process of subtracting the current number of payouts from the remaining number of payouts (step S1502) is performed. . During the bonus state when betting one medal, the 29th P minor win to the 31st P minor win are established, and one medal is paid out for each. In other words, when one bet is made, an increase in medals cannot be expected even in the bonus state, and no decrease in medals occurs. Then, when the remaining number of payouts becomes 0 (step S1504: YES), a bonus end command is set (step S1505). This process is the same as when betting 3 coins.

However, when betting 1 coin, the various mode winning flags and various additional flags are not set when winning the 1st PBB, 2nd PBB, or during the bonus state, so the end determination process ends without setting the precursor command or the additional command. .

Here, regardless of the number of bets, in each state, only one bonus can be won at a single opportunity and carried over, and the settings are set so that if one bonus is won, other bonuses will not be won. has been done. More specifically, regardless of the number of bets, if any BB wins in each state, it is set not to win any other BB. Therefore, when betting 3 coins, in a situation where the 1st BB is won or in a bonus state based on the 1st BB winning, the lottery for the 2nd BB as well as the 1st BB will not be drawn. In the bonus state based on 2BB winnings, the lottery for the 1st BB as well as the 2nd BB is not drawn. In addition, when betting one coin, in a situation where the 1st PBB is won or in a bonus state based on the 1st PBB winning, the lottery for the 2nd PBB as well as the 1st PBB will not be held. In the bonus state based on 2PBB winnings, the lottery for the 1st PBB as well as the 2nd PBB is not drawn.

Furthermore, when betting 3 coins, if you win the 1st BB or 2nd BB, or in a bonus state based on the 1st BB winning or 2nd BB winning, even if you play the game with 1 bet, you will not be able to win the 1st PBB or 2nd PBB. There will be no lottery. On the other hand, when betting 1 coin, if you win the 1st PBB or 2nd PBB, or if you are in a bonus state based on winning the 1st PBB or winning the 2nd PBB, even if you play the game with a bet of 3 coins, you will not win the 1st BB or 2nd BB. No lottery will be held.

Therefore, in this slot machine 10, each BB will not be won twice, and bonus states will not overlap.

As described above, in a game when one bet is made, the main controller 101 basically sends a bet command containing information that a one bet has been made, and information on the lottery result when one bet is made. A lottery result command including information on the winning result when betting one ticket, and a winning result command including information on the winning result when betting one ticket are output to the display control device 81. On the display control device 81 side, based on each of these commands, processing for notification is performed to allow the user to experience a simulated game in the normal game mode.

<Description of processing on the display control device 81 side when betting one coin>
In the specific mode, the display mode in the normal game mode is simulated to be experienced. Specifically, in the specific mode, the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone in the normal game mode are replaced with a pseudo display challenge mode, display attack mode, display VB mode, and display special zone. Experience it as a transformation zone. Each of these display modes is changed based on the lottery result or winning result when betting one coin.

Specifically, the display challenge mode includes special specific combinations (special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special watermelon, special chance A, B, special middle bell, special strong cherry stack 1, 2, special weak cherry stack 1, 2. Special watermelon overlap 1, 2, special chance A overlap 1, 2, special chance B overlap 1, 2, special middle bell overlap 1, 2) Transfer by winning the transfer lottery held based on the winning.

In addition, the display attack mode can also be changed by winning the transition lottery that is performed based on the winning of the special specific combination. However, the display attack mode is shifted when the transition lottery has been won and the third rip small win has been established.

The display VB mode can be shifted to by winning the transition lottery that is held when the special specific combination is won during the display attack mode. However, the display VB mode is shifted to when the shift lottery is won and the fourth and fifth rep small prizes are established.

In addition, the special zone for display shifts when the special BAR replay is won and the 7th rep small win is established during the VB mode for display.

The flow of processing on the display control device 81 side when the number of bets is one is mainly explained below, which enables transition to each of these display modes.

The processing when placing a single bet on the display control device 81 side can be roughly divided into a specific mode bet performance setting process in the bet performance setting process (FIG. 57), and a specific mode performance setting process in the start performance setting process (FIG. 58). There is a start effect setting process and a stop effect setting process for a specific mode in the stop effect setting process (FIG. 60). Each will be explained below.

<Bet performance setting process for specific mode>
First, the specific mode bet performance setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80. As already explained, this effect setting process is a process that is executed when the received bet command is a bet command corresponding to the specific number of coins (1) (step S1801: YES).

The specific mode bet performance setting process can be roughly divided into a specific mode start process (steps S2501 to S2506) and a mode transition notification process (steps S2507 to S2521).

That is, as a process for starting a specific mode, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether a specific mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The specific mode flag is a flag that is set based on the operation of the second effect switch 67, and the CPU 181 specifies the state in which the specific mode flag is set as a specific mode. If not set, it is determined in step S2502 whether a start command has been received. The start command is a lottery result command or the like output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41.

The case where it is determined that the start command has been received in step S2502 means that the bet command determined as the bet command corresponds to a one-coin bet, and the start lever 41 is not switched to the specific mode. This is the case when the start operation is performed. Specifically, for example, the act of winning the 1st BB etc. in the normal game mode and attempting to win the 1st BB with a single bet in the next game or later falls under this category. In this case, other bet effects are set in step S2503, and then the main effect setting process is ended. In step S2503, for example, processing is performed to turn off the built-in lamps of each credit input switch 56 to 58 based on a bet operation.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the start command has not been received, the process advances to step S2504, and it is determined whether or not the second effect switch 67 as a changeover button has been operated. If the second effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2502. When the second performance switch 67 is operated, it is determined in step S2505 whether the bonus state or the bonus carryover state is in progress. In this embodiment, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not possible during these bonus states or bonus carryover states, and if it is determined in step S2505 that these states are in effect, the process proceeds to step S2502. return. In other words, in these states, the operation of the switching button after the bet operation is invalidated. If it is determined in step S2505 that these conditions are not present, a specific mode flag is set in step S2506.

If the specific mode flag is set in step S2501, or after the specific mode flag is set in step S2506, processing for notifying mode transition from step S2507 onwards is performed. The mode transition notification process corresponds to the mode transition notification process (FIG. 49) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, in step S2507, it is determined whether the number of displayed precursor games is 0 or not. The number of displayed precursor games indicates the number of consecutive games in the pseudo precursor mode in the specific mode. Counting of the number of displayed precursor games is performed in a specific mode stop performance setting process to be described later, and the number of displayed precursor games is subtracted by 1 each time one game is played.

If the number of display precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S2508 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag for display is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The challenge mode winning flag for display corresponds to the challenge mode winning flag on the main controller 101 side, and is a flag that is set through a transition lottery that is performed when a special specific role is won in the specific mode start performance setting process. be. If the display challenge mode winning flag is set, the display challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S2509. Then, in step S2510, a challenge mode flag for display is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The challenge mode flag for display corresponds to the challenge mode flag on the main controller 101 side. In step S2511, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that a challenge mode start effect for display is performed.

In this case, the display control device 81 acquires image data for the challenge mode start effect from the normal game effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and image data for identification display from the identification information effect data storage area 182c of the ROM 182. get. Then, image data for identification display is added to the image data for the challenge mode start effect, and then set as image data for the challenge mode start effect for display.

The challenge mode start effect for display is generally the same effect as the challenge mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 93(a). The difference is that in the challenge mode start effect for display, there is a stamp 65a as image data for identification indicating "free" indicating a specific mode in the display image of the auxiliary display section 65, and the stamp 65a is in the challenge mode. It is added so that it exists in front of the image data of the start effect. In other words, the challenge mode start effect for display is the image data for the challenge mode start effect obtained from the normal game effect data storage area 182b, and the image data for identification display obtained from the effect data storage area 182c for identification information. The image data of the stamp 65a is added to the effect.

As described above, the difference between the challenge mode start effect for display and the challenge mode start effect is the presence or absence of the stamp 65a as an identification display. Thereby, when the display challenge mode start effect is displayed, the player can clearly understand that the current game mode is the specific mode. In this case, the challenge mode start effect for display is created using the effect data for the challenge mode start effect. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity compared to a configuration in which performance data for display challenge mode start performance is separately stored.

It should be noted that the creation of effect data when performing other display effects is also the same as described above, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S2512, counting of the number of display challenge mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 10) of the number of consecutive games in the display challenge mode is set in the display challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The challenge mode continuation counter for display corresponds to the challenge mode continuation counter on the main controller 101 side, and the initial value of the number of consecutive games of challenge mode for display is the same value as the initial value of the number of consecutive games of challenge mode. is set.

If it is determined in step S2508 that the display challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S2513 whether the display attack mode winning flag is set. The attack mode winning flag for display corresponds to the attack mode winning flag on the main controller 101 side, and is a flag that is set through a transition lottery that is performed when a special specific combination is won in the specific mode start performance setting process. be. If the display attack mode winning flag is set, the display attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S2514. Then, in step S2515, a display attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The display attack notification flag corresponds to the attack notification flag on the main control device 101 side, and in conjunction with winning the display attack mode transition lottery, it is possible to establish the third rep small prize. This is a flag for Thereafter, in step S2516, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that a display attack mode winning notification effect is performed.

The attack mode winning notification effect for display is generally the same effect as the attack mode winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 92(a). The difference is that in the attack mode winning notification effect for display, a stamp 65a exists in the display image of the auxiliary display section 65, and the stamp 65a is present on the near side with respect to the image data of the attack mode winning notification effect. has been added to.

If it is determined in step S2513 that the display attack mode winning flag is not set, then in step S2517 it is determined whether the display VB mode winning flag is set. The display VB mode winning flag corresponds to the VB mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag that is set through a transition lottery that is performed when a special specific combination is won in the specific mode start performance setting process. be. If the display VB mode winning flag is set, the display VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S2518. Then, in step S2519, a display VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The display VB notification flag corresponds to the VB notification flag on the main control device 101 side, and in conjunction with winning the display VB mode transition lottery, the 4th and 5th rep small prizes are awarded. This is a flag to make it possible. Thereafter, in step S2520, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that a display VB mode winning notification effect is performed.

The VB mode winning notification effect for display is almost the same as the VB mode winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 92(b). The difference is that in the VB mode winning notification performance for display, a stamp 65a exists in the display image of the auxiliary display section 65, and the stamp 65a is located on the near side with respect to the image data of the VB mode winning notification performance. has been added to.

If the display precursor mode is not 0 in step S2507, and if the display VB mode winning flag is not set in step S2517, after executing any of the processes in step S2512, step S2516, and step S2520, In step S2521, other bet effects are set, and then the main effect setting process is ended.

<Start production setting process for specific mode>
Next, the specific mode start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 81. As already explained, this effect setting process is a process that is executed when the received start command is a lottery result command corresponding to the specific number (1) (step S1901: YES).

In step S2601, it is determined whether the specific mode flag is set. If the specific mode flag is not set, the main effect setting process is immediately ended. That is, in a game with one bet that is started without the game mode being switched to the specific mode by operating the second performance switch 67, no start performance is set.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the specific mode flag is set, the process advances to step S2602. The processing after step S2602 is configured as follows. Step S2602: Processing for winning combinations for specific modes, Step S2603: Display mode setting processing for specific modes, Step S2604: Processing for bonus notification for specific modes, Step S2605: Continuous performance setting processing for specific modes, Step S2606: Start of other operations Setting process for time effects. Note that the display mode setting process for a specific mode is a process similar to the display mode setting process (step S1903) in the normal game mode, and the display mode in the current specific mode is specified based on the flags corresponding to various display modes. , controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so that the corresponding effects are performed.

Below, we will explain the winning combination handling process for specific modes, and since the specific mode bonus notification process and specific mode continuous performance setting process are related to continuous effects, etc., we will explain the specific mode stop performance setting process. Each will be explained later.

<Processing for winning combinations for specific modes>
The specific mode winning combination corresponding process corresponds to the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 45) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 82, in step S2701, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a special specific combination based on the received lottery result command. If it is a special specific combination, in step S2702, the display mode in the current specific mode is neither challenge mode for display, attack mode for display, VB mode for display, nor specialization zone for display, and normal for display. Determine whether it is in the mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not a display attack mode winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, a first specific combination processing for specific mode is executed in step S2704.

Further, if it is determined in step S2702 that the display mode is not the normal mode, or if it is determined in step S2703 that the display attack mode winning flag is set, the display mode in the current specific mode is determined in step S2705. Determine whether or not is in display attack mode. If it is the display attack mode, it is determined in step S2706 whether the display VB mode winning flag is set. If the display VB mode winning flag is not set, a second specific combination processing for specific mode is executed in step S2707.

If it is determined in step S2705 that it is not the display attack mode, or if it is determined in step S2706 that the display VB mode winning flag is set, the third specific combination processing for the specific mode is executed in step S2708. Execute.

After executing any one of the processes in step S2702, step S2707, and step S2708, in step S2709, a specific mode specific combination notification process is executed. The specific mode specific win notification process corresponds to the specific win notification process in the normal game mode, and is related to continuous performance, so it will be explained later.

In addition, if it is determined in step S2701 that the special specific winning combination has not been won, then in step S2710, based on the received lottery result command, the current lottery result is changed to a special push order win ("special push order bell"). ”, and “special press order replay”). If it is a special push order combination, a push order processing for a specific mode is executed in step S2711.

If a negative determination is made in step S2710, or after the processing in step S2709 or step S2711 is executed, it is determined in step S2712 whether or not the display specialized zone flag is set. If the display specialized zone flag is set, specific mode specialized zone processing is performed in step S2713. If a negative determination is made in step S2712, or after the process in step S2713 is executed, the real election matching process is ended.

<First specific combination processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the first specific combination process (FIG. 46) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 83, in step S2801, it is determined whether the display challenge mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, a normal table for display attack mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a in step S2802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, a challenge mode table for display attack mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a in step S2803. The normal table and the challenge mode table are the same as the table provided for the normal game mode on the main controller 101 side, and the transition winning rate for strong cherries is replaced by the transition winning rate for special strong cherries. , the transition winning rate of the weak cherry is replaced with the transition winning rate of the special weak cherry, and so on. Each special specific winning combination) is replaced with the specific winning combination. This also applies to tables for other specific modes.

After acquiring the display attack mode transition lottery table in step S2802 or step S2803, the display attack mode lottery process is executed in step S2804. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S2802 or step S2803, thereby performing a lottery for transition to the display attack mode.

In step S2805, based on the processing result in step S2804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for switching to the display attack mode has been won. If the lottery for switching to the display attack mode is won, a process of setting a display attack mode winning flag is performed in step S2806.

In the following step S2807, it is determined whether the bonus has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2807, a lottery process for the number of display precursor games is performed in step S2808. In step S2808, the number of display precursor games of 1 from 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In step S2809, based on the processing result of step S2808, processing is performed to input the number of display precursor games into the display precursor counter in the various counter areas 183b. The display precursor counter is decremented by 1 each time a 1-bet game is played.

In step S2810, a process of setting a display precursor flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2807, or after executing the process in step S2810, this specific combination process ends.

If it is determined in step S2805 that the lottery for transition to display attack mode has not been won, a display challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S2811. In the display challenge mode lottery process, a display challenge mode lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The challenge mode lottery table for display is similar to the challenge mode lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2812, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S2811. If it is determined that the display challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S2813 whether or not the display challenge mode is selected. If it is the normal mode for display, in step S2814, a process of setting a challenge mode winning flag for display in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed.

In the following step S2815, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus has not been won, a lottery process for the number of precursor games to be displayed is executed in step S2816, and in step S2817, the number of precursor games to be displayed is determined. After executing the process of setting the sign counter to the sign counter, and executing the process of setting the display sign flag in step S2818, the first specific combination process ends. The processing from step S2815 to step S2818 corresponds to step S2807 to step S2810.

If it is determined in step S2813 that the display challenge mode has been won again during the display challenge mode, then in steps S2819 to S2823, processing is performed to add on to the continuation game of the display challenge mode. That is, in step S2819, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus has not been won, the process advances to step S2820, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display challenge mode is executed. In the lottery process for the number of add-on games, a table for the display challenge mode add-on game number lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The display challenge mode add-on game number lottery table is similar to the challenge mode add-on game number lottery table on the main controller 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2821, processing for adding the number of games in the display challenge mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S2820 is added to the display challenge mode continuation counter. Then, in step S2822, additional effects for display are set. The additional effect for display is generally the same effect as the additional effect in the normal game mode, and as the display image on the auxiliary display section 65, the stamp 65a is placed on the near side with respect to the display image in the additional effect in the normal game mode. Added to exist. Note that in step S2822, only the setting of the additional effect for display is performed, and the execution of the additional effect for display is performed in the stop effect setting process. This also applies to the setting processing of other additional effects.

After executing the process of step S2822, this specific combination process ends. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2819, a challenge mode addition flag for display is set in step S2823, and then this specific combination processing is ended.

<Second specific combination processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the second specific combination process (FIG. 47) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 84, in step S2901, processing is performed to ascertain the rank of the display attack mode. Also in the specific mode, the display attack mode is provided with four ranks of the first display attack mode to the fourth display attack mode, and the probability of transition to the display VB mode is different for each rank. In step S2901, it is determined which of the first to fourth display attack modes the rank of the current display attack mode is.

In step S2902, a display VB mode lottery table corresponding to the display attack mode rank grasped in step S2901 is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. The display VB mode lottery table is similar to the VB mode lottery table on the main controller 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2903, a lottery for transition to the display VB mode is performed using the table acquired in step S2902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b. Then, in step S2904, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S2903 corresponds to the display VB mode winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, a process is performed in which a display VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S2905. Thereafter, in steps S2906 to S2909, similar to steps S2807 to S2810, processing for setting the number of precursor games for display is performed.

If it is determined in step S2904 that the result of the display VB mode lottery process is not a display VB mode win, the process advances to step S2910. In step S2910, display attack mode promotion lottery processing is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table for display is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The promotion lottery table for display is similar to the promotion lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2911, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S2910 is a promotion win. If the promotion has been won, in step S2912, promotion processing is performed in the display attack mode in which the display rank flag is set in correspondence with the rank to which the promotion destination is to be promoted. Thereafter, in step S2913, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so that a display promotion effect is performed. In the promotion performance for display, the stamp 65a is added to the display image in the promotion performance in the normal game mode so that it is present on the near side.

If it is determined in step S2911 that the promotion lottery for display has not been won, or after the process in step S2913 is executed, processes for increasing the number of consecutive games in the attack mode are performed in steps S2914 to S2920.

That is, in step S2914, an additional lottery process for the number of games in the display attack mode is performed. In this additional lottery process, tables for display attack mode additional lottery are acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and counters for lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The display attack mode additional lottery table is similar to the attack mode additional lottery table on the main controller 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

Then, in step S2915, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery. If it is determined that the player has not won the additional lottery, the specific combination processing is immediately terminated.

If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S2916 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus has not been won, the process advances to step S2917, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display attack mode is performed. In this lottery process for the number of add-on games, a table for the display attack mode add-on game number lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The table for drawing the number of attack mode additional games for display is the same as the table for drawing the number of attack mode additional games on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2918, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode for display is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S2917 is added to the display attack mode continuation counter. Then, in step S2919, additional effects for display are set. After executing the process of step S2919, this specific combination process ends. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2916, a display attack mode addition flag is set in step S2920, and then this specific combination processing is ended.

<Third specific combination processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the third specific combination process (FIG. 48) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 85, in step S3001, a lottery process for increasing the number of games in the display attack mode is performed. This process is similar to the process in step S2914.

In step S3002, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S3001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S3003 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus has not been won, the process advances to step S3004, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display attack mode is performed. Then, in step S3005, the number of games in the attack mode for display is added, and in step S3006, the additional effect for display is set, and then this specific combination processing is ended. The processing from step S3003 to step S3006 is similar to the processing from step S2916 to step S2919.

If a negative determination is made in step S3002, this specific combination processing is ended as is. Further, if it is determined in step S3003 that the bonus has been won, a display attack mode addition flag is set in step S3007, and then this specific combination processing is ended.

<Press order processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the push order process (FIG. 51) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 86, in step S3101, it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 based on the received lottery result command. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3101 is the case where any one of the first rep minor win, the third rep minor win, and the missing minor win wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S3102, and it is determined whether the display attack notification flag is set.

If the display attack notification flag is set, in step S3103, it is determined whether the display attack mode flag is set, that is, display attack mode, display VB mode, display additional specialization zone. It is determined whether either of the following is true. If the display attack mode flag is set, in step S3104, a process for notifying the pressing order of the third rep minor combination is executed. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the operation sequence corresponding to the winning of the third rep minor role among the first rep minor win, the third rep minor win, and the missing minor win is performed. (Figure 77(b)). Also in the operation order notification performance, the stamp 65a is added to the display image of the operation order notification performance in the normal game mode so that it is present on the near side.

If it is determined in step S3103 that the display attack mode is in effect, the process advances to step S3105, and the game is selected from among the first rep minor win, the third rep minor win, and the missing minor win, which corresponds to the winning of the first rep minor win. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the operation order notification effect is performed (FIG. 77(b)). Thereafter, the main push sequential winning combination process ends.

If the display attack notification flag is not set in step S3102, the main push order process is ended without notification of the operation order. In this case, for example, when a stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a winning small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3101 that it is not the special first promotion replay 1 to 4, it is determined in step S3104 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the special fall replays 1 to 3. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3103 is a case where any one of the first rep small win, the second rep small win, and the missing small win wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S3105, it is determined whether the display attack notification flag is set. If the display attack notification flag is set, in step S3106, a process for notification of the pressing order of the first rep minor combination is executed. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the notification performance of the operation order corresponding to the first rep minor win among the first rep minor win, the second rep minor win, and the missing minor win is performed. (Figure 77(b)). After that, the main push sequential winning combination process ends.

If the display attack notification flag is not set in step S3105, the main push order process is ended without notification of the operation order. In this case, for example, when a stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, any one of the first rep minor win, the second rep minor win, and the missing minor win is established.

If it is determined in step S3104 that it is not the special fall replay 1 to 3, it is determined in step S3107 whether the current lottery result is one of the special second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3107 is a case where any one of the first rep minor win, the fourth rep minor win, the fifth rep minor win, and the missing minor win wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S3108, it is determined whether the display attack notification flag is set. If the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3109 whether the display VB notification flag is set.

When the display VB notification flag is set, in step S3110, a process for notifying the press order of the 4th rep minor win or the 5th rep minor win is executed. Specifically, among the 1st rep minor role, the 4th rep minor role, the 5th rep minor role, and the missing minor role, the notification performance of the operation order corresponding to the winning of the 4th rep minor role or the 5th rep minor role is The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the display is performed (FIG. 77(c)). After that, the main push sequential winning combination process ends.

A negative determination in step S3109 means that the display attack mode is selected and the display VB mode is not selected. In this case, in step S3106, the process for notifying the push order of the first rep small win is executed, and then the main push order process is ended. Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step S3108, the main push order processing is directly ended without notifying the operation order. In this case, for example, when a stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a winning small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3107 that it is not the special second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S3111 whether the current lottery result is either the special BAR replay 1 or 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3111 means that depending on the operation order of the current game, any one of the first rep small win, the sixth to eighth rep small win, and the missing small win will win. In this case, in step S3112, it is determined whether the display attack notification flag is set. If the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3113 whether the display VB notification flag is set. If the display attack notification flag is set and the display VB notification flag is set, in step S3114, the processing for press order notification of the 6th rep small win to the 8th rep small win is performed. Execute. Specifically, the operation order corresponding to the winning of the 6th rep minor win to the 8th rep minor win of the 1st rep minor win, the 6th to 8th rep minor win, and the missing minor win is announced (FIG. 77 (d)). After that, the main push sequential winning combination process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S3113, a process for notifying the push order of the first rep small win is executed in step S3106, and then the main push order process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3113, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. In this case, for example, when a stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a winning small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3113 that it is not the special BAR replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S3115 whether or not the current lottery result is a special push order bell win. If the special push order bell is won, it is determined in step S3116 whether or not a display attack mode flag is set. If the display attack mode flag is set and the current state is any of the display attack mode, display VB mode, and display additional specialization zone, the 1st P small prize winning is performed in step S3117. Processing for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order is executed (FIG. 78). After that, the main push sequential winning combination process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S3116, the main press order process is ended without performing the press order notification process.

If it is determined in step S3115 that the special push order bell has not been won, it is determined in step S3118 whether or not the current lottery result is a winning one-card combination. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3118 is the case where the first rep small win or the missing small win wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S3119, it is determined whether the display attack mode flag is set. When the display attack mode flag is set, in step S3120, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first rep small winning combination is executed (FIG. 78). After that, the main push sequential winning combination process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S3119, the main press order process is ended without performing the press order notification process. In this case, for example, when a stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a winning small winning combination is established.

<Processing for specialized zones for specific modes>
This process corresponds to the specialized zone process (FIG. 55) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 87, the result of the current lottery process is grasped in step S3201. In the subsequent step S3202, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display attack mode is performed. In the following step S3203, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode for display is performed. Then, in step S3204, additional effects for display are set, and then the process for the special zone for the specific mode ends. The processing from step S3202 to step S3204 is similar to the processing from step S2917 to step S2919. However, the number of games to be selected is greater in the number of additional games lottery process in step S3202 than in the number of additional games lottery process in step S2917.

<Specific mode stop effect setting process>
Next, the specific mode stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88. As already explained, this effect setting process is a process that is executed when the received command at the time of stop is a winning result command corresponding to the specific number (1) (step S2101: YES).

The stop performance setting process for a specific mode includes a game number management process for a specific mode in step S3301, a winning result corresponding process for a specific mode in step S3302, and a bonus end process for a specific mode in step S3303. Each will be explained below.

<Game number management processing for specific modes>
This process corresponds to the game number management process (FIG. 53) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 89, in step S3401, it is determined whether the player has won a bonus or is in a bonus state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, in step S3402, the display challenge mode flag, display attack mode flag, display VB mode flag, display specialized zone flag, etc. are cleared, and then the number of games management process is performed. end.

If a negative determination is made in step S3401, it is determined in step S3403 whether the number of precursor games for display is 0 or not. If it is not 0, in step S3404, the number of precursor games for display is subtracted by 1. If the number of display precursor games is 0 in step S3403 (not in display precursor mode), or after executing the process in step S3404, the number of consecutive games in each mode is determined in steps S3405 to S3427. Performs count processing.

That is, in step S3405, it is determined whether the mode is the display challenge mode. If it is the display challenge mode, the process advances to step S3406, and a process of decrementing the display challenge mode continuation counter by 1 is performed. Then, in step S3407, it is determined whether the display challenge mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, this management process is immediately ended. If it is 0, the display challenge mode flag is cleared in step S3408, and the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to perform a display challenge mode end effect in step S3409.

The challenge mode end effect for display is generally the same effect as the challenge mode end effect, as shown in FIG. 93(b). In the challenge mode end effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the challenge mode end effect on the auxiliary display section 65 so that it is present on the near side.

If it is determined in step S3405 that the mode is not the challenge mode for display, it is determined in step S3410 whether the mode is the attack mode for display. If it is the display attack mode, the process advances to step S3411, and a process of subtracting 1 from the display attack mode continuation counter is performed. Then, in step S3412, it is determined whether the display attack mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, this management process is immediately ended. If it is 0, the display attack mode flag is cleared in step S3413, and the display attack notification flag is cleared in step S3414. Thereafter, in step S3415, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to perform an attack mode end effect.

The attack mode end effect for display is generally the same effect as the attack mode end effect, as shown in FIG. 94(b). In the attack mode end effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the attack mode end effect on the auxiliary display section 65 so as to be present on the near side. Note that the display of the number of games and the number of acquired coins during the display attack mode will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S3410 that the mode is not the display attack mode, the process advances to step S3416, and it is determined whether the mode is the display VB mode. If it is the VB mode for display, it is determined in step S3417 whether or not it is an additional specialized zone for display. If it is not the display specialization zone, a process of subtracting 1 from the display VB mode continuation counter is performed in step S3418. Then, in step S3419, it is determined whether the display VB mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, this management process is immediately ended. If it is 0, the display VB mode flag is cleared in step S3420, and the display VB notification flag is cleared in step S3421. Thereafter, in step S3422, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to perform the effect of ending the display VB mode.

The VB mode end effect for display is generally the same effect as the VB mode end effect, as shown in FIG. 95(b). In the VB mode end effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the VB mode end effect on the auxiliary display section 65 so that it is present on the near side. Note that the display of the number of games and the number of acquired coins in the display VB mode will be explained later.

If it is determined in step S3417 that the zone is an additional specialization zone for display, the process advances to step S3423, and a process of subtracting one from the specialization display zone continuation counter is performed. Then, in step S3424, it is determined whether the display specialized zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, the specialized zone flag is cleared in step S3425, and the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to perform a specialized zone end effect for display in step S3426. The specialized zone end effect for display is generally the same effect as the specialized zone end effect, and like other display effects, the stamp 65a is placed on the near side of the image data of the specialized zone end effect. It has been added to exist.

If a negative determination is made in step S3407, step S3412, step S3419, step S3416, or step S3424, or after executing the processing in step S3409, step S3415, step S3422, or step S3426, the process advances to step S3427. In step S3427, additional notification processing is executed. In this process, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to execute the set additional display effects (step S2822, step S2919, step S3006, etc.). The additional effects for display are as described above. After executing the process in step S3427, this management process ends.

<Processing for winning results for specific modes>
This process corresponds to the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 52) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 90, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the current stop result is that the third rep small win has been established. If the third rep small winning combination is established, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. If the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3503 whether the display attack mode flag is set. If the display attack mode flag is set, the display attack mode is already in effect, and this corresponding processing is then terminated. On the other hand, if the display attack mode flag is not set, the display attack mode flag is set in step S3504. In the following step S3505, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to perform a display attack mode start effect.

The attack mode start effect for display is generally the same effect as the attack mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 94(a). In the attack mode start effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the attack mode start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 so as to be present on the near side.

Thereafter, in step S3506, counting of the number of display attack mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of consecutive games in the display attack mode is set in the display attack mode continuation counter. The attack mode continuation counter for display corresponds to the attack mode continuation counter on the main controller 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games of attack mode for display is the same value as the initial value of the number of continuous games of attack mode. is set. After performing the process in step S3506, this corresponding process ends.

If it is determined in step S3501 that the third rep small winning combination has not been established, the process advances to step S3507. In step S3507, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth rep small winning combinations have been established as the current stop result. If the fourth and fifth rep small winning combinations are established, it is determined in step S3508 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set. If the display VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3509 whether the display VB mode flag is set. If the display VB mode flag is set, it is already the display VB mode, and the present corresponding processing is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the display VB mode flag is not set, processing for setting the display VB mode flag is performed in step S3510. Thereafter, in step S3511, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to perform a display VB mode start effect.

The VB mode start effect for display is generally the same effect as the VB mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 95(a). In the VB mode start effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the VB mode start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 so as to be present on the near side.

Thereafter, in step S3512, counting of the number of display VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 60) of the number of consecutive games in the display VB mode is set in the display VB mode continuation counter. The display VB mode continuation counter corresponds to the VB mode continuation counter on the main controller 101 side, and the initial value of the number of consecutive games in the display VB mode is the same as the initial value of the number of consecutive games in the VB mode. is set. After performing the process of step S3512, this corresponding process ends.

If it is determined in step S3507 that the 4th and 5th rep minor winning combinations have not been established, it is determined in step S3513 whether or not the 7th repping minor winning combination has been established as a result of this stop. do. If the seventh rep small winning combination is established, it is determined in step S3514 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set. If the display VB notification flag is set, processing for setting the display specialized zone flag is performed in step S3515. Thereafter, in step S3516, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to perform a special display zone start effect.

The specialized zone start effect for display is, as shown in FIG. 96, almost the same effect as the specialized zone start effect. In the specialized zone start effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the specialized zone start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 so that it is present on the near side. The auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the following operations.

Thereafter, in step S3517, counting of the number of continuous display specialized zones is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 5) of the number of consecutive games of the specialized zone is set in the display specialized zone continuation counter. The specialized zone continuation counter for display corresponds to the specialized zone continuation counter on the main controller 101 side, and the initial value of the number of consecutive games of the specialized zone for display is the initial value of the number of consecutive games of the specialized zone. The same value is set. After executing the process in step S3517, this corresponding process ends. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S3513 or step S3514, the present corresponding processing is directly ended.

<Specific mode bonus termination process>
This process corresponds to the end determination process (FIG. 54) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 91, in step S3601, it is determined whether a bonus end command has been received. The bonus end command is a command set in step S1505 in the end determination process on the main controller 101 side. If the bonus end command has not been received, the main end processing is ended as is.

If the bonus end command has been received, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the display attack mode winning flag is set. If the display attack mode winning flag is set, a lottery process is performed to determine the number of display precursor games in step S3603, the number of display precursor games is set in step S3604, and the number of display precursor games is set in step S3605. Set the precursor flag. The processing in steps S3603 to S3605 is similar to the processing in steps S2808 to S2810. After executing the process in step S3605, the main end process ends.

If the display attack mode winning flag is not set in step S3602, it is determined in step S3606 whether the display challenge mode winning flag is set. If the display challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the display precursor mode in steps S3603 to S3605 is performed, and then the main termination process is ended. If the display challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S3606, it is determined in step S3607 whether the display VB mode winning flag is set. If the display VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the display precursor mode in steps S3603 to S3605 is performed, and then the main end process is ended.

If the display VB mode winning flag is not set in step S3607, the process advances to step S3608. In step S3608, it is determined whether the display attack mode addition flag is set. If the display attack mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display attack mode is performed in step S3609, an additional game number lottery process in the display attack mode is performed in step S3610, and a process for adding the number of games in the display attack mode is performed in step S3611. Set up additional effects for display. The processing in steps S3609 to S3611 is similar to the processing in steps S2917 to S2919. However, the additional display effect set in step S3611 is executed at the timing. After executing the process of step S3611, this end process is ended.

If the display attack mode addition flag is not set in step S3608, it is determined in step S3612 whether or not the display challenge mode addition flag is set. If the display challenge mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display challenge mode is performed in step S3613, an additional game number lottery process in the display challenge mode is performed in step S3614, and a process for adding the number of games in the display challenge mode is performed in step S3615. Set up additional effects for display. The processing in steps S3613 to S3615 is similar to the processing in steps S2820 to S2822. However, the additional display effect set in step S3615 is executed at the timing. If a negative determination is made in step S3612, or after executing the process in step S3615, this end process ends.

<Game flow of each game mode>
As described above, in this embodiment, the normal game mode carried out in the 3-bet mode or the 2-bet mode can be simulated in the 1-bet mode. Therefore, the flow and differences of each game mode will be explained with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. 97 and 98 show the flow of the game in the normal game mode, and FIGS. 99 and 100 show the flow of the game in the specific mode.

In the normal gaming mode, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, the display mode is basically the normal mode. In this situation, at the timing of ta1, if a specific winning combination is won (winner), a lottery is held to change the display mode to challenge mode or attack mode. For example, if you win the lottery to enter the attack mode, the auxiliary display section 65 or the like performs an attack mode winning notification effect at timing ta2 after passing through the portent mode. After the attack mode winning notification effect is performed, the press order notification will be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 etc., and if the press order combination is won, the press order notification for transitioning the game state will be executed. It will be done.

If you win the first promotion replay 1 to 4 at the timing of ta3, the press order notification will be executed as described above, so the press order notification will be carried out so that the 3rd replay prize will be achieved. . As a result, the third re-game winning is established, and the attack mode start effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the like.

By the way, the state after the attack mode winning notification performance is performed until the attack mode start performance is performed is a state in which the attack mode is being prepared, the push order is announced, and the game state is This is the case in the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.61 each time one game is played. On the other hand, when the second re-game winning is achieved and the state is shifted from the attack mode preparation state to the attack mode, the push order combination is notified and the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game, and it will be possible to obtain more medals than in the preparation state. Therefore, after the attack mode winning notification performance is performed, it is advantageous for the player to shift to the attack mode sooner. On the other hand, if you really want to win the first promotion replays 1 to 4, there is a possibility that your medals will gradually decrease even though the transition to attack mode has been confirmed. Therefore, after the attack mode winning announcement is made (more specifically, after the attack mode has been won), the configuration is such that the number of consecutive games of attack mode can be increased due to winning a specific combination. . Therefore, even if the transition to attack mode is slow, it is possible to enjoy the game to the fullest during that time.

When the attack mode is started at timing ta3, the gaming state becomes the second RT state, and the probability of winning in the push order replay is higher than that in the first RT state or the normal gaming state. For example, if you win the fall replays 1 to 3 at the timing of ta4, during the attack mode, the press order notification that the first replay win is established is performed. Therefore, during the attack mode, the occurrence of an event in which the RT state falls due to the second re-game winning is avoided. Further, even if the push order bell is won during the attack mode, push order notification that the bell has been won is performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the transition number stops and the RT state falls due to missing the push order bell.

If a specific winning combination is won at the timing of ta5 during the attack mode, a lottery for changing the display mode to the VB mode and an additional lottery for the number of consecutive games in the attack mode are performed. For example, if you win the lottery for switching to the VB mode, the auxiliary display section 65 or the like performs a VB mode winning notification effect after passing through the portent mode at timing ta6. After the VB mode winning notification effect is performed, the press order notification for VB mode will be executed on the auxiliary display section 65 etc., and if you win the second promotion replay 1 and 2, the 4th, Notification of the pressing order that can make the fifth re-game winning is performed.

If you win the second promotion replay 1 or 2 at the timing of ta7, the press order notification will be executed as described above, so the press order notification will be executed so that the 4th and 5th replay winnings will be realized. will be held. For example, when the fourth re-game winning is established, a VB mode start effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like.

By the way, the state after the VB mode winning notification performance is performed until the VB mode start performance is performed is a state in which the VB mode is being prepared, the pressing order is announced, and the game state is This is the case in the second RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Moreover, in the games after the VB mode winning notification effect is performed until the VB mode start effect is performed, the subtraction of the number of consecutive games in the attack mode is stopped. Therefore, for example, even though the press order notification that allows the fourth and fifth replay winnings to be established is being made, if the first replay winning is established without following the press order notification, By preventing the VB mode from starting, there is a possibility that games can be played without reducing the number of consecutive games in the attack mode. Therefore, for example, after the VB mode winning notification effect is performed and until the VB mode start effect is performed, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated without following the press order notification, a predetermined penalty is imposed. You can also use it as The predetermined penalty may include subtracting the number of consecutive games in attack mode, demoting the rank of attack mode, or terminating attack mode. Further, as a configuration in which the VB mode is performed in the second RT state, a configuration may be adopted in which no transition of the gaming state occurs between the attack mode and the VB mode. In this case, it becomes possible to start the VB mode without going through the fourth and fifth re-game winnings, and it is possible to eliminate the difference between the game in which the VB mode winning notification effect is executed and the game in which the VB mode start effect is executed.

During the VB mode, the player is in the third RT state, so there is a possibility of winning BAR Replays 1 and 2. If you win BAR Replay 1 and 2, and if you win the BAR matching lottery, it will be possible to establish the 7th replay prize (middle bar matching), and the 7th replay prize will give you a special prize. transition to the transformation zone. The specialized zone continues until the number of continuous games in the specialized zone reaches 0, and when it reaches 0, the game returns to the VB mode.

At timing ta8, when the number of consecutive games in the VB mode becomes 0, the auxiliary display section 65 or the like performs a VB mode ending effect. When the VB mode ends, the display mode shifts to attack mode. Although the RT state is still in the 3rd RT state, if you win BAR Replay 1 and 2, the 6th to 8th replay winnings are not announced in the press order, so the 3rd replay winnings are established. A possibility arises. When the third re-game winning is established at the timing of ta9, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state.

At timing ta10, when the number of consecutive games in the attack mode becomes 0, an attack mode ending effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. When the attack mode ends, the display mode shifts from the attack mode to the normal mode. Although the RT state is still in the 2nd RT state, if you win Fall Replay 1 to 3 and the 2nd replay prize is established, or if you win the push order bell and the bell is missed. (When the transition number stops), the gaming state shifts to the first RT state.

On the other hand, in the specific mode, the gaming state does not change. Below, for example, a case will be described in which the specific mode is executed in a situation where the gaming state is the normal gaming state in the normal gaming mode.

If the special specific combination is won (wins) at the timing of tb1 which is the normal mode for display, a lottery to shift to the challenge mode for display or the attack mode for display is performed. In this case, since the stopping roll of the special specific winning combination is the same as the stopping rolling of the specific winning combination, the player can move to challenge mode or attack mode when winning a specific winning combination in normal game mode. A lottery can be experienced in a simulated manner in a specific mode.

For example, if the special specific combination won at the timing tb1 wins the lottery for transition to the display attack mode, the game transitions to the display precursor mode. When the attack mode confirmation notification effect for display is performed at the timing tb2, press order notification is executed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the like.

If you win the special 1st promotion replay 1 to 4 at the timing of tb3, the press order notification will be executed as described above, so the 3rd rep small win can be achieved. Advance notification will be made. As a result, the third rep small win is won, the display attack mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65, etc., and the display attack mode is started.

In this case, the stop roll of the 3rd rep small prize winning, which is the trigger for starting the display attack mode, is the same as the stop roll of the 3rd replay winning, which is the trigger for starting the attack mode in the normal game mode. ing. Therefore, the player can simulate that the attack mode is started by winning the third re-game prize by winning the third repeat small winning combination. Moreover, the content displayed by the auxiliary display section 65 in the attack mode start effect and the attack mode start effect for display are visually almost the same. Therefore, by performing the start effect, it is possible to experience in a pseudo manner that the attack mode is started.

On the other hand, there is a difference between the attack mode start effect and the attack mode start effect for display in the presence or absence of the stamp 65a. Therefore, for example, the manager of a game hall can easily check which game mode the game is being played in, and also, for example, when trying to capture such a simulated experience in a photo, etc. , the stamp 65a will inevitably appear in the photo, which may lead to a desire for an actual normal game mode experience rather than a simulated experience. The effect of displaying the stamp 65a is the same for other display effects.

Incidentally, the state after the display attack mode winning notification performance is performed until the display attack mode start performance is performed is a state in which the display attack mode is being prepared, and a special push order is announced. However, if you win Special Fall Replays 1 to 3, Special 2nd Promotion Replays 1 and 2, or Special BAR Replays 1 and 2, the order of press will not be announced on the condition that you are not in display attack mode. A small winning role may occur. That is, press order notification is performed when the special first promotion replay 1 to 4 is won and when the special press order bell is won. On the other hand, when the display attack mode is started at the timing of tb3, for example, if you win the special fall re-games 1 to 3 at the timing of tb4, you can press the button to make the first rep small prize win. Even if special second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won by sequential notification, push order notification is carried out which allows the winning of the first rep small winning combination to be established. Not only that, when the display attack mode is started, the push order notification is performed that allows the first repeat small winning combination to be established even when a one-card winning combination is won. Therefore, when the third rep small win is established and the display attack mode is started, it becomes possible to experience in a pseudo manner that the winning probability of the replay is improved.

At the timing of tb5, if the special specific winning combination is won (winner), a lottery for transition to the display VB mode and an additional lottery for the number of consecutive games of the display attack mode are performed. For example, if you win the lottery for switching to the display VB mode, after passing through the omen mode, at timing tb6, the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. After the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed, the press order notification for the display VB mode will be executed by the auxiliary display section 65 etc., and if you win the special 2nd promotion replay 1 or 2, In this case, notification of the pressing order that can make the fourth and fifth rep small winning combinations possible will be performed.

If the special second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won at the timing of tb7, press order notification is performed so that the special fourth and fifth rep minor prizes are realized. For example, when the fourth rep small win is established, the auxiliary display section 65 or the like performs a VB mode start effect for display.

In this case, the stop rolls of the 4th and 5th repeat minor winnings, which are the trigger for starting the display VB mode, are the stop rolls of the 4th and 5th repeat winnings, which are the trigger to start the VB mode in the normal game mode. The result is the same. Therefore, the player can experience in a simulated manner that the VB mode is started by winning the fourth and fifth repeat game prizes by winning the fourth and fifth repeat small winning combinations. Furthermore, the contents displayed by the auxiliary display section 65 in the VB mode start effect and the VB mode start effect for display are visually almost the same. Therefore, by performing the start effect, it is possible to experience in a pseudo manner that the VB mode is started.

In the display VB mode, if you win special BAR replays 1 and 2, and if you win the BAR matching lottery, it is possible to establish the 7th rep small prize (middle BAR matching). , and will move to the special zone for display by winning the 7th rep small role. The specialized display zone continues until the number of consecutive games in the specialized display zone reaches 0, and when it reaches 0, the display returns to the VB mode.

At timing tb8, when the number of consecutive games in the display VB mode becomes 0, the auxiliary display section 65 or the like performs a display VB mode end effect. When the display VB mode ends, the display shifts to the display attack mode. However, in conjunction with the transition of the RT state in the normal game mode, when special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, a push order report is performed that makes it possible to establish the third rep small winning combination. When the third rep small winning combination is established at the timing of tb9, the gaming state pseudo-transitions to the second RT state (it does not actually transition).

At timing tb10, when the number of consecutive games in the display attack mode becomes 0, the auxiliary display section 65 or the like performs a display attack mode end effect. When the display attack mode ends, the display attack mode shifts to the display normal mode. In this embodiment, by shifting from the display attack mode to the display normal mode, the display attack mode flag and the display attack notification flag are cleared, and press order notification is no longer performed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of pseudo RT state transition, the RT state transitions to the first RT state at the timing tb10.

In addition, in accordance with the fall of the RT state in the normal game mode, this configuration is applied until the second rep small prize is established or the special transition roll stops after the end of the display attack mode (for example, in tb11). (up to the timing) may be configured such that push order notification is performed when special push order combinations other than special fall replays 1 to 3 or special push order bell are won. In this way, it becomes possible for the user to experience that the state in which the replay probability is improved continues until the RT state falls.

As mentioned above, in a pseudo game in a specific mode that is played as a 1 bet game, there is no RT state etc., and there is a normal gaming state until winning the 1st PBB or 2nd PBB, and a 1st PBB or 2nd PBB. A bonus status based on 2PBB winnings is set. In both the normal game state and the bonus state, one medal is paid out in each game with a one-bet bet, and the number of medals does not increase or decrease. By doing so, the player can experience the gameplay in the normal game mode in the specific mode without worrying about the increase or decrease of medals.

In this case, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to insert medals (the game can be executed by inserting 0 medals), but by inserting the minimum number of 1 medal, it is possible to It is possible to play the following games. In other words, the specific mode can be executed at least by receiving medals lent at the game hall, and the act of simply playing the specific mode for free is discouraged. In addition, in a game hall where medals are lent out in units of a predetermined number (for example, 50), the player can experience a pseudo game with the minimum number of medals, and then use the remaining medals to play a game in the actual normal game mode. It can be used as a motivation to

In addition, as a mode in which medals do not increase or decrease, it is configured such that instead of realizing all the winnings as replayable winnings, it is possible to win winning winnings in which one payout is made, such as various special winnings (special watermelon winning). As long as it does not cause an increase or decrease in medals, all the lottery results may be used as replay combinations, and it is thought that this will improve the operability of the specific mode since the bet operation can be omitted. However, if all the lottery results are used as replay combinations, one coin will be automatically inserted at the end of each game in a specific mode, and settings for replay will be made, and the specific mode will end. This can be difficult. In this case, for example, even if settings for replaying have been made, the settings may be canceled, or the power may be turned off and on to set the gaming mode again. There is a need. On that point, as mentioned above, since the configuration is such that it is possible to win a winning combination in which a single payout is made, it is possible to switch from the specific mode to the normal gaming mode (the number of bets can be reset) in games other than replay winning combinations. , it becomes possible to add novel gaming features such as a specific mode to a single gaming machine without adding a new configuration.

The payout rate (ball payout rate) of medals per game is different between the normal game mode and the specific mode. Therefore, in order to make the simulated experience of the normal game mode more realistic in a specific mode, it is necessary to make the numbers, effects, winning probabilities of each role, etc. common to both game modes. Therefore, it is necessary to be able to specify in which game mode the game is being played. Therefore, by adding a stamp 65a as an identification display to each display image on the auxiliary display section 65 in the specific mode, it becomes possible to easily identify that the game mode being executed is the specific mode.

In addition, by displaying the display image of the auxiliary display section 65 to identify that the specific mode is in progress, for example, when taking a commemorative photo of the display of the number of acquisitions displayed in the attack mode end effect, it is possible to use a pseudo It becomes possible to easily determine after the fact whether the number of wins is from the game that was experienced as a game or the number of wins from the actual normal game mode.

In particular, since such identification display was performed on the auxiliary display section 65 instead of on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotated based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the winning combination is drawn. The game itself of the slot machine 10, in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and whether or not a winning combination is won is determined in a specific mode. The identification display does not get in the way of the experience, making it possible to make the simulated experience of the normal game mode more realistic. That is, for example, if the identification display is seen when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the user will be reminded that the mode is a pseudo mode, and there is a possibility that the so-called pressing of the buttons will be neglected. Therefore, as mentioned above, when operating the stop switches 42 to 44, the identification display is displayed in a place that is difficult to see, so that even though it is a simulated experience, you can play the game with the same attentiveness as in the normal game mode. This makes it possible to improve the simulated gameplay.

<About continuous production>
A continuous performance is a performance that starts when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode reaches a predetermined number in the normal game mode, and ends when the number of precursor games reaches 0, and spans a predetermined number of games. It is. In the specific mode in this embodiment, it is also possible to experience continuous effects during the normal game mode. For example, if you win the lottery to enter the display attack mode during the normal display mode, you will be notified that you have won the display attack mode after passing through the display precursor mode as described above. Then, the continuous performance is started when the number of display precursor games in the display precursor mode reaches a predetermined number, and ends when the number of display precursor games becomes zero.

Hereinafter, a process for executing continuous effects in a specific mode will be explained. The processing for executing the continuous performance includes a specific mode bonus notification process, a specific mode specific combination notification process, and a specific mode continuous performance setting process.

<Specific mode bonus notification process>
This process corresponds to the bonus notification process (FIG. 61) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 101, in step S3701, it is determined whether the game to be started is a special bonus (first PBB, second PBB) winning game based on the lottery result command received this time. If it is a special bonus winning game, in step S3702, a notification game lottery process for notifying bonus winning in the specific mode is executed. In this notification game lottery process, a shorter number of games is more likely to be selected than in the notification game lottery process in the normal game mode. Specifically, one notification game is determined from 0 games (to be notified in the current game) to 4 games.

In the subsequent step S3703, a process is performed to set the number of consecutive performance games for display based on the notification game determined in the process of step S3702. Specifically, in step S3703, the display continuous effect game is set in the display continuous effect counter. The continuous performance counter for display corresponds to the continuous performance counter in the normal game mode, and is decremented by 1 each time a 1-bet game is executed. After executing the process of step S3703, a continuous effect flag for display is set in step S3704.

If a negative determination is made in step S3701, or after executing the process in step S3704, the process advances to step S3705. In step S3705, it is determined whether the current game corresponds to the start of a bonus game. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3705, the number of bonus effect games is set in the display bonus effect counter in step S3706. The display bonus performance counter corresponds to the bonus performance counter in the normal game mode. In this embodiment, 24 is set as the upper limit number of special bonus payouts. In addition, in the bonus game during the special bonus, a small winning combination in which one coin is paid out every game is established. Therefore, the special bonus is configured such that 24 bonus games are played. Therefore, in step S3706, 24 is input to the display bonus performance counter.

Thereafter, in step S3707, a display bonus effect flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S3705, or after executing the process in step S3707, this notification process ends.

<Specific role notification process for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the specific combination notification process (FIG. 62) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 102, in step S3801, it is determined whether the display precursor flag is set. The display precursor flag may be set in the immediately preceding specific mode first specific combination processing (FIG. 83) or specific mode second specific combination processing (FIG. 84). If the display precursor flag is not set, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not an additional display effect is set. The setting of the additional effect for display is done in the immediately preceding first specific role processing for specific mode (Figure 83), second specific role processing for specific mode (Figure 84), and third specific role processing for specific mode (Figure 85). It can be done. If the additional effect for display is not set, it is determined in step S3803 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won the bonus, that is, if you have won a special special combination as a result of the lottery, there will be a lottery for transition to display challenge mode, display attack mode, display VB mode, or an additional lottery for the number of consecutive games. If the lottery has not been won, and the bonus has not been won, a lottery process for display pseudo omen mode is executed in step S3804. The pseudo omen mode for display corresponds to the pseudo omen mode in the normal game mode.

In step S3804, a table for display pseudo omen mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage areas 182a, and a counter for lottery is obtained from the various counter areas 183b, and it is determined whether or not to execute the display pseudo omen mode. A lottery will be held. The table for the pseudo-harbinger mode lottery for display is similar to the table for the pseudo-harbinger mode lottery, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S3805, based on the processing result in step S3804, it is determined whether the lottery for the display pseudo omen mode has been won. If the game has been won, in step S3806, a lottery process for the number of games in the display pseudo omen mode is performed. This processing corresponds to the lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo omen mode in the normal game mode. In the following step S3807, the number of display pseudo precursor games determined in step S3806 is set in the display continuous effect counter.

In step S3808, a process of setting a display pseudo flag indicating that the display pseudo precursor mode is set is executed. In the following step S3809, a continuous effect flag for display is set. After that, the main notification process ends. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S3801 to S3803, or if a negative determination is made in step S3805, the main notification process is immediately terminated.

<Continuous performance setting process for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the continuous performance setting process (FIG. 63) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 103, in step S3901, it is determined whether the display precursor flag is set. If the display precursor flag is set, in step S3902, processing is performed to input the number of display precursor games in the display precursor mode into the display continuous performance counter. In the following step S3903, a continuous effect flag for display is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901, or after executing the process in step S3903, the process advances to step S3904. In step S3904, it is determined whether the display continuous effect flag is set. If the display continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the display continuous effect counter is performed in step S3905. Then, in step S3906, it is determined whether the display continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performance. If the display continuous performance counter is the number corresponding to the continuous performance, it is determined in step S3907 whether or not the display pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag for display is not set, the process advances to step S3908, and the actual omen effect table for display is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3909, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the display main sign performance table and the display continuous performance counter, and the corresponding performance data is acquired from the normal game performance data storage area 182b. At the same time, performance data regarding the identification information is acquired from the identification information performance data storage area 182c, and processing is performed to set it as the current continuous performance.

The performance data of the continuous performance specified from the display performance table for the main sign is the same as the performance data of the continuous performance specified from the performance table for the main sign in the normal game mode, and like the other display effects, The stamp 65a is added to the image data of the continuous performance in the normal game mode so as to be present on the near side.

If it is determined in step S3907 that the display pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S3910. In step S3910, a pseudo omen effect table for display is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3911, performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the display pseudo-harbinger performance table and the display continuous performance counter, and the normal game performance data storage area 182b and the identification information performance data storage area The production data is acquired from 182c, and processing is performed to set it as the current continuous production.

The performance data of the continuous performance specified from the display pseudo-harbinger performance table is the same as the continuous performance data specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table in the normal game mode, and is the same as the other display performances. A stamp 65a as an identification display is added so as to be present on the near side with respect to the image data of the continuous performance in the normal game mode.

After performing the processing in step S3909 or step S3911, it is determined in step S3912 whether the display continuous effect counter is 0 or not. If the display continuous effect counter is 0, a process to clear the display continuous effect flag and the display pseudo flag is performed in step S3913. Note that if the display pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S3906 or step S3912, or after performing the process in step S3913, this setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S3904 that the display continuous effect flag is not set, the process advances to step S3914. In step S3914, it is determined whether the display bonus effect flag is set. If it has been set, in step S3915, the display bonus performance counter is subtracted. In the following step S3916, a display bonus effect table is obtained from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S3917, the performance data of the corresponding bonus performance is specified from the display bonus performance table and the display bonus performance counter, and the performance data for the normal game performance data storage area 182b and the performance data storage for identification information are determined. Performance data is acquired from the area 182c, and processing is performed to set it as the current bonus performance.

The performance data for the mid-bonus performance specified from the display bonus performance table is the same as the performance data for the mid-bonus performance specified from the bonus performance table in the normal game mode, and is the same as other display performances. , a stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the near side with respect to the image data of the bonus effect in the normal game mode.

In step S3918, it is determined whether the display bonus performance counter is 0 or not. If the display bonus performance counter is 0, processing is performed to clear the display bonus performance flag in step S3919. After that, this setting process ends. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S3914 or step S3918, the present setting process is directly ended.

As described above, in this embodiment, even in a game in a specific mode, based on the winning of the display challenge mode, the winning of the display attack mode, and the winning of the display VB mode, the display precursor mode in which continuous effects are finally performed is selected. Set. Continuous performances are also set based on bonus winnings. In addition, when a specific winning combination is won, if the transfer lottery of each mode is not won and the additional lottery is also not won, the display pseudo omen mode corresponding to the pseudo omen mode is set. Therefore, in the specific mode, it is possible to experience in a simulated manner that a specific combination is won in the normal game mode, and the result is announced through the portent mode and continuous performance.

Here, counters are provided separately for the normal game mode and the specific mode to keep track of the game being executed in the continuous play and also to keep track of the number of games in the continuous play. Therefore, for example, even if you switch to a specific mode while a continuous performance is being executed in the normal game mode, if you return to the normal game mode again, the continuous performance in the normal game mode before switching will be interrupted. It is possible to restart from.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, for example, assume that the mode is switched to the specific mode at the timing when the first continuous performance game and the second continuous performance game are played in the normal game mode. In this case, in the specific mode, it is possible to perform the above-mentioned pseudo game regardless of the progress and subsequent results of the continuous performance in the normal game mode up to that point. In the specific mode, if a pseudo display challenge mode or the like is won, the result will be announced after continuous performance. For example, if the game is subsequently switched to the normal game mode, the continuous performance that is currently being played in the normal game mode is restarted. In this case, the continuous performance is restarted from the third continuous performance as a continuation of the first and second games that have been completed.

By doing this, when a continuous performance occurs in the normal game mode, for example, it is possible to predict how the winning notification will be carried out in the specific mode by predicting that the winning notification will be made later in the attack mode. After preparing in advance how the game mode will be played and how the game state will shift thereafter, it becomes possible to make the continuous performance of the normal game mode desired.

Moreover, as described above, the continuous performance counter and the display continuous performance counter start counting as the precursor mode and the display precursor mode from the game before the continuous performance occurs. Therefore, for example, if a situation arises in which a continuous performance is likely to occur due to the winning of a specific combination, it is possible to prepare for the specific mode as described above before the continuous performance begins. In this way, there is no need to interrupt the continuous performance in the middle, and the continuous performance can be fully enjoyed from the beginning.

On the other hand, after the continuous performance becomes the final game and an advantageous result or a non-advantageous result is announced, if any of the credit input switches 56 to 58 is operated, a winning notification performance is performed. (Mode transition notification process in FIG. 49). In other words, after the result of the 3-bet game is announced through continuous performances, even if the second credit input switch 57 is operated to play the 1-bet game, the winning notification performance for the 3-bet game is performed. However, after the result is announced through continuous performance in the 1-bet game, even if the first credit input switch 56 is operated to play the 3-bet game, the winning notification performance in the 1-bet game is performed. For example, if a continuous effect occurs while playing in the normal game mode, and the continuous effect continues until the final game, and the above-mentioned advantageous result is announced, the next This is because it is conceivable that players may try to win the first BB prize or the second BB prize by betting one coin in the game. In other words, in such a case, if a switch to a specific mode occurs based on a single bet, the timing is when the player's spirits are high after the 1st BB or 2nd BB win is announced after continuous production. This is because the display of the practice screen may make the player feel depressed, which may reduce the performance effect of the continuous performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regarding the performance during the bonus, it is possible to specify which game the performance is in each of the normal game mode and the specific mode. The bonus performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 105.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the mid-bonus performance in the normal game mode and the mid-bonus performance in the specific mode are both continuous for the same number of games. Specifically, the bonus performance in the normal game mode is a live-action video-style story performance in which the story progresses for each game, and the story is completed in 24 games. In each game, a story is assigned one episode at a time, and the story of the one episode is played out over a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period is set longer than the minimum period (approximately 4.1 seconds) required from the start of the game (operation of the start lever 41) to the completion of medal payout. Each game is completed within the shortest period of time, and if an operation to start the next game is performed immediately, each story performance being executed is ended midway and the story performance corresponding to the next game is started.

In the bonus state based on the first BB and second BB in the normal game mode, the payout upper limit number is set to 216 coins. In each game, either the BB medium/small role 1, the BB medium/red 7 matching role, or the BB medium BAR matching role (IV=28-30) is won, and any of the 1st small role to the 32nd small role wins. do. No matter which combination wins, the bonus that can be obtained is a payout of 9 medals, and the maximum number of payouts is reached after 24 games.

That is, in the normal game mode, the bonus state is set to end after 24 games, which is the predetermined number of games, and the bonus performance is also set to end after 24 games, which is the predetermined number of games.

On the other hand, in a bonus state (special bonus state) based on the first PBB and second PBB in the specific game mode, the payout upper limit number is set to 24 coins. In each game, either the special BB medium/small role 1, the special BB medium/red 7 matching role, or the special BB medium/BAR matching role (IV=78-80) is won, and any of the 1st P small role to the 32nd P small role is won. Someone wins a prize. Regardless of which winning combination is won, the bonus that can be obtained is one medal payout, and the maximum number of payouts is reached after 24 games.

That is, the bonus state in the specific mode is also set to end after 24 games, which is the predetermined number of games, similarly to the bonus state in the normal game mode. The bonus performance in the specific mode is similar to the bonus performance in the normal game mode, and the bonus performance is common for each number of games in the bonus state. The difference is that, like other performances, in the bonus performance in a specific mode, a stamp 65a indicating the specific mode exists in the display image of the auxiliary display section 65, and the stamp 65a indicates the normal game mode. It is added so that it exists on the near side of the image data of the bonus effect in .

Furthermore, in the bonus performance, the remaining number of payouts to be paid out during the bonus and the number of medals acquired during the bonus are displayed. In the normal game mode, the remaining number of payouts is 216 pieces as described above, and in the bonus performance of the first game, as shown in Figure 105 (b1), the remaining number of payouts is 216 pieces and 0 pieces. The number of acquisitions is displayed. Then, in the second game's bonus performance, the number of remaining payouts will be reduced to 207 and the number of medals won will be increased to 9, corresponding to the fact that 9 medals were obtained in the first game. . This display is repeatedly updated in each game, and for example, in the bonus performance of the fifth game in FIG. 105(b2), the remaining payout number is displayed as 180 coins, and the acquired number is displayed as 36 coins. Further, in the bonus performance of the 23rd game in FIG. 105(b3), the remaining payout number is displayed as 18 coins, and the acquired number is displayed as 196 coins. Then, in the bonus performance of the final game (24th game) in FIG. 105(b4), the remaining payout number is displayed as 9 coins, and the acquired number is displayed as 207 coins. When a payout is made in the final game, the remaining number of payouts becomes 0, and the bonus state ends.

Also in the bonus performance in the specific mode, the remaining number of payouts to be paid out during the bonus and the number of medals acquired during the bonus are displayed. However, these displays in specific modes are not the actual remaining payout number (maximum payout number 24 coins) or actual number of acquisitions (maximum acquisition number 24 coins), but the remaining payout when replaced with the bonus status in the normal game mode. It is displayed as a number (maximum number of payouts: 216 coins) or number of acquisitions (maximum number of acquisitions: 216 coins).

For example, as shown in FIG. 105(c1), in the first game, the remaining payout number of 216 coins and the acquired number of 0 coins are displayed as a bonus performance in the specific mode. This display number is the same as that shown in FIG. 105 (b1) above. In other words, the remaining payout number and the acquisition number are displayed in a different manner from the actual remaining payout number of 24 coins and the acquisition number of 0 coins. . Then, in the bonus performance of the second game, although one medal was obtained in the first game, in the normal game mode, 9 medals were obtained, so the remaining payout number displayed decreased to 207 medals. However, the number displayed increases to 9. This display is repeatedly updated in each game. For example, in the bonus performance of the fifth game in FIG. 105(c2), the remaining payout number is displayed as 180 coins, and the acquired number is displayed as 36 coins. The displayed number is the same as that shown in FIG. 105 (b2) above. In other words, the remaining payout number and the acquisition number are displayed in a different manner from the actual remaining payout number of 20 coins and the acquisition number of 4 coins. . Further, in the bonus performance of the 23rd game in FIG. 105(c3), the remaining payout number is displayed as 18 coins, and the acquired number is displayed as 196 coins. This displayed number is the same as that shown in FIG. 105 (b3) above. In other words, the remaining payout number and the acquisition number are displayed in a different manner from the actual remaining payout number of 2 coins and the acquisition number of 22 coins. . Then, in the bonus performance of the final game (24th game) in FIG. 105(c4), the remaining payout number is displayed as 9 coins, and the acquired number is displayed as 207 coins. The displayed number is the same as that shown in FIG. 105 (b4) above. In other words, the remaining payout number and the acquisition number are displayed in a different manner from the actual remaining payout number of 1 coin and the actual number of 23 coins acquired. . When a payout is made in the final game, the remaining number of payouts becomes 0, and the bonus state ends.

As described above, by winning the first PBB and the second PBB and shifting to the special bonus, the bonus state in the normal game mode can also be explored in a pseudo manner. Since the winning numbers on the 1st PBB and 2nd PBB are the same as the winning numbers on the 1st BB and 2nd BB in the normal gaming mode, the system determines that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will move to the bonus state. The experience is visually easy to understand, and since the effects during the bonus state are the same after the transition to the bonus state, you can enjoy the bonus in a specific mode as if it were a bonus in the normal game mode. .

Furthermore, since the number of consecutive games in the bonus state is the same, and the effects of each game in the bonus state are the same, it is possible to share data between the normal game mode and the specific mode, greatly increasing the storage capacity. Capacity can be reduced. In particular, the bonus effect during the bonus state is in the form of a live-action video, and although the effect of increasing the attention of the bonus state is tremendous, the storage capacity may increase. In this regard, as described above, since the bonus performance in the specific mode is adapted to be used as the bonus performance in the normal game mode, it is possible to maintain a good balance between the performance effect and the storage capacity.

Moreover, the display of the remaining number of payouts and the number of acquisitions during the bonus performance is configured to use the display of the normal game mode rather than the actual remaining number of payouts and the number of acquisitions during the specific mode. Therefore, even in a specific mode, it is possible to simulate the experience of winning a bonus and acquiring medals by consuming the bonus.

Here, in this embodiment, in a situation where the first PBB or the second PBB is won during a specific mode, and the first PBB or the second PBB is not won, in a so-called carryover state of the first PBB or the second PBB, it is determined whether the winnings are valid or not. The lottery table used for the lottery is different. Therefore, in the carryover state, a lottery table used for determination of success or failure will be explained with reference to FIG. 106.

As shown in Figure 106, in the carryover state of the 1st PBB and 2nd PBB, the point values of index values IV = 63 to 92 and 95 to 99 are the same as those before winning the 1st PBB and 2nd PBB (Figure 72). On the other hand, the point values of index values IV=50 to 62, 93, and 94 are set to 0. In other words, when carrying over the 1st PBB or 2nd PBB, 1 winning hand, special 1st promotion replay 1 to 4, special fall replay 1 to 3, special 2nd promotion replay 1, 2, special BAR replay 1, 2 not be elected. Therefore, when carrying over the first PBB or the second PBB, there are cases where the player does not win any of the winning combinations and ends up losing. By doing this, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player cannot win the first PBB or the second PBB even though he or she has won the first PBB or the second PBB. In other words, even when carrying over the above, if the gameplay remains the same, with 1 bet and 1 payout for each game, the control that prioritizes winning small winnings over winning bonuses will not allow you to win the bonus, and you will not be able to win the bonus. This is because the player may be forced to play a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game that includes a result.

When carrying over the won 1st BB or 2nd BB in the normal game mode, the lottery table for the normal gaming state is referred to in the 3-bet game (BB duplicate role and BB point value PV are 0), and in the 1-bet game, the above The lottery table in FIG. 106 is referred to. Therefore, even if you aim to win the 1st BB with a 1-card bet when carrying over the 1st BB, etc., it is possible to achieve the 1st BB win without being hindered by the 1-card payout combination.

In addition, in the carryover state, instead of or in addition to the configuration using a lottery table with a losing result as described above, in the carryover state, a configuration in which the priority of attracting bonus winnings is higher than that of small winnings. You can also use it as In other words, in a situation where both a bonus and a small winning combination are won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R may be performed so that the bonus winning is given priority over the small winning combination. Even in this case, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to win a bonus due to winning a small winning combination. Further, the control to give priority to bonus winnings over minor winnings is not limited to the time of carrying over bonuses, but may also be performed in bonus winning games or in a bonus non-winning state.

<Display of number of consecutive games and number of acquisitions>
As described above, during the bonus state in the specific mode, the remaining number of medals to be paid out and the number of acquired medals are displayed assuming that nine medals have been paid out in each game. In this embodiment, the number of acquisitions corresponding to the normal game mode is displayed not only during the bonus state but also in the attack mode for display, the VB mode for display, and the special add-on zone for display.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the counting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81. The counting process is a process for counting the number of consecutive games such as attack mode and display attack mode, and the number of wins, and is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1.49 msec).

In step S4001, it is determined whether a count condition is satisfied. The count condition is established by starting the attack mode or starting the display attack mode. If the count condition is satisfied, a count flag corresponding to the game mode is set in the various flag storage area 183a in step S4002. The count flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to understand that the count condition has already been met. For example, when the count condition is met in the normal game mode (when the attack mode is started), , the count flag for the normal game mode is set, and when the count condition is satisfied in the specific mode (when the display attack mode is started), the count flag for the specific mode is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001, or after executing the process in step S4002, the process advances to step S4003. In step S4003, it is determined whether any count flag is set. If any count flag is set, the process advances to step S4004, and it is determined whether it is time to start the game. Specifically, it is determined whether a start command has been received from the main controller 101. If the game has started, the process advances to step S4005, and it is determined whether the specific mode flag is set. As already explained, the specific mode flag is a flag indicating that the game mode is a specific mode, and a state in which the flag is set is a specific mode, and a state in which it is not set is a normal gaming mode.

If it is the normal game mode, in step S4006, the game counters provided in the various counter areas 183b are added. Specifically, the game counter is incremented by one. In the following step S4007, the payout counters provided in the various counter areas 183b are subtracted. Specifically, a process is performed in which a value corresponding to the current bet number (1 to 3) is subtracted from the payout counter.

If it is determined in step S4005 that the game is in the specific mode, in step S4008, the game counters for the specific mode provided in the various counter areas 183b are added. Specifically, the game counter for the specific mode is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S4009, a subtraction process is performed on the payout counter for the specific mode provided in the various counter areas 183b. Specifically, instead of the current bet number (1), a value corresponding to the bet number in the normal game mode (uniformly 3 in this process) is subtracted from the payout counter for the specific mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S4004, or after executing the process in step S4007 or step S4009, the process advances to step S4010. In step S4010, it is determined whether it is time to end the game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main control device 101. If the game has ended, it is determined in step S4011 whether there has been a payout in the current game. In addition, in step S4011, it is determined that a payout has been made at the time of replay winning.

If there is a payout, it is determined in step S4012 whether or not a specific mode flag is set. If the specific mode flag is not set and the game is in the normal game mode, in step S4013, processing is performed to ascertain the number of payouts. In addition, at the time of replay winning, the number of payouts is grasped assuming that the same number of payouts as the number of bets have been made. Then, in step S4014, a process of adding the current number of payouts to the payout counter is performed.

If it is determined in step S4012 that the mode is a specific mode, in step S4015 a process is performed to understand the current winning mode, and in step S4016, the number of payouts in the normal game mode is grasped based on the winning mode. Perform processing. For example, as the winning mode this time, if the 1st P minor prize (special bell) is won, the actual payout number based on the 1st P minor prize won is not 1, but the 1st P in the normal game mode. Nine pieces, which is the payout number at the time of winning the first small win corresponding to the small win, is grasped as a pseudo payout number. Also, for example, if the 26th P small winning combination (special watermelon) is achieved as a winning pattern this time, the actual payout number based on the 26th small winning combination is not 1, but the number of coins in the normal game mode. Five pieces, which is the payout number at the time of winning the 26th small winning combination corresponding to the 26P small winning combination, is grasped as a pseudo payout number.

In step S4017, processing is performed to add the pseudo number of payouts, ascertained in step S4016, to the payout counter for the specific mode. As a result, the specific mode payout counter takes on a value as if the payout had been received in the normal game mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S4010 or step S4011, or after executing the process in step S4014 or step S4017, it is determined in step S4018 whether a count clear condition is satisfied. The count clear condition is satisfied by the end of the attack mode or the end of the display attack mode. If the count clear condition is satisfied, in step S4019, the count flag corresponding to the game mode in which the count clear condition is satisfied is cleared, and the corresponding game counter and payout counter are reset. Specifically, when the attack mode ends and the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag for the normal game mode is cleared, and the game counter and payout counter for the normal game mode are reset to 0. Further, when the display attack mode ends and the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag for the specific mode is cleared, and the game counter and payout counter for the specific mode are reset to zero.

If a negative determination is made in step S4003 or step S4018, or after executing the process in step S4019, this counting process ends.

In the normal game mode, for example, in the attack mode, as a production during the attack mode, as shown in FIG. The total number of games corresponding to the value of the game counter for the normal game mode is displayed, and the number of wins corresponding to the value of the payout counter is displayed. Further, the remaining number of games in the attack mode and VB mode is displayed in an area arranged parallel to the display area for the total number of games. In addition, in the normal game mode, in the attack mode end effect setting process (step S2108 in the stop effect setting process in FIG. 60) and the VB mode end effect setting process (step S2112 in the stop effect setting process in FIG. 60). , the number of consecutive games and the number of wins are displayed with reference to the game counter and payout counter for the normal game mode (FIGS. 66(b) and 67(b)).

In a specific mode, for example, in the display attack mode, even in the display attack mode, as shown in FIG. , the total number of games corresponding to the value of the game counter for the specific mode is displayed, and the number of wins corresponding to the value of the payout counter for the specific mode is displayed. Further, the remaining number of games in the attack mode for display and the VB mode for display is displayed in an area provided in parallel with the display area for the total number of games. By doing this, for example, it becomes possible to experience in a simulated manner how many medals can be won in each game during the display attack mode.

In addition, the process for setting the end effect of the attack mode for display (step S3415 in the number of games management process for a specific mode in FIG. 89) and the process for setting the end effect for the VB mode for display (the process for managing the number of games for a specific mode in FIG. 89) In step S3422), the number of consecutive games and the number of wins are displayed with reference to the game counter and payout counter for the specific mode (FIG. 94(b)) and FIG. 95(b). That is, the display of the number of wins in the specific mode is not the actual number of wins (one coin obtained for each game), but the number of wins that is a pseudo-measurement of the number of payouts corresponding to the normal game mode. On the other hand, the number of consecutive games is the actual number of games. This makes it possible to experience in a specific mode how many games the attack mode or the like can be continued to see how many points will be gained.

<Switching between normal game mode and specific mode>
Next, specific mode switching processing for switching between the normal gaming mode and the specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 109 as processing related to switching the gaming mode. The specific mode switching process is a process that is activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 1.49 msec cycle) by the CPU 181 of the sub-side display control device 81 when the game is stopped (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped). be.

In step S4101, it is determined whether or not the second effect switch 67 as a changeover button has been operated. If the operation has been performed, it is determined in step S4102 whether or not there is any bonus state or bonus carryover state. In the case of the bonus state, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled in step S4103 to perform a display indicating that switching is not possible. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays "mode switching NG" to notify that it is not possible to switch between the normal game mode and the specific mode. . After performing the process in step S4103, the main switching process is ended without performing the following mode switching process.

That is, in the present embodiment, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not possible in the bonus state or in the carryover state where the player has won the bonus but has not yet won the prize. By doing this, not only the configuration of the lottery table that is referred to when carrying over, but also the fact that switching between the two modes does not occur, so that bonuses are won in duplicate in both game modes. Events that could cause problems to occur have been avoided.

If a negative determination is made in step S4102, the process advances to step S4104. In step S4104, it is determined whether a specific mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If the specific mode flag is not set, it means that the second effect switch 67 was operated during the normal game mode. In this case, in step S4105, processing for setting a specific mode flag is executed. Further, in step S4106, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to execute a specific mode switching effect. The effect at the time of switching to the specific mode is as already explained, and as shown in FIG. This will instruct you that you can return to the normal game mode. After setting the special mode switching performance, in step S4107, the game content is stored. Specifically, various flags and various counters for the normal game mode are made unrewritable (inaccessible), and various flags and various counters for the specific mode are made rewriteable (accessible). Then, specific mode setting processing is executed in step S4108. Such processing will be explained in detail later.

If the specific mode flag is set in step S4104, it means that the second effect switch 67 was operated during the specific mode. In this case, in step S4109, processing to clear the specific mode flag is executed. Further, in step S4110, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled to execute the effect when switching to the normal game mode. The effect when switching to the normal game mode is as described above, and as shown in FIG. It is taught that the specific mode can be returned to by the operation.

After executing the process of step S4110, the game content storage process is performed in step S4111. Specifically, various flags and various counters for the specific mode are made unrewritable (inaccessible), and various flags and various counters for the normal game mode are made rewritable (accessible).

If a negative determination is made in step S4101, or after executing the process in step S4108 or step S4111, the process advances to step S4112. In step S4112, it is determined whether the specific mode flag is set. If it has been set, it is determined in step S4113 whether or not the game non-execution period has exceeded a predetermined specific period (3 minutes). During the no-play period, bets are not set, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not rotating, and no medals are paid out. After this is completed, counting is started in a predetermined timer process. For example, the count of the timer process is reset on the condition that any of the various operation parts such as the start lever 41, stop switches 42 to 44, credit input switches 56 to 58, etc. is operated. Therefore, for example, after the medal payout for a predetermined game has been completed and a specific period of time has elapsed without operating any of the operation units, an affirmative determination is made in step S4113.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4113, it is determined in step S4114 whether or not the bonus state or the bonus carryover state is present. If it is not in either state, a process of clearing the specific mode flag is executed in step S4115, and in the subsequent step S4116, an effect at the time of switching to the normal game mode is set.

That is, when the non-playing period in a specific mode passes a specific period, the game is forcibly switched to the normal gaming mode, provided that the game is not in a bonus state or a bonus carryover state. As a result, for example, if a player who practices gaming in a specific mode ends the game without switching to the normal gaming mode, the next player who takes a seat may continue playing in the specific mode without realizing it. This prevents things from happening.

After executing the process of step S4116, a game content storage process is executed in step S4117. This process is similar to the process in step S4111 above. After performing the process of step S4117, this switching process ends.

If the bonus status or bonus carryover status is determined in step S4114, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that a bonus consumption instruction effect is performed in step S4118. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays the message "Please use the bonus" to notify that the bonus in the specific mode should be used. After performing the process of step S4118, this switching process ends.

For example, if a game ends in a specific mode with a bonus state or a bonus carryover state, and a successor player attempts to play a game in the normal game mode without noticing this, a non-switchable effect may be executed. In this case, there is a risk that it may be mistaken for a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the above-mentioned bonus consumption instruction performance is designed to suppress the occurrence of such misconception.

<Specific mode setting process>
The specific mode setting process performed in step S4108 of the specific mode switching process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 111.

In step S4201, it is determined whether the switching performance period has elapsed. The switching performance period is a period for maintaining the state after performing the specific mode switching performance, and is set to, for example, about 4.1 seconds (equivalent to the period required to complete one game). It should be noted that regarding this period as well, the elapse of the period from the execution timing of the specific mode switching performance is grasped by a predetermined timer process.

If the switching performance period has elapsed, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display a specific mode setting screen in step S4202. On the specific mode setting screen, for example, you can select whether to carry over the game content of the previous specific mode and play the current specific mode, or reset the gaming content of the previous specific mode and play the current specific mode. Let them choose whether to implement it. For example, as shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), there is a button image displaying "Continue from last time" indicating that the game contents will be carried over, and a button image displaying "Reset" indicating that the game contents will be reset. A button image displaying "Start" is alternately highlighted at predetermined intervals (for example, 1 sec), and a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first production switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing. When the selected side is displayed, the highlighted side can be selected.

After displaying the setting screen in step S4202, it is determined in step S4203 whether or not any of the above selections (selection to carry over game content or selection to reset game content) has been made. do. If no selection has been made, the process advances to step S4204 and it is determined whether a start operation has been performed, that is, whether a start command from the main controller 101 has been received. If the start time command has not been received, the process returns to step S4203, and if the start time command has been received, the game contents are set to be inherited in step S4205, and this setting process is ended. In step S4205, processing is performed to read various flags and various counters for the specific mode that were made accessible in step S4108. That is, if the start lever 41 is operated without any selection being made, the previous game content is automatically carried over.

If it is determined in step S4203 that any selection has been made, it is determined in step S4206 whether or not a selection has been made to take over the game content. If the selection to take over is made, the process advances to step S4205, where handover setting processing is performed, and then this setting processing ends.

If it is determined in step S4206 that the selection to reset the game content has been made instead of the selection to take over the game content, the process to reset the game content in the specific mode is performed in step S4207. In this process, various flags and various counters for the specific mode made accessible in the process of step S4108 are initialized. As a result, the game content in the specific mode is set to the state at power-on (normal mode for display).

In the following step S4208, a reset screen is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 113(a), the reset screen displays "Free mode reset" indicating that the game content of the specific mode has been reset, as well as a display challenge as an option for the state to start after reset. The option ``From Challenge Mode'' corresponds to the display mode, the option ``From Attack Mode'' corresponds to the attack mode for display, the option ``From VB Mode'' corresponds to the VB mode for display, and the additional special zone for display. ``From the specialized zone'' and ``From the beginning'' which correspond to the normal mode for display. Further, on the reset screen, for example, an image of one option among the options is highlighted, and the highlighted option is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (eg, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

In step S4209, it is determined whether or not an operation for selecting an option corresponding to the display challenge mode among the displayed options is performed. If the display challenge mode is selected, a process of setting a display challenge mode flag is performed in step S4210. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the display challenge mode.

In the following step S4211, processing is performed to set a challenge mode start effect for display. This allows the player to understand that the specific mode starts from the display challenge mode (that the selection operation for the display challenge mode was valid). In this case, in the challenge mode start effect for display, for example, as shown in FIG. Each button image is alternately highlighted every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

In the following step S4212, a process to start counting the number of consecutive games in the display challenge mode is performed.

If it is determined in step S4209 that the selection operation for the display challenge mode has not been performed, it is determined in step S4213 whether or not the selection operation for the option corresponding to the display attack mode has been performed. When the display attack mode is selected, a process is performed to set a display attack notification flag in step S4214. Thereby, the specific mode can be started from the state at the time of the winning notification in the display attack mode.

In the following step S4215, processing is performed to set a display attack mode winning notification effect. As a result, the player can understand that the specific mode starts from the game in which the winning display attack mode is announced (that the selection operation for the display attack mode is valid). In this case, in the attack mode winning notification effect for display, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b2), together with the attack mode winning notification effect for display, an image of a "confirm button" and an image of a "back button" are displayed. Then, each button image is alternately highlighted at predetermined intervals (for example, 1 sec).

If it is determined in step S4213 that the selection operation for the display attack mode has not been performed, it is determined in step S4216 whether or not the selection operation for the option corresponding to the display VB mode has been performed. When the display VB mode is selected, in step S4217, processing is performed to set the display attack notification flag, display attack mode flag, and display VB notification flag. Thereby, the specific mode can be started from the state at the time of the winning notification in the display VB mode.

In the subsequent step S4218, processing is performed to set a display VB mode winning notification effect. As a result, the player can understand that the specific mode starts from the game in which the winning information for the display VB mode is announced (that the selection operation for the display VB mode is valid). In this case, in the display VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b3), together with the display VB mode winning notification effect, an image of a "confirm button" and an image of a "back button" are displayed. Then, each button image is alternately highlighted at predetermined intervals (for example, 1 sec).

If it is determined in step S4216 that the selection operation of the display VB mode has not been performed, it is determined in step S4219 whether or not the selection operation of the option corresponding to the display specialized zone has been performed. If the display specialized zone is selected, in step S4220, the display attack notification flag, display attack mode flag, display VB notification flag, display VB mode flag, and display specialized zone flag are selected. Performs processing to set. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the starting game of the display specialized zone.

In step S4221, processing is performed to set a special zone start effect for display. This allows the player to understand that the specific mode starts from the starting game of the specialized display zone (that the selection operation of the specialized display zone was valid). In this case, in the display specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b4), together with the display specialized zone start effect, an image of a "decision button" and an image of a "back button" are displayed. Then, each button image is alternately highlighted at predetermined intervals (for example, 1 sec).

After executing the processing in step S4212, step S4215, step S4218, or step S4222, or if a negative determination is made in step S4219, it is determined in step S4223 whether or not a determination operation has been performed. Specifically, a predetermined button operation ( For example, it is determined whether or not the first effect switch 66 has been operated. Further, in step S4223, an affirmative determination is also made when the option "from the beginning" corresponding to the normal mode for display is selected among the options in FIG. 113(a). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4223, this setting process is ended, and if a negative determination is made, the process returns to step S4209.

As described above, by making it possible to set the state at the start of the specific mode, it is possible to improve the versatility of the specific mode for practice. In other words, if players can select which state they would like to practice (simulate) in a specific mode, they will not have to play the game they already understand, and will be able to concentrate on the state they want to practice or experience. It becomes possible to practice or experience it.

In this case, if the display attack mode or display VB mode is selected, instead of setting the start of the display attack mode (start effect) or the start of the display VB mode (start effect), the winning notification effect is set. The configuration was configured to set the . As a result, it becomes possible to experience that the attack mode is started after winning the third re-game prize, through the way that the display attack mode is started after winning the third small role win. In addition, it is possible to experience that the VB mode is started after winning the fourth and fifth re-games by seeing how the VB mode for display is started after winning the fourth and fifth repeat small winning combinations. In other words, it may feel strange that the attack mode is started without going through the 3rd re-gaming win (without going through the 3rd rep small role winning), or without going through the 4th or 5th re-gaming winning (the 4th re-gaming winning). It is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort when the VB mode is started (without passing through the 5th rep small winning combination).

On the other hand, when a specialized display zone is selected, a specialized display zone start effect is set (a configuration starts from the starting game of the specialized display zone). This is a special zone for display, which is a mode that changes when special BAR replay 1 and 2 are won and the 7th rep small win is established in the game, and attack mode for display and display special zone. This is because the winning game and the starting game cannot be different as in the VB mode. By doing this, it becomes possible to start the specialized zone in a pseudo manner without going through the seventh re-game winning (without going through the seventh repeat small winning winning). In this case, for example, at the time of displaying the special zone start effect, a display may be displayed saying "This mode starts with all BARs" to explain the difference between the stop result and the mode to start. .

<Modification 1>
In this first modification, the winning probabilities of various special winning combinations in the specific mode are different from the winning probabilities of the corresponding specific winning combinations in the normal game mode. FIG. 114 is a lottery table in the specific mode in the first modification.

For example, the point values PV corresponding to the special specific combinations of index values IV=63 to 77 and 81 to 92 are set to be 10 times the point value PV for the corresponding specific combinations in the normal game mode (see FIG. 31, etc.). As a result, the probability of winning the special specific combination becomes 10 times that of the corresponding specific combination in the normal game mode. By doing this, by winning a special role, you can experience that a transition lottery such as challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, special zone, etc. will be held by winning a special role, and that an additional lottery will be held. In this way, the player can experience the transition lottery and the additional lottery with a higher probability than the transition lottery and the additional lottery in the normal game mode. In other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that a transition lottery or an additional lottery will occur with a smaller number of games than in the normal game mode.

In this modification 1, as shown in FIG. 114, in addition to the winning probability of the special specific combination, the winning probability of the 1st PBB and 2nd PBB is also different from the winning probability of the corresponding 1st BB and 2nd BB in the normal game mode. Specifically, the winning probability is 10 times that of the normal game mode. Thereby, the bonus state can also be experienced with a higher probability than in the normal game mode. In other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that a bonus win will occur in a smaller number of games than in the normal game mode.

As mentioned above, when increasing the winning probability of the special specific combination, it is necessary to lower the winning probability of other winning combinations. In this regard, in this modification example 1, as shown in FIG. 4 and 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2, and set the winning probabilities of other special replays (special fall replays 1 to 3, special BAR replays 1 and 2) to the corresponding other replays in the normal game mode. is lower than the probability of This avoids the inconvenience that the display attack mode or display VB mode does not start easily even if you win the transition lottery for display attack mode or display VB mode based on winning a special specific combination. This is to do so.

On the other hand, for Special Fall Replays 1 to 3 and Special BAR Replays 1 and 2, even if the winning probability is lowered, the display attack mode and display VB mode are configured to end when the number of games is counted, so they will end. There is no effect on the game, and even if you do the above, it is unlikely to cause any inconvenience.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the configuration regarding the setting of the bonus performance in the specific mode is different. In this modification, in the bonus state (special bonus state) in the specific mode, a 3-bet game is possible in addition to a 1-bet game.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 115(a), the benefits corresponding to the 30th P minor winning combination to the 32nd P minor winning winning combination as winning combinations that can be won during the special bonus state are made different depending on each bet game. In other words, if the 30th P minor prize to the 32nd P minor prize is achieved in a 1-bet game, one medal payout equal to the number of bets will be given as a bonus, and the 30th P minor prize to the 32nd minor prize in a 3-bet game will be paid out as a bonus. When a 32P small winning combination is achieved, the bonus is a payout of three medals, which is the same as the number of bets. By doing so, even if the special bonus state is exhausted in the 3-bet game, it is possible to prevent medals from increasing or decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 115(b), for example, if each game in the special bonus state is played as a 3-bet game, three medals will be paid out per game, and a total of 8 games will be played in the special bonus state. The maximum number of payouts will be reached. This makes it possible to shorten the time needed to consume the special bonus, which requires 24 games.

FIG. 116(a) shows a part of the specific mode continuous effect setting process in the second modification.

If it is determined in step S3904 in FIG. 103 that the display continuous effect flag is not set, it is determined in step S4301 whether or not the display bonus medium effect flag is set. This process is similar to the process in step S3914 above, and if it is not set, the main setting process is ended. If the display bonus performance flag is set, it is determined in step S4302 whether or not the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game. If it is a 1-bet game rather than a 3-bet game, in step S4303, processing is performed to subtract 1 from the display bonus performance counter. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4302 that the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game, then in step S4304 a process of subtracting 3 from the display bonus performance counter is performed.

After executing the processing in step S4303 or step S4304, the process advances to step S3916 in FIG. 103, where a display bonus effect table is obtained, and then a bonus effect setting process corresponding to the value of the display bonus effect counter is performed. etc. will be carried out.

For example, if each game in the special bonus state is played as a 3-bet game, as shown in FIG. 115(b), the first game is The performance data for the first game of the bonus mid-performance is acquired, the second game is the performance data for the fourth game of the bonus mid-performance, and the third game is the performance data of the seventh game of the bonus mid-performance. The performance data is acquired every three games. By doing this, even if the number of games played in the special bonus state is shortened, the discrepancy between the presentation content of each game and the number of games played can be reduced.

<Modification 3>
In this third modification, a configuration is adopted in which it is possible to win the PCB during the special bonus. FIG. 117 is a lottery table during the special bonus in the third modification. The PCB (special CB) in this embodiment is a so-called single bonus (SB), and one JAC game is executed based on a winning PCB (SB). In this JAC game, special CB small and medium winning combinations 1 to 4 with index values IV=96 to 97 are won with high probability.

As shown in FIG. 117, in the special bonus in this modification, in addition to the index values IV=78 to 80, point values PV are also allocated to the index value IV=95. You will win when the index value IV=95 with a probability of 1 (this will be a special CB win).

FIG. 116(b) shows a part of the end determination process in the third modification.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the PCB (SB) winning has been established. If the PCB (SB) winning has been established, the remaining payout number is set to 0 in step S4402. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, or after the process in step S4402 is executed, the processes in and after step S1501 in FIG. 54 are performed. Then, since the remaining payout number is set to 0 in step S4402, an affirmative determination is made in step S1504, and processing for ending the bonus is performed.

That is, by implementing the third modification, it is possible to reduce the number of games played in the special bonus state. This makes it possible to quickly end the bonus state in which no increase or decrease in medals occurs.

Note that the probability of winning the PCB in the special bonus state is not limited to the above, and may be higher or lower than the above. If the probability is set to be high, it becomes possible to end the special bonus state earlier, and if the probability is set to be low, the deviation from the performance during the bonus in the normal game mode can be reduced.

For example, the above configuration may be combined with Modification 2 to create a configuration in which a PCB can be won in a 3-bet game in the special bonus state, but a PCB cannot be won in a 1-bet game. When a special bonus state is used in a 3-bet game, it can be considered that the player has made a decision to use the special bonus state at an early stage, and this is different from the bonus performance in the normal game mode. This is because it is thought that even if a discrepancy occurs, the player will not feel any discomfort.

In the above-mentioned end determination process, the number of remaining payouts at the time of winning the PCB (SB) may be set to 1 or more, and the bonus may be ended after the special CB state (a state in which one game of JAC game can be played) is executed. In this case, the game during the special CB state is configured to be executed in the 2-bet mode together with the 2-bet mode in the normal game mode, and the benefits based on the winning of each role during the special CB state are paid out with 2 medals. It is good to say. By doing this, it is possible to create a bonus state in which no increase in medals can be expected.

In a configuration in which the bonus condition ends after each game in the special CB condition is executed, for example, the number of remaining payouts at the time of PCB winning is set to 3, and each game in the special CB condition is executed in 2 bet mode, and A configuration may be adopted in which an increase of one medal can be expected, such as by making the bonus based on the establishment of each winning combination during the CB state a payout of two medals. When winning the first PBB or the second PBB, the transition to the bonus state is made, but no medals are paid out. Therefore, when the specific mode shifts to the bonus state, the number of medals decreases by one. In this regard, if the bonus state is configured so that an increase of one medal can be expected as described above, it becomes possible to eliminate the increase or decrease in medals by subtracting the decrease by one medal at the time of winning.

In addition, as a configuration in which the number of medals is increased during the bonus and the medals are decreased when the bonus is won, the total is plus or minus zero, it may be possible to use a configuration that does not involve the PCB state. The number of payouts is set to 2, each game during the special bonus state is executed in 1 bet mode, and the bonus based on the winning of each role during the special bonus state is a payout of 2 medals. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which an increase of one medal can be expected.

<Modification 4>
In this modification 4, the specific mode is set from the demo screen. The demo screen is a screen that is displayed when the effect switch (first effect switch 66) provided in the slot machine 10 is operated other than during game execution. For example, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the demo screen includes an option called "Brightness Settings" that corresponds to adjusting the brightness of the screen, and an option that corresponds to adjusting the volume output from the speaker 64. ``Volume setting'' option, which corresponds to setting a specific mode, ``Free mode setting'' option, which corresponds to setting a specific mode, and ``Mobile linked service'', which corresponds to setting using a player's mobile terminal, etc. etc. are displayed respectively. Further, on the demo screen, for example, an image of one option among the options is highlighted, and the highlighted option is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (eg, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

Then, when the selection operation of the option "free mode setting" is performed, a free mode setting image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, for example, as shown in FIG. 118(b). In the free mode setting image, the option of whether or not to reset the gaming history of a specific mode is displayed with an image of a "YES button" that corresponds to resetting, and an image of a "NO button" that does not correspond to resetting, and each The highlighted display of the button image is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (eg, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

For example, when a "YES button" image selection operation is performed, the specific mode setting screen shown in FIG. 112 is displayed. The specific mode setting screen and subsequent reset operation are as described above.

On the other hand, when the "NO button" image selection operation is performed, the configuration is such that the display returns to the demo screen shown in FIG. 118(a).

By doing so, the operability of specific mode setting is improved. That is, it becomes possible to set the specific mode only by operating the first effect switch 66 without operating the second effect switch 67. This makes it possible to set a specific mode (initialization, etc.), for example, even if the second effect switch 67 is not always operable, but can be operated based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Become.

<Modification 5>
In this fifth modification, a specific mode is set in the mobile linkage service on the demo screen (FIG. 118(a)) shown in the fourth modification.

In the above demo screen, when the selection operation of the option "mobile-linked service" is performed, a mobile-linked service image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, as shown in FIG. 119(a), for example. In the mobile-linked service image, the options for using the service in normal gaming mode or in a specific mode are shown in the "normal mode" image corresponding to the normal gaming mode and in the specific mode. The uncorresponding "specific mode" images are respectively displayed, and the highlighted display of each image is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (eg, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

Information input/output processing regarding mobile-linked services will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120. The information input/output process is activated by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 1.49 msec) when the game is stopped.

In step S4401, it is determined whether a mobile linkage service has been selected on the demo screen. If no mobile-linked service is selected, the main input/output process is ended. If the mobile-linked service is selected, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display the mobile-linked service image (FIG. 119(a)) in step S4402.

In step S4403, it is determined whether or not an operation for selecting an option for the normal game mode has been performed in the mobile linked service image. When the selection operation for the option for the normal game mode is performed, the auxiliary display section 65 is controlled to display the game information for the normal game mode in step S4404. In the display of game information for the normal game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. The number of winnings in the zone, the number of additions, the maximum number of additional games, the longest number of games continued in attack mode, the maximum number of coins acquired in attack mode, etc.) are displayed using a QR code (registered trademark) or the like so that they can be acquired on a mobile terminal or the like. Further, when displaying game information for the normal game mode, for example, a password input section may be provided so that the password can be input by the player's operation. The password is set, for example, according to the gaming history, and by inputting the password, the player can continue playing the previous game at the gaming machine.

In step S4405, it is determined whether information has been input using the password or the like. If information has been input, in step S4406, as a game information update process for the normal game mode, the currently stored game history information is rewritten to the game history corresponding to the input password. I do. Note that the password and the game history are stored in the ROM 182 of the display control device 81 in a one-to-one correspondence. If a negative determination is made in step S4405, or after executing the process in step S4406, this input/output process ends.

If it is determined in step S4403 that the selection operation for the option for the normal game mode has not been performed, the process advances to step S4407. In step S4407, it is determined whether a selection operation for a specific mode option has been performed. When the selection operation for the option for the specific mode is performed, the auxiliary display section 65 is controlled to display the game information for the specific mode in step S4408. In the display of game information for a specific mode, for example, as shown in FIG. The number of mode wins, the number of special zone wins for display, the number of additions, the maximum number of additional games, the longest number of continuous games in attack mode for display, the maximum number of coins acquired for attack mode for display, etc.) can be obtained using a mobile terminal etc. Displayed by code (registered trademark), etc. Furthermore, when displaying the game information for the specific mode, a password input section is provided, similar to the display of the game information for the normal game mode, so that the password can be input by the player's operation.

In step S4409, it is determined whether information has been input using the password or the like. If the information has been input, in step S4410, as an update process of the game information for the specific mode, a process of rewriting the currently stored game history information to a game history corresponding to the input password is performed. conduct. If a negative determination is made in step S4407 or step S4409, or after executing the process in step S4410, the main input/output process ends.

As described above, by doing as in Modification 5, for example, if you stop practicing in a specific mode midway through, you can change the game machine, game hall, play date, etc. and restart the practice from the middle. It becomes possible to do so.

<Modification 6>
In this modification 6, in the normal game mode, when the number of consecutive games in the game state equal to or higher than the second RT state reaches a predetermined number of games, the normal game state is forcibly set. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing advantageous section processing in this modification 6. The advantageous section refers to a section of the game that is played in a state where the gaming state is the second RT state or the third RT state. The advantageous section process is activated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 1.49 msec).

In step S4501, it is determined whether a transition to the second RT state has occurred. Such a determination can be made based on whether or not the third re-game winning is established. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, a game number measurement flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S4502.

If a negative determination is made in step S4501, or after the process in step S4502 is executed, it is determined in step S4503 whether or not the number-of-games counting flag is set. If it has not been set, the process for advantageous section ends. If it has been set, a process for measuring the number of games is executed in step S4504. In the process of measuring the number of games, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing for one game, and if it is the start timing, a process is performed in which 1 is added to the number of games for advantageous section counter in the various counter areas 106e.

In the following step S4505, it is determined whether the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) based on the result of the game count measurement process. If the upper limit game has not been reached, this advantageous section processing ends. If the upper limit number of games has been reached, processing is performed to clear flags and counters for each display mode in step S4506. Through this process, the display mode shifts to normal mode. As a result, the press order notification is no longer performed, and when a falling replay prize is established, the gaming state also shifts from the RT state to the normal gaming state. Note that the configuration may be such that the RT setting flag is cleared in step S4506 and the gaming state is forcibly shifted to the normal gaming state. Thereafter, in step S4507, a forced termination command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this advantageous section processing is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the forced termination command performs processing corresponding to the display mode such as attack mode being forced into normal mode (processing of resetting various flags and various counters), and also The auxiliary display section 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify that the auxiliary display section 65 has been reset. As a notification of the forced reset, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the following message: "The upper limit has been reached. Transition to the normal gaming state."

In this case, in the game number measurement process (step S4505), the advantageous section game number counter is added regardless of the number of bets. Then, for example, if practice is performed in the specific mode during the advantageous section, the number of games that can be played in the advantageous section will be reduced by the number of games played in the specific mode.

Therefore, for example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 122(a), in the specific mode switching process in this modification 6, when it is determined in step S4601 that the second effect switch 67 as a switching button has been operated. , In step S4602, it is determined whether the bonus state or the bonus carryover state is present. The processing in step S4601 and step S4602 is similar to the processing in step S4101 and step S4102 described above.

If it is determined in step S4602 that the bonus is in progress, a switchable effect is set in step S4603, and then the specific mode switching process is ended. The processing in step S4603 is similar to the processing in step S4103.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4602 that the bonus is not in progress, it is determined in step S4604 whether the game is in attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone in the normal game mode. That is, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section. If it is determined in step S4604 that the current mode is in an advantageous section, then in step S4603, a switching-disabled effect is set, and then the specific mode switching process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S4604, the process advances to step S4104. The processing after step S4104 is as described above.

By doing as described above, it is possible to avoid a situation where the number of games that can be played in the advantageous section in the normal game mode decreases due to the implementation of the specific mode during the advantageous section.

<Modification 7>
In the present modification 7, in the above modification 6, switching to a specific mode is enabled during the advantageous section, but a caution is given at the time of switching.

For example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 122(b), steps S4701 to S4704 are performed in the same manner as steps S4601 to S4604 described above. If it is determined in step S4704 that the mode is in attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, the process proceeds to step S4705, which differs from step S4604 described above, and provides assistance so that a warning effect is performed. Controls the display unit 65 and the like.

As shown in Figure 123, the attention-raising effect includes a display that says ``In an advantageous area'' indicating that the player is in an advantageous area, and a message that says ``Because the advantageous area will be reduced, the 3 bet game will be reduced.'' Please return to your bet." is displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S4704 or after the process in step S4705 is performed, the process advances to step S4104.

In other words, this modification 7 is configured to allow switching of the game mode even during the advantageous period, leaving it to the player's discretion.

For example, the continuation limit of the advantageous section is not only the maximum number of games played (for example, 1,500 games), but also the acquisition of the maximum number of medals (for example, 3,000), and which continuation limit falls under which it will be forced to end? If the forced termination effect is different depending on the game, some players may wish to be forced to quit by playing the maximum number of games rather than by acquiring the maximum number of games. Therefore, as mentioned above, if a specific mode can be executed at the player's will even during the advantageous period, it will be possible to run a specific mode based on the player's decision, and the game will be forcibly terminated when the maximum number of games is exhausted. It can be made possible.

For example, when the game is forcibly terminated due to the maximum number of games being played, a setting value of the slot machine 10 is suggested as a forced termination effect. In this case, after winning the attack mode in the normal game mode, switch the game mode from the normal game mode to a specific mode, play the game up to the maximum number of games, and then switch to the normal game mode. Although the number of medals acquired in the game will decrease, the number of medals will not decrease during the specific mode, so it is possible to perform a forced termination effect without reducing the number of medals. By doing this, you can enjoy the gameplay of steadily acquiring medals in the attack mode, and the gameplay of performing a forced termination effect while selecting not to add on the attack mode, etc. It is also possible to let the person choose.

<Modification 8>
In this modification 8, the operability of the first credit input switch 56 is different, and the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit input switch 56 differs depending on the situation. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the MAX bet switching process regarding the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. The MAX bet switching process is activated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 at a predetermined period (for example, every 1.49 msec).

In step S4801, the second credit input switch 57 is operated, and it is determined whether or not a one-copy bet operation has occurred. If a one-coin bet operation is performed, it is determined in step S4802 whether a one-coin bet mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The 1-coin bet mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify the number of medals to be inserted based on the operation of the first credit input switch 56, and when the 1-coin bet mode flag is set, the first credit input switch 56 is set. When is operated, one virtual medal is inserted, and when the first credit input switch 56 is operated in a situation where the one-copy bet mode flag is not set, three virtual medals are inserted.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S4802 that the one-coin bet mode flag is not set, that is, the second credit input switch 57 is operated in a situation where the one-coin bet mode flag is not set. In this case, in step S4803, processing is performed to set the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 to one. In the following step S4804, a one-coin bet mode flag is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4802 that the one-coin bet mode flag is set, that is, if the second credit input switch 57 is operated while the one-coin bet mode flag is set, then step In S4805, processing is performed to set the number of medals to be inserted to three based on the operation of the first credit input switch 56. In the following step S4806, the one bet mode flag is cleared.

After performing the processing in step S4804 or step S4806, a bet number switching command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4807. If it is determined in step S4801 that the second credit input switch 57 has not been operated, or after executing the process in step S4807, this switching process ends.

That is, in this modification 8, the number of medals inserted is switched based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 based on the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57. By doing this, for example, when trying to play a game in a specific mode, when the second credit input switch 57 is operated once, the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit input switch 56 corresponds to the specific mode. Therefore, in the specific mode, it is possible to operate the first credit input switch 56 instead of the second credit input switch 57 to play the game. In other words, although the number of bets is different between the normal game mode and the specific mode, the operation buttons when inserting medals are the same, making the pseudo experience of the normal gaming mode more realistic in the specific mode. can.

For example, in the normal game mode, if the specified number is 3 bets during the normal game state or bonus state, and the specified number is 2 bets during the CB state, depending on which state the MAX bet is It is possible to vary the number of virtual medals inserted. On the other hand, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed only in the display control device 81, and is not performed via the main control device 101. Therefore, if the game mode is switched, the number of virtual medals inserted at the time of MAX bet will be automatically changed (three virtual medals are inserted in the normal game mode, and one virtual medal is inserted in the specific mode). ) configuration, the operation information of the second effect switch 67 for switching the game mode can be output from the display control device 81 to the main control device 101, or the second effect switch 67 can be connected to the main control device 101. It becomes necessary to do something. In this case, the processing load on the main control device 101 may increase, and the amount of information input to the main control device 101 increases, making it easier for fraudulent acts to occur. Undesirable. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to improve the operability of the game in a specific mode without increasing the information input to the main control device 101.

In addition, if the configuration is such that the number of virtual medals inserted at the time of MAX bet is automatically changed by switching to the game mode, the second performance switch 67 is connected to the main control device 101 and the game mode is switched. What is necessary is to make it possible for the main control device 101 to understand this.

In the above modification 8, it is not necessary to provide the second credit input switch 57 with the same or approximately the same size as the first credit input switch 56. For example, the configuration is such that the second credit input switch 57 is provided with the same or approximately the same size as the third credit input switch 58. You can also use it as As a result, since the size of the second credit input switch 57 is reduced, the area in which each of the credit input switches 56 to 58 is installed can be narrowed, and space can be secured for installation of other accessories (effect buttons, etc.). becomes possible.

<Modification 9>
In this modification 9, the configuration of the identification display indicating that the specific mode is in progress is different.

As shown in FIGS. 125(a) and 125(b), in this modification 9, an identification accessory 65b and a switching drive unit 65c that switches the position of the identification accessory 65b are provided. There is. The switching drive unit 65c is connected to the display control device 81, and by controlling the switching drive unit 65c by the CPU 181, the identification accessory 65b is set at a position that does not overlap with the auxiliary display unit 65 in the front-rear direction. 125(a)) and a specific position (FIG. 125(b)) set at a position overlapping the auxiliary display section 65 in the front-rear direction.

When the game mode is set to the normal game mode, the CPU 181 drives and controls the switching drive unit 65c to place the identification accessory 65b in the normal position, and when the game mode is set to the specific mode, In this step, the switching drive unit 65c is drive-controlled so that the identification accessory 65b is placed at a specific position.

By doing so, it becomes easier to visually determine whether or not the game mode is the specific mode, and it becomes possible to use each performance data of the normal game mode as is in the specific mode. This eliminates the need to incorporate the image data of the stamp 65a into the performance data of the normal game mode, and it is possible to significantly reduce the processing load during the specific mode.

The normal position of the identification accessory 65b and the position where the switching drive part 65c is provided are, for example, set on the back side of the upper lamp 63, so that it is not visible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. good. Thereby, in the normal game mode, the identification accessory 65b and the switching drive section 65c do not get in the way, and the player can play the game without being particularly conscious of the specific mode.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the handling of a specific mode in a 1-bet game. Specifically, the specific mode of the 1-bet game in this embodiment becomes executable when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal game mode of the 3-bet game.

FIG. 126 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the second credit input switch 57 in the first embodiment is formed to have the same or substantially the same size as the third credit input switch 58, and is arranged to the left of the first credit input switch 56. ing. Further, in this embodiment, the second performance switch 67 for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not provided.

A fourth credit input switch 69 is provided on the decorative panel 80 located below the locations where the stop switches 42 to 44 are provided. The fourth credit input switch 69 is for inputting one virtual medal. The fourth credit input switch 69 is connected to the main control device 101. More specifically, a fourth credit input detection sensor (not shown) that individually detects the operation of the fourth credit input switch 69 is connected to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 of the main controller 101. When the 4 credit input switch 69 is operated, a detection signal from the 4 credit input detection sensor is output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104. Based on receiving the detection signal, the CPU 102 determines that one virtual medal has been inserted.

The fourth credit input switch 69 is a switch that can be pressed from the front side to the back side of the slot machine 10, and can be operated with the other credit input switches 56 to 58 that can be pressed downward. The directions are different. Further, the fourth credit input switch 69 is provided larger than the other credit input switches 56 to 58, and specifically has an oval shape (about 15 cm in major axis and about 8 cm in short axis) the size of an adult's palm. ing. Therefore, it is an operation button that attracts the player's attention more easily than the other credit input switches 56 to 58, and when operating the fourth credit input switch 69, the operation position and operation direction are different from the others. , it is easy to give the impression that a special movement is being performed.

FIG. 127 shows a lottery table for a specific mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, unlike the lottery table (FIG. 76) in the first embodiment, point values PV are allocated to index values IV=51, 63 to 65, 68, and 79, while other index values The point value PV of IV is set to 0. Therefore, index value IV = 51 (special replay), index value IV = 63 (special strong cherry), index value IV = 64 (special weak cherry), index value IV = 65 (special watermelon), index value IV = 68 (special middle bell), you can win if the index value IV = 79 (special red 7 combination), while other index values IV = 50, 52 ~ 62, 66 ~ 67, 69 ~ 78, 80 ~ 99. In that case, you will not be selected. Also in this embodiment, in the lottery table of the specific mode, the point values PV of index values IV = 0 to 49 are all set to 0, and the winning combinations that can be won during the normal game mode are the same as those during the specific mode. will not be elected. In addition, in the first embodiment, winning when the index value IV = 79 is during the special bonus state, but in this embodiment, winning when the index value IV = 79 is achieved even during the normal gaming state. It is possible. Therefore, although the winning combination with the index value IV=79 was referred to as the "special BB middle red 7 matching combination" in the first embodiment, in this embodiment it may also be simply referred to as the "special red 7 matching combination". shall be.

Almost equal point values PV are set for each index value IV=51, 63 to 65, 68, and 79, respectively. In other words, when playing in a specific mode, there is about a 1/6 probability of winning the special replay, about a 1/6 probability of winning the special strong cherry, and about a 1/6 probability of winning the special weak cherry. There is a probability of winning the cherry, about a 1/6 chance of winning the special middle bell, and a probability of about 1/6 of winning the special red 7 combination.

The winning modes and benefits of the special replay, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special middle bell, and special red 7-set combination are the same as in the first embodiment, and all of them are the same as the above-mentioned first embodiment. A prize is won by stopping on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R when the same number as the number that results in a cherry prize, a weak cherry prize, a middle bell prize, or a red 7 winning combination stops on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, the active lines set according to each number of bets are also the same as in the first embodiment.

The specific mode using the 1-bet game in this embodiment can be executed in a part of the case where the lottery for adding up the number of consecutive games in the attack mode is won.

<Summary of additions by specific modes>
With reference to FIG. 128, an overview of addition by the specific mode in this embodiment will be explained.

In the normal game mode, when the display mode is attack mode or higher, if you win a specific combination such as watermelon, strong cherry, weak cherry, middle bell, chance A or B, as in the first embodiment, In addition to a display mode transition lottery being held according to the current display mode, an additional attack mode lottery is also held.

In this embodiment, if you win an additional lottery, the number of consecutive games will be increased based on the number of additional games table corresponding to the specific role won in the additional lottery, and the number of consecutive games will be increased based on the winning role by executing a specific mode. Depending on the situation, the number of consecutive games may be increased. In the following explanation, a top-up performed at a table corresponding to a specific combination won in the top-up lottery will be referred to as a normal top-up, and a top-up according to a winning combination won by executing a specific mode will be referred to as a special top-up.

In normal add-on, after the game in which the above-mentioned specific winning combination is won or the bonus ends, the number of games is added according to the specific winning lottery. It is executed as an additional performance.

On the other hand, in the special bet, first, a special bet instruction effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 etc. to prompt the user to operate the fourth credit insertion switch 69. In the special bet instruction performance, for example, the fourth credit input switch 69 is called the "Dodeka button", and the auxiliary display section 65 displays a message saying "Press the Dodeka button!!", and the special bet instruction performance is A sound effect is emitted from the speaker 64. The sound effect is, for example, a loud electronic sound such as "Zuba-ba-ba-ba-ba-bang!!", which is set as a sound that allows the player to clearly recognize that an operation different from a normal bet operation should be performed.

After the special bet instruction performance and after the fourth credit input switch 69 is operated, a special start instruction performance that prompts the operator to operate the start lever 41 is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. In the special start instruction performance, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a message saying "Put up your spirit and hit the lever!!". When a start operation (operation of the start lever 41) is performed based on the special start instruction performance, a sound effect for the special start operation instruction performance is emitted from the speaker 64. The sound effect may be, for example, a low electronic sound "Dun", which is a starting operation that has a different effect from a normal starting operation (in a normal starting operation, for example, a high electronic sound "Thun"). The sound is set so that the player can understand what has happened, and also encourages a calm stop operation so as to make the player look forward to the subsequent game content.

Based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, one medal is inserted. When the start lever 41 is operated while the one-bet bet is being made, the game is started as a one-bet game, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. In the 1-bet game, as described above, the player wins any of the special replay, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special middle bell, and special red 7-set combination.

When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, one of the above-mentioned special winning combinations is won. For example, the figure shows that a special watermelon prize has been won. In the special add-on, the number of add-on games this time is determined based on the winning special watermelon, and an add-on performance corresponding to the determined number of games is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like.

Special add-ons through games in a specific mode are more likely to result in a larger number of games than normal add-ons that do not involve games in a specific mode. Therefore, when a special winning combination is won and an extra bonus occurs, the player expects a special bonus to occur.

<Processing for special additions>
Hereinafter, a description will be given of processing when the number of consecutive games in attack mode is increased in this embodiment.

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the second specific combination process is a process executed as one process of the lottery result corresponding process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 47).

That is, if a negative determination is made in step S911 in the flowchart of FIG. 47, or after executing the process of step S913 (after executing the process for promoting the attack mode), the process advances to step S4901 shown in FIG. 129. In step S4901, similar to the process in step S914, a lottery process for adding up the number of games in attack mode is performed.

In the following step S4902, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery based on the processing result of step S4901. If the winning combination has not been won, the second specific combination processing is immediately ended. If it has been won, the process advances to step S4903, and it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set or not, that is, if the current specific winning combination has been won in a winning combination with a bonus, or if the specific winning combination has been won while the bonus has been carried over. Determine whether it is a role. This process is similar to the process in step S916 above.

If the bonus winning flag is not set, special additional lottery processing is executed in step S4904. In the special add-on lottery process, a special add-on occurrence table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and counters for lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e. In the special add-on occurrence table, the probability of special add-on occurrence differs depending on the type of specific combination won in the add-on lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, there is a pattern in which the higher the probability of winning each specific combination, the lower the probability of special additions occurring, and the higher the probability of winning each specific combination, the lower the probability of special additions. There are patterns that are set so that the probability of occurrence is high. For example, the probability of winning a watermelon is approximately 1/144 (including 1 and 2 duplicate watermelons, Figure 31, etc.), and the probability of winning a strong cherry is approximately 1/218 (including 1 and 2 duplicate strong cherries, Figure 31). 31, etc.), and the probability of winning a strong cherry is lower than the probability of winning a watermelon. In the special add-on occurrence table, the special add-on is more likely to occur when an add-on is based on a strong cherry win than when an add-on is based on a watermelon win.

On the other hand, the probability of winning a weak cherry is approximately 1/169 (including 1 and 2 duplicate weak cherries, as shown in FIG. 31), and the probability of winning a watermelon is higher than the probability of winning a weak cherry. In the special add-on generation table, the special add-on is more likely to occur when the win is based on a watermelon win than when the win is based on a weak cherry win.

In other words, in the special add-on occurrence table, the probability of occurrence of the special add-on is set regardless of the relationship between the high and low winning probabilities of specific combinations in the normal game mode.

In step S4905, it is determined whether or not it is a special additional winning based on the processing result of step S4904. In the case of non-winning, the same processes as steps S917 to S919 described above are performed in steps S4906 to S4908, and then the second specific combination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that the special bonus win has been won, in step S4909, processing is performed to add 1 to the bonus counter in the various counter areas 106e. In the following step S4910, a special additional flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The add-on counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times a special add-on has occurred, and the special add-on flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to know that the situation is such that a special add-on should be executed.

In the following step S4911, a special additional command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special addition command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to understand that a special addition will be generated in the next game, that is, that the next game should be executed in a specific mode. The display control device 81 that has received the special add-on command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like to execute the above-mentioned special bet instruction performance as a performance at the end of the current game.

If it is determined in step S4903 that the bonus winning flag is set, this means that the current add-on is carried over after the bonus ends, and in this case, the process advances to step S4912. In step S4912, a special bonus lottery process is executed as in step S4904. Then, in step S4913, it is determined whether or not there is a special bonus win. If it is a non-win, a process of setting an attack mode bonus flag is performed in step S4914. This process is similar to the process in step S920 above. If it is a special bonus win in step S4913, a process of adding 1 to the bonus counter is performed in step S4915.

After executing the processing in step S4908, step S4911, step S4914, or step S4915, the second specific combination processing ends.

The third specific combination processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 131. As already explained, the third specific combination process is a process executed as one process of the lottery result corresponding process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 48).

In step S5001, an attack mode game number addition lottery process is executed. This process is similar to step S1001. In step S5002, based on the processing result of step S5001, it is determined whether or not there is an additional winning. If the winning combination has not been won, the third specific combination processing is immediately ended. If the winner has been won, the same processes as steps S4903 to S4915 described above are performed in steps S5003 to S5015. That is, for example, if the special bonus lottery process is performed in step S5005 or step S5012, and if the special bonus lottery is not won, the normal bonus lottery process is performed, and if the special bonus lottery is won, the special bonus lottery process is performed. Perform processing.

Next, the termination determination process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 132. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed as one process of the bonus state process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 54).

FIG. 132 shows the process when a negative determination is made in step S1511 in FIG. 54. That is, if the remaining number of payouts becomes 0 (step S1504: YES) and the attack mode winning flag, challenge mode winning flag, and VB mode winning flag are not set when the bonus ends, the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S5101. It is determined whether the mode additional winning flag is set. If set, normal addition processing is performed in steps S5102 to S5204, similar to steps S1513 to S1515 above.

If it is determined in step S5101 that the attack mode addition flag is not set, it is determined in step S5105 whether the addition counter is 0 or not. As described above, when performing a special add-on after the end of the bonus, the add-on counter is added (step S4915, step S5015). If it is determined in step S5105 that the addition counter is 0, the process advances to step S1516, and processing for addition in the challenge mode is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5105 that the add-on counter is not 0, special add-on processing is performed in steps S5106 and S5107, similar to steps S4910 and S4911 described above. After executing the process of step S5104 or step S5107, the end determination process ends.

Next, the specialized zone processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 133. As already explained, the specialized zone process is a process executed as one process of the lottery result corresponding process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 55).

In step S5201, similar to step S1601, processing is performed to grasp the lottery result of the current game. In the following step S5202, a special bonus lottery process is executed, similar to the process in step S4904 and the like. In addition, in the lottery process of step S5202, the probability of occurrence of a special add-on may be made different from that in other lottery processes, and specifically, the probability of occurrence of a special add-on may be made more likely than in other lottery processes.

In step S5203, it is determined whether or not it is a special additional winning based on the processing result of step S5202. In the case of non-winning, normal add-on processing is performed in steps S5204 to S5206 in the same manner as steps S1602 to S1604. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5203 that there is a special bonus win, the process for the special bonus is performed in steps S5207 to S5209 in the same manner as steps S4909 to S4911. After executing the process of step S5206 or step S5209, the specialized zone process ends.

Next, the lottery result handling process at the time of special addition will be explained.

FIG. 134(a) is a flowchart showing part of the lottery result handling process in this embodiment. As already explained, the lottery result corresponding process is a process performed as one process of the lottery process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 45).

In this embodiment, first, in step S5301, the number of bets for the current game is determined. If the number of bets is not a one-coin bet corresponding to the specific mode, the process advances to step S701, and processing for the normal game mode is performed. On the other hand, if the current game is a 1-card bet, in step S5302, a specific mode lottery result corresponding process is executed, and then this corresponding process is ended.

FIG. 134(b) is a flowchart showing the specific mode lottery result handling process.

In step S5401, it is determined whether the special addition flag is set. That is, in this embodiment as well, the 1-bet game can be played in modes other than the specific mode, and in step S5401 it is determined whether the game was played in the specific mode. If it is not the specific mode, this corresponding processing is immediately ended.

If it is the specific mode, the process advances to step S5402, and it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a special watermelon win. If the special watermelon has been won, in step S5403, processing is performed to acquire the special watermelon table as the current additional table from the various table storage area 105a.

FIG. 135(a1) shows a special watermelon table that is selected as the top-up table when a special watermelon is won, and FIG. 135(b1) shows a watermelon table that is selected as a top-up table when a watermelon is won. As shown in FIGS. 135(a1) and 135(b1), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when winning a special watermelon is different from the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when winning a watermelon, and A greater number of games are selected when the watermelon is won than when the watermelon is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5402, it is determined in step S5404 whether or not the current lottery result is a special strong cherry win. If the special strong cherry is won, in step S5405, processing is performed to obtain the special strong cherry table as the current additional table from the various table storage area 105a.

FIG. 135 (a2) shows a special strong cherry table that is selected as an additional table when a special strong cherry is won, and FIG. 135 (b2) shows a strong cherry table that is selected as an additional table when a strong cherry is won. There is. As shown in FIGS. 135(a2) and 135(b2), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when winning a special strong cherry is different from the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when winning a strong cherry, A greater number of games are selected when a special strong cherry is won than when a strong cherry is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5404, it is determined in step S5406 whether or not the current lottery result is a special weak cherry win. If the special weak cherry is won, in step S5407, a process is performed to acquire the special weak cherry table as the current additional table from the various table storage area 105a.

FIG. 135 (a3) shows a special weak cherry table that is selected as an additional table when a special weak cherry is won, and FIG. 135 (b3) shows a weak cherry table that is selected as an additional table when a weak cherry is won. There is. As shown in FIGS. 135(a3) and 135(b3), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when winning a special weak cherry is different from the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when winning a weak cherry, A greater number of games are selected when a special weak cherry is won than when a weak cherry is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5406, it is determined in step S5408 whether or not the current lottery result is a special middle bell win. If the special middle bell is won, in step S5409, a process is performed to obtain the special middle bell table as the current additional table from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 135 (a4) shows a special middle bell table that is selected as an additional table when the special middle bell is won, and FIG. 135 (b4) shows a middle bell table that is selected as an additional table when the middle bell is won. There is. As shown in FIGS. 135(a4) and 135(b4), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special middle bell is won is different from the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the middle bell is won. A greater number of games are selected when the special middle bell is won than when the middle bell is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5408, it is determined in step S5410 whether or not the current lottery result is a special replay win. If it is a special replay win, in step S5411, a process is performed to obtain a special replay table as the current additional table from the various table storage area 105a.

FIG. 135 (a5) shows a special replay table that is selected as a top-up table when a special replay is won, and FIG. 135 (b5) shows a replay table that is selected as a top-up table when a replay is won. Unlike other special special combinations, in the normal game mode, there is no additional bonus when winning a replay during the attack mode. The replay winnings are added only in specialized zones, and this replay table shows a table for specialized zones. As shown in FIG. 135 (a5) and FIG. 135 (b5), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when winning a special replay is different from the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when winning a replay in the specialized zone. Therefore, more games are selected when winning a special replay than when winning a replay in a specialized zone. That is, even compared to the winnings added during the special zone, a larger number of games will be added when the special winning combination is won. Furthermore, even on the top-up tables in the specialized zones for other specific roles, when compared to the top-up tables when the special specific roles are won, the number of top-up games when winning the special specific roles is higher than the number of top-up games when the special specific roles are won. This is more than the number of additional games at the time of winning the winning combination.

A negative determination in step S5410 means that the current lottery result in the specific mode is a special red 7 combination winning combination. In this case, in step S5412, a process is performed to obtain a special red 7 combination table as the current add-on table from the various table storage area 105a.

FIG. 135 (a6) shows a special red 7-match table that is selected as a top-up table when a special red 7-match occurs, and FIG. 135 (b6) shows a red 7-match table that is selected as a top-up table when a red 7 match occurs. It shows. Unlike other special specific combinations, in the normal game mode, the red 7 combination occurs only during the bonus. A table with red 7s indicates a table with a bonus. As shown in FIG. 135 (a6) and FIG. 135 (b6), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special red 7 is set is different from the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the red 7 is set during the bonus. Therefore, a larger number of games is selected when there are 7 special reds than when there are 7 reds during the bonus.

After executing the processing in step S5403, step S5405, step S5407, step S5409, step S5411, or step S5412, in step S5413, an attack mode game number addition process is executed. In this process, the number of additional games for the current special add-on determined by referring to the table and lottery counter obtained in each of the above processes is added to the number of consecutive games in the attack mode being executed.

Thereafter, in step S5414, a process is performed to set the additional command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this corresponding process is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the top-up command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like to generate a top-up effect corresponding to the end of the current game (when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped).

As described above, in this embodiment, by using each special specific combination corresponding to each specific combination in which an attack mode addition may occur, a special additional effect is created in which the number of additional games is different from the number of additional games in each specific combination. I do. As shown in the first embodiment, each specific combination and each special specific combination are different combinations, but the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R appear to have the same stop result.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a watermelon win, a "watermelon" symbol will stop at the top of the left reel, a "watermelon" symbol will stop at the middle of the middle reel, a "watermelon" symbol will stop at the bottom of the right reel, and the corresponding The watermelon prize is established. Then, an additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the watermelon combination may occur. On the other hand, if it is a special watermelon win, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel, and the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bottom row of the right reel, then the right reel The "red bell" symbol will stop in the middle row, and the special watermelon winning combination will be established. In this case, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped at the bottom of the right reel, and the appearance of the winning special watermelon winning combination is the same as that of the winning watermelon winning combination. Then, an additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the special watermelon combination may occur. Therefore, considering the stopping results of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R and the situation in which the top-up occurred, it is possible that the player may be made to think that the top-up effect corresponding to the special watermelon win was caused by the watermelon win. can. By doing this, it becomes possible to make the additional performance corresponding to winning a special specific role such as a special watermelon role appear as a type of additional performance corresponding to winning a specific role such as a watermelon role.

Here, as a type of additional effect corresponding to winning a specific role such as the watermelon role, it is also possible to set a special additional effect in which an additional number of games occurs, such as the above-mentioned special watermelon role. However, if you do so, the additional effect corresponding to winning a specific role may become complicated, and winning a specific role becomes a condition for the special additional effect, so depending on the winning probability of the specific role, the special additional effect may be Inconveniences may occur, such as a player not being able to win a specific role even though he or she wants to do so. On the other hand, if the probability of winning a particular combination is increased too much, problems such as the ball payout rate may occur. Therefore, as in this embodiment, since the specific role and the special specific role are set as different roles, each role is associated with an additional effect, and only the additional effect corresponding to the winning of a specific role becomes complicated, which is an inconvenience. By adjusting the winning rate of each role, it is possible to suitably generate an additional effect corresponding to the winning of a specific role and the above-mentioned special additional effect.

Moreover, both the specific winning combination and the special specific winning combination can occur without a transition of the gaming state due to, for example, winning a bonus. Specifically, if you play in the normal game mode of a 3-bet game or 2-bet game in the normal gaming state, you can win a specific winning combination, and if you play in the specific mode of a 1-bet game, you can win a special winning combination. You can win. In other words, these specific winning combinations and special specific winning combinations can be won by simply making different bet numbers in the same gaming state without changing the gaming state. In this case, it is not possible to identify which role has been won/won depending on the gaming state.

As mentioned above, changing the number of bets determines which role wins/wins, so if you want to generate the above special additional effect with a special specific role, you can easily do it by simply switching the number of bets. It becomes possible to do so. By doing so, it becomes possible to generate the above-mentioned special additional effect at the designed timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the commonality of the stop results, various measures are taken to reduce the distinguishability between the specific winning combination and the special specific winning combination. Each will be explained below.

<Configuration that reduces the distinguishability between a special specific role and a specific role>
As mentioned above, the special specific combination including the special replay and special red 7 set and the corresponding specific combination have the same stopping numbers on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R at the time of winning, and which of the special combinations is the winning combination. It is becoming difficult to identify what is being done. In this embodiment, in addition to the commonality regarding the stop result, there is a configuration for reducing the distinguishability between these special specific combinations and specific combinations.

<Commonality of performance when betting>
As a configuration for reducing the distinguishability between a special specific winning combination and a specific winning combination, first, the commonality of the performance at the time of bet will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 136, when making a bet in the normal game mode, which includes normal additions, for example, if the situation before the bet is in the attack mode, the auxiliary display section 65 shows the amount of money earned during the current attack mode. The total number obtained is displayed as the "number obtained" (the figure shows that 54 pieces have been obtained). Further, the number of coins that were paid out in the previous game when winning was established is displayed on the payout number display section 62 (the figure shows that nine coins were paid out in the previous game). The credit display section 60 displays the number of virtual medals that are currently being credited (the figure shows that 50 virtual medals, which is the maximum number, are being credited).

In the above-mentioned pre-bet situation, for example, if the first credit input switch 56 is operated and a bet is made for three cards, the display of the total number of winnings on the auxiliary display section 65 will not correspond to the current number of bets. Specifically, the display is updated to show the total number of acquired cards decreased by 3. Furthermore, the display on the payout number display section 62 is turned off to indicate that the next game can be started based on the bet operation. Then, in the credit display section 60, the display of the number of credits before the bet is updated to the display of the number of credits with the current bet number reduced.

In addition, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the current bet operation (sound effect when 3 coins are bet). For example, in the sound effect when 3 coins are bet, "bebebe" is emitted three times in correspondence with the number of bets. Note that the sound effect when betting one card is "be", and the sound effect when betting two cards is "bebe". These bet sound effects may be other sound effects as long as the player can identify the number of bets.

For example, when the above-mentioned special bet instruction performance is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 as a pre-bet situation, the number of games in each game in the attack mode or the total number of wins can be displayed as a performance during a bet operation at the time of special addition. Display will no longer occur. Further, at the timing when the special bet instruction effect is started, the display on the payout number display section 62 and the display on the credit display section 60 are turned off.

In this situation, when the fourth credit input switch 69 is operated and one bet is placed in accordance with the instruction of the special bet instruction presentation, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the special start instruction presentation from the special bet instruction presentation. The screen changes to . Even in the special start instruction performance, the number of games in attack mode and the total number of games won will no longer be displayed. Therefore, unlike when making a normal bet, the display of the total number of wins is not updated based on this bet operation. Further, as described above, the credit display section 60 is turned off. Therefore, the display of the number of credits on the credit display section 60 based on the current bet operation is not updated.

In addition, although the current bet operation corresponds to a 1-card bet, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect for a 3-card bet corresponding to a 3-card bet. In other words, normally, "Be" would be emitted once as a sound effect when betting 1 card corresponding to a 1 card bet, but in the case of a 1 card bet during the special bet, as a sound effect when betting 3 cards, “Bebebe” and “be” are uttered three times.

<Bet operation processing>
Processing for performing each of the above effects will be explained.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the bet operation process. The bet operation process is executed as one process in the bet number in/out counter process in step S109 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) in the main controller 101. The bet operation process is activated at the timing when the bet operation becomes possible (all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and medal payout is completed) in the bet number in/out counter process.

In step S5501, it is determined whether a special addition flag is set. If the special addition flag is set, this indicates that the next game to be started is a game with special additions, and in this case, in step S5502, the special operation instruction command is output to the display control device 81. set. The display control device 81 that has received the special operation instruction command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like to generate the special operation instruction performance based on the end of the game in which the special addition flag is set. In the following step S5503, credit display invisible processing is executed. Specifically, the display on the credit display section 60 and the payout number display section 62 is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step S5501, or after executing the process in step S5503, it is determined in step S5504 whether or not any of the credit input switches 56 to 58, 69 has been operated. Wait until. Based on any of the operations being performed, the process advances to step S5505.

In step S5505, it is determined whether the current operation was an operation of the first credit input switch 56. If the first credit input switch 56 has been operated, a three-copy bet process is executed in step S5506. This process is a process for effectively betting three virtual medals according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than three, it is determined that the bet operation is not valid. In this case, the process returns to step S5504, for example.

If three virtual medals have been effectively bet, in step S5507, processing is performed to subtract 3 corresponding to the current bet number from the credit counter. In this case, the display on the credit display section 60 is updated to a value subtracted by 3. Note that when the display on the credit display section 60 is OFF, only the credit counter is decremented. Then, in step S5508, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a sound effect (beep) is emitted when a three-card bet is made, and then the bet operation process is ended.

If it is determined in step S5505 that the first credit input switch 56 was not operated, it is determined in step S5509 whether or not the third credit input switch 58 was operated. If the third credit input switch 58 has been operated, a two-copy bet process is executed in step S5510. This process is a process for effectively betting two virtual medals according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than two, the bet operation is determined to be invalid. In this case, the process returns to step S5504, for example.

When two virtual medals are effectively bet, a process is performed in which 2 corresponding to the current bet number is subtracted from the credit counter in step S5511. In this case, the display on the credit display section 60 is updated to a value subtracted by 2. Note that when the display on the credit display section 60 is OFF, only the credit counter is decremented. Then, in step S5512, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a sound effect (bebe) is emitted when two cards are bet, and then the bet operation process is ended.

If it is determined in step S5509 that the third credit input switch 58 was not operated, it is determined in step S5513 whether or not the second credit input switch 57 was operated. If the second credit input switch 57 has been operated, a one-copy bet process is executed in step S5514. This process is a process for effectively betting one virtual medal according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than one (0), the bet operation is determined to be invalid. do. In this case, the process returns to step S5504, for example.

When one virtual medal is effectively bet, a process of subtracting 1 corresponding to the current bet number from the credit counter is performed in step S5515. In this case, the display on the credit display section 60 is updated to a value subtracted by 1. Note that when the display on the credit display section 60 is OFF, only the credit counter is decremented. Then, in step S5516, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a sound effect (B) is emitted when one bet is made, and then the bet operation process is ended.

If it is determined in step S5513 that the second credit input switch 57 was not operated, this means that the current credit input switch operation was an operation of the fourth credit input switch 69. In this case, one bet processing is executed in step S5517. This process is similar to the process in step S5514. In the following step S5518, similarly to the process in step S5515, a process of subtracting 1 corresponding to the current bet number from the credit counter is performed.

In step S5519, it is determined whether the special addition flag is set. If the special addition flag is not set, in step S5520, similarly to the process in step S5516, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the sound effect (be) is emitted when one bet is made, and then the bet operation process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5519 that the special add flag is set, then in step S5521 the speaker 64 is controlled so that a sound effect (beep) is emitted when a three-card bet is made. Then, in step S5522, the special start instruction command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the bet operation process is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the special start instruction command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like to generate a special start instruction effect.

As described above, when the special addition flag is set and the fourth credit input switch 69 is operated, the sound effect when 3 cards are bet is emitted. Therefore, it is possible to make it seem as if the current 1-bet game specific mode is a 3-bet game.

Furthermore, in a game that is started with the special add-on flag set, the display on the credit display section 60 is turned off. Therefore, when making a bet, only the credit counter is subtracted, and the credit display section 60 is not updated. This avoids the possibility of being able to clearly identify whether it is a 1-card bet or a 3-card bet just by looking at the credit display section 60.

When the display on the credit display section 60 is turned off, the display on the payout number display section 62 is also turned off. Thereby, unnaturalness can be reduced compared to a configuration in which only the display of the credit display section 60 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to special operation effects and the like.

Even if the special addition flag is set, if the second credit input switch 57 is operated instead of the fourth credit input switch 69, processing for a single bet is performed and the bet is The time sound effect is configured to set a sound effect when a 1-coin bet is made, which corresponds to a 1-coin bet. This is because, in a situation where such a special addition is made, a player who operates the second credit input switch 57 instead of the fourth credit input switch 69 may place a one-copy bet by operating the fourth credit input switch 69. This is because it is thought that they are aware that they will be exposed. Therefore, a sound effect is set when a one-coin bet is made to confirm that a one-coin bet has been made effectively.

Note that in each game, a bet may be placed by inserting medals from the medal slot 45 in addition to operating the credit input switch. A description of the process in this case will be omitted, but regardless of the presence or absence of the special add-on flag, a sound effect (b) is emitted when one bet is made every time one medal is inserted.

Incidentally, the case where the special add-on flag is set is the case where a specific winning combination (prize) has occurred in the previous game, and at least three medals have been paid out. In this case, in a game where a special addition is made, a situation in which the credit counter is 0 is unlikely to occur, and a bet operation can be made by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 without inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45. It becomes. A situation in which the credit counter is 0 is a case where the settlement switch 59 is operated before a game in which a special addition is performed. Similarly to the situation described above, there is a high possibility that the player recognizes that a one-copy bet will be placed by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69.

<Commonality of winning performances>
Next, as a configuration for reducing the distinguishability between the special specific winning combination and the specific winning combination, the commonality of the winning performance will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 138, when a normal win occurs, for example, when the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and a watermelon prize is established, the positions corresponding to these "watermelon" symbols The reels are irradiated with a predetermined light emitting part to generate a flash effect as a watermelon payout. Note that the flash effect can be realized by controlling an existing light emitting unit or the like. When the watermelon winning is established, five medals are paid out as a benefit corresponding to the watermelon winning. In this case, as the medal payout sound effect, a watermelon payout sound effect (for example, a low-pitched "do-do-do-do") is emitted from the speaker 64. Then, an additional effect of the number of games is generated based on the watermelon table when the watermelon is won.

On the other hand, when a special win occurs, for example, when the "Watermelon" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, and "Red Bell" symbol stop on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a special watermelon prize is established, these Instead of each symbol corresponding to the special watermelon (watermelon, watermelon, red bell), the reel at the position corresponding to the "watermelon" symbol is illuminated with a predetermined light emitting part, and a flash effect as the watermelon payout is generated. do. In other words, although it is a special watermelon prize, at the time of special add-on, the above-mentioned watermelon payout, which is an effect that occurs when a watermelon prize is won, occurs. When the special watermelon prize is established, one medal is paid out as a privilege corresponding to the special watermelon prize. In this case, the watermelon payout sound effect described above is emitted from the speaker 64 as the medal payout sound effect. In other words, although the number of medals paid out is one in the special watermelon winning, at the time of special addition, a watermelon payout sound effect is generated as a medal payout sound effect when the watermelon is won. Then, an additional effect of the number of games is generated based on the special watermelon table when the special watermelon is won.

<Payout judgment process>
Processing for performing each of the above effects will be explained.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the payout determination process in this embodiment. As already explained, the payout determination process is a process executed as one process (step S413) of the reel control process (FIG. 32) in the main control device 101.

In step S5601, it is determined whether a payout can occur as a result of the current winning. If a payout is likely to occur, a payout process is performed in step S5602, and then the payout determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5601 that no payout occurs, it is determined in step S5603 whether any re-game winning has been achieved. If any re-game winning is established, re-game processing is performed in step S5604, and then the main payout determination process is ended.

The payout process and the replay process will be explained below.

<Payout processing>
In the payout process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 140, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not a special add-on flag is set. If the special add-on flag is not set and the game played this time is not a game that supports special add-ons, payout settings for the normal game mode are performed in steps S5702 to S5705. On the other hand, if the special add-on flag is set and the game played this time is a game that supports special add-ons, payout settings for the specific mode are performed in steps S5706 to S5728.

As for the payout setting for the normal game mode, first, in step S5702, a process of understanding the number of payouts is performed. In this process, the current number of bets and winning pattern are specified, and the number of payouts corresponding to the specified number of bets and winning pattern is determined. For example, if the current bet number is 3 medals and a bell (first minor role) is won, it is determined that 9 medals will be paid out. Further, if the number of bets this time is 3 and a watermelon (26th minor prize, etc.) winning is established, it is understood that 5 medals will be paid out. Also, if the number of bets this time is 3 and a strong cherry (25th minor role, etc.) is won, a weak cherry (18th minor role, etc.) is won, or a middle bell (29th minor role) is achieved, It is understood that three medals will be paid out. Then, during the bonus, if the current bet number is 3 medals and a winning of 7 reds (30th small winning combination) is achieved, it is determined that 9 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if the number of bets this time is one and the special bell (1st P minor role) winning is established, it is understood that one medal will be paid out. Further, if the number of bets this time is one and a special watermelon (26th P small role, etc.) winning is established, it is determined that one medal will be paid out. Also, the number of bets this time is 1, and a special strong cherry (25th page small role, etc.), a special weak cherry (18th page small role, etc.) is won, or a special middle bell (29th page small role) is won. If so, it is determined that one medal will be paid out. Further, if the number of bets this time is one and the special red 7 set (30th P minor role) winning is established, it is understood that one medal will be paid out.

After performing the process in step S5702, in step S5703, a payout process is executed to pay out the number of medals determined in step S5702. Specifically, the hopper device 51 is controlled so that the determined number of medals are paid out. In this case, the number of payouts is added to the credit counter, and the hopper device 51 is controlled so that the amount of medals exceeding the upper limit of the credit counter is paid out. That is, even if the number of payouts is added to the credit counter, if it is less than the upper limit value of the credit counter, no medals are paid out from the hopper device 51.

In the following step S5704, a payout sound effect corresponding to the winning combination is set. For example, if a watermelon (26th small prize) winning is established, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a watermelon payout sound effect is emitted. Further, if a special watermelon (26th P small winning combination) winning is established, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a special watermelon payout sound effect is emitted. The watermelon payout sound effect and the special watermelon payout sound effect are set to different sounds to the extent that the player can distinguish them.For example, the watermelon payout sound effect is set to the above-mentioned low-pitched "do-do-do-do" sound. The special watermelon dispensing sound is set to a low sound like a "thud" and is shorter than the watermelon dispensing sound effect. Note that the payout sound effects for other specific combinations and the payout sound effects for the special specific combination are also set to different sounds to the extent that the players can identify them. In this case, the payout sound effect is set regardless of whether medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 or not. In other words, even if the number of payouts is simply added to the credit counter, the payout sound effect is set.

In the following step S5705, a payout corresponding to the winning combination is set. For example, if a watermelon (26th small role) winning is established, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for the watermelon. Further, as a watermelon payout, the payout number display section 62 is controlled so that the number 5 is displayed on the payout number display section 62 in correspondence with the above five medal payouts. If the special watermelon (26th P small role) winning is established, a lights-out effect is generated to turn off the light emitting parts illuminating each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R as a payout for the special watermelon. As a special watermelon payout, the payout number display section 62 is controlled so that the number 1 is displayed on the payout number display section 62 in correspondence with the above-mentioned one medal payout. That is, the watermelon payout appearance and the special watermelon payout appearance are different effects so that the player can identify them. In addition, different effects are set for the payouts of other specific roles and the payouts of special specific roles so that players can distinguish them, and the flash effects and lights-out effects on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are different. They can be identified by the difference and the difference in the number of coins to be paid out displayed on the number of coins to be paid out display section 62.

After performing the process of step S5705, the main payout process ends.

As for the payout setting for the specific mode, first, in step S5706, it is determined whether the number of bets in the current game is one as the specific number. If it is not one coin, the process advances to step S5702, and payout settings for the normal game mode are performed.

If the special add-on flag is set and the game is a one-bet bet, the process advances to step S5707. In step S5707, processing is performed to subtract 1 from the addition counter. Then, in step S5708, it is determined whether the addition counter has become 0. If it is 0, the special addition flag is cleared in step S5709. Note that the processing in steps S5707 to S5709 is performed when a plurality of special add-on games occur in succession.

If a negative determination is made in step S5708, or after executing the process in step S5709, the process advances to step S5710. In step S5710, it is determined whether or not a special watermelon (26th P minor prize) winning has been achieved. If the special watermelon prize is established, in step S5711, a payout process corresponding to the special watermelon prize is performed. In this case, unlike the payout process in step S5703 above, it is unlikely that the current payout number will be added to the credit counter and the upper limit value of the credit counter will be exceeded. That is, the credit counter is decremented by 1 due to the 1-copy bet in the current specific mode, and even if 1, which is the current payout number, is added, the upper limit value of the credit counter will not be exceeded. The configuration is as described above, in which medals are not paid out when the upper limit value of the credit counter is not exceeded, and the hopper device 51 is controlled to pay out medals only when the upper limit value of the credit counter is exceeded. Note that the actual medal payout occurs when the credit counter is at the upper limit before starting the specific mode, and the specific mode is executed with one medal inserted from the medal slot 45. . This payout process is the same for other special specific combination winnings.

In the following step S5712, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a watermelon payout sound effect is emitted in response to the watermelon winning instead of the special watermelon winning that is the current winning result. In this case, the payout sound effect is set regardless of whether actual medal payout is performed or not. Then, in step S5713, a watermelon payout is controlled so as to correspond to the watermelon winning instead of the special watermelon winning that is the current winning result. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a watermelon payout appearance. However, as described above, when the special add-on occurs, the display on the payout number display section 62 is OFF, so the processing for displaying the payout number is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5710 that the special watermelon winning has not been achieved, it is determined in step S5714 whether or not a special strong cherry winning (25th P small prize, etc.) has been achieved. If the special strong cherry winning is established, in step S5715, payout processing corresponding to the special strong cherry winning is performed.

In the subsequent step S5716, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a strong cherry payout sound effect is emitted in response to the strong cherry winning instead of the special strong cherry winning that is the current winning result. Then, in step S5717, control is performed so that the payout for strong cherries is made in correspondence with the winning of strong cherries rather than the winning of special strong cherries, which is the winning result of this time. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for strong cherries. However, as described above, when the special add-on occurs, the display on the payout number display section 62 is OFF, so the processing for displaying the payout number is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5714 that a special strong cherry prize has not been established, it is determined in step S5718 whether a special weak cherry prize (such as the 18th P minor prize) has been established. If the special weak cherry winning is established, in step S5719, a payout process corresponding to the special weak cherry winning is performed.

In the subsequent step S5720, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a weak cherry payout sound effect is emitted in response to the weak cherry winning instead of the special weak cherry winning that is the current winning result. Then, in step S5721, the payout for weak cherries is controlled so as to correspond to the weak cherry winning instead of the special weak cherry winning that is the current winning result. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for weak cherries. However, as described above, when the special add-on occurs, the display on the payout number display section 62 is OFF, so the processing for displaying the payout number is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5718 that the special weak cherry winning has not been established, it is determined in step S5722 whether or not a special middle bell (such as the 29th P small winning combination) winning has been established. If the special middle bell winning is established, in step S5723, a payout process corresponding to the special middle bell winning is performed.

In the subsequent step S5724, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the payout sound effect for the middle bell is emitted in response to the winning of the middle bell instead of the special middle bell winning result that is the current winning result. Then, in step S5725, the payout for the middle bell is controlled so as to correspond to the winning of the middle bell instead of the special middle bell winning result that is the winning result this time. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for the middle bell. However, as described above, when the special add-on occurs, the display on the payout number display section 62 is OFF, so the processing for displaying the payout number is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5722 that the special middle bell winning has not been established, it means that the winning result in the current specific mode is a special red 7 set (30th P minor prize) winning. In this case, in step S5726, a payout process corresponding to the special red 7-set winning is performed.

In the subsequent step S5727, the speaker 64 is controlled so as to emit a payout sound effect for red 7 sets in response to a red 7 match win instead of the special red 7 match winning result that is the current winning result. Then, in step S5728, control is performed so that a payout for red 7 sets is performed in response to a red 7 set win instead of the special red 7 set win that is the winning result this time. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for a set of red sevens. However, as described above, when the special add-on occurs, the display on the payout number display section 62 is OFF, so the processing for displaying the payout number is not performed.

After performing any of the processes in step S5713, step S5717, step S5721, step S5725, and step S5728, the payout setting for the specific mode is completed, and the payout process is ended.

<Replay processing>
Next, the re-gaming process in the payout determination process (FIG. 139) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 141.

In step S5801, it is determined whether a special add-on is set. If the special add-on is not set, processing for the normal game mode is performed in steps S5802 and S5803. On the other hand, if the special addition flag is set, processing for the specific mode is performed in steps S5804 to S5809.

That is, as a process for the normal game mode, in step S5802, a bet sound effect setting process is performed. In this process, a bet sound effect is set to correspond to the fact that a number of re-bets are made in accordance with the number of bets in the currently executed game. Specifically, when a re-play winning occurs in a 3-bet game, a sound effect (bebebe) is set when a 3-bet bet occurs, and when a 2-bet bet occurs when a re-play winning occurs in a 2-bet game, a sound effect is set when a 2-bet bet occurs. A sound effect (bebe) is set, and when a replay win occurs in a 1-bet game, a sound effect (bebe) is set when a 1-bet bet is made. These set bet sound effects are output from the speaker 64 when virtual medals are automatically inserted into the next game based on the replay winnings. Specifically, an automatic insertion process is performed in the start waiting process in the normal process (FIG. 28), and a bet sound effect set in accordance with this automatic insertion is output.

The re-bet process in step S5803 that follows is a process that prepares to automatically bet a number corresponding to the number of bets on the game executed this time in the start waiting process (step S204) in the normal process (FIG. 28). It is. Specifically, in the case of a 3-bet game, a 3-card automatic insertion flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d so that a 3-card bet is placed in the start waiting process, and in the case of a 2-bet game, a 2-card bet is started. A two-sheet automatic insertion flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d so that the flag is placed in the various flag storage area 106d so that the flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and one bet is set in the various flag storage area 106d so that one bet is placed in the start waiting process in the case of a one-bet game. Set the automatic input flag. In the start waiting process, by checking these automatic insertion flags, it is possible to identify that a replay winning was achieved in the previous game, and the number of virtual medals corresponding to the set automatic insertion flag is automatically inserted. Perform processing. Then, upon the automatic insertion, the bet sound effect set in step S5802 is output. After performing the process of step S5803, the replay process ends.

If the special addition flag is set in step S5801, as processing for a specific mode, it is determined in step S5804 whether or not the current game is a 1-bet game. If it is not a 1-bet game, the process advances to step S5802, and processing for the normal game mode is performed. If it is a 1-bet game, the add-on counter is subtracted in step S5805. Then, in step S5806, it is determined whether the add-on counter is 0 or not, and if it is 0, the special add-on flag is cleared in step S5807. The processing in steps S5805 to S5807 corresponds to the processing in steps S5707 to S5709.

If the add-on counter is not 0 in step S5806, or after executing the process in step S5807, a process is performed to set a sound effect when betting 3 coins in step S5808. Then, in step S5809, as a special re-bet process, a one-coin automatic insertion flag is set so that a one-coin bet is made in the start waiting process. As a result, in the next game when a special replay winning is achieved with the special addition, one virtual medal is automatically inserted, and a sound effect is output when three medals are bet. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to realize that the game in which the special addition was made was a 1-bet game. Thereafter, the replay process ends.

As mentioned above, in a specific mode where special additions are made, if a special specific winning combination is achieved, one medal is paid out as the corresponding benefit, while the payout sound effect and payout appearance are The payout sound effects and payout appearances corresponding to the specific winning combination are set, rather than those corresponding to the specific winning combination. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which one of the specific winning combination and the special specific winning winning combination has been won.

On the other hand, even if a special specific win is achieved, if the game is played in a situation where the special addition flag is not set, the special specific win will not be the payout sound effect or payout that corresponds to the special win. A value corresponding to a prize is set. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the special add-on is not valid, and for example, even though a special red 7 set prize is established in a 1-bet game in the normal gaming state, the add-on is not effective. You can make things that don't occur seem unnatural.

In the special add-on, when a special re-game winning is established, one virtual medal is automatically inserted, and a sound effect is emitted when three medals are bet. By doing this, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether a special replay win was established in a game in which a special add-on was performed, or whether a special replay win was established simply by playing a 1-bet game regardless of the special add-on. can be done.

<Modification 1>
In the present modification example 1, when determining the top-up game at the time of special top-up, the game result that triggered the special top-up is taken into consideration. In other words, the configuration is such that the benefits in the specific mode are determined by taking into consideration not only the gaming results in the specific mode but also the gaming results in the normal gaming mode in which the specific mode is to be executed.

FIG. 142 shows a special add-on lottery table in the first modification. The lottery table for special addition is acquired in each process (step S5403, step S5405, step S5407, step S5409, step S5411, step S5412) of the above-mentioned specific mode lottery result corresponding process.

In the special watermelon table, special strong cherry table, special weak cherry table, and special middle bell table in this modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 142(a) to 142(d), this was the trigger for the additional winning The number of additional games is set to differ depending on the type of specific combination. In this case, the number of add-on games is set to be the largest when the winning combination that triggered the add-on and the current special win correspond (consecutive).

In other words, in the special watermelon table, if the opportunity for an additional win is a watermelon win, and a special watermelon win occurs in a specific mode as a special add-on that is implemented after that, the stoppage will be as if two watermelon wins had occurred in a row. The games with the winning results are consecutive, and in this case, the number of special add-on games is set to be the largest. In addition, in the special strong cherry table, if the trigger for the additional winning is the winning of a strong cherry, and then in a specific mode as a special additional winning, if a special strong cherry is won, it means that the winning of the strong cherry occurs twice in a row. A series of games with a stop result like , etc. will occur in succession, and the number of special add-on games is set to be the largest in this case. In the special weak cherry table, if the opportunity for an additional win is a weak cherry win, and then in a specific mode as a special add-on that is implemented after that, if a special weak cherry is won, it will be as if two consecutive weak cherry wins have occurred. The game is set so that the number of special add-on games is the largest in this case. Regarding the special middle bell table, if the opportunity for an additional win is the middle bell winning, and then in a specific mode as a special add on, if the special middle bell is won, it will be considered as if the middle bell has been won twice in a row. Games with a stop result like this will continue, and in this case it is set so that the number of special add-on games is the largest.

In the special replay table and the special red 7 set table, unlike the other special specific combination tables mentioned above, there is no event in which a specific combination and the corresponding special specific combination are consecutively won. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 142(e) and 142(f), on the special replay table and the special red 7-match table, the number of additional games is increased depending on the type of specific combination that triggered the current additional winning. are configured differently.

By doing the above, the number of add-on games is determined by taking into account the game results in the normal game mode that triggered the occurrence of the special add-on, so the game quality is improved compared to a configuration where the number of add-on games is determined based on the specific mode alone. improves.

In this case, for example, when various specific combinations are won consecutively in the normal game mode, the number of additional games may be determined using a different lottery table than when the winnings are not consecutively won. In this way, the continuity between the specific winning combination in the normal game mode and the special specific winning combination in the specific mode can be associated with the continuity of the specific winning combination in the normal gaming mode. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the continuity with the normal game mode from the continuity with the normal game mode.

<Modification 2>
In this second modification, special BAR replay 1 (IV=61) is set as a winning combination in the lottery table in the specific mode instead of special replay.

As shown in FIG. 143, when the index value IV=61, the winning combinations that can be won when the special BAR replay is won are the 1st special replay, the 6th special replay, and the 7th special replay, unlike in the first embodiment. A special re-game and an eighth special re-game are set.

In each of these special re-games, a re-game is given as a bonus when winning a prize. As shown in FIG. 144, in the first special replay, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel The "red bell" symbol stops at 32R, which is set as the same winning mode as the first rep small win. In addition, for the 6th special replay winning, the "1st replay" symbol or "2nd replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, and the "1st replay" symbol or "2nd replay" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M. However, it is set as a winning mode similar to the above-mentioned 6th P rep small role, in which any one of the "BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, and "Watermelon" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. For the 7th special replay winning, the "1st replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "youth" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. , is set as a winning mode similar to the above-mentioned 7th rep small win. For the 8th special replay winning, the "1st Replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. It is set as a winning mode similar to the Reply Small Win.

When the special BAR replay 1 is won, as shown in FIG. 145, one of the special replays wins regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In this case, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the 7th special re-game (BAR middle row) winning is possible, the 7th special re-game winning is established, and the 7th special re-gaming winning is possible. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at a timing when the above is not established, another special re-game winning is established.

If the special BAR replay 1 is won during the special add-on during the attack mode, the VB mode win will be awarded. In this case, after the special addition ends, the VB mode winning notification is performed without going through the precursor mode for VB mode, and after the 4th and 5th replay winnings are established when the 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 are won, Shift to VB mode.

The state of special addition in Modification 2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 146.

As mentioned above, in the lottery table during the specific mode in this modification 2, there is a case where you can win special BAR replay 1, and if you win the special BAR replay 1, you will win a replay and the next game will also be a 1 bet game. is executed. In other words, in the lottery table in Modified Example 2, there is a 5/6 probability of winning any of the special special combinations of the special watermelon, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, and special red 7 set, and the probability is 1/6. Chances are you will win Special BAR Replay 1. If you win the special special combination with a 5/6 probability of winning, the lottery table for special addition is obtained as described above, the number of additional games is determined, and the number of additional games in attack mode is determined. Occur.

On the other hand, if you win Special BAR Replay 1 with a probability of 1/6, you will be given a VB mode win as well as a replay as a bonus at the time of winning. Then, on the auxiliary display section 65, "VB+1" is displayed indicating that the player has won the VB mode.

In this modification example 2, the special add-on does not end due to the winning of the re-game, and the special add-on is performed in the next game as well. Then, in the next game as well, there is a chance of winning Special BAR Replay 1 with a probability of 1/6. If you win Special BAR Replay 1, you will be given a VB mode win as well as a re-game as a bonus at the time of winning, similar to the above. Then, on the auxiliary display section 65, "VB+1" is displayed indicating that the player has won the VB mode.

As mentioned above, special bonuses will be given in the next game due to replay winnings. In the example of FIG. 146, in this game, instead of special BAR replay 1, a special watermelon is won as a special specific combination, and the corresponding number of games is added. Then, by winning the special special combination, this special addition ends.

In the example shown in FIG. 146, the player has won the VB mode twice. In this case, when the special add-on is completed, a VB mode winning notification is performed, and the first VB mode is executed after the fourth and fifth re-game winnings. When the first VB mode is finished, the normal gaming state is shifted to the first RT state due to the transition result, the second RT state is entered due to the third re-game winning, and then the second RT state due to the fourth and fifth re-gaming winnings. The VB mode is executed for the second time. When the second VB mode ends, the normal gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and at the same time, shifts to the attack mode.

By doing the above, the gameplay is improved when a special add-on is performed. That is, by preventing the special add-on from ending when winning a prize in a re-game, the inconvenience of playing the normal game mode in the 1-bet game after the special add-on is eliminated.

Note that the above configuration may be used, for example, in a specialized zone. Specifically, for the special add-on that occurs during the attack mode, the one of the second embodiment is used, and for the special add-on that occurs during the specialization zone, the one of the second modification is used. By doing this, it is possible to reproduce the situation where top-ups occur continuously in the specialized zone, taking advantage of the inconvenience caused by winning a prize in a re-game.

<Modification 3>
In this modification example 3, in a situation where the special addition flag is set, if a game with a 3-card bet is carried out instead of a 1-card bet, an additional amount is added according to the lottery result in the normal game mode with a 3-card bet. generate. In this modification 3, in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 134(a)), if the number of bets is 3 bets in the process of step S5301, if the special add-on flag is not set, step S701 is executed. The process proceeds to the normal lottery result handling process, and if the special addition flag is set, the process proceeds to substantially the same process as the specific mode lottery result handling process shown in FIG. 134(b). That is, in the case where the number of bets is 3 bets and the special add-on flag is set, each special specific combination is It should be read and applied as a specific role. For example, in the process of determining whether or not a special watermelon has been won in step S5402, it is determined whether or not a watermelon has been won, and if the watermelon has been won, a watermelon table is acquired as a specific combination table for special addition in step S5403.

FIG. 147 shows a special specific combination table for special additions and a specific combination table for special additions. The special specific combination tables shown in FIGS. 147(a1) to 147(a6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 135(a1) to 135(a6). On the other hand, in the special combination table for special combinations, as shown in FIGS. 147(b1) to 147(b4), the number of games is set to be greater than the number of additional games in the special combination table. has been done.

On the other hand, in the replay table shown in FIG. 147(b5), the number of additional games is not set, and no additional games occur. Further, the number of additional games is not set in the red 7-match table shown in FIG. 147 (b6).

That is, in the normal game mode judgment of success or failure, the probability of winning a specific combination is lower than the probability of winning a special specific combination in the specific mode. In this respect, if the special add-on is executed in the normal game mode and a specific combination is won, a larger number of games will be added than when the special add-on is executed in the specific mode and the special specific combination is won. In this way, by allowing the player to select greatly different gameplay features, such as special add-ons performed in a specific mode and special add-ons performed in the normal game mode, it is possible to significantly improve the playability of special add-ons. Become.

Additionally, if a special add-on is carried out in the normal game mode, the add-on will not occur when a replay win occurs. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the imbalance in which winning in a replay with a relatively high probability results in an additional payout even in the normal game mode.

<Modification 4>
In this modification 4, when the fourth credit input switch 69 is operated, there are cases where a one-copy bet is made and a case where a three-copy bet is made. FIG. 148 shows a part of the bet operation process in the fourth modification.

That is, if it is determined in step S5513 in FIG. 137 that the fourth credit input switch 69 has been operated instead of the second credit input switch 57, the process advances to step S5901. In step S5901, it is determined whether the special addition flag is set. If the special add-on flag is set, in steps S5902 to S5904, the processing for the 1-coat bet in steps S5517 and S5518 and the setting process for the sound effect when betting 3 coins in step S5521 are performed.

If the special addition flag is not set in step S5901, a 3-piece bet process is performed in step S5905, a process to subtract 3 from the credit counter is performed in step S5906, and a 3-piece bet effect is performed in step S5907. Set the sound. This processing is similar to the processing in steps S5506 to S5508 described above. After performing the processing in step S5904 or step S5907, the main operation processing ends.

By doing so, the fourth credit input switch 69 can be used even in the normal game mode. In this case, for example, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the fourth credit input switch 69 can be operated in a game in which a normal bonus is generated in the normal game mode. For example, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the number of additional games is notified at the end of one game (when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped), the number of additional games may be notified at the time of bet operation for the next game. do. Then, as a bet operation for the next game, a special operation instruction performance is generated to prompt the operation of the fourth credit input switch 69, and the number of additional games is notified based on the operation of the fourth credit input switch 69. In this way, in the normal game mode, in a game where a specific winning combination is won in a situation where an attack mode add-on may occur, the number of add-on games will be announced at the end of the game, and when the bet for the next game is announced. There are cases in which the notification is performed at the time of operation (when the fourth credit input switch 69 is operated) and cases in which the notification is performed at the end of the next game, and the manner in which the number of additional games is notified can be varied.

In this case, the number of games notified at the time of the bet operation for the next game is likely to be greater than the number of games notified at the end of the specific winning game in the normal game mode. The number of games notified at the end of the next game may be more likely to be the number of games than the number of games to be played. In this way, the configuration can be expected to be more advantageous as the timing of notification is later, and it is possible to draw greater attention to the situation in which additional notification is performed.

The number of games announced at a previous timing may be rewritten by the number of games announced at a later timing. For example, at the end of the game when a specific winning combination is won, the additional timing of, for example, 10 games may be announced, and based on the operation of the fourth credit input switch 69, the additional timing may be rewritten to, for example, 30 games. It may also be configured to rewrite, for example, an additional 100 games at the end of the game based on the result of the game in the mode. In this way, step-by-step additions can be made in conjunction with the player's operations, so the enjoyment of each operation can be greatly improved.

<Modification 5>
In the configuration where both 1 bet and 3 bets are possible based on the operation of the fourth credit input switch 69 as in the above modification 4, the number of bets based on the operation of the fourth credit input switch 69 is It may also be configured so that it is difficult to identify. For example, in Modification 4, when a special operation instruction performance occurs, a game that is started by operating the fourth credit input switch 69 and operating the start lever 41 is played in a specific mode with 1 bet. The configuration is such that it is difficult to understand whether there is a regular game mode with 3 bets or a normal game mode with 3 bets. In this case, if the special add-on is won, the game is a game in a specific mode, and if the special add-on is not won, the game is in the normal game mode.

As described above, by making it difficult to distinguish between a 1-bet game and a 3-bet game from the bet operation, it becomes more difficult for players to understand which of the two games is being played, and It is thought that each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated while hoping to win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the game.

In particular, since it is possible to switch back and forth between the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game without changing the gaming state, it becomes even more difficult to understand which game is being played. As described above, since the configuration is such that it is possible to go back and forth without going through the transition of the gaming state, it is possible to go back and forth between the 1 bet game and the 3 bet game at various timings. It is possible to configure the system to shift from a 3-bet game to a 1-bet game, not only when winning a special bonus as in the embodiment, but also when you want to generate some kind of effect or give some kind of benefit. .

<Modification 6>
In this modification 6, the configuration of the fourth credit input switch 69 is changed. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 in Modification 6.

In the sixth modification, a fifth credit input switch 75 is provided on the opposite side of the start lever 41 across the stop switches 42 to 44. The fifth credit input switch 75 is a lever-type operating section that can be switched up and down. Normally, the fifth credit input switch 75 is placed at the upper initial position, and when the fifth credit input switch 75 is operated toward the lower operation position, the operation detection signal is determined to be valid and the operation detection signal is activated. It is output to the control device 101. The main controller 101 determines that a one-bet bet operation has been performed based on the operation detection signal. Inside the fifth credit input switch 75, a biasing means (not shown) (such as a leaf spring) is provided that biases the fifth credit input switch 75 from the operation position to the initial position. The 5 credit input switch 75 automatically returns to the initial position.

A second start lever 76 is provided on the right side of the fifth credit input switch 75. The second start lever 76 has the same function as the first start lever 41, and when the start conditions for each game are met, operating the second start lever 76 starts each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. As soon as the rotation of the game starts, a lottery for the game is held.

At the tip of the fifth credit input switch 75, a first operation part 75a having a spherical shape with left and right halves (left half) is provided. Further, a second operating portion 76a having a spherical shape with left and right halves (right half) is provided at the tip of the second start lever 76. Further, the fifth credit input switch 75 and the second start lever 76 are installed close to each other so that both the operating parts 75a and 76a form a spherical shape. Therefore, the first operation part 75a of the fifth credit input switch 75 and the second operation part 76a of the second start lever 76 can be operated at the same time, and when the fifth credit input switch 75 is operated. In this case, it is easy to operate the second start lever 76, and when the second start lever 76 is operated, the fifth credit input switch 75 is also easily operated.

The first lever main body 75b, which is closer to the slot machine 10 main body than the first operating part 75a in the fifth credit input switch 75, has the first lever main body 75b, which is closer to the slot machine 10 main body than the second operating part 76a in the second start lever 76. A credit side cover 75c is provided to cover the two-lever main body 76b from above. Due to the provision of the credit side cover 75c, when the fifth credit input switch 75 is operated downward, the second lever body 76b of the second start lever 76 is rotated downward by the credit side cover 75c. When pressed, the second start lever 76 is operated. Thereby, when the fifth credit input switch 75 is operated, the second start lever 76 is also operated.

With the above configuration, it is possible to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R without separately operating the start lever when a special top-up or the like occurs. This makes it possible to strengthen the impression that the game in the specific mode is a special game, while reducing the distinguishability of the game in the specific mode from the game in the normal game mode.

In addition, since the second start lever 76 is operated based on the operation of the fifth credit input switch 75 as described above, not only is the operability improved when a special add-on occurs, but also the bet operation is improved. The period from start to start of the game is shorter than that in a configuration in which each operation is performed separately. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to confirm that credits are subtracted based on a bet operation or that a valid line is set in a game when a special add-on or the like occurs. This makes it possible to further reduce the distinguishability between the specific mode and the normal game mode.

As described above, although the second start lever 76 is operated based on the operation of the fifth credit input switch 75, the second credit input switch 57 that can be operated for one bet and the start lever 41 are separately provided. It is provided. Therefore, in a game in which special bets or the like occur, it is possible to perform the bet operation and the start operation separately. By doing this, the fifth credit input switch can be operated without detracting from the real pleasure of playing the slot machine 10, which is starting the game based on the player's operation and ending the game based on the player's operation. 75 and the second start lever 76 can improve the operability.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration regarding the auxiliary tank 54 is different from each of the above embodiments. This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 150 to 153. 150 is a perspective view of the auxiliary tank 54 in a downward position, FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the installed state of the auxiliary tank 54 corresponding to the cross section taken along line FF in FIG. 150, and FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the auxiliary tank 54 in an upward position. FIG. 153 is a partially enlarged view of the bottom in the case where the lower opening 603 opens and closes. Note that in these figures, the same components as in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 150 and 151, the auxiliary tank 54 includes a substantially box-shaped tank body 601. The tank body 601 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. The bottom plate portion 602 of the tank body 601 is provided with a lower opening 603 that penetrates the bottom plate portion 602 in the thickness direction. The lower opening 603 has a generally elongated rectangular shape extending along the longitudinal direction of the tank body 601 when viewed from above, and is disposed at the center of the bottom plate portion 602 .

An inclined portion 604 is provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602 so as to surround the lower opening 603. The sloped portion 604 includes a front sloped portion 604a and a rear sloped portion 604b provided on both sides of the lower opening 603 in the longitudinal direction of the bottom plate 602, and a front sloped portion 604a and a rear sloped portion 604b provided on both sides of the lower opening 603 in the widthwise direction of the bottom plate 602. It is constituted by a right side inclined part 604c and a left side inclined part 604d provided in the. Each of these inclined portions 604a to 604d is sloped downward toward the lower opening 603, and the medals from the guide plate 52a (see FIG. 5) are drawn along the slope of each of the inclined portions 604a to 604d. and is guided to the lower opening 603.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the medals from the guide plate 52a are once dropped onto the back surface 602b, and then collected in the lower opening 603. Therefore, the lower opening 603 has a smaller opening size in plan view than the lower opening 512 (see FIG. 13) according to each of the embodiments described above, and has an elongated shape.

A bottom plate protrusion 605 that protrudes upward is provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate part 602. The bottom plate protrusion 605 is circumferentially continuous along the peripheral edge of the bottom plate 602 and is formed over the entire circumference of the bottom plate 602 . The upper surface 605a of the bottom plate protrusion 605 when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward position (the installation surface with the bottom plate 11a when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward position) is flat, and the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward position. It is substantially parallel to the upper surface of the flange portion 571 in this case. The bottom plate protrusion 605 is integrally formed with the tank body 601 and has a predetermined height.

As shown in FIG. 152, a bottom cover 606 that opens and closes the lower opening 512 and a support portion 607 that supports the bottom cover 606 are provided on the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602. The support part 607 moves the bottom cover 606 into a closed position where the lower opening 603 is closed (see FIG. 151) and an open position where the bottom lid 606 is rotated inward of the tank body 601 from the closed position to open the lower opening 603. It is rotatably supported in the position (see FIG. 153(b)).

The support portion 607 is constituted by an upright portion 608 that stands up inward of the tank body 601 from the surface 602a around the lower opening 603. The standing parts 608 include a front standing part 608a and a rear standing part 608b provided on both sides of the lower opening 512 in the longitudinal direction of the bottom plate part 602, and a front standing part 608a and a rear standing part 608b provided on both sides of the lower opening 512 in the lateral direction of the bottom plate part 602. It has a right side upright part 608c and a left side upright part 608d provided in the. These upright portions 608a to 608d are continuous in a frame shape when viewed from above.

Each of the upright portions 608a to 608d is integrally formed with the tank body 601, and is spaced a predetermined distance outward from the peripheral edge of the lower opening 603. That is, the distance between the front side upright part 608a and the rear side upright part 608b is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the lower opening 603, and the distance between the right side upright part 608c and the left side upright part 608d is longer than the length of the lower opening 603. It is larger than the width direction dimension. As a result, a substantially prismatic recess 609 is formed by each of the upright portions 608a to 608d and the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602 inside each of the upright portions 608a to 608d.

As shown in FIG. 153(b), the bottom lid 606 includes a lid main body 610 that is substantially rectangular in plan view. The longitudinal and lateral dimensions of the lid body 610 are larger than those of the lower opening 603, and the entire lower opening 603 can be closed from the inside of the tank body 601 by the bottom lid 606. It is possible. Further, each of the dimensions of the lid main body 610 is smaller than that of the recess 609, and the thickness of the bottom lid 606 is smaller than the depth of the recess 609, that is, the height of each of the upright portions 608a to 608d. It has become.

Therefore, when the bottom lid 606 is in the closed position, the lid main body 610 is accommodated inside the recess 609. At this time, as shown in FIG. 151, the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 comes into contact with the surface 602a (see FIG. 152(b)) of the bottom plate part 602 inside each of the upright parts 608a to 608d, so that the bottom lid 606 Rotation to the outside of the tank body 601 beyond the closed position is restricted.

A cylindrical through hole 612 that penetrates the lid body 610 in the longitudinal direction is provided on one long side of the lid body 610. On the other hand, through holes 614a and 614b are provided in the front upright portion 608a and the rear upright portion 608b, respectively, in correspondence with the through hole 612. These through holes 614a, 614b have a cylindrical shape extending in the thickness direction of each standing portion 608a, 608b, and are arranged coaxially with each other. A round bar-shaped rod shaft 615 is inserted into the through holes 612, 614a, and 614b with the bottom lid 606 housed in the recess 609, and the bottom lid 606 and the support part 607 (tank body 601) are inserted through the rod shaft 615. are connected.

As shown in FIG. 152(a), a rectangular notch 618 is formed in one longitudinal side of the lid body 610 of the bottom lid 606. A coil spring 617 is arranged in the notch 618 to bias the bottom cover 606 toward the closed position. A rod shaft 615 is inserted through the winding portion 617a of the coil spring 617, and one arm portion 617b of the coil spring 617 is locked in the locking hole 606f of the bottom cover 606, and the other arm portion 617c is attached to the left side. By hanging on the standing portion 608d, it spans between the bottom cover 606 and the left standing portion 608d. As shown in FIG. 151, the biasing force of the coil spring 617 is strong enough to keep the bottom cover 606 in the closed position without causing the bottom cover 606 to rotate downward under its own weight when the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in a downward position. It is set to

In the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is made to support automatic recovery, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in a downward position. In this case, when a part of the bottom cover 606 is exposed upward from the lower opening 603, if medals are not overflowing from the storage tank 52 and no medals are placed on the bottom cover 606, the coil spring The bottom cover 606 is held in the closed position by the biasing force 617, and the lower opening 603 is closed (see FIG. 151).

When the medals overflow from the storage tank 52, the medals fall onto the right slope 604c provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate 602, as shown in FIG. 153(a). The medals that have fallen onto the right side slope 604c descend along the slope of the right side slope 604c and are guided to the lower opening 603. In this case, even if the medal moves vigorously on the right side slope 604c and passes through the lower opening 603, since the left side slope 604d is tilted in the opposite direction, the left side slope 604d will open the lower side opening again. 603. Further, if the medal has strong momentum and reaches the peripheral edge of the bottom plate part 602 by climbing up the left slope part 604d, the medal comes into contact with the bottom plate protrusion part 605. This restricts further movement of the medals and prevents them from falling outside the tank body 601.

The medals that have reached the lower opening 603 are placed on the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 exposed from the lower opening 603. Such a flow is repeated every time a medal is discharged from the storage tank 52. As long as the weight of the medal on the back surface 606b is less than a predetermined weight and the biasing force of the coil spring 617 exceeds the load of the medal, the bottom cover 606 is maintained in the closed position. As a result, medals accumulate on and around the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606.

Then, when the weight of the medal on the back surface 606b reaches a predetermined weight, the load of the medal overcomes the biasing force of the coil spring 617, and the bottom cover 606 rotates downward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the lower opening 603 opens and the medals on and around the back surface 606b fall into the tank body 601. These medals pass through the tank body 601 and reach the medal discharge hole 15, and are supplied to an automatic collection device located below the slot machine 10.

After the medals on the back surface 606b fall, the bottom cover 606 returns to the closed position and the lower opening 603 is closed again. Thereafter, in the same manner as described above, the medals from the storage tank 52 are temporarily stored on the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606, and the lower opening 603 is opened each time the weight of the medals on the back surface 606b reaches a predetermined weight. be done. In this way, since the lower opening 603 is opened by the weight of the medal, manual operation of opening the bottom cover 606 can be made unnecessary. Therefore, automatic recovery can be achieved simply by installing the auxiliary tank 54 facing downward, improving convenience.

In this case, in this embodiment, the medals on the back surface 606b are guided to the lower opening 603, so that the weight of the medals can be easily concentrated on the bottom cover 606. For example, if the weight of the medals discharged from the storage tank 52 is dispersed on the bottom plate portion 602, the response of the bottom cover 606 is delayed and the time it takes for the lower opening 603 to open is likely to be prolonged. As a result, the medals may overflow on the bottom plate portion 602, spilling out of the tank body 601, and being scattered inside the housing 11, which may cause an inconvenience. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the medal weight is easily concentrated on the bottom lid 606, the opening responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 can be improved, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by being configured to guide the medals on the back surface 606b to the lower opening 603, the lower opening 603 can be made smaller, and the size of the bottom cover 606 can also be made smaller accordingly. . This makes it possible to suppress interference with the upper sensor rod 16a when the bottom cover 606 opens and closes. In this case, by adjusting the size of the lower opening 603 and the bottom cover 606, the position of the rotation axis 606c, etc., the dimension from the rotation axis 606c of the bottom cover 606 to the end 606d on the rotation tip side can be adjusted. If the distance is shorter than the distance from the rotation shaft 606c to the upper sensor rod 16a, the above-mentioned interference can be reliably avoided.

When transporting the slot machine 10, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in a downward position, as in the case of automatic recovery. In this case, the bottom cover 606 is held in the closed position by the biasing force of the coil spring 617, and the lower opening 603 is closed (see FIG. 151). That is, in this embodiment, the lower opening 603 can be closed when the slot machine 10 is transported.

In this case, by installing the auxiliary tank 54 facing downward so as to cover the medal discharge hole 15, the space above the medal discharge hole 15 (the space within the tank body 601) can be closed off by the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, even if a foreign object or a hand enters the medal ejection hole 15, unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10 is blocked by the auxiliary tank 54, and such unauthorized acts can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the bottom cover 606 is located in the closed position, the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 and the front surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602 come into contact with each other, so that the bottom cover 606 is placed on the outside of the tank body 601. Rotation is restricted. With this configuration, when transporting the slot machine 10, even if a foreign object or a hand enters the medal ejection hole 15 and pushes up the bottom cover 606, the bottom cover 606 will not rotate, and the lower opening will not open. This makes it difficult to open the section 603. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the act of opening the lower opening 603 and attempting to gain unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10, and it becomes possible to strengthen countermeasures against fraud. Incidentally, with this configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing upward in response to manual collection, the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from falling out due to the weight of medals in the auxiliary tank 54.

Further, when the bottom cover 606 is in the closed state, the periphery of the bottom cover 606 is surrounded by the upright portion 608 (the bottom cover 606 enters inside the recess 609). In this case, each of the upright portions 608a to 608d can cover the peripheral end surface of the bottom lid 606, making it difficult for foreign objects or hands that have entered through the medal ejection hole 15 to get caught on the bottom lid 606. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of hooking and pulling the foreign object etc. on the bottom cover 606 and attempting to rotate the bottom cover 606 toward the open position.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the height of the upright portion 608 (the depth of the recess 609) is larger than the thickness of the bottom cover 606, it is difficult to insert the bottom cover 606 deeply into the recess 609. I can do it. This makes it even more difficult for the above-mentioned foreign objects to get caught on the bottom cover 606, making it possible to strengthen countermeasures against fraud.

Here, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward position, the weight of the medals causes the bottom cover 606 to be opened and the medals to enter the inside of the tank. In this case, when the medal enters the tank and its weight is reduced, the bottom cover 606 returns to the closed position due to the biasing force of the coil spring 617. At this time, if medals remain on the bottom cover 606, there is a risk that the medals will be thrown off by the force of the bottom cover 606 returning to the closed position and scattered within the housing 11. In this regard, in this embodiment, since the bottom plate protrusion 605 stands up around the bottom plate part 602 (receiving part for receiving the medals from the storage tank 52), even if the medals are blown away, the medals will not be It is possible to prevent the water from reaching the outside of the auxiliary tank 54.

Also in this embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward, the right flange portion 571c of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574 engage with each other, and the floating of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted (see FIG. 151). Therefore, when transporting the slot machine 10, even if a foreign object or a hand enters through the medal discharge hole 15 and pushes up the auxiliary tank 54, it is difficult to create a gap between the auxiliary tank 54 and the bottom plate 11a. It is possible to make it difficult to expand the gap. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10 by inserting a foreign object such as a wire into the gap.

Also, when used in conjunction with automatic collection, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from bouncing within the housing 11 when a shock is applied, such as when a player hits the slot machine 10. be done. As a result, displacement of the auxiliary tank 54 due to impact is suppressed, and the inconvenience that medals from the storage tank 52 are not guided to the medal discharge hole 15 can be suppressed.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the configurations regarding the bottom cover 606 and the bottom plate portion 602 are different from those of the third embodiment. The auxiliary tank 54 according to this modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a partially enlarged sectional view showing the structure of the auxiliary tank 54.

As shown in FIG. 154, in this modification, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position, an inclined surface is formed on the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 toward the end of the rotation tip of the bottom cover 606. has been done. In addition, in this modification, the said inclined surface is comprised by inclining the whole bottom cover 606 and the support part 607, However, Only the back surface 606b may be inclined.

With this configuration, the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 can guide the medals placed on the back surface 606b toward the end of the bottom cover 606 on the rotation tip side. As a result, the medals can be brought closer to the end of the bottom cover 606 on the rotating tip side, making it easier to concentrate the weight of the medals on that part. As a result, the opening responsiveness of the bottom cover 606 increases, and it becomes possible to suppress medals from overflowing and falling on the back surface 606b.

In particular, since the right side inclined part 604c of the bottom plate part 602 is inclined downward toward the lower opening 603 (bottom cover 606), the V-shaped groove is formed by the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 and the right side inclined part 604c. It becomes possible to configure. This makes it easier to collect medals in the portion of the bottom cover 606 on the rotating tip side, and it becomes possible to suitably improve the opening responsiveness of the bottom cover 606.

With the above configuration, the following effects are expected. As already explained, if a medal remains on the bottom cover 606 when the bottom cover 606 returns to the closed position due to the biasing force of the coil spring 617, the medal will be moved by the force of the bottom cover 606 returning to the closed position. There is a risk of being blown away. In this regard, since the back surface 606a (medal placement surface) of the bottom lid 606 is sloped downward toward the rotating tip side of the bottom lid 606, it is difficult for medals to remain on the bottom lid 606, and the medals are placed on the bottom lid 606. It is possible to suppress the splashing. Further, since medals can be led into the tank even if the amount of opening of the bottom cover 606 is relatively small, the amount of rotation required for closing is reduced, and even if medals remain, the amount of flight thereof can be suppressed to a small level.

Note that the entire back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 does not necessarily have to be sloped, and only the portion exposed upward from the lower opening 603 may be sloped, or a part of the portion may be sloped.

<Modification 2>
This modification differs from Modification 1 described above in the configuration regarding the bottom cover 606. The auxiliary tank 54 according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a partially enlarged sectional view showing the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 is provided with a back surface protrusion 621 that projects upward from the back surface 606b. The back protrusion 621 is integrally formed with the lid body 610 and is provided at an exposed portion 606e that is exposed upward from the lower opening 603 when the bottom lid 606 is in the closed position.

The height dimension of the back protrusion 621 is such that it does not interfere with the bottom plate 602 (peripheral wall surface of the lower opening 603) when the bottom cover 606 is opened and closed, and that it protrudes from the back when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward position. A predetermined dimension is set within a range in which the tip of the portion 621 does not protrude below the bottom plate protrusion 605. Specifically, the height is higher than the height when a plurality of medals (for example, about 5 medals) are piled up flat, and the height is such that the medals guided by the right side inclined portion 604c can be dammed.

The back protrusion 621 is disposed at a position closer to the rotation shaft 606c when viewed in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 606c, and extends from the wall portion 603a on the rotation tip side of the peripheral wall portion of the lower opening 603 at a predetermined distance. They are separated by a distance. Thereby, in the exposed portion 606e of the bottom cover 606, a space in which a medal can be placed is secured in a portion closer to the rotating tip than the back protrusion 621. In addition, the back protrusion 621 is formed in a straight line from one end to the other end of the exposed portion 606e so as to cross the exposed portion 606e in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 606c in a plan view.

With this configuration, the medals guided by the right side inclined portion 604c can be stopped by the back protrusion 621. Thereby, the medals can be gathered in front of the back protrusion 621 in the exposed portion 606e, and the medals can be gathered in a portion spaced apart from the rotation shaft 606c. As a result, the weight of the medals tends to concentrate in this area, making it possible to improve the opening response of the bottom cover 606.

At this time, the back protruding portion 621 is spaced a predetermined distance from the wall portion 603a, and a space in which the medal can be placed is secured in the exposed portion 606e, so that the dammed medal can be placed on the bottom cover 606 appropriately. I can do it. This prevents the medals from staying on the right side inclined portion 604c due to the damming, and makes it possible to efficiently apply the weight of the medals discharged from the storage tank 52 to the bottom cover 606.

The structure for damming up medals is not limited to the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606, but may be provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602. As such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 155(b), a configuration in which a back protrusion 622 is provided above the wall 603b on the rotation base end side of the peripheral wall of the lower opening 603 is considered. It will be done.

In this case, in the radial direction of the rod shaft 615, the lower opening 603 is arranged to be biased toward the rotating tip side with respect to the bottom cover 606, so that the portion of the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 on the rotating tip side is more It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which a large portion of the exposed portion 606e is formed. Thereby, the weight of the dammed medal can be efficiently applied to the portion on the rotating tip side, and it is possible to improve the opening response of the bottom cover 606.

Note that the configuration in which the lower opening 603 is biased toward the rotating tip side with respect to the bottom cover 606 is not limited to this modification, but can be applied to each of the above embodiments and other modifications. . Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which medals are dammed by providing both the back surface protrusions 621 and 622 or by making the wall portion 603b higher. Furthermore, in this modification, the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606 is inclined as in the first modification, but the back surface 606b may be configured to be substantially horizontal as in the third embodiment.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the connection structure between the auxiliary tank 54 and the housing 11 is different from those in the above embodiments. This embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 156 to 159. 156 is a plan view of the auxiliary tank, FIG. 157(a) is a perspective sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 156, (b) is a perspective sectional view taken along the line GG of the tank body, and FIG. 159(a) is a perspective view of the bottom cover 704, and FIG. 159(b) is a rear perspective view of the bottom cover 704.

As shown in FIG. 156, the auxiliary tank 54 includes a bottomed tank body 701 having a substantially box-like shape with an upwardly open top. The tank body 701 has a bottom plate portion 701a that is substantially rectangular in plan view, and a front wall portion 701b, a rear wall portion 701c, a right side wall portion 701d, and a left side wall portion 701e that stand up from the bottom plate portion 701a so as to surround the bottom plate portion 701a. An upper opening 702 that opens upward and has a substantially rectangular shape in plan view is formed in the upper part of the opening 702 .

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the tank body 701 includes a lower opening 703 provided in a bottom plate portion 701a, and a bottom lid 704 that opens and closes the lower opening 703. The bottom cover 704 is rotatably supported by a support section 705 provided on the bottom plate section 701a.

The lower opening 703 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and passes through the bottom plate portion 701a in the thickness direction. The lower opening 703 opens upward and downward except for a portion of the periphery of the bottom plate 701a, and is disposed as a whole toward the front wall 701b. A bottom plate rear part 701g and a bottom plate front part 701f are arranged on both sides of the lower opening 703 in the bottom plate part 701a, and the bottom plate rear part 701g is longer in the longitudinal direction than the bottom plate front part 701f.

As shown in FIG. 159, the bottom lid 704 includes a lid main body 706 that is approximately rectangular in plan view, and a shaft portion 707 that is integrally formed with the lid main body 706. The lid main body 706 is larger than the lower opening 703 in both the longitudinal and lateral directions, and has a size that allows the lower opening 703 to be closed. The shaft portion 707 is provided on one of the longitudinally opposing short sides of the lid body 706, and has a round rod shape extending along the width direction of the lid body 706 (the direction in which the short side extends). . The length dimension of the shaft portion 707 is larger than the width direction dimension of the lid body 706, and both ends of the shaft portion 707 in the axial direction protrude laterally than both ends of the lid body 706 in the short direction. .

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the support portion 705 includes a right side support portion 708 and a left side support portion 709 provided at both ends of the bottom plate portion 701a in the lateral direction in the bottom plate front portion 701f.

The right side support portion 708 includes a right side bulge portion 710 that bulges upward from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. The bulging dimension (height) of the right side bulging portion 710 is larger than the shaft diameter of the shaft portion 707 of the bottom cover 704. A right hole 711 is provided inside the right bulge 710 and has a bell-shaped longitudinal section and extends in the lateral direction of the bottom plate 701a. The end of the right hole 711 on the left support portion 709 side is an open end, and the opposite end is closed. The depth of the right hole 711 from the open end is larger than the protrusion of the shaft 707 from the lid body 706.

The left side support part 709 has the same configuration as the right side support part 708 except that it is symmetrical. That is, it includes a left side bulge 713 that bulges upward from the surface of the bottom plate 701a, and a left side hole 714 provided in the left side bulge 713.

Both ends of the shaft portion 707 are inserted into the holes 711 and 714 of the right side support portion 708 and the left side support portion 709, with the bottom cover 704 being placed inside the tank body 701. As a result, the bottom cover 704 is connected to the tank body 701 in a vertically rotatable state, and the bottom cover 704 is in a closed state in which it closes the lower opening 703 from the inside of the tank body 701, and in a closed state in which the bottom cover It is possible to switch to an open state in which the lower opening 703 is opened by rotating the lower opening 704 upward.

The front wall portion 701b of the tank body 701 is provided with a front wall bulging portion 716 that bulges forward, as shown in FIG. 157(a). The front wall bulge 716 is arranged at the upper part of the front wall 701b, and its width is slightly larger than that of the lid main body 706. A portion of the lid main body 706 can be inserted into the inside of the front wall bulging portion 716 when the bottom lid 704 is rotated toward the open position.

Each wall portion 716a facing in the width direction in the front wall bulge portion 716 is provided with a protrusion portion 716b that protrudes semicircularly from each wall portion 716a toward the inside of the front wall bulge portion 716. Each of these protrusions 716b is arranged at a predetermined distance rearward from the front part 716c of the front wall bulge part 716 at the upper end of each wall part 716a. The distance between the projections 716b in the width direction of the front wall bulge 716 is slightly narrower than the width of the lid body 706, and the bottom lid 704 can be rotated toward the inside of the front wall bulge 716. In this case, the lid main body 706 is elastically deformed and enters between the protrusion 716b and the front portion 716c. With this configuration, it is possible to keep the bottom cover 704 in the open position.

A handle portion 718 is provided on the front wall portion 701b of the tank body 701. The handle portion 718 has the same configuration as the handle portion 503 according to each of the embodiments described above, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, a first state in which the auxiliary tank 54 is engaged with the engaging portion 721 in the casing 11 to restrict movement of the auxiliary tank 54, and a first state in which the auxiliary tank 54 is restrained from moving by engaging the auxiliary tank 54 with the engaging portion 721 in the casing 11, and a first state in which the auxiliary tank 54 is restrained from moving by disengaging the auxiliary tank 54 and the casing 11 The structure is such that it can be switched to a second state in which the auxiliary tank 54 is allowed to be taken out from inside. This configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163 in addition to FIGS. 156 to 159. FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram showing the installed state of the auxiliary tank 54 corresponding to the cross section taken along the line H--H in FIG. 156, FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing the state before engagement, and FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram showing the engaged state. FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the engagement is released. Note that in FIG. 163, illustration of the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the bottom plate portion 701a of the auxiliary tank 54 is provided with a cylindrical bottom through hole 720 that penetrates the bottom plate portion 701a in the thickness direction. The bottom through hole 720 is arranged at the bottom rear portion 701g of the bottom plate portion 701a, and is located at the rear end of the auxiliary tank 54. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with an engaging portion 721 that can engage with the bottom through hole 720. The engaging portion 721 includes an accommodating portion 722 provided on the bottom plate 11a, and an engaging protrusion 723 accommodated in the accommodating portion 722 so as to partially protrude upward from the surface of the bottom plate 11a.

The engagement protrusion 723 includes a substantially cylindrical shaft portion 724 extending in the vertical direction and a head portion 725 connected to the upper end portion of the shaft portion 724, and the shaft portion 724 and the head portion 725 are integrally formed. There is. The head 725 has a substantially disk shape, and its diameter is larger than that of the shaft portion 724.

The accommodating part 722 has a bottomed vertical hole shape that opens upward, and includes a first hole 726 provided from the upper end position of the accommodating part 722 to an intermediate position, and a first hole part 726 provided from the intermediate position to the lower end of the accommodating part 722. A second hole 727 is provided up to the position. Both the first hole 726 and the second hole 727 have a substantially cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction. The diameter of the first hole 726 is larger than the diameter of the head 725 of the engagement protrusion 723, and the depth of the first hole 726 is sufficiently larger than the thickness of the head 725. Therefore, the head 725 can be accommodated inside the first hole 726. The second hole 727 is formed to extend downward from the center of the bottom surface 726a of the first hole 726, and the shaft 724 of the engagement protrusion 723 is inserted into the second hole 727. The diameter of the second hole portion 727 is slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 724, and the engagement protrusion 723 is supported by the second hole portion 727 so as to be movable up and down.

A coil spring 729 is arranged between the lower surface 725a of the head 725 and the bottom surface 726a of the first hole 726. The coil spring 729 is disposed such that the shaft portion 724 is inserted therethrough, and the engagement protrusion 723 is urged upward by the urging force of the coil spring 729.

Here, the diameter Dc of the head 725 is smaller than the minimum diameter Dd of the bottom side through hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54 (see FIG. 158). Therefore, when the two are opposed to each other so that the bottom through hole 720 is located above the head 725, the head 725 can be inserted into the bottom through hole 720. When the head 725 is inserted into the bottom through-hole 720, the circumferential wall 720a of the bottom through-hole 720 and the circumferential surface 725b of the head 725 come into contact with each other, thereby restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the front, rear, right and left directions. be done.

Note that in this embodiment, the thickness of the head 725 is smaller than the length of the bottom through hole 720 in the vertical direction (the insertion direction of the head 725), but these may be the same. , the former may be larger than the latter.

The arrangement position of the engaging part 721 (engaging protrusion 723) in the front-rear direction (depth direction of the housing 11) is such that when the auxiliary tank 54 is inserted into the housing 11 to a predetermined installation position, the engaging part 721 is set so as to face and engage with the bottom side through hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160, the rear end of the auxiliary tank 54 approaches the back plate 11b of the housing 11. In other words, even if the front door 12 (see FIG. 3) is closed, the front This is a position where the back side of the door 12 does not collide with the auxiliary tank 54. By setting the installation position at such a position, the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 will not interfere even if the front door 12 is closed with the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging part 721 engaged. , damage to the auxiliary tank 54, the front door 12, and the engaging portion 721 due to the closing of the front door 12 is avoided.

On the other hand, the arrangement position of the engaging portion 721 in the left-right direction (width direction of the housing 11) is such that the end (right flange portion) on the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 in the auxiliary tank 54 comes into contact with the right side plate 11c. The engaging portion 721 and the bottom through hole 720 are set so that the left and right positions match when the engaging portion 721 and the bottom through hole 720 are moved. In this case, the engagement portion 721 and the bottom through hole 720 can be aligned simply by installing the auxiliary tank 54 in a position where it contacts the right side plate 11c. This not only facilitates the engagement work but also allows the auxiliary tank 54 to be installed close to the right side plate 11c, which is advantageous in securing installation space for other mounted components such as the hopper device 51.

As shown in FIGS. 158 and 159(b), the back surface 706a of the lid body 706 is provided with a pushing projection 733 and two support projections 734 arranged on both sides of the pushing projection 733. ing. These pushing projections 733 and support projections 734 are integrally formed with the lid body 706.

The pushing protrusion 733 is formed at the end of the lid main body 706 opposite to the shaft 707, and is arranged at a position corresponding to the bottom through hole 720. As shown in FIG. 158, the pushing projection 733 has a cylindrical shape extending downward, and its tip is chamfered in a tapered shape. The diameter De of the push-in protrusion 733 is smaller than the minimum diameter Dd of the bottom through-hole 720, so that the push-in protrusion 733 can be inserted into the bottom through-hole 720.

The height of the pushing projection 733 corresponds to the depth of the bottom through hole 720. Specifically, the pushing protrusion 733 is set so that the remaining dimension Ha after subtracting the height dimension of the support protrusion 734 is the same as or slightly larger than the depth dimension of the bottom side through hole 720. The height dimension is set.

Each support protrusion 734 has a substantially semicircular cross section and is disposed at a corner of the lid body 706 at the end opposite to the shaft 707 . When the bottom cover 704 is in the closed position and the lower opening 703 is closed, a space corresponding to the lower opening 703 is formed below the bottom cover 704, so that the liquid is not accommodated in the auxiliary tank 54. There is a risk that the bottom cover 704 may bend due to the weight of the medals. Even if such deflection occurs, the support protrusion 734 comes into contact with the surface of the bottom plate 701a, making it possible to support the bottom cover 704 in a well-balanced manner.

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the tank body 701 includes an upper sensor insertion hole 731a through which the upper sensor rod 16a (see FIG. 6) is inserted, and a lower sensor insertion hole through which the lower sensor rod 16b is inserted. 731b is provided. Each of these sensor insertion holes 731a, 731b is formed in a horizontally elongated shape, and the height position thereof corresponds to the height position of each sensor rod 16a, 16b. Specifically, the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a is the same as or the distance Lj from the surface of the bottom plate 11a to the lower end of the upper sensor rod 16a (see FIG. 160). It is slightly shorter than Lj. Further, the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the lower sensor insertion hole 731b is the same as or slightly less than the distance Lm from the surface of the bottom plate 11a to the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 160). It is a short one.

Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed at the above installation position, the auxiliary tank 54 and each sensor rod 16a, 16b come into contact with or come close to each other at the lower end of each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b. As a result, even if the auxiliary tank 54 tries to move upward, it is restricted by the sensor rods 16a, 16b, and lifting of the auxiliary tank 54 from the bottom plate 11a is suppressed.

In this embodiment, both the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the lower sensor insertion hole 731b are made to correspond to the distances Lj and Lm, respectively, but a configuration may be adopted in which only one of them is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 160, the vertical width of each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b is approximately the same as the diameter (vertical width) of each sensor rod 16a, 16b, but it is not limited to this. The vertical width of each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b may be larger than the diameter of each sensor rod 16a, 16b. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing the spillage of medals from each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b when storing medals, the configuration of this embodiment is preferable.

Next, a method of engaging the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162.

To engage the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721, first, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a with the front surface of the housing 11 open. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed so that the rear wall portion 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is located closer to the front than the tips of the sensor rods 16a, 16b. At this time, as already explained, by guiding the auxiliary tank 54 by the right side plate 11c, the left and right positions of the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging part 721 can be easily aligned.

From this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed toward the interior of the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid on the bottom plate 11a. As shown in FIG. 161, when the bottom side through hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engagement part 721 come close to each other to some extent, the front end of the bottom plate part 701a and the engagement protrusion protruding from the surface of the bottom plate 11a 723 come into contact with each other.

Here, in the present embodiment, an engaging inclined portion 745 is provided at the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 701a (the contact portion with the head portion 725). The engagement slope portion 745 has a distance from the bottom plate 11a that decreases as it goes from one end on the engagement protrusion 723 side toward the bottom side through hole 720. In other words, the distance from the engagement slope portion 745 to the bottom plate 11a becomes narrower when viewed in the opposite direction to the sliding movement direction of the auxiliary tank 54. It has a sloped shape. A circular arc portion 746 that is convex toward the outside is provided above the engagement slope portion 745, and the circular arc portion 746 connects the engagement slope portion 745 and the front wall portion 701b.

Because the engagement protrusion 723 is biased by the coil spring 729, the engagement protrusion 723 protrudes from the bottom plate 11a, and during the process of sliding the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 and the engagement protrusion 723 interfere. There is a risk of In this regard, the provision of the arcuate portion 746 and the engaging inclined portion 745 allows the engaging protrusion 723 to be pushed down and guided into the accommodating portion 722 . As a result, in addition to being able to smoothly slide the auxiliary tank 54 to the position where the engagement protrusion 723 and the bottom through hole 720 engage, it is also possible to suppress damage to the engagement protrusion 723 and the like due to installation of the auxiliary tank 54. becomes.

When the engagement protrusion 723 is pushed down, the coil spring 729 is compressed and a restoring force is accumulated. Then, as shown in FIG. 162, when the auxiliary tank 54 reaches the above-described installation position and the bottom through hole 720 is located above the engagement protrusion 723, the downward force on the engagement protrusion 723 disappears. The engagement protrusion 723 rises due to the restoring force of the coil spring 729. As a result, the engaging protrusion 723 is inserted into the bottom side through hole 720, and the two engage with each other. This makes it possible to restrict movement of the auxiliary tank 54.

Therefore, when the slot machine 10 is transported, if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in the above-mentioned installation mode, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the auxiliary tank 54 within the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be It is possible to prevent damage caused by collision between the front and peripheral members.

Next, a method of releasing the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 will be described with reference to FIGS. 160, 162, and 163.

It is necessary to disengage the auxiliary tank 54 when it is used in conjunction with manual recovery, and in this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is Install it at the installation location. In this case, as shown in FIG. 162, the lower surface of the pushing projection 733 comes into contact with the upper surface of the head 725 of the engagement projection 723, and the pushing projection 733 is pushed up together with the engagement projection 723.

As a result of this pushing up the bottom cover 704, the bottom cover 704 is in a state where it is floating by a predetermined height from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a, in other words, it is in a state where it has rotated slightly upward. Stand still. Moreover, the engaging protrusion 723 is raised and inserted into the bottom through hole 720, so that the engaging protrusion 723 and the bottom through hole 720 are engaged with each other.

Thereafter, when the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are sequentially stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the medals are placed on the bottom cover 704, so that the load of the medals acts on the bottom cover 704. The load of the medal also acts on the coil spring 729 through the pushing projection 733 and the engagement protrusion 723, so as the weight of the medal on the bottom lid 704 increases, the coil spring 729 is gradually compressed and the bottom lid 704 rotates downward little by little. As a result, the engaging protrusion 723 is pushed down by the pushing protrusion 733, and the head 725 gradually comes out of the bottom through hole 720.

When the amount of medals accommodated in the auxiliary tank 54 exceeds a predetermined amount, the head 725 is completely pushed out from the bottom through hole 720, as shown in FIG. 163. As a result, the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engagement protrusion 723 is released, allowing the auxiliary tank 54 to move. In other words, when medals accumulate in the auxiliary tank 54 to a certain extent, the auxiliary tank 54 is automatically allowed to be taken out, and the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 can be recovered.

Incidentally, the amount of medals accommodated (weight) at which the engagement is released is smaller than the amount of medals accommodated (full state) at which each sensor bar 16a, 16b becomes electrically conductive, and is assumed to reach the amount before fullness is detected. It's good to do that. In this case, the engagement can be released well in advance of the work timing for medal collection (removal of the auxiliary tank 54) by an employee of the game hall, and it becomes possible to suppress any hindrance to the collection work.

Note that the engagement between the engaging portion 721 and the bottom through hole 720 can also be released by manual operation. That is, by inserting a hand into the auxiliary tank 54 and pushing the bottom cover 704 downward, the engagement between the two can be released. With this configuration, even if there are no medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 or the number of medals stored is small, the engagement can be released as necessary, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be taken out as appropriate. becomes possible.

By the way, in a situation where there are no medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 or the amount of medals accommodated is small, such as when the auxiliary tank 54 is temporarily removed in order to pick up medals scattered within the housing 11. However, an operation to take out the auxiliary tank 54 may be performed. In this case, in a configuration in which the bottom through hole 720 and the engagement protrusion 723 are engaged, if a forcible removal operation is performed, there is a risk that the auxiliary tank 54 and the engagement portion 721 will be damaged.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to cope with the above-described removal operation, a release slope 741 is provided on the peripheral wall surface of the bottom through hole 720, as shown in FIG. 158. The releasing inclined portion 741 is provided on a peripheral wall surface of the bottom through hole 720 that is located on the opposite side of the head 725 from the direction in which the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out (pulled out direction). The distance between the releasing inclined part 741 and the bottom plate 11a becomes narrower as it goes from one end on the engagement protrusion 723 side toward the rear wall part 701c side. It has an inclined shape.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is removed, the engagement protrusion 723 comes into contact with the release slope 741 and is pushed downward along the slope of the release slope 741 while sliding on the surface thereof. Therefore, if the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out with a certain level of pulling force, the engagement protrusion 723 can be retracted from the bottom through hole 720 accordingly. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 721 even if a forcible removal operation is performed.

In addition, in the bottom side through-hole 720, the peripheral wall surface 743 on the opposite side to the releasing slope part 741 is not sloped, but is formed to be substantially parallel to the peripheral surface of the head 725. That is, when sliding in the installation direction, the head 725 is actively hooked on the peripheral wall surface 743 to restrict movement of the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed in with force when installing the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from advancing beyond the installation position, and the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from violently colliding with the back plate 11b. suppressed.

Next, a case where the auxiliary tank 54 is adapted to automatic recovery will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram when the auxiliary tank 54 is used in conjunction with automatic recovery.

When using the auxiliary tank 54 in response to automatic collection, take out the auxiliary tank 54 from the inside of the casing 11 with the front side of the casing 11 open, and then rotate the bottom cover 704 upward and lower it. The side opening 703 is opened. At this time, the bottom lid 704 is rotated until a portion of the lid body 706 enters between each protrusion 716b and the front portion 716c at the front wall bulge 716. In this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed so that the rear wall portion 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is located closer to the front than the tips of the sensor rods 16a, 16b.

From this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed toward the interior of the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid on the bottom plate 11a. Then, the auxiliary tank 54 is advanced to a position where the lower opening 703 and the medal discharge hole 15 communicate with each other. At this time, the auxiliary tank 54 is stopped at a position on the near side where the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging part 721 engage with each other, so that the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging part 721 do not engage with each other. The installation of the auxiliary tank 54 is completed by the above operations.

In this embodiment, the longitudinal dimension of the bottom cover 704 is sufficiently larger than the height dimension of the tank body 701. Therefore, when the bottom cover 704 is rotated to the open position, the end 704a of the bottom cover 704 on the rotation tip side is located above the upper end of the tank body 701. A guide plate 52a (see FIG. 5) is arranged above the tank body 701 so as to protrude from the storage tank 52 toward the auxiliary tank 54.

In this embodiment, the position of the guide plate 52a, the longitudinal dimension of the auxiliary tank 54, and the length of the bottom cover 704 are adjusted so that the guide plate 52a is located halfway between the open position and the closed position of the bottom cover 704. The opening position etc. has been adjusted. Therefore, even if a strong impact is applied to the slot machine 10 that causes the bottom cover 704 to rotate toward the bottom plate 701a, the bottom cover 704 will not come into contact with the outer surface of the front wall 52b of the guide plate 52a. Rotation of the bottom cover 704 is restricted. This prevents the bottom cover 704 from falling down to the closed position, making it possible to prevent the inconvenience of the lower opening 703 being closed.

Furthermore, by bringing the bottom lid 704 into contact with the outer surface of the front wall portion 52b of the guide plate 52a, rotation of the bottom lid 704 in the closing direction is restricted. This prevents the bottom lid 704 from blocking the medal ejection port of the guide plate 52a or from interposing the bottom lid 704 between the guide plate 52a and the lower opening 703. Even if the bottom cover 704 is maintained leaning against the guide plate 52a, medals from the storage tank 52 can still be guided to the lower opening 703, and medals can be continuously supplied to the automatic collection device. It becomes possible.

Note that in this embodiment, the protrusion 716b may be omitted. However, double protection with the guide plate 52a is provided against tilting of the bottom cover 704, and generation of abnormal noise due to such collisions is suppressed by reducing the number of collisions of the bottom cover 704 with the guide plate 52a. Considering the above, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above embodiment.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A configuration that includes a bottom through hole 720 provided in the auxiliary tank 54 and an engaging portion 721 provided in the housing 11, and switches whether or not to engage them depending on the state of accommodation of medals in the auxiliary tank 54. And so. Therefore, when the slot machine 10 is transported, by engaging the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721, it is possible to suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank 54. On the other hand, when collecting medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 can be switched to a non-engaging state in accordance with the accumulation of medals in the auxiliary tank 54, and the case It becomes possible to allow the auxiliary tank 54 to be taken out from inside the body 11.

When no medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are brought into engagement, and when the medal is stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom through hole 720 is engaged. The structure is such that the portion 721 is in a non-engaged state. In this case, during transportation when medals are not expected to be stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721, while during operation, the auxiliary tank 54 The auxiliary tank 54 is naturally allowed to be taken out in response to the medals being stored in the tank. This not only eliminates the need for a switching operation by hall employees and contributes to eliminating their inconvenience, but also prevents the inconvenience of damage to the engaging portion 721 etc. caused by performing a take-out operation without forgetting to switch.

When medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, a bottom cover 704 is provided which is displaced downward due to the weight of the medals, and as the bottom cover 704 is displaced downward, the engaging portion 721 (engaging protrusion 723) is disposed. It is configured to be pushed out from the bottom side through hole 720 and moved to the non-engaging position.

According to the above configuration, there is no need for a sensor for detecting weight, a drive section for driving the engagement protrusion 723, and a control structure for controlling the drive section according to the detection result of the sensor, which simplifies the structure and reduces costs. be advantageous to In addition, since the bottom lid 704 can efficiently receive the weight of the medals accommodated in the auxiliary tank 54, the displacement of the bottom cover 704 can be used to move the engaging portion 721, so that the medals can be brought into a state where the medals are accommodated. The responsiveness of the engaging portion 721 to changes in can be improved. Thereby, it is possible to prevent problems in taking out the auxiliary tank 54 due to a delay in switching to the disengaged state.

A push-in protrusion 733 is provided in the bottom cover 704 at a position on the back side of the casing 11, and a bottom through hole 720 and an engaging part 721 are provided on the back side of the casing 11.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out from inside the housing 11 by a hall employee, the front side of the auxiliary tank 54 may be lightly lifted, and in this state it may be slid toward the front along the bottom plate 11a. In this case, for example, if the pushing protrusion 733, the bottom through hole 720, and the engaging part 721 are arranged on the front side of the housing 11, as the auxiliary tank 54 is lifted, the pushing protrusion 733 It is conceivable that the disengaged state may be unintentionally switched from the engaged state to the engaged state due to separation from the engaging portion 721.

In this regard, since the pushing protrusion 733, the bottom through hole 720, and the engaging part 721 are arranged on the back side of the housing 11, the pushing of the engaging part 721 by the pushing protruding part 733 is easily maintained. Therefore, unintentional switching from the non-engaged state to the engaged state can be suppressed. Thereby, the auxiliary tank 54 can be smoothly drawn out.

When each sensor rod 16a, 16b is inserted into each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b, the peripheral edge of each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b and each sensor rod 16a, 16b contact or approach each other, and the auxiliary tank 54 The structure was designed to restrict movement. As a result, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 can be additionally restricted in addition to the engagement between the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721, and the shaking of the auxiliary tank 54 can be further suppressed. At this time, since each sensor rod 16a, 16b is utilized, there is no need to separately provide a dedicated structure for engagement, and an increase in the number of mounted parts can be suppressed.

By sliding the auxiliary tank 54 placed on the bottom plate 11a, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are configured to engage with each other. In this case, the two can be engaged by moving the auxiliary tank 54 on the bottom plate 11a without directly operating the bottom through hole 720 or the engagement part 721, and the engagement operation can be performed easily. It becomes possible. In addition, with this configuration, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 can be placed in locations that are difficult for the operator (person performing the engaging operation) to reach, allowing for freedom in layout. degree will improve.

Moreover, since the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are configured to engage with each other by sliding toward the inner side of the housing 11, it is possible to further simplify the engagement operation. That is, when closing the front door 12 after installing the auxiliary tank 54, it is necessary to push the auxiliary tank 54 deep into the housing 11 in advance so that the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 do not interfere with each other. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the pushing operation of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging operation of the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 in one operation. At that time, since the engagement will occur naturally by performing normal installation work, it can also contribute to suppressing forgetting to engage.

The bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are configured to engage with each other in the front-rear direction. In this case, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the front-rear direction can be restricted by the engagement between the bottom through-hole 720 and the engagement portion 721. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid to be installed, its movement is restricted, making it possible to know that the auxiliary tank 54 has been installed at an appropriate position.

When the bottom cover 704 is in the open state, the end 704a of the bottom cover 704 on the rotating tip side is located above the upper end of the tank body 701, A guide plate 52a is provided at a predetermined open position to contact the bottom cover 704 in an open state. As a result, even if the bottom cover 704 is tilted due to shock or vibration applied to the slot machine 10, the rotation of the bottom cover 704 can be restricted by the guiding plate 52a, and it is possible to prevent the lower opening 703 from unintentionally closing. .

At this time, by switching the bottom cover 704 from the closed state to the open state by rotating it forward, the bottom cover 704 in the open state can be positioned on the front door 12 side with respect to the guide plate 52a. I can do it. Thereby, inconveniences such as medals supplied from the guide plate 52a to the auxiliary tank 54 hitting the bottom cover 704 and flying toward the front door 12 and hitting the front door 12 can be suppressed. Furthermore, the inconvenience of medals getting stuck between the front door 12 and the tank body 701 can also be suppressed.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position in a form compatible with automatic recovery, a configuration is added that defines the forward end position of the auxiliary tank 54. This embodiment is different from the embodiment of . This modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 165 to 168. 165 is a perspective view of the bottom cover 704, FIG. 166 is a plan view of the tank body 701, FIG. 167(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the extension plate 751 when closed, and (b) is an illustration of the extension plate when opened. 751, and FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing how the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 165, an extending plate 751 extending outward is provided on the short side of the bottom cover 704 on the shaft portion 707 side. The extension plate 751 is provided on the opposite side of the lid body 706 with the shaft portion 707 interposed therebetween, and is integrally formed with the shaft portion 707 . The extension plate 751 has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the axial direction of the shaft portion 707 when viewed from above, and is disposed at the center of the shaft portion 707 . The length of the extension plate 751 in the extending direction is such that the distance from the rotation axis 707a of the shaft portion 707 (see FIG. 167(a)) to the tip 751a of the extension plate 751 is the distance from the rotation axis 707a to the bottom plate portion. The distance is set to be longer than the distance to the back surface of 701a.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the tank body 701, a notch 752 is formed in the bottom plate front part 701f of the bottom plate part 701a, corresponding to the extension plate 751. The notch 752 has a rectangular shape in plan view, and has a size that allows the extension plate 751 of the bottom cover 704 to pass through.

In this configuration, when the bottom cover 704 is in the closed position, the extension plate 751 is located above the notch 752 and housed inside the tank body 701, as shown in FIG. 167(a). There is. On the other hand, when the bottom cover 704 is rotated upward toward the open position, the extension plate 751 is rotated in the opposite direction (downward) on the opposite side of the cover body 706, as shown in FIG. 167(b). The tip portion 751a passes through the cutout portion 752 and projects downward from the back surface of the bottom plate portion 701a.

As shown in FIG. 168, the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with a recess 754 formed by cutting out a part of the surface of the bottom plate 11a. The concave portion 754 is located in front of the medal ejection hole 15 in the movement path of the auxiliary tank 54 when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position (the position where the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 engage). (See the two-dot chain line in FIG. 6). Specifically, the concave portion 754 is disposed on a passage area through which the tip portion 751a of the extension plate 751 passes when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position on the bottom plate 11a. The depth of the recess 754 is deeper than the length of the extension plate 751 that protrudes from the back surface of the bottom plate 701a, so that when the extension plate 751 passes over the recess 754, it can enter the recess 754. (See FIG. 168(a)).

Then, when the auxiliary tank 54 moves forward toward the installation position with the extension plate 751 inserted into the recess 754, the boundary between the recess 754 and the surface of the bottom plate 11a appears as shown in FIG. 168(b). The tip portion 751a of the extension plate 751 is caught in the step portion 755 formed in the step portion 755. As a result, the forward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted, and the moving end position of the auxiliary tank 54 is defined.

In this modification, the position of the stepped portion 755 is set so that the tip 751a of the extension plate 751 comes into contact with the stepped portion 755 of the recessed portion 754 before the auxiliary tank 54 reaches the installation position. In addition, in this case, the position of the stepped portion 755 is such that when the entire auxiliary tank 54 enters the housing 11 and the front door 12 is closed, the position of the step portion 755 is between the back of the front door 12 and the front end of the auxiliary tank 54 (on the front door 12 side). It is also positioned so that it does not interfere with the end of the

Therefore, when the bottom cover 704 is rotated to the open position, while allowing the auxiliary tank 54 to move forward to a position where the front door 12 can be closed, the auxiliary tank 54 is moved forward of the installation position. can be stopped. Therefore, even if the operator (employee of the game hall) who performs the pushing operation does not pay special attention to the position of the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 will not engage, and the front door 12 will not engage with the engaging portion 721. The auxiliary tank 54 can be installed at an appropriate position where it can be closed.

On the other hand, when the bottom cover 704 is located in the closed position and the auxiliary tank 54 is used for transportation or manual recovery of the slot machine 10, the extension plate 751 is housed inside the tank body 701, as described above. The tip portion 751a does not protrude downward from the back surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. Therefore, the distal end portion 751a and the stepped portion 755 do not get caught, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be smoothly advanced to the installation position.

<Modification 2>
This modification differs from the fourth embodiment in the configuration for releasing the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721. This modification will be described below with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank 54. In this modification, the bottom cover 514 of the auxiliary tank 54 and the structure related to its support are the same as those of the first embodiment. These are given the same reference numerals as those in each drawing of the first embodiment, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 169, an engagement drive section 761 that drives the engagement protrusion 723 of the engagement section 721 is attached to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11. The engagement drive unit 761 includes a solenoid as a drive source, and a transmission mechanism as a drive force transmission means that connects the solenoid and the engagement protrusion 723 and transmits the driving force of the solenoid to the engagement protrusion 723. ing. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control device 101 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main control device 101.

When the output of the drive signal from the main controller 101 is stopped and the solenoid is in a non-driven (non-energized) state, the engagement protrusion 723 is held in the raised position (engaged position) by the biasing force of the coil spring 729. Then, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 engage with each other. On the other hand, when a drive signal is output from the main controller 101 and the solenoid is driven (excited), the engagement protrusion 723 moves from the raised position to the lowered position (non-engaged position). As a result, the engagement protrusion 723 disengages from the bottom through hole 720, the engagement between the two is released, and movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is permitted.

In this modification, the main controller 101 monitors the electrical continuity between the upper sensor bar 16a and the lower sensor bar 16b, and recognizes that they are electrically connected, that is, that the auxiliary tank 54 is full. In this case, the drive signal is outputted to the engagement drive section 761.

In such a configuration, when transporting the slot machine 10, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 using the engagement method described in the fourth embodiment (see FIGS. 161 and 162). do. During transportation, the power supply device 91 of the slot machine 10 is not connected to an external power source, and no power is supplied to the slot machine 10. The drive signal is not output. Therefore, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 engage with each other, and the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 within the housing 11 can be restricted. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the shaking of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation, and it is possible to suppress damage caused by collision between the auxiliary tank 54 and surrounding members.

Furthermore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is used in conjunction with manual collection, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed within the housing 11 in the same manner as described above. In this case, the power supply device 91 of the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source (commercial power source of the gaming hall), and power is supplied to the slot machine 10. However, in a situation where no medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b are in a non-conducting state, so the main controller 101 does not output the drive signal. , the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are in an engaged state.

Even if the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source, if the auxiliary tank 54 is empty before the opening of the hall or during inspection or game settings after the hall is closed, it is necessary to move the auxiliary tank 54. However, it is desirable that the auxiliary tank 54 is immovable due to work convenience and the like. In this regard, even when power is being supplied to the slot machine 10, if the amount of medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 is below a predetermined value, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 engage with each other. When it is unnecessary to move the auxiliary tank 54, the unnecessary movement can be suppressed, and a configuration advantageous in work etc. can be realized.

Thereafter, when the number of medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 reaches a predetermined amount and both the sensor rods 16a and 16b are electrically connected, the main controller 101 outputs the drive signal to the engagement drive section 761. As a result, the engagement drive section 761 is driven, the engagement protrusion 723 descends, and the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engagement section 721 is released.

Further, when both the sensor rods 16a and 16b are electrically connected, as already explained, an external signal indicating that the hall is full is outputted to the management device of the game hall through the external centralized terminal board 121. Thereafter, the employee who received the notification heads to the bottom of the slot machine 10 and performs an operation to take out the auxiliary tank 54 in order to collect the medals in the auxiliary tank 54. In this case, in this modification, the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 has already been released, and removal of the auxiliary tank 54 is now permitted. Therefore, the auxiliary tank 54 can be taken out without difficulty, and the medals can be recovered.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 again after collecting the medals, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged, and then both the sensor rods 16a and 16b are electrically connected. The engagement is released again in response to this.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is used for automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 may be installed inside the housing 11 with the top and bottom turned upside down, as in the first embodiment, or the bottom cover 514 may be installed upside down. It may be configured such that the auxiliary tank 54 can be held in the open position by locking it to the tank body 701 with a locking claw or the like, and then installing the auxiliary tank 54 in an upward position.

As described above, according to this modification, it is possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 when transporting the slot machine 10, while avoiding any adverse effect on the operation of taking out the auxiliary tank 54 during manual recovery, thereby improving convenience. Much improved.

In the above modification, the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 is released in response to the detection of the full state of the auxiliary tank 54; however, before the full state is detected. A configuration may also be adopted in which the engagement between the two is released.

Specifically, apart from both sensor rods 16a and 16b, a detection means for detecting that the amount of medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 has reached a specific amount less than full is provided, and the detection of the detection means is provided. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the engagement drive section 761 is drive-controlled based on the result. In this case, the detection means is electrically connected to the main controller 101, and the main controller 101 outputs a drive signal when the main controller 101 recognizes that the specific amount of medals has been accommodated. It's good to do that. This allows the auxiliary tank 54 to be removed before it becomes full.

With such a configuration, it is possible to respond with sufficient margin to the timing of taking out the auxiliary tank 54 when fullness is detected. In addition, since the auxiliary tank 54 can be taken out even when the tank is not full, it is possible to cope with the case where some of the medals in the storage tank 52 are transferred to the auxiliary tank 54 for collection. becomes.

In addition, as the above-mentioned detection means, a load sensor may be attached to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, or a light emitting element may be attached to the auxiliary tank 54 (tank body 701) at a height lower than the upper sensor bar 16a so as to be sandwiched between the front and rear or left and right sides. A conceivable configuration is to provide a light-receiving element and detect the amount of medals stored by continuously blocking the light from the light-emitting element for a predetermined period of time by the medals in the auxiliary tank 54.

<Modification 3>
This modification differs from the fourth embodiment in that engagement with and release from the auxiliary tank 54 is achieved by utilizing a sensor that detects the state of accommodation of medals in the auxiliary tank 54. . The configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank 54, FIG. 171(a) is a perspective view of the lower sensor section 801 and its surrounding area, FIG. 171(b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower sensor section 801, and FIG. 173 is a perspective sectional view of the auxiliary tank 54, (b) is a perspective sectional view of the tank body 701, and FIG. 173 is a longitudinal sectional view of the auxiliary tank 54.

As shown in FIG. 171(a), in this modification, a lower sensor section 801 is provided in place of the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 6). As shown in FIG. 170, the lower sensor section 801 is configured to engage with the bottom cover 802 across the rear wall section 701c of the tank body 701. The combination of the lower sensor section 801, the rear wall section 701c, and the bottom cover 802 will be described below. Note that the upper sensor rod 16a has the same configuration as that in each of the embodiments described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 171(a), the lower sensor section 801 has a substantially L-shaped longitudinal section and is constructed by bending a metal plate having a predetermined thickness. The lower sensor section 801 includes an attachment section 811 for attaching the lower sensor section 801 to the housing 11 and a sensor main body 812 provided at the lower end of the attachment section 811.

The attachment portion 811 extends along the back plate 11b of the housing 11, and a through hole (not shown) is formed in the center of the attachment portion 811 so as to pass through the attachment portion 811 in the thickness direction. A shaft portion 813a of a screw 813 (see FIG. 170) is inserted into the through hole from inside the housing 11, and a nut 814 is screwed onto the shaft portion 813a of the screw 813 from the back side of the back plate 11b. . Thereby, the lower sensor section 801 is fixed to the back plate 11b. Wiring is connected to the shaft portion 813a or the nut 814 via a connecting terminal, and the lower sensor portion 801 and the main control device 101 are electrically connected through the wiring.

The sensor main body 812 includes an extending portion 821 extending forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 811, a bent portion 822 bent downward from the tip of the extending portion 821, and a retaining portion rising diagonally upward from the tip of the bent portion 822. A combined slope portion 823 is provided. As shown in FIG. 171(b), the distal end 823a of the engaging inclined portion 823 extends to approximately the same height as the upper end 822a of the bent portion 822, and the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 The vertical width dimensions of are approximately equal.

As shown in FIG. 170, the length of the sensor main body 812 extending from the mounting portion 811 corresponds to the length of the upper sensor rod 16a. Specifically, the distance from one end 821a of the extension 821 on the back plate 11b side (see FIG. 171(a)) to the tip 823a of the engagement slope 823 in the extension direction of the extension 821 is , is approximately the same as the distance from the back plate 11b of the upper sensor rod 16a to the tip of the sensor rod 16a. As a result, even if the shape of the lower sensor part 801 is different from that of the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 6), the lower sensor part 801 can be appropriately brought into contact with the medals in the auxiliary tank 54. This makes it possible to detect the full state well.

As shown in FIGS. 172(b) and 173, a lower sensor insertion hole 831 is provided in the rear wall portion 701c of the tank body 701 in correspondence with the lower sensor portion 801. The lower sensor insertion hole 831 passes through the rear wall portion 701c in the thickness direction, and is formed in a size that allows the bent portion 822 and the engagement slope portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801 to pass therethrough.

As shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173, the bottom lid 802 stands upward from a lid main body 835 that is substantially rectangular in plan view and an end 835a of the lid main body 835 on the opposite side to the shaft portion 832. It has a substantially L-shaped cross section. In the lid body 835, the distance from the shaft portion 832 (center of rotation) to the end portion 835a is approximately the same as the distance from the shaft portion 832 to the end on the rear wall portion 701c side on the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a, The lid body 835 extends to cover substantially the entire surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. The engagement upright portion 836 stands up in the vicinity of the rear wall portion 701c so as to substantially follow the inner surface of the rear wall portion 701c, and is located above the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and below the upper sensor insertion hole 731a. It extends to a predetermined height position.

A lid sensor insertion hole 837 is provided in the upper part of the engagement upright portion 836. The lid sensor insertion hole 837 passes through the engagement upright portion 836 in the thickness direction, and has a size that allows the bent portion 822 of the lower sensor portion 801 and the engagement slope portion 823 to pass therethrough. The lid sensor insertion hole 837 is arranged to correspond to the lower sensor part 801 so as to be located in front of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 of the rear wall part 701c when viewed from the front with respect to the engagement upright part 836.

As shown in FIGS. 172(b) and 173, a coil spring 839 is arranged in the bottom plate rear part 701g located between the lower opening 703 and the rear wall 701c in the bottom plate part 701a. The coil spring 839 is fixed on a spring pedestal portion 840, which is formed by recessing a portion of the surface of the bottom plate rear portion 701g downward, and is arranged so as to exert an upward biasing force.

When the lid body 835 of the bottom lid 802 is close to the bottom plate portion 701a, a coil spring 839 is interposed between the lid body 835 and the bottom plate portion 701a, and the coil spring 839 urges the bottom lid 802 upward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 173, if no medal is placed on the lid main body 835 in a state where the bottom lid 802 closes the lower opening 703, the bottom lid 802 is placed in a predetermined position from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. The bottom cover 802 is in a floating state, and accordingly, the engagement upright portion 836 of the bottom cover 802 is also stationary at a raised position.

When the engagement upright portion 836 is located at the raised position, the height position of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 rises, so that the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 becomes the upper end of the lower sensor insertion hole 831. It is located above 831a. As a result, the vertical width of the space that communicates the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837 in the insertion direction of the lower sensor part 801, that is, from the upper end 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 to the lid sensor The distance Lq to the lower end 837a of the insertion hole 837 is reduced compared to the case where the engagement upright portion 836 (bottom lid 802) is lowered. In this case, the distance Lq is smaller than the vertical width dimension Hb (see FIG. 171(b)) of the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801, and The inclined portion 823 cannot be passed through or is difficult to pass through.

Next, a method of engaging and releasing the lower sensor section 801 and the bottom cover 802 will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. FIG. 174(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state before engagement, FIG. 174(b) is an explanatory diagram showing an engaged state, and FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing a disengaged state. Note that in FIG. 175, illustration of the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 is omitted for convenience.

First, a method of engaging the lower sensor section 801 and the bottom cover 802 will be explained. To engage the lower sensor section 801 and the bottom cover 802, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a with the front surface of the housing 11 open. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed such that the rear wall portion 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is located closer to the front than the tips of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor portion 801. At this time, as in the fourth embodiment, positioning in the left-right direction can be performed by placing the auxiliary tank 54 on the right side plate 11c.

From this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed toward the interior of the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid on the bottom plate 11a. Then, as shown in FIG. 174(a), when the auxiliary tank 54 approaches the back plate 11b to a certain extent, a part of the tip end side of the engagement slope part 823 of the lower sensor part 801 is attached to the rear wall of the tank body 701. It passes through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 provided in the bottom lid 802 and comes into contact with the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 provided in the engagement upright portion 836 of the bottom lid 802.

Here, since the engaging inclined part 823 is inclined downward when viewed in the direction of movement of the auxiliary tank 54, as the auxiliary tank 54 moves forward, the lower end part 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 moves toward the engaging inclined part 823. It slides on the upper part and is gradually pushed down along the slope of the engagement slope part 823. Accordingly, the bottom cover 802 is lowered together with the engagement upright portion 836, the coil spring 839 is compressed, and restoring force is accumulated.

Furthermore, as the engagement upright portion 836 descends, the height position of the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is lowered, and the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is moved from the upper end 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 to the lower end of the lid sensor insertion hole 837. The distance Lq to 837a is extended. The further the auxiliary tank 54 moves forward, the more the distance Lq expands, and eventually becomes equal to or larger than the vertical width dimension Hb of the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823. As a result, the entire bent portion 822 and engagement inclined portion 823 can pass through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837.

When the auxiliary tank 54 advances further and the engaging inclined portion 823 passes through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837, the downward pressing force against the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 disappears. do. Along with this, the engagement standing portion 836 rises due to the restoring force of the coil spring 729. As a result, as shown in FIG. 174(b), a portion of the engagement upright portion 836 below the lid sensor insertion hole 837 (a portion including the lower end portion 837a) is connected to the bent portion 822 and the back plate 11b. The lower sensor part 801 and the bottom cover 802 engage with each other.

In this case, even if an attempt is made to move the auxiliary tank 54 in the direction opposite to the back plate 11b, the engagement upright portion 836 contacts the bent portion 822 of the lower sensor portion 801, so that the auxiliary tank 54 cannot be moved. Regulated. On the other hand, movement of the auxiliary tank 54 toward the back plate 11b is regulated by the rear wall portion 701c of the tank body 701 coming into contact with a screw 813 that fixes the lower sensor portion 801. That is, in this modification, the rear wall portion 701c and the engagement upright portion 836 are sandwiched between the bent portion 822 and the screw 813, thereby restricting the back and forth movement of the auxiliary tank 54.

Note that upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by the upper sensor rod 16a and the upper sensor insertion hole 731a, as described in the fourth embodiment.

In this way, in a state where the back and forth movement and upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted, the entire auxiliary tank 54 fits within the housing 11, and even when the front door 12 is closed, the front door 12 remains closed. The back side does not collide with the auxiliary tank 54. That is, in this modification, the position of the auxiliary tank 54 when the lower sensor part 801 and the bottom cover 802 engage corresponds to the installation position in the fourth embodiment.

Therefore, when the slot machine 10 is transported, if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in the above-mentioned installation mode, it is possible to suppress the rattling of the auxiliary tank 54 within the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be It is possible to prevent damage caused by collision between the front and peripheral members.

Next, a method of releasing the engagement will be explained. It is necessary to disengage the auxiliary tank 54 when it is used in conjunction with manual recovery, and in this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is Install it at the installation location.

When the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are sequentially stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the medals are placed on the bottom cover 704, so that the load of the medals acts on the bottom cover 704. The load of the medals also acts on the coil spring 839 through the bottom cover 704, so as the weight of the medals on the bottom cover 704 increases, the coil spring 839 is gradually compressed and the bottom cover 704 rotates downward little by little. I will do it. As a result, the engagement upright portion 836 descends, and the distance Lq from the upper end 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 to the lower end 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 expands.

Then, when the number of medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 exceeds a predetermined amount, the engagement upright portion 836 (bottom cover 704) is lowered to the lower end position, and the distance Lq is reduced between the bent portion 822 and the engagement portion, as shown in FIG. It is larger than the vertical width dimension Hb of the combined slope portion 823. As a result, the entire bent portion 822 and engagement inclined portion 823 can pass through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837, and the restriction on movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the drawing direction is released. be done. In other words, when medals have accumulated in the auxiliary tank 54 to a certain extent, the auxiliary tank 54 is automatically allowed to be taken out, and the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 can be collected.

In addition, when making the auxiliary tank 54 compatible with automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 is temporarily removed from the inside of the casing 11 with the front surface of the casing 11 opened, and the bottom cover is removed. 704 is rotated upward to open the lower opening 703. Thereafter, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed at the installation position with the lower opening 703 left open.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In the first embodiment, the winning probability of each special winning combination was set to be the same as the winning probability of each corresponding winning combination in the normal game mode, but some of them may have different probabilities, or all of them may have different probabilities. You can also use it as For example, if the winning probability of the special specific winning combination corresponding to the specific winning combination is higher than the winning probability of the specific winning combination, in the game in the specific mode, there will be transition lottery such as attack mode in the normal game mode, and It becomes easier to experience the lottery. On the other hand, if the probability is lower than that of the specific combination, in the game in the specific mode, the transition lottery such as the attack mode in the normal game mode and the lottery such as the add-on lottery will be difficult to perform. This makes it easier for players who have experienced that transition lots, such as attack mode, etc., are not often performed in the specific mode for practice to experience that transition lots, etc., are executed frequently in the normal game mode.

Furthermore, the probability of winning the first PBB or the second PBB in the specific mode may be different from the probability of winning the first PBB or the second PBB in the normal game mode, for example, the probability of winning the first PBB or the second PBB may be higher than the probability of winning the first PBB or the second PBB. The probability may be lower than that. If the probability is high, it will be easier to experience the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, while if the probability is low, the bonus state will be ended by transitioning to a bonus state (special bonus state) during a specific mode. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the first BB or second BB lottery in the normal game mode is not performed until the end of the game.

(2) In the first embodiment, the lottery table in the specific mode was set to be the same as the lottery table in the normal game state in the normal game mode, but the lottery table in other game states (for example, bonus state) It may be set to be equivalent to .

(3) In the first embodiment, the condition for ending the first PBB and the second PBB by playing the game the same number of times as the number of executions of the first and second BB (payout of 24 pieces) However, in order to be able to end the process earlier, it may be configured to end with a smaller number of payouts (for example, 3 pieces) than the 24 pieces. For example, in the case of a configuration that ends with a payout of 3 cards, a 1-bet game is 3 games (1 bet, 1 card payout is 3 games), and a 3-bet game is 1 game (3 bets, 3 cards payout is 1 game) Therefore, it is possible to end the process earlier than in the first embodiment.

(4) In the first embodiment, the first PBB and the second PBB are provided, but a configuration may be adopted in which the first PBB and the second PBB are not provided. Instead, a one-piece payout combination is provided in which the winning pattern is the same as the winning pattern of the first PBB and the second PBB, that is, the winning pattern is the same as the winning pattern of the first BB and the second BB in the normal game mode. Then, when the one-piece payout combination is won (at the time of winning), it is preferable to generate an effect of winning the first PBB or the second PBB (winning). In this case, if the configuration is such that the one-card payout combination is a winning combination that can be won in a winning game, there is no need to provide processing corresponding to the state in which the first PBB and the second PBB are carried over.

Furthermore, in this case, a special win (such as the 30th small win) that corresponds to a win that can be won during the bonus state (such as the 30th minor win) is combined with a special win that can be won during the normal gaming state and the stop switches 42 to 44. Winning/non-winning is configured differently depending on the order of operations, and after winning a winning combination with the same roll as the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning, over a predetermined number of games (for example, 24 games). Then, the operating order of the special combination corresponding to the combination that can be won during the above-mentioned bonus state is notified, so that the winning of the special combination is realized. This allows the player to experience a pseudo-bonus state over a predetermined number of games.

Moreover, a plurality of types of the above-mentioned winning small winning combinations are provided as pushing winning combinations, and a pushing winning combination in which a plurality of winning small winning combinations are set is provided. That is, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation order, the first winning small winning combination is established, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation order. In this case, a second winning small winning combination is established. Then, if you win the 1-piece payout combination corresponding to the 1st PBB or 2nd PBB, but do not win with the result corresponding to the 1st PBB or 2nd PBB winning (if you win the 1-piece payout combination with the winning result) ) is configured to pay out one medal and to vary the types of small winning combinations to be notified when the winning combination is won. In other words, before winning the one-piece payout combination corresponding to the first PBB or the second PBB, the first operation order is announced or the first operation order is normally carried out so that the first outgoing small combination is easier to win. The operation order is set to be easy (such as the order of stopping from the left reel), and the operation order of the second losing small winning combination is notified after winning a one-piece payout corresponding to the first PBB or the second PBB. By doing this, it is possible to make a so-called reach number appear by making the rolls different between the carryover state and the non-carryover state.

(5) In the first embodiment, the specific mode is basically performed using a 1-bet game, but the specific mode may be performed using a 2-bet game, or the normal game mode is changed to 3. The specific mode may be a 3-bet game instead of a 1-bet game or a 2-bet game.

(6) In the first embodiment, in addition to the normal gaming state and bonus state, each RT state is set even in a 1-bet game, and the transition to each RT state (promotion/fall) corresponds to each replay. It is also possible to perform a special re-game with a result or a special transition result. In this case, if at least a winning small winning combination that pays out one coin is provided, it is possible to make the one-bet game play as a free mode in which there is no increase or decrease of medals (fewer medals).

(7) In the first embodiment, even in the lottery process of the 1-bet game, there may be provided a complete loss result in which no index value wins.

(8) In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which it is possible to externally output whether the normal game mode or the specific mode is being executed. The external output destination may be, for example, a hall computer in a game hall, or a data display device installed in the game hall. In this case, it may be configured such that the game history of the normal gaming mode and the specific mode can be managed separately on the hall computer or data display device, or at least the gaming history of the normal gaming mode is managed, while the gaming history of the specific mode is managed. It is also possible to configure the system so that it is not managed.

(9) In the first embodiment, the configuration that allows the normal game mode and the specific mode to be distinguished is not limited to the stamp 65a and the identification accessory 65b, but may be other configurations. For example, if the display content of the auxiliary display section 65 is to be distinguishable, instead of or in addition to the stamp 65a, the background color or the like may be made different between the normal game mode and the specific mode. In this case, when the display control device 81 determines the display content in the specific mode, it acquires the production data of the corresponding production content in the normal game mode, rewrites the color data in the production data, and then It is preferable to set the display content in a specific mode. As a result, compared to a configuration in which performance data for a specific mode is stored separately, storage capacity can be significantly reduced. In addition, when the identification accessory 65b is used to make the identification possible, if a position that protrudes from the slot machine 10 (for example, upward) is set as the specific position, the manager of the game hall or the like can tell from a distance that the specific mode is in progress. can also be easily understood.

Further, an upright wall is provided at the side end of the slot machine 10 (for example, on the right side opposite to the rotating shaft side) that projects forward and extends vertically. The identification display may be made using the wall portion of the standing wall. This makes it easy for players who play games while visually checking the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, stop switches 42 to 44, auxiliary display section 65, etc., and easy for game hall managers and others. This makes it possible to display identification at a location where it can be confirmed. In this case, for example, the identification display may not be displayed on the wall portion of the upright wall facing inward (toward the player), but the identification display may be displayed on the wall portion of the upright wall facing outward (towards the adjacent gaming machine). In this way, it becomes possible to make the display even more noticeable to players who are playing the game. In addition, by doing this, from the perspective of a player playing a game on an adjacent gaming machine, it becomes easy to understand that the game on the adjacent gaming machine (this gaming machine) is in a specific mode. It is also possible to prevent the game feature of this gaming machine in which the number of medals does not decrease from being mistaken as fraudulent activity.

(10) In the first embodiment, the lottery table in the specific mode was set so that the winning combinations were all different between the normal game state and the bonus state (special bonus state), but some The winning combinations may overlap, or all the winning combinations may overlap, as long as the winning probability of each winning combination differs between at least the normal game state and the bonus state.

(11) In the first embodiment, in the specific mode, a game with one bet and one payout is performed in both the normal gaming state and the bonus state, but these normal gaming states and bonus states It is sufficient that the expected number of payouts to the number of medals inserted is equal to each other. For example, in the normal gaming state, a game is played in which one bet and one payout is performed (expected number of payouts to the number of medals inserted = 1/1), In the bonus state, a game may be performed in which 3 coins are bet and 3 coins are paid out (the expected number of payouts to the number of inserted medals = 3/3). In addition, although we have explained the gameplay with no winning results in both the normal game state and the bonus state, if you want to realize the gameplay with winning results, the medals will be inserted including the winning results in each state. It is sufficient if the expected number of payouts is the same for each number.

(12) In the first embodiment, the first PBB and the second PBB that can be won in a 1-bet game may be set as a so-called winning combination. By doing this, it is possible to reliably achieve a first PBB prize or a second PBB prize in a game in which the first PBB or the second PBB is won. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the loss of medals that occurs when the first PBB and the second PBB are carried over.

(13) In the first embodiment, the first PBB and the second PBB that can be won in a 1-bet game may be set as a combination in which one medal is paid out at the time of winning. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the loss of medals that occurs in games where the player wins the first PBB prize or the second PBB prize.

(14) In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which automatic bets are not made when a special replay winning is achieved in a specific mode. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the difference between the small winning combination and the presence or absence of a bet operation. Further, when a rep small winning combination is established, an automatic bet of one medal may be made instead of paying out one medal. Even in this manner, it is possible to eliminate the difference in whether a bet operation is performed or not between a repeat small winning combination winning and a special replay winning winning.

(15) In the second embodiment, the configurations of the fourth credit input switch 69 and the fifth credit input switch 75 that perform bet operations for a specific mode are not limited to those described above, and other operation units may be used. good. For example, the entire decorative panel 80 may be configured as an operating section that can be operated by pressing, and the operating section of the decorative panel 80 may be used to perform a bet operation for a specific mode. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor is provided, and the detection of a part of the player's body such as a hand by these sensors is determined as a bet operation in a specific mode. Alternatively, a MAX bet button may be provided, and the number of coins bet by operating the MAX bet button may be varied depending on the presence or absence of a special add-on flag.

(16) In the second embodiment, the winning combinations that can be won during the specific mode are not limited to those mentioned above, and may include other winning combinations or may not include any of the above winnings. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the first PBB and the second PBB can also be won. If you win the 1st PBB or 2nd PBB, you will be in a bonus state for a predetermined number of games (until the predetermined number of coins are paid out), or you may win or win the 1st PBB or 2nd PBB when special additions occur, etc. It may also be configured such that the zone shifts to a bonus state, and further additions are made in each game during the bonus state (that is, the zone is treated as a specialized zone).

Further, for example, although the special replay game and the special red set of 7 are provided, a configuration may be adopted in which the special replay and the special red set of 7 are not provided.

A non-winning result may be provided in which no winning combination is won, or a small winning result may be provided as in the first embodiment. For these non-winning results and small winning combinations, the number of additional games may be reduced, or the configuration may be such that no additional winnings occur.

As the special specific combinations, a special watermelon, a special strong cherry, a special weak cherry, a special middle bell, a special re-game, and a special set of 7 reds are provided, but a configuration may be adopted in which one or more of these types can be won. Alternatively, a plurality of lottery tables in a specific mode may be provided, and each table may have different winning combinations and winning combinations. In this case, for example, in the normal game mode, if the 2nd RT state (attack mode is supported), a lottery for a specific mode will be held on the table where the special watermelon is won, and if it is the 3rd RT state (VB mode is supported), For example, the lottery table in the specific mode may be configured to be different depending on the game state in the normal game mode, such as a lottery in a specific mode being held on a table where a special set of 7 reds is won.

(17) In the second embodiment, the combinations that can be won during the specific mode may include a push order combination, or any combination may be a push order combination. For example, a special watermelon and a special strong cherry are set as the pressing sequence, and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that results in a corresponding special special combination winning is announced according to the number of winning additional games. It may also be a configuration. For example, between the special watermelon and the special strong cherry, the special strong cherry is set so that the number of additional games is larger overall. Therefore, when a relatively large number of additional games are selected at the time of drawing in a specific mode in special additions, the operation order that will result in a special strong cherry prize will be announced, and if a small number of additional games are selected, a special watermelon prize will be announced. Notify the order of operations. By doing so, it becomes possible to more closely associate the winning combination with the number of additional games.

In addition, as the push order combination, each special specific combination in the second embodiment, and the combination of the number of rolls that informs the granting of benefits such as a predetermined bonus (for example, the fourth rep small combination and the second combination in the first embodiment) 5 rip small role) and the push order role may be provided. Further, a winning combination may be provided, which is a combination of a winning combination that notifies the granting of benefits such as the predetermined bonus, and a small winning combination. Regardless of whether or not you win the special add-on, etc., the game is played in a specific mode, and if you win the special add-on, etc., you will be notified of the award of benefits such as the above-mentioned predetermined bonus. It may be configured to notify the operation order, and to notify the operation order of a missing small winning combination or a special specific winning combination if the winning is not achieved.

(18) In the second embodiment, the timing at which the game in the specific mode is executed is not limited to the addition of the attack mode, but may be at other timings. For example, in the normal mode, it may be used as a winning notification effect in the challenge mode or attack mode. In this case, for example, as described in (17) above, each combination in the specific mode is set as a combination of the combination of the winning combination that notifies the granting of benefits such as a predetermined bonus. If you have won the challenge mode or attack mode, you will be notified of the order of operations in which you can win the winning role that will notify you of the above bonus award, and if you have not won the special specific role or the winning role. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the order of operations that can win a small winning combination is notified.

(19) In the second embodiment, if a specific combination is won during the normal game mode, and if a winning occurs (if there is a payout), special additions due to the specific mode are likely to occur, and a winning occurs. If the payout is not made (if there is no payout due to a missed payout), the special add-on due to the specific mode may be configured to be less likely to occur. By doing this, it is possible to improve the significance of not allowing players to miss out by making a so-called push when winning a specific winning combination. Furthermore, by doing so, it becomes difficult for the event that the credit counter is 0 at the start of the specific mode to occur. Thereby, it is possible to suitably realize a game feature in which the fourth credit input switch 69 is operated in the specific mode.

(20) In the second embodiment, the closer the value of the credit counter is to the upper limit value, the less likely special additions due to a specific mode will occur, and the further the value of the credit counter is from the upper limit (the smaller the value of the credit counter), the more special additions due to a specific mode will occur. It is also possible to configure a configuration in which this phenomenon is likely to occur. At the time of special addition in a specific mode, even if one coin is paid out, a sound effect corresponding to the payout sound effect of the normal game mode is generated. For example, when a special watermelon is won, a payout effect corresponding to the watermelon winning is generated. At the same time as the sound is output, 1 is added to the credit counter. In this case, if a special watermelon prize is established in a situation where the value of the credit counter is close to the upper limit (for example, 49), the credit counter will be incremented by 1 instead of the 5 watermelon prizes that would normally be paid out. The upper limit is set to (50) and four medals are paid out from the hopper device 51, but in the case of a special watermelon prize, the credit counter is only added and no medals are paid out. In this case, even though the special watermelon winning performance was set at the time of winning the special watermelon, the fact that the medal was not paid out from the hopper device 51 clearly identifies that the special watermelon winning was won. Therefore, if the smaller the value of the credit counter is, the more likely it is that special additions will occur in a specific mode, it will be possible to simulate a specific win and avoid creating a contradiction between the presence or absence of medal payouts. Become. In this case, for example, even if 9 coins are paid out, which corresponds to the maximum payout number for a specific win, the credit counter will only be incremented, and if the credit counter is 41 or less, a special addition will occur in the specific mode. It may be configured to make it easier, and to make it less likely to occur if it exceeds 41.

(21) In the second embodiment, as special additions based on the specific mode, the number of consecutive games of the attack mode and the VB mode are added, but the benefits of the game based on the specific mode are not limited to this. For example, a rare image may be provided as a bonus for a game in a specific mode, or a password or the like may be provided that allows changes to be made in the normal game mode. In a configuration in which rare images are provided, the degree of rarity of the rare image may be varied depending on the type of special specific combination won in a game in a specific mode. Furthermore, in a configuration in which a password or the like is provided, the performance in the normal game mode that can be changed may be changed depending on the type of special specific combination won in the game in the specific mode.

(22) In the second embodiment, in the credit display invisible processing in step S5503, the display of the credit display section 60 etc. is turned off, but for example, although the display of the credit display section 60 etc. continues, the It may be configured to reduce the visibility of the display (for example, the display is displayed more faintly than usual), or the visibility of the credit display area 60 etc. may be reduced by performing the effect at a position that overlaps with the credit display area 60 etc. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the amount of credit is lowered (for example, a configuration in which the accessory overlaps the credit display section 60 and the like in the front-rear direction).

(23) In the second embodiment, the benefits of the specific combination that triggers the special addition may be different from those described above. For example, instead of five medals being paid out based on a winning watermelon winning combination, three medals may be paid out. In this case, in a game played as a 3-bet game, there is a situation in which a watermelon prize is established in which 3 medals are paid out, and in a game played as a 1-bet game, a special watermelon prize is established in which 1 medal is paid out. This is preferable in terms of reducing the distinguishability between the two situations, since it becomes difficult to actually pay out medals in both the situation where a winning combination is established and the situation where the medals are actually paid out (the situation is reduced to just an increase/decrease in the credit counter). In other words, by setting the benefit of the specific winning combination that triggers the special bonus to 3 or less, which is the number of bets, it is possible to suitably reduce the distinguishability from the situation where the special winning combination is realized.

(24) The display modes such as normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, specialized zone configuration, transition trigger, transition probability, number of consecutive games, etc. are not limited to the above, and may be other configurations. Good too. For example, in each of the above embodiments, the specialized zone is configured to shift to the 7th re-game win during the VB mode, but it may also be configured to shift to the attack mode, and the role that triggers the transition may also be For example, it may be part of a specific winning combination such as watermelon.

(25) The configurations of the normal gaming state, RT state, and bonus state as gaming states, transition triggers, transition probabilities, number of consecutive games, etc. are not limited to those described above, and other configurations may be used. In this case, for example, in the first embodiment described above, it is preferable to set a special combination in which a prize is won by a stop result that appears at the time of transition of the gaming state in the specific mode.

(26) The effective lines set in the 3-bet game and the 1-bet game are not limited to the downward-sloping line L4 and the bent line L6. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a bending line L6 is set in a 3-bet game, and a downward-sloping line L4 is set in a 1-bet game. In this case, it is preferable to set the winning mode of each combination so that, for example, when the numbers that are stopped in the 3-bet game in each of the above embodiments are stopped, a winning occurs.

(27) Although the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the operation order may be notified by outputting audio from the speaker 64. Alternatively, the lamp of the stop switch to be operated next may be lit in a different color from other stop switches to indicate the order of operation, and the backlight of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be A configuration may be adopted in which the reel to be stopped next is indicated by lighting or extinguishing, or another display device or accessory device may be provided, and the device may notify the operation order. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation order is notified by a combination of these configurations.

(28) A penalty may be given to the player depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. For example, if an operation is performed in a different order of operations from the operation order that is notified when the winning combination is won (if an operation is performed to win a winning combination that is different from the winning combination that is the target of notification), It may be configured to give a penalty, or even though the operation order is not notified when the push order is won, or even though the operation order is not notified when the push order is won. However, if an operation is performed in a different order from the predetermined order of operations (for example, the order of operations in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first), a penalty may be imposed. In order to give a penalty, for example, an operation that is subject to a penalty (a specific operation that is subject to a predetermined penalty) is performed based on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the reel control process by the main control device 101. The main control device 101 can, for example, prevent a lottery for challenge mode, attack mode, etc. from being held for a predetermined number of games, or hold an additional lottery for the number of consecutive games such as challenge mode, attack mode, etc. It is preferable to have a configuration in which a penalty process is executed such that the lottery is not performed, or the lottery is performed but the lottery has a lower probability of winning than in a situation where no penalty is given.

Further, in this case, it is preferable that the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like be configured to notify a penalty that a specific operation that is subject to the above-mentioned predetermined penalty has been performed. This notification may be configured to be performed by the display control device 81. In this case, the display control device 81 can grasp that the specific operation has been performed by the command output when the main control device 101 identifies that the specific operation has been performed, and also It becomes possible to execute processing for notifying a penalty.

Then, for example, the main control device 101 is configured to perform the above penalty process when a specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, but not to perform the above penalty process when a specific operation is performed in the specific mode. You can. The specific mode is a game mode that prevents the number of medals from increasing or decreasing when the number of medals is returned evenly, but if a penalty is given even in such a game mode, the penalty will be imposed even though there is no increase or decrease in the number of medals. This is because an event may occur that contradicts the purpose of providing a specific mode, such as the provision of a specific mode.

Further, in this case, the display control device 81 may be configured to notify the penalty when a specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, and also to notify the penalty when a specific operation is performed in the specific mode. good. In this way, in a configuration in which the specific mode is set as the practice mode, it is possible to notify that if such a specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, a penalty will be imposed, and the practice mode is set as the practice mode. It is possible to improve the significance of being in the mode of use.

Furthermore, the display control device 81 may be configured to notify the content of the penalty when a specific operation is performed in the specific mode. The content notification may be a notification explaining that the lottery in attack mode or the like will be more disadvantageous than usual, as described above. In this way, it is possible to improve the significance of providing the specific mode as a practice mode.

(29) Although the normal game mode and the specific mode are realized by different bet numbers, they may be realized by other configurations. For example, even if the number of bets is the same, if a changeover switch that can be switched between the first and second positions is switched to the first position, the normal gaming mode can be executed, and when switched to the second position. In some cases, a specific mode may be enabled. The changeover switch may be provided at a position where the player can perform switching operations (for example, on the front of the slot machine 10), or may be provided at a position where the player cannot perform switching operations (for example, on the back of the slot machine 10). good. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the normal game mode and the specific mode are switched by setting values that differ the winning probabilities of each role in the lottery by the lottery means. Specifically, if the setting value is 1, which is the lowest value, or 3, which is the intermediate value, the specific mode may be made executable, and if the setting value is any other value, the normal game mode may be made executable.

(30) The active lines between the normal game mode and the specific mode are not limited to those mentioned above. For example, in the normal game mode, in a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game, other straight lines L1 to L5 may be set as valid lines instead of the downward-sloping line L4, and even in the normal game mode, lines with bends may be set. It may also be configured to be set as a valid line. Also in the specific mode, the straight lines L1 to L5 may be set as effective lines, or other bending lines may be set as effective lines. The number of active lines in the normal game mode and the specific mode is not limited to one, but may be two or more, or the number of active lines may be different in both game modes. If either or both of the active lines in both game modes are composed of a plurality of active lines, one of the active lines may overlap in both game modes, and in this case, at least the active lines of each other are Any configuration is sufficient as long as it includes valid lines that do not overlap.

(31) Although the auxiliary display section 65 is configured to perform various effects, it may be configured to perform various effects using other performance means. For example, a configuration may be used in which various effects are displayed on a so-called full-screen liquid crystal display panel in which the gaming panel 25 provided to cover the entire display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is used as a liquid crystal display panel while making each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. Alternatively, various performances may be performed on the decorative panel 80 below the stop switches 42 to 44, or various performances may be performed using movable accessories.

(32) Although a slot machine with BB states (1st BB, 2nd BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB), CB states (CB, PCB), and each RT state as bonus states has been described, the slot machine is limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine that does not have a BB state or a CB state, or a slot machine that has other gaming states such as a regular bonus (RB) state or a single bonus (SB) state. good.

(33) In the normal game mode, the game can be started when 3 to 1 medals are bet, but it may be configured such that the game cannot be started when 1 medal or 2 medals are bet. In this case, in the first embodiment, it is preferable to enable one bet by switching to a specific mode by operating the second effect switch 67, and in the second embodiment, by setting a special add-on flag, one bet can be made. It would be good if you could make a bet. If these one-card bets are allowed, other bets (three-card bets and two-card bets) may be prohibited.

(34) In addition to the privilege of shifting the gaming state and the privilege of replaying, the privileges to be granted include the privilege of paying out medals, but the present invention is not limited to this structure, and the player Any configuration may be used as long as it provides some kind of benefit. For example, instead of the privilege of paying out medals, a configuration may be adopted in which prizes other than medals are paid out. In particular, when a game is played in a specific mode as a free mode as in the first embodiment, the number of medals does not increase or decrease, so even if a large number of games are added, for example, the number of medals will not increase. Not expected. Therefore, for example, when the number of pseudo acquisitions exceeds a predetermined number, it may be configured to provide a benefit such as displaying a rare image.

(35) Although a slot machine has been described which includes three reels and three stop buttons corresponding to the reels in parallel and has four active lines, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the reels and the stop buttons corresponding to the reels and the stop buttons corresponding to the reels are It may be a slot machine with five lines arranged in parallel, or a slot machine with seven active lines. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operations in stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and corresponding stop buttons.

(36) In each of the above embodiments, the bottom side through hole 720 is provided in the bottom plate portions 501a, 602, 701a, and this is opened and closed by the bottom cover 514, 606, 704, 802, but the bottom side of the auxiliary tank 54 The entire structure may be opened and the opening may be opened and closed using the bottom cover 514 or the like.

(37) In each of the above embodiments, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11. A configuration may also be adopted in which an auxiliary tank 54 is installed at the location.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, a rod-shaped sensor is used as the accommodation state detection means for detecting the accommodation state of medals in the auxiliary tank 54, but other sensors may be used, such as attaching a load sensor to the bottom plate 11a. You can.

(39) In each of the above embodiments, the left and right positions of the auxiliary tank 54 are guided by the right side plate 11c of the housing 11, but such a guide is, for example, a predetermined guide member extending in the front-rear direction on the bottom plate 11a. It may be configured by other than the right side plate 11c, such as by providing a. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the auxiliary tank 54 is guided only on one left and right side, but may be configured to be guided on both the left and right sides.

(40) In each of the above embodiments, the structure includes two sensor rods, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b, but the lower sensor rod 16b may be omitted. In this case, for example, a conductive plate may be placed on the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501, and the main controller 101 may monitor the conduction state between the conductive plate and the upper sensor rod 16a.

(41) In the first and third embodiments, the lower openings 512, 603 may be omitted to leave the bottom plate portions 501a, 602 in a closed state, and the bottom lids 514, 606 may be omitted. . In this case, by installing the auxiliary tank 54 facing downward, not only can the auxiliary tank 54 be fixed to the housing 11, but also the medal discharge hole 15 can be blocked by the auxiliary tank 54. In addition, when supporting automatic collection in a configuration in which the lower openings 512, 603 and the bottom covers 514, 606 are omitted, the auxiliary tank 54 may be taken out from the inside of the housing 11.

In addition, if the lower openings 512, 603 and the bottom covers 514, 606 are omitted, it is not necessarily necessary to install the auxiliary tank 54 downward to engage the auxiliary tank 54, and for example, if the upper opening 502 is Alternatively, it may be installed in a sideways position so as to face to the right, or installed in a standing position so that the upper opening 502 faces forward or rearward, so that they engage. Even in such a case, it can be noticed at a glance that the device is installed in a manner different from the normal installation manner, and it is possible to prompt the user to notice that the device is engaged (fixed).

Furthermore, even in a configuration in which the lower openings 512, 603 and the bottom covers 514, 606 are provided, the configuration may be such that they are engaged in the above-mentioned horizontal position or standing position. In that case, it is not necessarily necessary to make the posture of the auxiliary tank 54 the same when transporting the slot machine 10 and when using it in response to automatic recovery; for example, when transporting it, it may be in the horizontal position or standing position, When supporting automatic collection, it can be placed in a downward facing position. In particular, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward position, there is an advantage that the upper opening 502 can be utilized to secure the medal movement path from the lower openings 512, 603 to the medal discharge hole 15. A configuration that supports automatic collection is preferable. Note that the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable, considering that the attitude of the auxiliary tank 54 does not need to be changed every time during transportation and automatic recovery.

(42) In the first and third embodiments, the bottom lids 514 and 606 are configured to rotate, but they are configured to move up and down or diagonally, so that when the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in a downward position, the bottom lids 514 and 606 rotate. A configuration may be adopted in which the lower openings 512 and 603 are opened by lowering. In this case, it is preferable to form an inclined surface descending toward the upper opening 502 (medal discharge hole 15) on the back surface of these bottom covers (the surface that becomes the upper surface when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward position). With such a configuration, the medals that have passed through the lower openings 512 and 603 and reached the back surface can be efficiently guided toward the medal discharge hole 15.

(43) In the first and third embodiments described above, the engaging portion 574 for engaging the auxiliary tank 54 is provided on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, but for example, such an engaging portion may be provided on the hopper device 51 etc. The auxiliary tank 54 may be configured to engage with a mounted component within the housing 11, such as by providing the auxiliary tank 54. In this case, it is not necessarily necessary to engage the flange portion 571 of the auxiliary tank 54 with the above-mentioned engaging portion. A configuration may be adopted in which a portion other than the flange portion 571 is engaged, such as by providing an engaged portion that can be engaged. At this time, the height position of the engaged part is configured to change depending on the attitude of the auxiliary tank 54, and when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward attitude, the engaging part and the engaged part cannot reach each other, but only when it is in a downward attitude. It is best to have a configuration that allows both parties to reach each other. This makes it possible to suppress the inconvenience that when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward position, the two unintentionally engage with each other and the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted.

(44) In the first and third embodiments described above, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, the configuration is such that only the left side of the auxiliary tank 54 engages, but for example, the tank body 501 may be provided on the bottom plate 11a, the back plate 11b, and the right side plate 11c, so that the engagement portions may be engaged on the right side or the rear side as well. Note that the engagement location is not limited to the left side of the auxiliary tank 54, but in a configuration in which the auxiliary tank 54 is installed at the right corner inside the housing 11, the engagement location is placed on the left side of the auxiliary tank 54. This has the advantage of making it easier to visually recognize the engagement location than when disposed on the right side or rear side, and making it easier to visually confirm the presence or absence of engagement. Considering this point, it is preferable that the engagement portion be placed on the left side of the auxiliary tank 54. Incidentally, in the case of a configuration in which the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the left corner of the housing 11, it is preferable to arrange the engagement portion on the right side of the auxiliary tank 54.

(45) In the first and third embodiments described above, the flange portion 571 is configured to be utilized as the first engaging portion. A configuration may be adopted in which the portion serves as the first engaging portion. In this case, the projecting portion does not necessarily need to be provided all around the peripheral edge of the tank body 501, and may be provided corresponding to a part of the peripheral edge.

(46) In the first and third embodiments described above, the engaging portion 574 is formed integrally with the hopper mounting plate 22, but the engaging portion may be provided independently of the hopper mounting plate 22. , it may be formed integrally with a peripheral member other than the hopper mounting plate 22 (for example, the hopper device 51).

(47) In the first and third embodiments described above, when the right flange portion 571c of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574 engage, the upper surface of the right flange portion 571c and the overhang portion of the engaging portion 574 578 is in contact with the lower surface (see FIG. 18(c)), but a configuration may be adopted in which they are only brought close to each other and a gap is formed between them. That is, engagement does not necessarily involve contact.

(48) In the first and third embodiments described above, a display section on which predetermined information is displayed is provided on the back surface of the bottom plate section 501a (the surface that becomes the top surface when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward position), and the auxiliary tank 54 It may be configured such that the predetermined information is hidden when the display is in an upward position, and the predetermined information appears when the display is in a downward position. With this configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward, it is possible to warn the operator (employee of the game hall) who performs the take-out operation, thereby suppressing forced take-out operations. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward position, the predetermined information is not visible or difficult to see, which prevents the worker from being confused by the display of the predetermined information, and prevents any hindrance to the medal collection work. can. Note that the predetermined information may be, for example, information explaining a release method for releasing the engaged state (for example, "Please slide and take out!").

Note that the display section (predetermined display) may be provided not only on the bottom plate section 501a but also on other wall sections such as the front wall section 501b. In this case, the predetermined information may be configured to be upside down when the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in an upward position. Thereby, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward position, it is difficult to visually recognize the predetermined information (the contents are difficult to identify), and when it is in the downward position, it is easy to visually recognize (the contents are easy to identify). Furthermore, the predetermined information may not be configured to be directly visible, but may be configured to be indirectly visible, such as through a mirror or the like.

(49) In the first and third embodiments, the bottom lids 514, 606 are placed inside the tank bodies 501, 601, but they are placed outside the tank bodies 501, 601 or inside the lower openings 512, 603. May be placed. At this time, it is preferable to provide a regulating means for regulating the bottom lids from rotating outside the tank bodies 501, 601 beyond the closed position. Thereby, even if the bottom lids do not contact the surfaces of the bottom plate portions 501a and 602, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from falling out of the bottom.

(50) In the third and fourth embodiments, the bottom lids 606, 704, 802 are tilted at a predetermined rotation angle between the closed position and the open position, as in the first embodiment. The bottom cover 606, 704, 802 may be disconnected from the tank body 601, 701 by moving it in a predetermined removal direction. Conversely, in the first embodiment, the bottom cover 514 may be configured to be non-removable.

(51) In the first embodiment, the bottom cover 514 may be configured to engage with the tank body 501 in the closed position. In this case, the bottom cover 514 can be held in the closed position, and the slot machine 10 can be transported with the lower opening 512 closed.

(52) In the first embodiment, the rotation limiting means (protruding portion 535) is provided on the lid body 521 of the bottom lid 514, but it may be provided on the shaft portion 522 of the bottom lid 514 or on the tank body 501. It may also be provided on the right side wall portion 501d.

(53) In the first embodiment described above, the tank body 501 and the bottom cover 514 are configured to have transparency, but they may also be configured to be opaque. With this configuration, when an attempt is made to visually check the internal structure of the slot machine 10 from the outside of the slot machine 10 through the medal discharge hole 15, this can be obstructed by the tank body 501 and the bottom cover 514. In this case, it is not necessarily necessary to make both the tank body 501 and the bottom lid 514 opaque, and it is also possible to make only one of them opaque, or to make a part of them opaque. This also applies to other embodiments.

(54) In the third embodiment, the bottom cover 606 is biased toward the closed position by the coil spring 617 (elastic member), but the configuration is biased by magnetic force (attractive force) using a magnet. You can also use it as However, from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent activity by automatically returning the bottom cover 606 to the closed position when the bottom cover 606 is opened through the medal ejection hole 15 during transportation of the slot machine 10, the third It is preferable to use the configuration of the embodiment or a configuration using both an elastic member and magnetic force. In addition, also in the said 4th Embodiment, it is good also as a structure which urges|biases the engaging protrusion 723 and the bottom cover 802 by magnetic force (repulsive force) instead of or in addition to the coil springs 729 and 839.

(55) In the first modification of the third embodiment, an inclination is provided on the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606, and the medal is guided to the rotating tip side of the bottom cover 606 by the inclination. An air blowing device that blows air onto the medals on the lid 606 or the bottom plate portion 602 is provided inside the housing 11 or in the tank body 601, and the medals are guided by the air from the device. Alternatively, the guide means may be provided at a location other than the bottom cover 606. However, in order to simplify the configuration and improve guidance accuracy, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above embodiment.

(56) In the second modification of the third embodiment, the back protrusion 621 is configured to be continuous from one end of the back surface 606b to the other end along the rotation axis of the bottom cover 606. It is good also as a structure provided in a section, or a structure in which a plurality of back surface protrusions are arranged intermittently. In the latter case, it is preferable that the distance between the back protrusions be smaller than the diameter of the medal. This prevents the medals from the storage tank 52 from slipping between the rear protrusions and reducing the damming efficiency.

(57) In the second modification of the third embodiment, the medals from the storage tank 52 are dammed on the back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606, but the medals dammed at a location other than the back surface 606b are placed on the back surface. 606b may be adopted.

(58) In the fourth embodiment, the installation position of the auxiliary tank 54 (the position where the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging part 721 engage, or the position where the lower sensor part 801 and the engaging upright part 836 engage) Although the front door 12 is set to a position further back than the position where the front door 12 can be closed (the position where the front door 12 does not interfere with the auxiliary tank 54 even if the front door 12 is closed), the front door 12 can be closed. It may be set at a position as close as possible. In this case, the space between the back of the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 can be eliminated or narrowed, and attempts to use this space to gain unauthorized access to the main control device 101, setting key insertion hole 73, etc. Acts can be restrained.

(59) In the fourth embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position, the engagement slope portion 745 and the arcuate portion 746 that guide the engagement protrusion 723 toward the lowered position assist. Although the structure is provided on the tank 54 side, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a structure may be provided on the auxiliary tank 54 side, such as providing an inclination at the contact point of the auxiliary tank 54 on the head 725 of the engagement protrusion 723. Good too. In this case, the slope on the side of the auxiliary tank 54 may be the opposite slope to the engaging slope portion 745.

(60) In the fourth embodiment, the diameter De of the pushing projection 733 may be made larger than the opening diameter of the accommodating portion 722 (the diameter of the first hole 726). In this case, the weight of the medal prevents the push-in protrusion 733 from entering the accommodating part 722 when the push-in protrusion 733 descends, and the height dimension of the push-in protrusion 733 is reduced to the depth dimension of the bottom side through-hole 720 (when descending). The stroke of the pushing projection 733 can be made sufficiently large. As a result, even if the height of the push-in protrusion 733 becomes smaller due to wear or the like, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of not being able to push out the engagement protrusion 723 from the bottom through-hole 720.

(61) In the fourth embodiment, the peripheral wall surface 743 of the bottom through hole 720 on the side opposite to the release slope 741 stands upright and is approximately parallel to the peripheral surface of the head 725. However, the peripheral wall surface 743 may be configured to be inclined in a direction opposite to that of the releasing inclined portion 741. In this case, the inclination angles of both inclinations may be the same or different.

In the latter case, it is preferable that the inclination angle of the releasing inclined part 741 (the angle formed between the upper surface of the head 725 and the releasing inclined part 741) is smaller than the inclination of the peripheral wall surface 743. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is removed (pull-out operation), the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging protrusion 723 come into contact with each other at the initial stage, and when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed (pushed in), the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging protrusion 723 are brought into contact at the final stage. It is assumed that a stronger load is applied to the engagement protrusion 723 when the protrusion 723 comes into contact with the engagement protrusion 723 during the ejection operation. In this case, by making the releasing inclined portion 741 relatively flat, damage to the engagement protrusion 723 can be suppressed. On the other hand, regarding the inclination of the surrounding wall surface 743, by increasing the above-mentioned inclination angle and making it relatively upright, while reducing the catch between the head 725 and the surrounding wall surface 743 to some extent, This makes it easier to control the progression to

(62) In the fourth embodiment, the release slope 741 is provided on the peripheral wall surface of the bottom through hole 720 to reduce the possibility of getting caught when the auxiliary tank 54 is removed. Alternatively, the engagement protrusion 723 may have a structure provided on the auxiliary tank 54 side, such as by providing a slope at the contact portion of the auxiliary tank 54 on the head 725 . In this case, the slope on the side of the auxiliary tank 54 may be opposite to the slope for release 741. Also, as in (61) above, when providing an inclination to reduce the catch when pushing the auxiliary tank 54, the head of the engagement protrusion 723 may be used instead of or in addition to the peripheral wall surface of the bottom through hole 720. 725 may be provided.

(63) In the fourth embodiment, the floating of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by both the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b, but it may be restricted by only one of them. Also in the first and second embodiments described above, a structure may be adopted in which the floating of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by at least one of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b.

(64) In the fourth embodiment, the widths of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the lower sensor insertion hole 731b are made to correspond to the widths of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b (approximately the same size), A configuration may be adopted in which movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the left-right direction is restricted by the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b. This also applies to other embodiments. In this case, the widths of both the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the lower sensor insertion hole 731b do not necessarily have to correspond, and only one of them may have a corresponding width.

(65) In the fourth embodiment, the entire bottom cover 704 is transparent, but when the bottom cover 704 is located in the open position, it is located above the upper end of the tank body 701. A configuration may be adopted in which only the portion or a part of the portion has transparency. With such a configuration, the inside of the housing 11 and the tank body 701 can be viewed through the bottom cover 704, and a portion of the bottom cover 704 protrudes upward, which tends to increase the height of the auxiliary tank 54. Despite this configuration, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the visibility inside the casing 11 and the tank body 701. Note that the entire bottom cover 704 is transparent, and the front wall 701b of the tank body 701 (the wall that overlaps the bottom cover 704 from the front when the bottom cover 704 is in the open position) is transparent. With this configuration, the inside of the tank body 701 can be visually viewed through both the front wall portion 701b and the bottom cover 704, and inspection and confirmation work such as whether medals are clogged in the tank body 701 can be facilitated.

(66) In the fourth embodiment, the bottom cover 704 is in contact with the guide plate 52a, but other members located closer to the open position than the guide plate 52a (for example, the storage tank 52, etc.) It is also possible to have a configuration in which they are in contact with each other. This also applies to each modification of the fourth embodiment.

(67) In the fourth embodiment, the lid main body 706 of the bottom lid 704 is made a movable bottom plate, so that the configuration includes a movable member that receives almost all of the medal weight in the auxiliary tank 54. A movable member may be provided on a peripheral wall such as a portion of the portion 701a or the front wall portion 701b, and the movable member may receive part of the weight of the medal. In short, it is sufficient that the engagement can be released in accordance with an increase in the weight of the medal, and it is arbitrary how much of the weight of the medal is received by the movable member. This also applies to the third modification of the fourth embodiment.

(68) In the fourth embodiment, the bottom lid 704 includes both the lid main body 706 as a movable bottom plate and the engagement upright portion 836 as the first engagement portion, and they are integrally formed. However, the movable bottom plate and the first engaging portion may be arranged separately and separated from each other, and the two may be interlocked via a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement (power) of the movable bottom plate to the first engaging portion. This also applies to the third modification of the fourth embodiment.

(69) In the fourth embodiment described above, a buffer member (elastic member) such as rubber or sponge may be arranged at the contact portion between the bottom cover 704 and the guide plate 52a. This prevents damage to the bottom cover 704 and the guide plate 52a due to impact when the bottom cover 704 collides with the guide plate 52a. In this case, the interference member may be placed on the bottom cover 704 side or on the guide plate 52a side. This also applies to each modification of the fourth embodiment.

(70) In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, when the slot machine 10 is not connected to an external power source, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 engage (the engaging protrusion 723 is However, even if the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source, if the power of the slot machine 10 is not turned on (if the power switch 71 is not turned on), the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 may be configured to engage with each other.

Further, when releasing the engagement, the configuration may be such that the engagement is not released unless the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on even if the slot machine 10 is connected to the external power supply, or the engagement may not be released unless the slot machine 10 is connected to the external power supply. The configuration may be such that the release is not released unless the release is performed.

Note that the slot machine 10 may be configured to release the engagement even when the slot machine 10 is not connected to an external power source, such as by mechanically interlocking with the ON operation of the power switch 71 to release the engagement. Considering that during transportation, the slot machines may collide with each other and the power switch 71 may be switched to the ON side, it is preferable to make the connection to an external power source a condition.

(71) In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 is released regardless of the detection results of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b. You can also use it as That is, the engagement may be released on the condition that the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source or is powered on while connected to an external power source.

(72) In the third modification of the fourth embodiment, a lid sensor insertion hole 837 is provided in the engagement upright portion 836, and the lower sensor portion 801 is inserted into the lid sensor insertion hole 837. A portion of the engagement upright portion 836 above the lower end of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 may be omitted, and the lid sensor insertion hole 837 may not be provided. That is, the height of the engagement upright part 836 is set to a position corresponding to the height position of the lower end of the lid sensor insertion hole 837, and the upper end of the engagement upright part 836 is connected to the bent part 822 and the rear wall. A configuration may be adopted in which the auxiliary tank 54 and the lower sensor section 801 engage with each other by moving in and out of the space formed between the auxiliary tank 54 and the lower sensor section 701c.

(73) In the third modification of the fourth embodiment, when the engagement upright portion 836 and the lower sensor portion 801 are engaged, the lower end portion of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 in the engagement upright portion 836 is Although the structure is such that a gap is formed between the lower sensor section 801 and the extension section 821 so that both of them approach each other, they may be brought into contact with each other.

(74) In the fourth embodiment and its third modification, these configurations are not necessarily alternative, and both configurations may be combined.

(75) In each of the above embodiments, the auxiliary tank 54 can be opened by performing a specific operation using the operation means provided in the slot machine 10 so that an employee of the game hall or the like can release the engagement at any time. A configuration may also be adopted in which the engagement is released. Considering that when taking out the auxiliary tank 54 from the slot machine 10, it is necessary to open the front door 12 as a preliminary operation, the above-mentioned specific operation is preferably an operation for opening the front door 12.

Specifically, an unlocking operation on the locking device 20 (key cylinder 21) (for example, an operation of rotating a key inserted in the key cylinder 21 to the left) can be considered. For example, the engaging portion on the side of the housing 11 is made movable and can be switched between an engaged state and a non-engaged state (for example, the configuration of Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment), A link mechanism that transmits the movement of the locking device 20 to the engaging portion is provided between the engaging portion and the locking device 20, or a configuration is provided that detects an unlocking operation and controls the driving of the engaging portion, The engaging portion may be configured to be switched from an engaged state to a non-engaged state based on the unlocking operation being performed.

In the above configuration, the disengagement by the specific operation may be provided in addition to the disengagement configuration in each embodiment, or may be provided in place of these configurations. In the latter case, when an operation different from the specific operation described above (for example, an operation to close the front door 12) is performed using the operation means or a different operation means, the movable The engaging portion may be configured to switch from a non-engaged state to an engaged state.

(76) Although a specific example has been shown for the slot machine 10, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, in place of the medal insertion and medal payout functions among slot machines, it may be a gaming machine that has ball insertion and ball payout functions, such as a pachinko machine. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

The inventions shown in Feature Groups A to H below are as follows: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. A configuration is known in which a lottery is held and rewards are given to players according to the results of the internal lottery.Specifically, in the case of slot machines, when medals are bet as game media, the start lever is When is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start rotating.If the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reel stops rotating. If the result corresponds to the result of an internal lottery, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of gaming in gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56 to 58, 69);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants the player a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
The number of bets set by the number of bets setting means includes a first number of bets (3 pieces) and a second number of bets (1 piece, 2 pieces) that is a different number from the first number of bets. Ori,
comprising an effective position setting means (a function for executing an effective line setting process by the main controller 101) for setting the effective position according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means,
When the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, a first specific result (for example, a watermelon win as a 26th minor win, a replay) is provided as a possible result of winning the lottery by the lottery means. Ori,
When the second number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, a second specific result different from the first specific result (for example, a special result as the 26th P small prize) is a possible result of winning the lottery by the lottery means. Watermelon role, special replay) is provided,
The benefit granting means is
The lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, and a first specific symbol is placed at a first effective position (downward right line L4) set by the effective position setting means in correspondence with the first bet amount. If the combination is stopped, a first benefit corresponding to the first specific result (for example, 5 medals when winning a watermelon, replay) can be given,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, and the first specific symbol is placed in a second valid position (bending line L6) set by the valid position setting unit in correspondence with the second bet amount. When a second specific symbol combination different from the combination stops, a second benefit corresponding to the second specific result (for example, one medal when winning a special watermelon, replay) can be given,
When the second specific symbol combination is stopped at the second valid position, the orbiting body is provided with a position that is not set as a valid position by the valid position setting means when the second bet number is reached. The symbol is attached to a specific position set as the first effective position by the effective position setting means when the number of bets is 1, so that the first specific symbol combination stops. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when playing a game with the first number of bets, if the first specific result is won, the first specific symbol combination will stop at the first effective position and the first benefit will be awarded. When playing a game with a second number of bets different from the first number of bets, if a second specific result different from the first specific result is won, the first specific symbol combination stops at the first valid position, and A second specific symbol combination is stopped at the second valid position and a second benefit is awarded. Therefore, it is possible to obtain different benefits with the same stop result when playing the game with the first number of bets and when playing the game with the second number of bets. In other words, it is possible to realize a game in which different benefits are given by playing the game with different numbers of bets even if the stopping result is visually the same, using one gaming machine. By doing so, it becomes possible to diversify the games.

Feature A2. The benefit granting means is capable of paying out a specific number of gaming media that is equal to or greater than the first number of bets as the first benefit, or causing a replay to be executed, and as the second benefit, the second benefit The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it is possible to pay out the same number of gaming media as the number of bets or to execute a re-game.

According to the above configuration, even if the game played with the first number of bets and the game played with the second number of bets appear to have the same stopping result, the game played with the first number of bets has more game media than the number of bets. On the other hand, in a game played with the second number of bets, the same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out or a re-game is awarded, and an increase in the number of game media cannot be expected. In this way, by creating a clear difference in the degree of advantage for the player between games based on the first number of bets and games based on the second number of bets, it is possible to standardize the outcomes of games based on both numbers of bets, thereby improving the gameplay. Even if they are similar, it is possible to have completely different game features, and it is possible to ensure the significance of incorporating multiple game features into one gaming machine.

Feature A3. When the second number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, a plurality of types of the second specific results are provided as possible results of winning the lottery by the lottery means,
In a situation where the second bet number is set in a predetermined state (normal gaming state), when a lottery is held by the lottery means, one of the plurality of types of second specific results is won. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that the gaming machine is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific result winning is established, the payout of game media or replay is given in the same number as the second number of bets. If one of the second specified results or a re-gaming combination is won in the game that is played, the game that is played with the second number of bets in the predetermined state will not have an increase or decrease in game media. This allows the game played with the second number of bets to be used, for example, as a practice game or as an effect in a game played with the first number of bets. Therefore, by utilizing the commonality of the outcome with the game based on the first number of bets, it is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which the amount of game media does not increase or decrease depending on the second number of bets.

Feature A4. As the first specified result, there is provided a transition result (for example, a third replay as the first promotion replay 1 to 4) in which the winning probability of the predetermined combination (replay) before and after the transition is different,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the first specific symbol combination for transition as the first specific symbol combination stops at the first effective position, the gaming state is changed to a predetermined state (RT (a function for executing RT state processing by the main controller 101),
As the second identification result, a second payout result is provided in which the same number of game media as the second number of bets is paid out as the second benefit;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second payout result and the second specific symbol combination for payout as the second specific symbol combination stops at the second effective position, the second bet number The configuration is such that the same number of gaming media are paid out,
The symbol is attached to the rotating body so that when the second specific symbol combination for payout stops at the second effective position, the first specific symbol combination for transition stops at the specific position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

According to the above configuration, in the game with the first number of bets, the transition result of winning and the game state is shifted to the predetermined state is reproduced in the game with the second number of bets by paying out the same number of game media as the second number of bets. be able to. By doing this, for example, it is possible to simulate the transition of the gaming state to a predetermined state in a game with the first number of bets in a game with the second number of bets in which the amount of game media does not increase or decrease. becomes.

In addition, the "second benefit" corresponding to the "second payout result" was configured to "pay out the same number of gaming media as the second number of bets"; It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which "payout" is performed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to experience the transition of the gaming state to a predetermined state in the game with the first number of bets in the game with the second number of bets while giving the game media. becomes possible.

Feature A5. Executing a first predetermined effect that can be executed by a predetermined notification means (for example, the auxiliary display section 65) based on the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined state by the transition means (e.g., attack mode start effect); means (a function for performing processing for executing the attack mode start effect by the display control device 81);
The lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means is the second payout result, and the first specific symbol combination for transfer is placed at the specific position. When the second specific symbol combination for payout stops at the second effective position, a second predetermined performance execution means ( (a function to perform processing for executing a display attack mode start effect on the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature A4, comprising:

According to the above configuration, in order to experience the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined state with the second number of bets, a predetermined effect that is common in terms of presentation occurs, making it possible to have a more realistic experience. becomes. By doing so, the practice game quality based on the second number of bets can be brought closer to the game quality based on the first number of bets.

Feature A6. Identification means (stamp 65a, identification tool) that makes it possible to distinguish between a case where the predetermined effect is executed by the first predetermined effect execution means and a case where the predetermined effect is executed by the second predetermined effect execution means. The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized by comprising item 65b).

According to the above configuration, although both the games with the first number of bets and the second number of bets are made similar, it is difficult to determine whether the game is being played with the first number of bets or the game with the second number of bets. can be identified by looking at the predetermined effect. By doing this, while making the rolls of the orbiting objects common and further standardizing the presentation, for example, when the manager of the game hall checks the ball roll status etc., it is possible to clearly distinguish both games. It is possible to distinguish between

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A6, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the probability of winning a replay combination as the predetermined combination changes before and after the transition.

According to the above configuration, the user can experience a transition to a so-called RT state as a transition to a predetermined state. In addition to the RT state in which the replay probability changes, the probability of the lottery result changes due to a change in the gaming state, as well as the bonus state in which the small role probability changes.Generally, the bonus state is, for example, 7. It is visually easy to understand that the specific symbols such as symbols can be transferred together, and it can be said that it is familiar to players that the specific symbols such as the seven symbols are aligned and the transition is made to the bonus state. On the other hand, the transition to the RT state is less familiar than the transition to the bonus state, and the rolls at the time of transition are often set to be relatively difficult to recognize. Therefore, as in the configuration of Feature A4, by applying the gameplay feature that allows you to experience the transition of the gaming state at the second bet number to the transition of the RT state, it is possible to experience the transition of the gaming state that is difficult to understand. This can be of great help in helping people fully understand the gameplay.

Feature A8. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result in which the predetermined combination (replay) is won as the first specified result, and the first specified combination of symbols for the predetermined combination is placed in the first effective position. 1. When a specific symbol combination stops, a predetermined benefit (replay) corresponding to the predetermined result is given as the first benefit,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a second predetermined combination result as the second payout result (for example, a 1-card winning combination), and the predetermined symbol combination as the second specific symbol combination is placed in the second valid position. It is configured such that when a second specific symbol combination for a role (for example, a symbol combination that makes a first return small prize win) stops, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out,
The rotating body is provided with the symbols such that when the second specific symbol combination for the predetermined combination stops at the second valid position, the first specific symbol combination for the predetermined combination stops at the specific position. It is attached,
A first means for causing the second specific symbol combination for the predetermined combination to stop at the second valid position when the lottery result by the lottery means is the result for the second predetermined combination (for example, the main When the control device 101 wins a winning one winning winning combination, a function of executing a process for notifying the push order to establish a first rep small winning combination) and the second specific symbol combination for the predetermined winning combination are performed. A second means for preventing the vehicle from stopping at the second effective position (for example, a function of executing a process for notifying the pressing order to establish a winning small winning combination when the main controller 101 wins a winning winning combination) ) The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A7.

According to the above configuration, in the game with the second number of bets, it is determined that the probability of winning the predetermined combination changes as a result of winning in the game with the first number of bets, and the probability of being awarded the predetermined privilege changes. It is possible to reproduce this by stopping the second specific symbol combination for the predetermined role or not stopping the second specific symbol combination for the predetermined role when winning the result for the second predetermined role. . Moreover, if the second specific symbol combination for the second predetermined combination stops, a payout of the same number of gaming media as the second number of bets will be given, so this kind of gameplay can be improved by increasing the number of gaming media. It becomes possible to have the user experience it without being accompanied.

Feature A9. When the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means, winning a payout combination (for example, Bell) in which a payout of game media is given as a privilege before and after the transition. First specific transition results (first BB, second BB) with different probabilities are provided,
When the second number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means, winning a payout combination (for example, Bell) in which a payout of game media is given as a privilege before and after the transition. Second specific transition results (first PBB, second PBB) with different probabilities are provided,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific transfer result and the first specific symbol combination for specific transfer as the first specific symbol combination stops at the first effective position, the gaming state is changed. It is possible to shift to a first specific state (bonus state), and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific transition result, and the second specific symbol combination is specified in the second valid position. A specific transition means capable of shifting the gaming state to a second specific state (special bonus state) when a second specific symbol combination for transition is stopped (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) Equipped with
The rotating body is provided with the pattern so that when the second specific pattern combination for specific transition stops at the second effective position, the first specific pattern combination for specific transition stops at the specific position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

According to the above configuration, in both the games with the first number of bets and the second number of bets, the first specific transfer result and the second specific transfer result are respectively provided as so-called bonuses. Moreover, if the second specific transfer result is won in a game with the second bet number, and the second specific symbol combination for specific transfer that becomes the winning result of the second specific transfer stops at the second effective position, the first specific transfer result is won. The first specific pattern combination for specific transition, which results in a winning result, stops at a specific position. By doing this, it is possible to make it appear as if the bonus won in the game with the second number of bets was won as a bonus prize in the game with the first number of bets. The playability of the game can be improved.

Feature A10. a second specific state to which the state is shifted based on the second specific transition result after the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific transition result when the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means; The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that, in the game until the end of the game, a payout of gaming media in a number exceeding the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is not performed.

According to the above configuration, even if the game with the second number of bets results in a win as a result of the second specific shift and enters the second specific state, no increase in game media is expected. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the game based on the first number of bets from the game based on the second number of bets, and to strengthen the impression that the game based on the second number of bets is a game for practice.

In addition, in the above configuration, "When the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, after the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first specific transition result, In the game until the end of the first specific state to which the state has been transferred based on The difference between the first specific state and the second specific state can be made clear.

Also, if the relationship between the "first bet number" and the "second bet number" is "the second bet number is smaller than the first bet number", then the With the above-described configuration, it is possible to make the player understand the 2-specific state as a benefit that corresponds to the number of bets.

Feature A11. a first ending means (set in step S613 by the main controller 101) that ends the first specific state based on the number of gaming media paid out during the first specific state reaching a first predetermined number; (a function of executing a process of making an affirmative determination in step S1504 based on the number of remaining payouts becoming 0);
A second ending means (main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to feature A10, comprising:

According to the above configuration, the second specific state ends with a smaller number of payouts than the first specific state. By doing so, it is possible to make the second specific state match the practice game with the second number of bets, and as in feature A9, the second specific state can be made into a game medium. Even if it is assumed that no increase is expected, it is possible to end the second specific state more quickly.

In the above configuration, for example, "If the result of the first specific transition is a win or after the transition to the first specific state, the lottery by the lottery means using the second number of bets is held until the first specific state ends." As a result, if the second specific transition result does not result in a win, but if the second specific transition result results in a win, or after the second specific state transitions, the first bet amount will continue until the second specific state ends. If the lottery result of the lottery means does not result in winning as a result of the first specific transition, the significance of ending the second specific state earlier is enhanced. In other words, in such a configuration, even if the number of bets is changed to the first number of bets, the result of the first specific transition will not result in a win until the second specific state ends, regardless of the increase or decrease of gaming media during the second specific state. First, it is necessary to end the second specific state in order to play the game with the first number of bets.

Feature A12. During the second specific state, payout of game media equal to the second number of bets as a possible winning result in a lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the second number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means. is provided as a result that can be given as the benefit, and the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets setting means sets a specific number of bets (3, first number of bets) that is larger than the second number of bets. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that a result in which a payout of the same number of game media as the specific number of bets can be given as the benefit is provided as a result in which a win can be achieved.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the second specific state ends when the second predetermined number of payouts is made, the game is played earlier when the game is played using the specific number of bets than when the game is played using the second number of bets. It becomes possible to end the second specific state immediately. In particular, by making it possible to change whether or not to end early in the number of bets, which can be determined by the player's operations, the game can be improved if the player wants to fully enjoy or experience the second specific state. This makes it possible to allow players to play games while respecting their will.

Feature A13. A predetermined end result (PCB, SB) is provided as a possible result of winning the lottery by the lottery means during the second specific state,
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or feature A12, wherein the second ending means is capable of ending the second specific state based on the predetermined ending result being a winning result.

According to the above configuration, the second specific state ends even if the predetermined end result is won, so for example, depending on the winning probability of the predetermined end result, the second specific state ends earlier than the second predetermined number is reached. It is possible. This makes it possible to eliminate the inconvenience caused by the second specific state continuing for a long time in which no increase in the amount of game media is expected.

In addition, regarding the "predetermined end result", in more detail, "the winning probability of the predetermined combination changes before and after the transfer, and if the number of payouts of gaming media after the transfer reaches a predetermined number, the gaming state after the transfer" may also be used as a result of the termination of the program. In addition, regarding the "predetermined end result", "If the winning probability of the predetermined combination changes before and after the transfer, and the number of payouts of game media after the transfer reaches the predetermined number, or after playing a predetermined number of games, the transfer It may be set as ``result that the subsequent gaming state is terminated''.

In addition, when the above configuration is applied to feature A12, it may be possible that "the predetermined end result is set as a possible result of winning in the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the specific number of bets is set" . The player who sets the specific number of bets using the number of bets setting means can be considered to have the intention of ending the second specific state early, and in this case, the player may win the predetermined ending result. If the configuration is such that the game can be ended early according to the player's will, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of having to end the game even though the player does not want to end it early.

Feature A14. The drive control means is configured to stop the rotation of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, The winning pattern corresponding to the winning result is controlled to stop at the valid position,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific transfer result and the symbols corresponding to the second specific transfer result are not stopped and the second specific symbol combination for specific transfer is not formed, the second specific pattern combination for specific transfer is not formed. 2. Equipped with a reservation storage means (a function of executing a process of setting a bonus winning flag in step S306 in the main control device 101 and a process of making a negative determination in step S609) for reserving and storing the winning as a result of specific transition,
In the lottery performed by the lottery means in a situation where the second specific transition result winning is reserved and stored in the reservation storage means, it is set so that there is a non-winning result in which the second specific result is not a winning result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A13.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the second specific transfer result is reserved and stored, it is possible to aim at and stop the pattern corresponding to the second specific transfer result. In other words, even if you try to win the second specific transition result that is reserved and memorized, if the second specific result wins, the second specific transition result winning will be established in the control that gives priority to the second specific result winning. Therefore, it becomes impossible to shift to the second specific state. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to shift to the second specific state.

Feature A15. The reservation storage means is configured such that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific transition result, and the symbols corresponding to the first specific transition result are not stopped and the first specific symbol combination for specific transition is not formed. The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein it is possible to reserve and store the winning as a result of the first specific transition even in the case where the first specific transition result wins.

In a situation where the first number of bets is playing a game that may be different from the trial version game with a small increase or decrease in gaming media as described above, if the first specific transition result is obtained and it is reserved and stored, depending on the player. , it is also conceivable to carry out the reserved stored situation with the second bet number instead of the first bet number. In this regard, according to the above configuration, it is possible to win the first specific transition result that was won with the first number of bets, with the second number of bets, without reducing the game quality of each number of bets. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the game in which winnings are established.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A15, wherein the second number of bets is set as a smaller number than the first number of bets.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the first specific state to which the game moves when the first number of bets is made and the second specific state to which the game moves to when the second number of bets is smaller than that becomes clear. In particular, in feature A14, it becomes easier to win the first specific shift result with the second bet amount in a situation where the first specific shift result is reserved and stored.

Feature A17. If the second specific transition result is a win and the second specific symbol combination for specific transition stops at the valid position, the transition means transitions to the second specific state, and at the time of the transition, game media are paid out. This is a configuration in which the
In the second specific state, in the predetermined game in the second specific state, the number of game media with the bet number set by the bet number setting means is added to the number of gaming media with the second bet number. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A16, wherein one of the conditions for ending the second specific state is that a payout is made.

According to the above configuration, since the game media are not paid out when the second specific transition results in a winning, a loss of the game media may occur when the second specific state is transitioned. Therefore, if the condition for ending the second specific state is to increase the number of gaming media (second number of bets) required when winning a prize as a result of the second specific transition, the total from the transition to the second specific state to the end is as follows: It becomes possible to reduce the increase and decrease of game media. As a result, the game with the second number of bets can be played with less increase or decrease in game media even if the transition to the second specific state occurs, and the advantage is that it is common with the stop result in the game with the first number of bets. can be enjoyed to the fullest.

Feature A18. In a game played in a situation where the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, a first consecutive game is played consecutively across each game on a predetermined presentation means (for example, the auxiliary display section 65). The performance is set,
In a game performed in a situation where the second number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, a second continuous performance is set in the predetermined performance means to be performed continuously across each game. ,
A first consecutive number storage means (continuous performance counter) for grasping the number of consecutive performances of the first continuous performance, and a second consecutive number storage means (continuous performance counter for display) for grasping the number of consecutive performances of the second continuous performance. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, each having the following features.

According to the above configuration, since the number of consecutive performances of the first continuous performance and the number of consecutive performances of the second continuous performance are grasped separately, for example, while the first continuous performance is being executed, a game based on the first bet number is played. Even if you switch to a game with the second number of bets or vice versa, the number of consecutive performances can be memorized, and when you return to the game with the original number of bets, the number of consecutive performances can be stored. It becomes possible to restart the performance from the middle.

Feature A19. A first performance mode in which a performance based on the first number of bets is performed as a performance by a predetermined performance means (for example, the auxiliary display section 65) based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (operation of the second performance switch 67); (normal game mode) and a second effect mode (specific mode) in which an effect based on the second number of bets is performed (a function for executing specific mode switching processing by the display control device 81). ,
Any one of features A1 to A18, wherein the bet number setting means is capable of setting the first bet number and the second bet number without switching the performance mode by the switching means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, by switching the performance mode, it is possible to enjoy the game with the first number of bets and the game with the second number of bets in the performance mode suitable for each. On the other hand, for example, in a game where you win a so-called bonus when you win the bonus, the number of bets may be set different from the number of bets when the bonus is won, and even in such cases, the production mode may not be switched. If it is put away, the player may feel troubled. Therefore, by making it possible to set each number of bets using the number of bets setting means without switching the production mode, you can enjoy the game to the fullest with each number of bets without the above-mentioned inconvenience. Can be entertained.

Feature A20. Based on the fact that the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state (advantageous section, bonus period), switching of the performance mode by the switching means is disabled or the state is not such that switching of the performance mode by the switching means should be performed. The gaming machine according to feature A19, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a regulating means (a function for executing processing of steps S4603, S4604, S4703 to S4705, etc. by the main control device 101) for executing a regulating process for notifying.

According to the above configuration, depending on the gaming state, there is a possibility that switching between the game based on the first number of bets and the game based on the second number of bets should not be performed. For example, in an advantageous state controlled by the number of games, if the game is played with another number of bets, the number of games in the advantageous state may be eroded; If you have won the bonus, there is a possibility that the bonus lottery will not be drawn even if you play the game with the other bet number. Therefore, by providing a means for disabling switching as described above, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a player incurs a loss due to switching.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to feature A20, wherein the predetermined gaming state in which the regulating process is performed by the regulating means is a state advantageous to the player.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature A20 can be suitably achieved.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56 to 58, 69);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants the player a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A transition result (for example, 1st BB, 1st BB, 2BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB), and when a specific symbol combination (for example, red 7) corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position, a transition means (main) that transitions the gaming state to the specific state. (a function of executing bonus status processing by the control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
Paying out a number of gaming media greater than the first number of bets as a result of a lottery executed by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is a first number of bets (3 pieces). A first specific result (for example, watermelon as the 26th small role) and the transition result are provided, in which a game is played or replaying is possible,
As a result of the lottery executed by the lottery means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is a second bet number (1 ticket) that is smaller than the first bet number, the second A game characterized in that a second specific result (for example, a special watermelon as the 26th prize) and the transition result are provided, in which the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out or the game can be played again. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the start operation means is operated with the number of bets on the game medium as the first bet number, and the result of the lottery to be executed based on the operation is notified by the stop result of the symbols through the operation of the stop operation means. , if the result of the lottery is the first specific result, it is possible to acquire more game media than the number of bets, or it is possible to play again. By setting the second number of bets to be different from the first number of bets, a game in which the same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out or a second specific result or a transition result that allows replaying is possible. It becomes possible to do so. By doing this, it is possible to execute a game that is performed while expecting to obtain more gaming media than the number of bets, but it is also possible to realize a game that is performed from a completely different perspective from that game. . For example, by increasing the winning probability of the second specific result and transition result, although we cannot expect an increase in the number of game media, it is possible to realize a game where there is no increase or decrease in the number of game media (less). Even if the winning probability of the second specific result or transition result is low, the second number of bets is smaller than the first number of bets, so it is possible to operate the start operation means with a smaller number of gaming media. It is also possible to execute a series of games, including circling the orbiting body, operating the stop operation means, and stopping the orbiting body. By doing so, it is possible to freely set the game without being bound by a uniform number of bets, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature B2. In a situation where the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, the first specific result is won, and the first predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the first specific result is formed at the valid position. The configuration is such that when each of the orbiting bodies stops, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result winning is awarded,
As the second identification result,
The specific position is not set as the valid position in a situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, and is set as the valid position in a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means. When each of the orbiting bodies stops with the first predetermined symbol combination formed, the first corresponding result (for example, as the 26th P small prize) is awarded, in which a privilege corresponding to the second specific result winning is given. special watermelon) and
When each of the orbiting bodies stops at the specific position in a state where the first predetermined symbol combination is not formed, a first non-corresponding result (an unsuccessful small winning combination) is awarded, in which a privilege corresponding to the winning of the second specific result is given. )and,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein: is set.

According to the above configuration, in the gameplay with the second number of bets, there is a case where a first predetermined symbol combination that results in a winning is formed in a game with the first number of bets, and a first predetermined symbol combination that does not result in a winning in a game with the first number of bets. It is possible to give a benefit corresponding to the second specific result winning prize either in the case where the symbol combination is not formed or in the case where the symbol combination is not formed. By doing this, in a game with the second number of bets where there is little increase or decrease in game media, the so-called winning number stops when some symbols line up, rather than the game where some symbols line up and the so-called winning number stops as in every game. It is possible to increase the variations in the number of stop results, such as a winning number appearing, or a so-called losing number stopping when the numbers do not line up, thereby improving the game performance based on the second number of bets.

Feature B3. As the second identification result, when the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order, each of the orbiting objects stops with the first symbol combination stopped at the effective position and the first operation result wins. (For example, a winning small winning combination) is established, and when the operation order of the stop operation means is a second operation order different from the first operation order, a second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination is placed in the valid position. Each of the orbiting objects stops with the symbol combination stopped, and the result corresponding to the operation order (for example, the special number 1 promotion replay 1 to 4) is provided,
The benefit granting means pays out the same number of game media as the second number of bets when the winning result is achieved as a result of the first operation, and also pays out the same number of game media as the second number of bets when the winning result is achieved as a result of the second operation. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to pay out the same number of gaming media as .

According to the above configuration, in a game based on the second number of bets, when the second specified result is a result corresponding to the operation order, although the number of game media paid out does not change, different symbol combinations are stopped depending on the operation order and different prizes are won. It becomes a mode. By doing this, in a game using the second number of bets, it is possible to improve the gameplay by increasing the number of winning modes than the types of winning results, while ensuring the gameplay without increasing or decreasing (less) game media. I can do it.

Feature B4. In a situation where the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, the first specific result is won, and the first predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the first specific result is formed at the valid position. The configuration is such that when each of the orbiting bodies stops, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result winning is awarded,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a result corresponding to the operation order, and the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order, the first predetermined symbol combination is placed in the valid position as the first symbol combination. If each of the orbiting bodies stops with the symbol combination formed, and the winning result is established as a result of the first operation, and the operation order of the stop operation means is the second operation order, then the The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the winning as a result of the second operation is achieved by each of the orbiting bodies stopping in a state where the first predetermined symbol combination is not formed as the second symbol combination.

According to the above configuration, the so-called losing numbers and winning numbers in the first number of bets are stopped depending on the order of operations by the stop operation means. Although the benefits awarded will not change even if any roll stops, if you do the above, for example, by announcing or not announcing the first operation order for winning rolls, you can It becomes possible to intentionally make a winning number appear. Thereby, it is possible to significantly improve the gameplay based on the second number of bets.

Feature B5. In a situation where the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, a replay result out of the first specific results is won, and a predetermined symbol combination for replay corresponding to the replay result is placed in the valid position. By stopping each of the orbiting bodies in the formed state, a re-game corresponding to the winning result of the re-game is awarded,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a result corresponding to the operation order, and the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order, the predetermined re-playing symbol is placed in the valid position as the first symbol combination. When each of the orbiting bodies stops with the symbol combination formed, the winning result is established as a result of the first operation, and the operation order of the stop operation means is the second operation order, in the valid position, According to feature B3 or feature B4, the winning result is established as a result of the second operation when each of the orbiting bodies stops in a state where the predetermined symbol combination for replaying is not formed as the second symbol combination. gaming machines.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, the winning numbers and the missing numbers, which are so-called replay winnings, in the first number of bets are stopped depending on the order of operations by the stopping operation means. Although the benefits awarded will not change even if any roll stops, if you do the above, for example, you can notify or not notify the first operation order for the roll that will result in a replay prize. With this, it is possible to intentionally cause a result to appear as a replay prize. Thereby, it is possible to significantly improve the gameplay based on the second number of bets.

Feature B6. As a game played in a situation where the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, there are a high replay state (for example, a second RT state) in which the probability of winning as a result of the replay is relatively high and low; A replay state (for example, the first RT state) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a result corresponding to the operation order, the operation order notification means (for example, the specified operation order by the display control device 81) that can notify the first operation order on a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display section 65) The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing a mode push order process.

According to the above configuration, in the case where the result corresponds to the operation order, for example, if the operation order notification means notifies the first operation order, a result that becomes a replay winning in the game with the first number of bets will appear, and the first If the operation order is not notified, a missed result will appear in the game with the first bet number, and depending on whether notification is provided, a high replay state or a low replay state in the game with the first bet number will occur depending on the presence or absence of notification. It becomes possible to reproduce the re-gaming state. Therefore, the gameplay of the game based on the second number of bets can be improved.

Feature B7. When the second number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, a plurality of types of the second specific results are provided as possible results of winning the lottery by the lottery means,
In a predetermined state (normal gaming state), when the second bet number is set and a lottery is held by the lottery means, one of the plurality of types of second specific results and transition results is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the gaming machine is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, when the second specified result win is established, the payout of the same number of game media as the second number of bets or the grant of replay is performed, so the second specified number of bets is used in the game played with the second number of bets. If one of the results is won, the game played with the second number of bets will not have an increase or decrease in game media. This allows the game played with the second number of bets to be used, for example, as a practice game or as an effect in a game played with the first number of bets.

Feature B8. In the game from the time when the second number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means and the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the transition result until the end of the specific state that was transitioned based on the transition result. , The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that a payout of gaming media in a number exceeding the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is not performed.

According to the above configuration, even if the game with the second number of bets results in a winning result and a specific state is reached, no increase in game media is expected. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the game based on the first number of bets from the game based on the second number of bets, and to strengthen the impression that the game based on the second number of bets is a game for practice.

Feature B9. In a situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, when the transition result is a win and the specific symbol combination stops at the valid position, the transition means shifts to the specific state. , the configuration is such that no gaming media is paid out at the time of the transition,
In the specific state, in the predetermined game in the specific state, a payout is made in a number equal to the number of gaming media of the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means plus the number of gaming media of the second number of bets. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein: is set as one end condition of the specific state.

According to the above configuration, in the second number of bets, no payout of game media is made when the transition result is a win, so a loss of game media may occur when transitioning to the specific state. Therefore, if the condition for ending the specific state is to increase the number of gaming media required at the time of winning the transition result (the second number of bets), the total increase or decrease in gaming media from the transition to the specific state to the end will be reduced. becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to make the game based on the second number of bets such that even if a transition to a specific state occurs, the increase or decrease in game media is reduced.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56 to 58, 69);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants the player a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A transition result (for example, 1st BB, 1st BB, 2BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB), and a transition means (main control) that causes the gaming state to transition to the specific state when a specific symbol combination (red 7 set) corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position. (a function of executing bonus status processing by the device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:
The number of bets set by the number of bets setting means includes a first number of bets (3 pieces) and a second number of bets (1 piece) which is a different number from the first number of bets,
When the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets, the lottery means draws a lottery for each role including the transition result at a first lottery probability, and sets the number of bets. When the number of bets set by the means is the second number of bets, a lottery is performed for each role including the transition result at a second lottery probability,
In a predetermined state, when the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the first lottery probability, the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the ratio of the benefit to the number of bets, and the second lottery probability. A configuration in which the ratio of the benefit to the number of bets is different when the bet is placed,
a display means (auxiliary display section 65) capable of displaying game information including the bonuses to be provided;
Identification means (stamp 65a, identification Accessories 65b) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when playing a game with the first number of bets and when playing a game with the second number of bets, each winning combination including a transition result that allows transition to a specific state is A lottery will be held. The game played with the first number of bets and the game played with the second number of bets have different so-called payout rates, which are the ratio of bonuses to the number of bets. By using such a gaming machine, it is possible to realize a plurality of gaming features with different ball payout rates in one gaming machine, and it is possible to meet the needs of various players with one gaming machine. Furthermore, which game is being played can be identified by display means that can notify game information including bonuses. Therefore, for example, when checking game information including obtained benefits, it is obvious at a glance which number of bets the game was played with along with the benefits. This allows easy confirmation.

Note that the payout rate is expressed as "the ratio of the benefit to the number of bets," but for example, it may be "the rate at which the benefit is given per game," or "a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out as a benefit." '' structure, it may be expressed as "increase rate of the game media for each game" or "decrease rate of the game media for each game." Further, the number of games for calculating the above-mentioned ball payout rate may be set as "per predetermined number of games".

Furthermore, "in a predetermined state" may be a predetermined state among a plurality of gaming states, such as during a bonus or RT state, or may be a predetermined state among a plurality of gaming states, such as during a bonus or during an RT state. The state may include any or all of the gaming states.

Feature C2. The identification means includes identification information indicating that a game is being played with the second number of bets, in information displayed by the display means (normal game performance data) when a game with the first number of bets is being played. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein a game based on the first number of bets and a game based on the second number of bets can be distinguished by overlapping information (performance data for identification information).

According to the above configuration, the display information when the game is being played with the first number of bets and the display information when the game is being played with the second number of bets are provided as separate pieces, and each is separately displayed. Compared to a configuration that allows identification, it is sufficient to simply overlap the identification information, so the storage capacity of display information stored in advance can be significantly reduced.

Feature C3. The display means displays image data for displaying the display information when a game is being played with the second number of bets, and displays the display information when a game is being played with the first number of bets. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the gaming machine is capable of displaying the identification information using image data for the purpose of displaying the identification information and superimposing the identification information on the display.

According to the above configuration, there is no need to store in advance image data for displaying display information when a game with the second bet number is being played, and the effect of feature C2 can be more suitably achieved. can.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the display means is arranged at a position that does not overlap the orbiting body in the front-rear direction.

According to the above configuration, when playing a game while looking at the orbiting object, the identifiability by the identification means is not a concern, and when checking the identifiability by looking at the display means, the orbiting object is not a concern. For example, when a rolled figure that does not stop for a long time comes to a stop on a revolving object, it is assumed that some players will take a photo and record it. In this regard, according to the above configuration, it is possible to take a picture without worrying about the reflection of the display means.

Feature C5. The above in a situation where each of the orbiting bodies is stopped, when the transition means causes the transition to the specific state in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number. The stop number of the above-mentioned pattern that stops at a position that can be seen through the display unit is
The number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets, and the number is the same as the stop number when the transition means causes the transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

According to the above configuration, the transition to a specific state in which the winning probability of each role by the lottery means can change is caused by the same stop result for both the first number of bets and the second number of bets. obtain. In this way, even if the game features have different ball payout rates, the transition between game states will occur based on the same result, making it easier for players to understand the playability, and even if the ball payout rate is low. Even when playing a game on the side, it is possible to experience that the transition to a specific state has occurred due to the same roll as the side with a high ball output rate, and it is also possible to provide a sense of satisfaction. becomes.

On the other hand, if the results are the same, it can be said that it becomes even more difficult for game hall managers to know which game is being played. In particular, the point at which the gaming state transition occurs is a point that can be watched closely by the game hall manager. In this respect, as described in feature C1, since the display means is able to identify the game, it is possible to notify which game is being played at a position that is unrelated to the number of rolls made by each orbiting object. Although the player enjoys the effects of satisfaction, etc., the identifiability does not deteriorate.

Feature C6. In a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets, a first transition result (first BB, second BB) as the transition result that causes the transition means to transition to the specific state. is provided,
In a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets, a second transition result (first PBB, second PBB) as the transition result that causes the transition means to transition to the specific state. is provided,
a probability that the result of a lottery executed by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets will be the first transition result; Features C1 to C5 characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets to be bet is the second number of bets is set as the same probability as the second transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the probability of a transition result (the probability of a first transition result and the probability of a second transition result) is different between a game with a first number of bets and a game with a second number of bets with different ball payout rates. are set to have the same probability. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between a game based on the first number of bets and a game based on the second number of bets in the winning situation (occurrence situation of the specific state) as a result of the transition. In other words, even if the games have different payout rates, both games can be made similar, and for example, one game can be treated as a trial version of the other game. . As described in feature C1, although the two games are similar in this way, they can be identified on the display means side, so the confirmation work by the game hall can be easily performed.

In addition, by configuring that ``the benefits obtained are different depending on the specific state to which you transition based on the first transition result and the specific state to which you transition to based on the second transition result'', the probability of winning for both transition results is the same. However, it is possible to ensure a structure with different ball payout rates.

Feature C7. If the lottery result by the lottery means is a first specific result (for example, a watermelon as the 26th minor prize), the bonus awarding device pays out a first specific number of game media as the bonus. ,
The case where the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means is the first specific result in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets, and the first specific number When the payout of game media is to be performed, the same stop result as the stop result of the symbol that stops at a position that is visible through the display section when each of the orbiting bodies is stopped. is configured such that when the game stops in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets, a second specific number of gaming media different from the first specific number is paid out. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which different benefits are given for the same stop result in the game played with the first number of bets and the game played with the second number of bets. As a result, the first bet number and the second bet number can be identified by the identification means, and the first bet number and the second bet number may have a common result by using the rolled number of the orbiting body which is in a different area from the display means where identifiability occurs. It is possible to realize a game with different ball payout rates while using the above.

Feature C8. In a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets, the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means is a second specific result different from the first specific result (for example, as a 26th P small win). special watermelon), the second specific number of game media can be paid out,
a probability that the result of a lottery executed by the lottery means will be the first specific result in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets, and a probability set by the number of bets setting means. According to feature C7, the probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets to be bet is the second number of bets is set as the same probability as the second specific result. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, the first specific result in which the first specific number is paid out and the second specific result in which the second specific number is paid out are made to appear with the same probability while using a common result. be able to. As a result, the first bet number and the second bet number can be identified by the identification means, and the first bet number and the second bet number may have a common result by using the rolled number of the orbiting body which is in a different area from the display means where identifiability occurs. It is possible to realize a game with different ball payout rates while using the above.

Feature C9. The display means is capable of displaying the number of payouts of game media by the benefit giving means as payout number information when notifying gaming information including the privilege,
When the second specific number of gaming media is paid out based on the second specific result, the payout number information can be displayed as if the first specific number of gaming media were paid out. The gaming machine according to feature C8.

According to the above configuration, when notifying game information including benefits, the same payout number information can be displayed for the game based on the first number of bets and the game based on the second number of bets. As a result, even if the number of gaming media actually paid out is different and the payout rate is different, it is possible to experience the same gaming property on the display. However, as described in feature C1, when game information is announced, it is possible to identify which game it is, so it is assumed that it is only a pseudo display, and this assumption is made. For this reason, it is thought that no problem will occur even if the display differs from the actual number of payouts as described above.

Feature C10. The display means is capable of displaying information on the number of games played as number-of-games information when notifying game information including the bonus,
If a game is being played with the first number of bets, information on the number of games played with the first number of bets is displayed, and if a game is being played with the second number of bets, the information on the number of games played with the first number of bets is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature C9, characterized in that information about the number of games played with the second number of bets can be displayed.

According to the above configuration, while the payout number information is displayed in a pseudo manner, the game number information is displayed corresponding to the actual number of games. This is because if the information about the number of games is displayed in a pseudo manner, the reliability of the notification of game information will drop significantly. , it becomes easier to imagine a pseudo payout number display.

Feature C11. The identification means includes identification information indicating that a game is being played with the second number of bets, in information displayed by the display means (normal game performance data) when a game with the first number of bets is being played. By superimposing information (performance data for identification information), a game based on the first number of bets and a game based on the second number of bets can be distinguished,
The ratio of the benefit to the number of bets when the lottery is conducted by the lottery means based on the first lottery probability is higher than the number of bets when the lottery is conducted by the lottery means based on the second lottery probability. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, characterized in that the ratio of the bonus to the bonus is lower.

According to the above configuration, the display information indicates the game based on the second number of bets, which has a low ball payout rate, with respect to the display information when a game is being played with the first number of bets, which has a high ball payout rate. Identification information is superimposed. In other words, when a game is being played with the first number of bets, the identification information is not superimposed. In other words, when a game with the first number of bets is being played, it is possible to concentrate on the game with the first number of bets without worrying about the other game. This is based on the idea that many players prefer playing games with a higher ball payout rate, and by doing so, the gaming machine can be designed to meet the needs of the majority of players. be able to.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56 to 58, 69);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) that executes a payout of a predetermined number of gaming media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A transition result (e.g., a first PBB, a second PBB ), and a transition means (main controller 101); and
A gaming machine comprising:
the expected number of game media to be paid out (ball payout rate) by the payout means with respect to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means per game executed during the specific state, and the normal number before shifting to the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that the expected number of game media to be paid out by the payout means is equal to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means per game executed during a gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the number of payouts for the number of bets per game is set to be the same between the bonus state as a specific state to which the transition result is based on a so-called bonus win and the normal gaming state before the bonus transition. ing. In other words, even if the normal gaming state shifts to the bonus state, the degree of advantage for the player does not change. For example, as a configuration that does not change the advantage, a bonus state is generated by aligning the bonus symbols in a predetermined starting game and stopping, but a pseudo-probability that does not change the small winning probability compared to before the transition to the bonus state. A configuration that generates a bonus state is also conceivable. However, in this case, only through the starting game where the bonus symbols are aligned and the game can be stopped, the game state has not changed at all, and the probability of winning a small prize does not change either, so the player can experience the occurrence of the bonus state. It's hard to do. On the other hand, in the above configuration, the probability of each winning combination changes depending on the transition to a specific state as a bonus. For example, if the winning probability of each winning combination increases, or if a winning combination that can only be won during the bonus is won, the bonus Easy to feel the situation. If such a configuration is adopted, but the advantage is not changed as described above, it will be possible to have the player experience a simulated bonus state as a specific state without giving any benefit to the player, and this will improve the game design. The degree of freedom is greatly improved. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the attention of the game.

Note that "they are equivalent" may include "they are the same" and "they are not the same, but the profits obtained by the player are at the same level".

In addition, "the expected number of payouts of the game media (ball payout rate) by the payout means for the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means per game executed during the specific state, and the number of balls to be paid out before the transition to the specific state "The expected number of payouts of the game media by the payout means is equivalent to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means per game executed during the normal gaming state." It may be expressed as "the advantage during the specific state and the advantage during the normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state are equivalent".

Feature D2. The expected number of payouts of the game media by the payout means per game executed during the specific state, and the game by the payout means per game executed during the normal gaming state before transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the expected payout number of media is equal to or less than the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means for each game in each state.

According to the above configuration, an increase in game media is not expected not only during the normal gaming state but also during the specific state. In other words, an increase in game media cannot be expected even in the normal gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the player is allowed to experience a bonus as a specific state without giving any profit to the player.

Feature D3. The expected number of payouts of the game media by the payout means per game executed during the specific state, and the game by the payout means per game executed during the normal gaming state before transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the expected payout number of media is the same number as the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means for each game in each state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to expect a payout of the same number of game media as the number of bets in each game in the normal gaming state and the specific state. In other words, although no increase in the number of game media is expected for each game, there will also be no decrease in the number of game media. In this way, by creating a game experience in which the number of game media does not increase or decrease, it is possible to realize a game experience for practicing, for example, to help the player understand the specifications of the gaming machine.

Feature D4. As a lottery result executed by the lottery means, there are a plurality of payout combinations and re-gaming combinations to which game media are paid out by the payout means, and when a lottery is performed by the lottery means, one of the above-mentioned It is configured to win the payout role or the re-gaming role,
The payout means provides a benefit corresponding to the winning payout combination when the lottery result in the lottery means is the winning payout combination and a specific symbol combination corresponding to the winning payout combination is stopped at the valid position. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the gaming machine pays out the same number of gaming media as the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means.

According to the above configuration, a so-called losing result is not set, and in each game, the same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out or a re-game is executed. For example, in a configuration where there is no increase or decrease in the number of game media when averaged over multiple games, there will be a state in which the number of game media decreases and a state in which the number of game media increases, resulting in the gameplay of feature D1. There may be advantages and disadvantages for the player in realizing this. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, since the number of game media does not increase or decrease in each game, the player can easily experience the game without creating an advantageous or disadvantageous situation for the player. I can do it.

Feature D5. The drive control means is configured to stop the rotation of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, Control is performed so that the pattern corresponding to the winning result is stopped at the valid position,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result, and the symbols corresponding to the transition result do not form a predetermined symbol combination at the valid position and stop, a reservation storage means for retaining and storing the transition result winning ( (a function of executing a process of setting a bonus winning flag in the main control device 101),
In the lottery performed by the lottery means in a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved and stored in the reservation storage means, it is set so that there is a non-winning result in which none of the plurality of payout combinations wins. The gaming machine according to feature D4.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transition result is reserved and stored, it is possible to target and stop a specific symbol corresponding to the transition result. In other words, even if you try to win the transfer result that is reserved and memorized, if another payout combination has been won, the transfer result win cannot be established under the control that gives priority to the winning combination, and a specific state will occur. It will not be possible to migrate. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to shift to a specific state.

Feature D6. The number of bets set by the number of bets setting means includes the expected number of payouts of the game media by the payout means per game executed during the specific state, and the number of bets set by the number of bets set by the number of bets set by the number of bets set by the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means. A first bet number (one coin) that is equivalent to the expected number of payouts of the game media by the payout means per executed game, and a second bet number that is a different number from the first bet number. The number (3 pieces) is provided,
In a situation where the second number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, the number of expected payouts of the game media by the payout means per game executed during the specific state and the number of game media to be paid out before shifting to the specific state. The expected number of payouts of the game media by the payout means per game executed during a certain normal gaming state are not equal;
The transition result is set as a lottery result by the lottery means of a game played with the second bet number,
The reservation storage means is configured such that a lottery result by the lottery means for a game played with the second number of bets is a transition result, and a specific symbol corresponding to the transition result forms a predetermined combination at the valid position and then stops. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein even if the winning result is not determined, it is possible to reserve and store the winning as a result of the transfer.

In a situation where the second number of bets is a game that may be different from the trial version game where there is little increase or decrease in the number of gaming media mentioned above, if the transfer result is obtained and it is stored in reservation memory, depending on the player, the reservation memory It is also conceivable to carry out the situation in which the player is placed with the first number of bets instead of the second number of bets. In this regard, according to the above configuration, it is possible to win a winning result in the first number of bets with the transition result won in the second number of bets, so winning can be achieved without reducing the game quality of each number of bets. The degree of freedom of the game can be improved.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the first number of bets is set as a smaller number than the second number of bets.

According to the above configuration, since the first number of bets is smaller than the second number of bets, the loss of gaming media can be minimized in a situation where the transfer result is reserved and stored in the second number of bets. If you want to make the transition result winnings possible, it is assumed that the transition result winnings will be established with the first bet amount instead of the second bet amount. Therefore, scenes in which the effect of feature D6 is exhibited are more likely to occur, and it is possible to increase the merits of having the configuration of feature D6.

Feature D8. The drive control means is configured to stop the rotation of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, Control is performed so that the pattern corresponding to the winning result is stopped at the valid position,
In each of the orbiting bodies, the specific picture corresponding to the transition result is arranged so that it can be stopped at the effective position regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means,
The transition means is characterized in that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, and the specific symbols form a predetermined combination at the valid position and stop, thereby causing the transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature D4.

According to the above configuration, in the case of a transition result, the game feature of aiming at a specific symbol and stopping it is eliminated, but since it is not reserved and stored as in feature D5, the game media is equal to the number of bets at the time of reserved storage. The event of incurring a loss does not occur.

Feature D9. As the plurality of payout roles, a first payout role (for example, a special bell as a 1st P minor role) and a second payout role (for example, a special watermelon as a 26th P minor role) are set,
The dispensing means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning of the first payout combination, and the first predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the first payout combination is stopped at the valid position, the winning of the first payout combination is achieved. paying out the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means as a corresponding benefit;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning of the second payout combination, and the second predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the second payout combination is stopped at the valid position, the winning of the second payout combination is achieved. The payout is configured to pay out the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means as a corresponding benefit,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D8, wherein the first predetermined pattern combination and the second predetermined pattern combination are configured to be visually distinguishable.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of payout combinations are set, and when any of the payout combinations is won, the same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out, and in the gameplay where the number of game media does not increase or decrease, the first payout combination is won. The first predetermined symbol combination and the second predetermined symbol combination constituting the winning combination and the second payout combination are configured to be visually distinguishable. Therefore, it is possible to create variations in the stop roll of the revolving body in each game, and even if the game is such that no matter which payout combination is won, the amount of game media does not increase or decrease, it is possible to prevent the game from getting boring. It becomes possible.

Feature D10. The plurality of payout combinations include a first payout combination that can be won during the normal gaming state (for example, a special bell as the 1st P minor prize), and a third payout combination that can be won during the specific state (for example, the 32P minor prize). Special BB medium and small roles 1) are set as roles,
The dispensing means is
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning of the first payout combination, and the first predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the first payout combination is stopped at the valid position, the winning of the first payout combination is achieved. paying out the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means as a corresponding benefit;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning of the third payout combination, and a third predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the second payout combination is stopped at the valid position, the winning of the third payout combination is achieved. The payout is configured to pay out the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means as a corresponding benefit,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D9, wherein the first predetermined pattern combination and the third predetermined pattern combination are configured to be visually distinguishable.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of payout combinations are set, and when any of the payout combinations is won, the same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out, and the game media does not increase or decrease during the normal gaming state. The first predetermined symbol combination that constitutes the first payout combination win that occurs and the third predetermined symbol combination that constitutes the third payout win that occurs during the specific state are configured to be visually distinguishable. There is. Therefore, it is possible to create variations in the stop roll of the revolving body in each game between the normal game state and the specific state, and even in the game where the expected number of game media is the same, the game state can be experienced as changing. It becomes possible to make it easier.

Feature D11. The number of bets set by the number of bets setting means includes the expected number of payouts of the game media by the payout means per game executed during the specific state, and the number of bets set by the number of bets set by the number of bets set by the number of bets set by the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means. A first bet number (one coin) that is equivalent to the expected number of payouts of the game media by the payout means per executed game, and a second bet number that is a different number from the first bet number. The number (3 pieces) is provided,
In a situation where the second number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, the number of expected payouts of the game media by the payout means per game executed during the specific state and the number of game media to be paid out before shifting to the specific state. Any one of features D1 to D10 is characterized in that the expected number of payouts of the game media by the payout means per game executed during a certain normal gaming state is not equal. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, while realizing the novel gameplay of the feature D1 in the first number of bets, if the second number of bets is different from the first number of bets, payout is expected in the specific state and the normal gaming state. It is possible to realize a general game in which the numbers are different. In this way, it is possible to realize a plurality of game features with one gaming machine, and it is possible to diversify the games.

In this case, for example, if the configuration is such that a game feature in which the amount of game media that can be increased or decreased, which is realized with the second number of bets, can be experienced with the first number of bets, the game based on the first number of bets can be played with the second number of bets. This makes it possible to provide it for practice purposes. This makes the game with the second bet number novel and complex, and even if it is difficult to understand the fun of it the first time, you can practice it with the first bet number and enjoy it. This makes it possible for the player to understand and enjoy the game based on the second bet number to the fullest.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56 to 58, 69);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) that executes a payout of a predetermined number of gaming media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A transition result (e.g., a first PBB, a second PBB ), and a transition means (main controller 101); and
A gaming machine comprising:
The number of bets set by the number of bets setting means includes a first number of bets (3 pieces) and a second number of bets (1 piece) which is a different number from the first number of bets,
In a game played in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets, it is determined whether a specific condition that can be satisfied without winning the transition result is established. a condition determining means (in the second embodiment, a function of executing a process of determining the presence or absence of a special addition flag by the main controller 101);
A predetermined number of bets in a game played in a situation in which the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. A first effect means (in the main control device 101 in the second embodiment, for example, the processing of step S5520, step S5704, S5705 ) and
In a game that is played in a situation where the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. A second performance means (in the main control device 101 in the second embodiment, for example, A function to execute processing such as step S5521, step S5712, S5713, and special additional processing),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where a first number of bets and a second number of bets can be set, if a game is played with the first number of bets and a specific condition is established, then a game is played with the second number of bets. A different effect occurs when the game is not played with the first number of bets, or when the game is played with the first number of bets but the specific condition is not satisfied and the game is played with the second number of bets. As a result, it becomes possible to significantly improve the range of games of a gaming machine in which a plurality of bet numbers can be set. In other words, it is very different from the uniform gameplay of conventional gaming machines, where the game is always played with the first number of bets. It becomes possible to realize a game that allows players to play a game based on numbers.

Feature E2. The number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is determined in a situation where the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied and a situation where the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the probability of winning each winning combination by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets to be made is the second number of bets is the same probability.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of each winning combination by the lottery means in the game played with the second bet number does not change regardless of whether the specific condition is achieved or not. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make different performances between the first performance means and the second performance means without changing the game state or the like. Therefore, the degree of freedom in presentation is improved, and it becomes possible to greatly contribute to an increase in attention.

Feature E3. A payout of the same number of game media as the second number of bets is made as a result of the lottery performed by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. A 2 payout role (for example, a special watermelon as the 26th P small role) and a replay role (special replay) are provided,
At least in a situation where the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means, the lottery by the lottery means is carried out in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the gaming machine is set to win either the second payout winning combination or the replaying winning combination when the winning combination is won.

According to the above configuration, at least in the game played with the second number of bets when the specific condition is satisfied, no increase or decrease in game media occurs. By doing this, it is possible to position the game with the second number of bets as a game for presentation, and it is possible to suitably realize novel presentations with different number of bets within the range of not causing losses to the players. can.

Feature E4. A payout of a first specific number of gaming media that is equal to or greater than the second number of bets is made as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets. There is a first payout win (for example, watermelon as the 26th minor win) that will be played.
The specific condition is that, in a game played in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets, the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning of the first payout combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that one condition can be satisfied.

According to the above configuration, in order to play a game with the second number of bets based on the establishment of the specific condition, the player has the game media of the second number of bets even though the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, inconveniences such as not being able to view the second specific performance based on the satisfaction of the specific condition are less likely to occur. In other words, based on the winning/winning of the first payout combination that triggered the establishment of the specific condition, the payout of game media that is equal to or greater than the second number of bets should have been made.

Feature E5. A first payout winning combination (for example, a watermelon as a 26th minor winning combination) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the betting number set by the betting number setting means is the first betting number. Ori,
A second payout combination (for example, a special watermelon as a 26th prize) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. and
Set so that the stop number of each of the orbiting bodies when the first payout combination win is established is the same as the stop roll of each of the orbiting bodies when the second payout combination win is established. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4.

According to the above configuration, the first payout combination is won in a game with a first number of bets that satisfies a specific condition, and the second payout combination is won in a game with a second number of bets that can be executed after the specific condition is satisfied. The stopping rolls of will be the same. By doing so, the game played with the second number of bets can be made to resemble the game with the first number of bets, and it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort in the gameplay in which the number of bets changes back and forth.

Feature E6. A first payout winning combination (for example, a watermelon as a 26th minor winning combination) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the betting number set by the betting number setting means is the first betting number. Ori,
The specific condition is that the first payout combination has been won, and that the lottery has been won by a second lottery means (a function of executing a special additional lottery process by the main controller 101) which is different from the lottery by the lottery means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the gaming machine is established based on the following.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is not satisfied simply by winning the first payout combination at the time of the first number of bets, but is satisfied when the lottery by the second lottery means is won. Thereby, it is possible to lower the probability of the specific condition being satisfied without lowering the appearance rate of the first payout combination, and it is possible to increase the rarity of the second specific performance by the second performance means. In addition, by doing the above, even if the first specific winning combination is won, there will be cases where the specific conditions are met and cases where they are not, resulting in a variety of production settings when winning the first specific winning combination. It is also possible to aim for

Feature E7. It is characterized by a configuration in which, by winning the lottery by the second lottery means, a second benefit (for example, an additional number of games in attack mode) that is different from the benefit due to the payout of the game media is provided. The gaming machine according to feature E6.

According to the above configuration, the significance of the lottery by the second lottery means is improved, and when the second benefit is granted, the specific condition is satisfied and the second specific performance is performed by the second performance means. Therefore, the significance of the second specific performance is also improved.

Feature E8. The lottery means is conducted in a situation where the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. Feature E7 is characterized in that it includes means (a function for executing special add-on processing by the main control device 101) that can determine the type of the second benefit to be granted based on the lottery result. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the significance of the game played with the second bet number is improved. In other words, it is decided that the second bonus will be awarded by winning the second lottery means when the first specific winning combination is won, and the second bonus will be awarded in the game with the second number of bets to be held after that. 2. The type of benefit is determined. By doing so, the fun of the game based on the second number of bets is improved.

Feature E9. In a situation where the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, the lottery means sets the bet number set by the bet number setting means to be the first bet number instead of the second bet number. When a lottery is held, the system is equipped with a means (a function for executing normal add-on processing by the main control device 101) that can determine the type of the second benefit to be granted based on the lottery result. The gaming machine described in feature E8.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the specific condition is satisfied and the type of the second benefit can be determined in the game with the second number of bets, the game with the first number of bets is played instead of the game with the second number of bets. In this case, since the type of the second benefit is determined using the lottery result of the game based on the first number of bets, the inconvenience that the second benefit is not awarded can be avoided.

Feature E10. Means capable of determining the type of the second benefit to be granted using the lottery result by the lottery means based on the first number of bets that triggered the establishment of the specific condition (based on the additional trigger by the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to feature E8 or feature E9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing processing for determining the number of special add-on games.

According to the above configuration, not only the game after the specific condition is satisfied, but also the result of the game that triggered the specific condition to be satisfied is reflected in the type of the second benefit. As a result, the continuity of a series of games is changed to the type of second benefit, in which a specific condition is established in a game with a first number of bets, and then a second benefit is granted in a game with a second number of bets. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a novel game experience with a benefit award system that takes into account the continuity of games with different bet numbers.

Feature E11. The second specific performance by the second performance means is characterized in that it can occur even in a game played in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a game with a first bet number and a game with a second bet number is played, in the configuration where the second specific performance can occur, the second specific performance is the first Since this can occur even in games based on the number of bets, it is difficult to tell whether the game in which the second specific effect occurs is executed with the first number of bets or the game with the second number of bets. be able to. As a result, in a game that is realized by changing the number of bets back and forth, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the change in the number of bets and draw attention to the outcome of the game (for example, the type of second benefit that will be awarded).

Feature E12. A first payout winning combination (for example, a watermelon as a 26th minor winning combination) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the betting number set by the betting number setting means is the first betting number. Ori,
The specific condition is that the first payout combination has been won, and that the lottery has been won by a second lottery means (a function of executing a special additional lottery process by the main controller 101) which is different from the lottery by the lottery means. It is established based on
It is possible to execute the second specific effect when the lottery by the second lottery means that is held in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets is not won. The gaming machine according to feature E11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means (a function of executing normal add-on processing by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, even if the specific condition for awarding the second benefit is not satisfied, the second specific performance can occur in the game played with the first number of bets. Therefore, it is difficult to understand whether the second specific performance was executed based on the game with the second bet number that was executed when the specific condition was met, or whether it was executed based on the specific condition not being met. I can do it. As a result, in a game that is realized by changing the number of bets back and forth, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the change in the number of bets and draw attention to the outcome of the game (for example, the type of second benefit that will be awarded).

Feature E13. The accepting means includes a plurality of second bet number accepting means capable of accepting virtual game media of the second bet number;
The second effect means is a situation in which the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. In a game played at While executing the second specific performance, when the virtual gaming medium of the second bet number is accepted by operating a second second bet number acceptance means different from the first second bet number acceptance means; The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, wherein the first specific performance is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the first side of the plurality of second bet number accepting means is operated, the second specific effect is executed, while when the second side is operated, the first specific effect is executed. is executed, and it becomes possible to vary the effects depending on the operated second bet number acceptance means. For example, even if a player is prompted to perform an operation on the first side when a specific condition is met, it is up to the player to decide which operation to perform; In such a case, the structure is such that the player's decision-making is respected. As a result, the performance can be performed within a range that does not deviate from the real thrill of slot machine games, which is to start the game by causing the orbiting body to orbit through one's own operation, and to end the game by stopping the orbiting body through one's own operation. becomes possible.

Feature E14. having a plurality of said starting operation means,
Feature E13 is characterized in that the game is configured such that a predetermined starting operating means of the plurality of starting operating means is operated in response to an operating force of the first and second number of bets accepting means by the player. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, when the player operates the first and second number of bets accepting means, the predetermined starting operation means is also operated, and the operation of the accepting means and the operation of the starting operating means are performed in conjunction with each other. This improves operability. In this case, the second betting number accepting means not only has the first side and the second side as described above, but also has a plurality of starting operation means. It can be said that the player can select whether or not to use the configuration in which the operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the game without forcing the performance on the player against his will.

In addition, the above-mentioned configuration is such that "an acceptance operation section in which the first and second bet number acceptance means are operated and a starting operation section in which the predetermined starting operation means is operated are provided adjacently, and If the configuration is such that the acceptance operation section and the starting operation section are operated in a common direction, it becomes possible for the player to operate both operation sections at the same time.

Moreover, in this case, it is also possible to have a configuration in which "a linkage part is provided that presses the starting operation part in the operation direction when the acceptance operation part is operated in the operation direction".

Feature E15. a game that is played in a situation where the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means, and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets; Identification of the game being played in a situation in which the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means, and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. Features E1 to E14 are characterized in that they are equipped with a means for lowering the performance (a function of executing processing for setting bet effects, payout effects, etc. when a special add-on flag is set by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a specific condition is met, in a game that is achieved by changing the number of bets back and forth, it is difficult to understand the back and forth of the number of bets, and the outcome of the game (for example, the second benefit that is given) This makes it possible to draw attention to the type of

Feature E16. A payout win and a replay win in which a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out are set as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. and
If the lottery result by the lottery means held in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets is the payout combination, the winning combination is established when the specific condition is satisfied. Features E1 to E15 characterized in that it is possible to maintain the state in which the specific condition is satisfied if the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-gaming combination. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

A re-gaming role is a role that allows you to play a game with the same number of bets as the current game without requiring new gaming media as a bonus when winning a prize. If the player wins or wins a replay combination in a number game, he or she may be forced to play the next game with the second number of bets. Therefore, if the above configuration is adopted, if a player wins a replay combination in a game with the second number of bets based on the establishment of a specific condition, a situation where the next game is forced to be played with the second number of bets as well. Even if this happens, the state in which the specific condition is met is maintained, so it is difficult for a player to, for example, force a player to play a game with the second bet number even though the specific condition is not met. There is no need to play unnecessary games.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56 to 58, 69);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a payout means (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main controller 101) that executes a payout of a predetermined number of gaming media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As the lottery result by the lottery means, the first specific winning combination (in the first embodiment, for example, a re-game during the normal game state, and in the second embodiment, for example, the watermelon winning combination as the 26th small winning combination) and the first specific winning combination. A second specific win (in the first embodiment, for example, the first rep small win in the normal game state, in the second embodiment, for example, a special watermelon win as the 26th P small win) that has a higher winning probability than the win is provided. has been
A first specific situation in which the first specific winning combination can be achieved (a situation in which a re-game winning is achieved in the normal game mode or a situation in which a watermelon winning combination is achieved) and a second specific situation in which the second specific winning combination can be achieved. 2 Specific means (for example, in the second embodiment, special additional A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function to perform processing such as setting a sound effect when 3 coins are bet.

According to the above configuration, the distinguishability between the first specific situation in which the first specific combination can win and the second specific situation in which the second specific combination can win is reduced, so that the first specific combination can win. It becomes difficult to tell whether the winner was the winner, or the second special role won the prize. Since the winning probability of the second special combination is set higher than that of the first special combination, for example, by making the frequently occurring second special combination winnings look like the first special winnings that do not occur frequently, It is possible to make it seem as if the winning of the first specific winning combination occurs frequently without increasing the winning probability of the first specific winning combination too much. In this way, by reducing the distinguishability between winning combinations with different winning probabilities, it becomes possible to realize novel gameplay through combinations of these winning combinations.

Feature F2. In the first specific situation, when the first specific winning combination is established, the symbols stopping at positions that are visible through the display section in a situation where each of the orbiting bodies is stopped. The stop roll is
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein in the second specific situation, the number is the same as the stopped number when the second specific winning combination is established.

According to the above configuration, the stopping number when winning the first specific winning combination and the stopping number when winning the second specific winning combination become the same stopping number. In other words, the so-called slot machine starts the orbit of the orbiting body based on the operation of the start operation means, stops the orbiting body by operating the stop operation means, and establishes the winning of each role as a stop result according to the lottery result. It is possible to have commonality between the first specific winning combination and the second specific winning combination with regard to the stopping result, which is the key to the game performance of the machine. This makes it possible to reduce the identifiability of each specific performance by the specifying means, and to make it easier for players to think that both specific combinations are the same, since the stop rolls of each game are the same in the first place.

Feature F3. The first specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets (3),
The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is a second number of bets different from the first number of bets. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.

According to the above configuration, the first specific combination and the second specific combination with different winning probabilities can be used depending on the difference in the number of bets. As a result, the gaming properties such as the lottery probability can be changed between the first specific situation where the first specific winning combination can be achieved and the second specific situation where the second specific winning combination can be achieved, without going through the transition of the gaming state etc. can be completely different. Furthermore, as in feature F1, the distinguishability is reduced between the first specific situation and the second specific situation, making it difficult for players to notice that such completely different gameplay features come and go. , it becomes possible to realize novel gameplay using the back and forth of the gameplay.

Feature F4. comprising an acceptance effect execution means (a function for executing processing for a bet time effect by the main control device 101) capable of executing an acceptance effect based on the acceptance of gaming media or virtual game media by the acceptance means;
The identifying means determines the distinguishability between the acceptance performance executed by the acceptance performance execution means in the first specific situation and the acceptance performance executed by the acceptance performance execution unit in the second specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the game machine can be lowered.

According to the above configuration, from the presentation at the start of the game in which the accepting means accepts the game media or the virtual game media, the first specific situation and the second specific situation are reduced in distinguishability. It becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the situation in which different roles such as winning a winning combination and winning a second specific winning combination can be won, and it becomes possible to suitably realize the gameplay described in feature F1.

Feature F5. The first specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets (3),
The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is a second number of bets different from the first number of bets,
The specifying means is configured to execute the acceptance performance corresponding to the first number of bets by the acceptance performance execution means when the acceptance by the acceptance unit corresponding to the second number of bets is performed, thereby determining the first number of bets. The gaming machine according to feature F4, characterized in that the distinguishability between the first specific situation and the second specific situation is reduced.

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult to understand whether the game is a game in which the first specific combination can be won with the first number of bets or the second specific combination can be won with the second number of bets due to the acceptance effect. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which number of bets the game is based on, that is, which specific combination can be won, while making the winning combination different depending on the number of bets.

Feature F6. virtual game media number display means (credit display section 60) that displays the number of virtual game media that can be accepted by the acceptance means;
Updating means for updating the display of the number of virtual game media by the virtual game media number display means based on the reception of virtual game media by the accepting means (input/output of the number of bets by the main controller 101) Counter processing: function to execute step S109);
Equipped with
The specifying means may make the number of virtual game media invisible or difficult to see by the virtual game media number display means based on the establishment of a specific condition that causes the second specific situation (setting of a special addition flag). The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that it is possible.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is different between the first specific situation and the second specific situation, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the number of virtual gaming media that can be used to set the number of bets. , the distinguishability between the first specific situation and the second specific situation is reduced. In this way, the fact that a different number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means is clearly expressed by updating the display of the number of virtual gaming media, and it is possible to avoid the phenomenon where it becomes clear which number of bets are being made. can be avoided.

Feature F7. comprising payout number display means (payout number display section 62) for displaying the number of game media paid out by the payout means,
The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the specifying means is capable of making the number of payouts by the number of payout display means invisible or difficult to see based on the establishment of the specific condition.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific situation occurs, not only the visibility of the display of the number of virtual game media but also the display of the number of payouts is reduced. Generally, these displays are arranged side by side, and if the visibility of only one display decreases, it may give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, by reducing the visibility of both of these displays, it is possible to effectively achieve the effect of feature F6 without giving a sense of discomfort.

Feature F8. The number of game media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the first specific win is different from the number of game media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the second specific win. The gaming machine according to feature F7.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific combinations have different numbers of payouts, as described in feature F7, the visibility of the display of the number of payouts is reduced in the first place, so in the configuration of feature F7, It is also possible to enjoy the effect of making it difficult to understand which specific winning combination has been achieved.

Feature F9. The accepting means includes a plurality of specific accepting means (second credit inserting switch 57 for one bet, fourth credit inserting switch 69, fifth credit inserting switch 75) that can be operated in the second specific situation,
The specifying means is configured to cause the acceptance effect execution means to cause the acceptance effect execution means to accept the virtual game medium by operating a first specific acceptance means among the plurality of specific acceptance means in the second specific situation. 1. In a case where the virtual game medium is accepted by operating a second specific acceptance means different from the first specific acceptance means while causing the acceptance effect to be reduced in distinguishability from the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F8, characterized in that the acceptance performance execution means performs the acceptance performance that is not subject to reduction in distinguishability from the first specific situation.

According to the above configuration, in the second specific situation, when the first side of the plurality of second bet number accepting means is operated, an acceptance effect is performed in which the distinguishability from the first specific situation is reduced, and the second When the side is operated, an acceptance effect is performed that does not reduce the distinguishability from the first specific situation. By doing this, the best part of the slot machine game is that you can start the game by making the orbiting body orbit by your own operation, and end the game by stopping the orbiting body by your own operation. In this way, it is possible to enjoy the effect of a presentation with reduced identifiability.

Feature F10. A payout execution means (a function for executing a process of setting a payout by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout according to the number of payouts based on the payout of game media by the payout means. ,
The number of game media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the first specific win is different from the number of game media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the second specific win,
The specifying means is based on the payout and payout execution means executed by the payout and appearance execution means based on the first specific win in the first specific situation and the second specific win in the second specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized in that it is possible to reduce the distinguishability from the payout play executed by the payout play execution means.

According to the above configuration, the distinguishability of the payouts of the first specific role and the second specific role, which have different payout numbers, is reduced, so it is difficult to distinguish whether the first specific role won or the second specific role won in the first place. becomes difficult to understand. Thereby, the gameplay of feature F1 can be suitably realized.

Feature F11. A first specific number of game media is paid out by the payout means based on the first specific win, and a second specific number of game media different from the first specific number is paid out based on the second specific win. It is configured to be dispensed by the dispensing means,
The specifying means causes the payout execution means to execute the payout corresponding to the one specific number of payouts based on the second specific winning combination, thereby determining the first specific situation and the second specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by lowering the identifiability of the game machine.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature F10 can be suitably achieved.

Feature F12. The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets,
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the second specific number is set to be equal to or less than the second number of bets.

According to the above configuration, for example, if the configuration has a function of crediting virtual game media, it becomes difficult to actually pay out game media when the second specific winning combination is established. In other words, in order to establish the second specific winning combination, a second number of bets of virtual gaming media is accepted by the accepting means, and as a result, a second specific number of gaming media that is equal to or less than the second number of bets is accepted. Even if the second specific number of game media is acquired, it is considered that the second specific number of game media falls within the above credits. In this way, since the game media are not actually paid out, the payout alone can have the effect of reducing the identifiability.

Feature F13. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, characterized in that the starting operation means is operated in response to an operating force of the receiving means by a player.

According to the above configuration, when the player operates the receiving means, the starting operating means is also operated, and since the receiving means and the starting operating means are operated in conjunction with each other, the operability is improved. By doing this, a time lag between the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the starting operation means is less likely to occur, and the orbiting body can start orbiting without giving the receiving means time to recognize the number of accepted virtual game media. becomes possible. Therefore, in a configuration where the first specific winning combination and the second specific winning combination are used depending on the difference in the number of bets, as in feature F3, the distinguishability of the number of bets is reduced, and it is difficult to determine whether the first specific winning combination or the second specific winning combination wins. This makes it possible to make it difficult to understand whether a problem has occurred.

In addition, in the above configuration, "the receiving operation part where the receiving means is operated and the starting operating part where the starting operating means is operated are provided adjacent to each other, and the receiving operating part and the starting operating part are If the configuration is such that the direction of operation is made common, it becomes possible for the player to operate both operation sections at the same time.

Moreover, in this case, it is also possible to have a configuration in which "a linkage part is provided that presses the starting operation part in the operation direction when the acceptance operation part is operated in the operation direction".

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56 to 58, 69);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants the player a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
The number of bets set by the number of bets setting means includes a first number of bets (3 pieces) and a second number of bets (1 piece, 2 pieces) that is a different number from the first number of bets. Ori,
comprising an effective position setting means (a function for executing an effective line setting process by the main controller 101) for setting the effective position according to the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means,
A first effective position (downward line L4 to the right) set by the effective position setting means in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets, and a first effective position set by the number of bets setting means. A second effective position (bending line L6) set by the effective position setting means in a situation where the number of bets to be made is the second number of bets, and a specific position that is an effective position that does not overlap with each other is set. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the game with the first number of bets and the game with the second number of bets by using the specific position. That is, the specific position included on the first effective position side does not overlap with the second effective position, and the specific position included on the second effective position side does not overlap with the first effective position. If such a relationship is used, for example, in a game played with the first number of bets, a predetermined winning result will be achieved when a predetermined symbol combination stops at a specific position, while in a game played with the second number of bets. In this case, even if the predetermined symbol combination is stopped at the position where the predetermined symbol combination that resulted in a winning result was stopped in the first bet number, that position is valid in the game played with the second bet number. Since it is not considered as a position, it will not be considered as a predetermined result winning. However, visually, in the game played with the first number of bets, it is a stop roll with a predetermined result winning, so in the game played with the second bet number, it is as if the predetermined result winning has been achieved. It becomes possible to pretend. The reverse is also true; if you use a specific position that does not overlap between the first valid position and the second valid position, a winning result will appear in one position but not in the other, as shown above. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by utilizing the commonality of the results.

Feature G2. The first effective position is constituted by a first specific position (lower right line L4) that does not overlap with the second effective position, and the second effective position is constituted by a second specific position (bent line L6) that does not overlap with the first effective position. ), and the gaming machine according to feature G1 is configured such that there is no overlapping effective position between the first effective position and the second effective position.

According to the above configuration, there is no overlap between the first effective position and the second effective position. If there are overlapping valid positions, for example, when trying to stop a stop roll that results in a winning result in a game played with the first number of bets, in a game played with the second number of bets. , because the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the game with the second bet number stops at the overlapping valid position, the rule of the outcome that you want to set (the outcome of the game with the first bet number and the second bet number) This may lead to an inconvenience in which the law that standardizes the outcome of games based on numbers breaks down. Therefore, by eliminating overlapping effective positions as in the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature G1 while preventing such inconvenience from occurring.

Feature G3. The effective position is a position that can be visually recognized through the display unit, and includes one stop position for each of the orbiting bodies at which the pattern attached to each orbiting body can be stopped. It is set as a line consisting of a combination of
The first specific position is set as a line that becomes a straight line when the stopping positions are combined, while the second specific position is set as a bending line that bends when the stopping positions are combined. The gaming machine according to feature G2.

In a gaming machine where a plurality of orbiting bodies are stopped and the result is announced by a combination of symbols attached to the plurality of orbiting bodies, the symbols corresponding to the winning combination are lined up in a straight line and stopped. This setting makes it easier for the player to understand the winning combination than stopping at a bend line. Based on this premise, in the case of the above configuration, the player is more likely to notice the stopped picture at the first specific position set as a straight line than at the second specific position set as a bending line. The combination is considered easy to understand. If such an event is used, for example, even if a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the game with the second bet number is stopped at the second specific position with the second bet number, it will not be considered as the stop result of the game. If a predetermined symbol combination is stopped at the first specific position, the eye tends to be drawn to the predetermined symbol combination, and if the predetermined result is a winning result, it is likely to be misperceived. Therefore, it is more preferable to make the numbers common by using the first specific position and the second specific position.

Feature G4. The stop position included in the line of the first specific position and the stop position included in the line of the second specific position are set so that there are the common stop positions and the non-common stop positions, respectively. The gaming machine according to feature G3.

According to the above configuration, the design becomes easy in that the first specific position and the second specific position are used to standardize the outcome of the game based on both bet numbers. Specifically, for example, if a stop roll that stops a predetermined symbol combination on the line at the first specific position is to appear in a game with a second bet number, the game with the second bet number is According to the above configuration, in such a situation, it is necessary to stop the predetermined pattern combination at the first specific position while stopping the resulting pattern combination at the second specific position. It is only necessary to stop the symbols that make up the predetermined picture combination at the common stop positions, and stop the pictures that do not make up the predetermined picture combination at the different stop positions. This simplifies the pattern configuration by associating the combination of a pattern to be stopped at a common stop position and a pattern to be stopped at a non-common stop position with a predetermined pattern combination.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to feature G4, wherein the number of the common stop positions is greater than the number of the non-common stop positions.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature G4, among the patterns stopped at the second specific position, there are more patterns that form the predetermined pattern combination than patterns that do not form the predetermined pattern combination. This makes it easy to use the combinations of various symbols in the game with the first bet number when designing the combinations of various symbols in the game with the second bet number for the game with the first bet number. Therefore, the novel gameplay of feature G1 can be easily realized while making good use of the existing configuration.

Feature G6. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G5, wherein the first number of bets is set as a larger number than the second number of bets.

According to the above configuration, the first number of bets on the side where a straight line is set as the valid position is greater than the second number of bets on the side where the bent line is set as the valid position. Generally speaking, the larger the number of bets, the higher the probability of winning a winning combination (for example, a bonus), and the more benefits obtained in the game. The number of bets that will be made is set as a straight line. By doing this, for example, in a game with the second number of bets, if a predetermined symbol combination is stopped on a straight line that is the first effective position, it is possible to It is possible to easily make the player understand that this is a stop result corresponding to a predetermined winning result.

Feature G7. A first specific result (for example, a watermelon win) is set as a possible result of winning the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the first bet is the number,
A second specific result (for example, a special watermelon winning combination) is set as a possible result of winning the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the second bet is the number,
The benefit granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, the first specific symbol combination stops at the first specific position, so that it is possible to provide a benefit corresponding to the first specific result;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, a benefit corresponding to the second specific result can be granted by stopping the second specific symbol combination at the second specific position;
The first specific symbol combination is set to be established when the first specific symbols (for example, watermelon symbols) constituting the first specific symbol combination are aligned and stopped at each of the stop positions; The second specific symbol combination is established when a combination of a plurality of types of second specific symbols (for example, a watermelon symbol and a red bell symbol) constituting the second specific symbol combination stops at each of the stop positions. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G6, characterized in that the gaming machine is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination that stops on a straight line is set as one type of first specific pattern set, while the second specific pattern combination that stops on a bent line is set as one type of first specific pattern combination. Since it is set as a combination of the second specific symbol, the first specific symbol combination is more eye-catching than the second specific symbol combination, and it is easier to understand the winning combination from the stop roll. Even if the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination are stopped, it is easy to understand that the winning result has been achieved as a result of the first specific symbol combination. This makes it easy to make the player think that the first specific result has won even if it is the second specific result.

Feature G8. When the first specific picture combination stops at the first specific position, the second specific picture combination stops at the second specific position, and when the second specific picture combination stops at the second specific position, the second specific picture combination stops at the second specific position. The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the first specific symbol combination stops at the first specific position.

According to the above configuration, for example, if a situation occurs in which the second specific symbol combination stops at the second specific position and the second specific result is won in a game with the second number of bets. , the stopped result is that the first specific picture combination is stopped at the first specific position. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to make the user think that even the second identification result is the first identification result.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56 to 58, 69);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. function to perform processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants the player a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a game mode,
a first game mode (normal game mode) set in such a way that the number of bets set by the bet number setting means can be increased or decreased by playing a game;
a second gaming mode (specific mode) set in such a way that, by playing a game, the number of bets set by the number of bets set by the number of bets is less likely to increase or decrease in gaming media than in the first gaming mode;
is set,
In the second game mode, the lottery result by the lottery means is a payout result (for example, the 26th P. A gaming machine characterized in that a special watermelon role as a small role is set.

According to the above configuration, the first game mode is set such that an increase or decrease in game media can occur, and the second game mode is set so that an increase or decrease in game media is unlikely to occur. A plurality of game modes can be executed in a game machine, and games can be diversified. In particular, since the second game mode does not easily increase or decrease the number of game media, it can be used, for example, as a practice game mode or a performance game mode, making it possible to create a novel game machine that has not existed before. .

When setting a game mode in which increase or decrease of game media is unlikely to occur, for example, it is also possible to set all lottery results as replay combinations. A re-gaming role is a role that allows you to play the next game with the same number of bets as the number of bets set in the current game without having to accept gaming media again. , is considered to be a preferable hand for playing the above-mentioned practice game mode. In particular, when a replay winning combination is achieved, the number of bets for the next game is generally set automatically without having to accept the game media in the next game. By allowing the player to play in the game mode, there is also the advantage of improving operability since no acceptance operation is required.

However, if such a replay is set as all the winnings, the number of bets is automatically set as described above, so the second game mode as the practice game mode is Even if the player attempts to end the second game mode, the number of bets is always set based on the replay winnings, which may cause an inconvenience in that it becomes difficult to end the second game mode. In this case, for example, it is necessary to add a configuration that allows the gaming machine to be turned on and off, or to change the gaming mode even if the number of bets has been set based on replay winnings.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the number of bets is automatically set by setting a payout result in which the same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out, instead of setting all winnings as replay winnings. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that has the novel gameplay of the second gaming mode, which is unprecedented, in addition to the first gaming mode, while avoiding this.

Regarding the "second gaming mode", for example, it may be expressed as "a second gaming mode set so that no increase or decrease of gaming media occurs", or "a second gaming mode that allows the current status of gaming media to be maintained". It may also be expressed as "gaming mode".

Regarding the "first gaming mode" and the "second gaming mode", for example, "a first gaming mode in which the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, and a first gaming mode in which the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means"; It may be expressed as "a second game mode in which a second number of bets different from the number of bets is set".

Feature H2. The second game mode is set as a mode in which a game imitating the game in the first game mode can be executed,
When a game is played in the second game mode, a means capable of executing an identification notification indicating that the game is a game imitating a game in the first game mode (a process for performing identification display by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function.

According to the above configuration, in realizing the novel second game mode such as the practice game mode shown in feature H1, it is possible to make the player more clearly recognize the position of the second game mode.

Feature H3. The first gaming mode is a gaming mode that is executed when the first betting number (3 or 2 coins) is set by the betting number setting means,
According to feature H1 or feature H2, the second gaming mode is a gaming mode that is executed when a second number of bets different from the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, the first game mode and the second game mode are realized by a difference in the number of bets. In this way, since each game mode only requires different game media or virtual game media to be accepted by the accepting means, it is possible for the player to select which game mode he will play in according to his will. becomes possible. Here, if we were to realize multiple game modes based on the difference in the number of bets, but if one of the game modes was configured entirely by replays as described in Feature H1, then the automatic By setting a certain number of bets, the player is forced to play the next game in the same game mode. In this regard, as described in Feature H1, since the second game mode is realized by the payout result, even if you want to make the next game into the first game mode, the number of bets (first number of bets) is different. It is allowed to perform the settings, and it becomes possible to suitably execute the first gaming mode and the second gaming mode.

Feature H4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-gaming combination and a transition result (for example, the first PBB, the first PBB, 2PBB) is set,
A lottery by the lottery means in a first predetermined state (normal game state) of the normal gaming state in the first gaming mode and a second predetermined state (normal gaming state) of the normal gaming state in the second gaming mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the probability that the result is the winning of the re-gaming combination is set to be the same or substantially the same probability.

According to the above configuration, even in the second game mode that is set so that no increase or decrease in game media occurs, not only the payout result but also the replay combination is set. The replay combination is set to have the same or substantially the same probability of winning in the first predetermined state of the first game mode and the second predetermined state of the second game mode. Based on the premise that the first gaming mode is a general gaming mode, the winning probability of the re-gaming combination in the second gaming mode is the same or approximately the same as the winning probability of the re-gaming combination in the general gaming mode. If this is set, it will be possible to play the game with the same feeling as usual in both the practice mode and the second game mode, which is the game mode, and it will be possible to improve the significance of the practice mode. Become. Also, assuming that the first game mode is a general game mode as mentioned above, in the general game mode, the winning probability of the replay combination is determined by setting other minor combinations, etc. Even if the re-gaming role is set with such a high probability that other minor roles will be re-winning, other minor roles will be won in the general game mode. It is possible to expect a payout result even in the second game mode with a probability that a winning combination can be realized. Then, in the second game mode, almost all the results are re-gaming combinations, and in very rare cases, the result is a payout, which is less likely to occur, making it possible to suitably achieve the effect of feature H1.

Note that "approximately the same probability" does not have to be the exact same probability, but it is sufficient that the probabilities are such that the player can recognize that the probabilities are the same. In other words, the probabilities are different. It suffices if the probabilities are such that it is difficult to do so.

Feature H5. In the normal gaming state in the first gaming mode, a plurality of replaying states (normal gaming state, first to third RT states) in which the lottery result by the lottery means has a different probability of winning the regaming combination are set. and
The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the first predetermined state is set as one of the plurality of replay states.

According to the above configuration, the second predetermined state in the second gaming mode has the same or substantially the same probability of winning a re-gaming combination as any re-gaming state among the plurality of re-gaming states in the first gaming mode. It is set so that In this way, the plurality of replay states not only improves the gameplay in the first game mode, but also allows the second game mode to be positioned as a practice mode corresponding to one of the replay states. The gameplay of 2 game modes is clarified.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein the plurality of re-gaming states (normal gaming state, first to third RT states) are not set in the normal gaming state in the second gaming mode.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to simplify the second gaming mode in the gaming machine of feature H5. In other words, while the first game mode has multiple replay states set, the second game mode as a practice mode does not have multiple replay states set, so the second game mode is the same as the first game mode. It can be said that it is a simpler mode. By doing this, when designing a gaming machine that has multiple gaming modes such as the first gaming mode and the second gaming mode using the limited storage area of the gaming machine, it is possible to use twice the normal storage area. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of securing the game or the inconvenience of simplifying the general first game mode.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as "the normal game state in the second game mode is set so that the probability of winning the re-gaming combination in the lottery by the lottery means does not change."

Feature H7. In the first gaming mode, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning of the re-gaming combination and the symbol combination for re-gaming corresponding to the re-gaming combination is stopped at the valid position, the winning of the re-gaming combination is established. As a benefit corresponding to this, the number of bets can be set by the number of bets setting means in the next game without causing the accepting means to accept gaming media or virtual gaming media,
As a type of symbol combination for replay, the replay symbols (first replay symbol, second replay symbol), which are the symbols constituting the symbol combination for replay, are aligned at the valid position and stop. The symbol combinations that form the symbol combinations for replay are set.
As the payout result as a lottery result in the second game mode, the replay payout result (various reps) in which the payout of the same number of game media as the number of bets is given as the benefit when the replay symbols are aligned and stopped. The gaming machine according to feature H6, characterized in that a small win) is set.

As in the above configuration, if the stop roll corresponding to the re-game payout result appears, the re-game symbols appear to be aligned and stopped, so it can appear as if a re-game winning combination has been achieved. However, since the same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out, the effect of being able to play the next game without requiring new game media is the same as winning a re-gaming winning combination. Therefore, even if the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is set uniformly in the second game mode, if the winning probability and appearance rate of the re-gaming payout results are different, it will be as if the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is different. It can be made to appear as if it is changing. Therefore, without setting a plurality of states with different winning probabilities of re-gaming combinations in the second gaming mode, it is possible to bring the gameplay closer to that of the first gaming mode.

Feature H8. The drive control means establishes the re-game payout result winning when the lottery result of the lottery means is the re-game payout result and the stop operation means is operated in a first operation order; Means for preventing the re-game payout result winning from being established when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order (execution of reel control processing by the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to feature H7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a case where a re-game payout result winning prize is desired to appear and a case where it is not desired to appear without changing the winning probability of the re-game payout result. Therefore, in the gaming machine of feature H7, there is no need to provide a plurality of states in which the winning probabilities of re-game payout results are different, and the configuration of the second gaming mode can be simplified.

Feature H9. When the lottery result of the lottery means is the re-game payout result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order and the re-game payout result winning is established, the bonus awarding means A payout of the same number of game media as the number of bets is given as the benefit, and even if the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order and the re-game payout result does not result in a winning, the same number as the number of bets. The gaming machine according to feature H8, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to provide a payout of gaming media as the benefit.

According to the above configuration, when a re-game payout result is won, the same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out regardless of whether or not the re-game payout result is a winning result. In this way, regardless of whether or not there is a prize, it is possible to always play a game in which the same number of coins are returned, and to realize a gaming experience in which no increase or decrease in the amount of game media occurs.

Feature H10. The game according to any one of features H1 to H9, characterized in that the game is configured to be able to switch from the first game mode to the second game mode regardless of the lottery result in the first game mode. Machine.

According to the above configuration, if you want to execute the second gaming mode while playing the first gaming mode, you can execute it at any time, and the second gaming mode cannot be executed unless some kind of gaming result is obtained. In comparison, the degree of freedom of play is improved.

Feature H11. comprising a predetermined effect execution means (a function for performing processing for executing various effects for a specific mode by the display control device 81) for executing a predetermined effect during the second game mode;
The predetermined performance execution means is configured to perform a switching from the first gaming mode to the second gaming mode in a situation where a regulatory condition (for example, winning a bonus) is satisfied during the first gaming mode. The gaming machine according to feature H10 is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to restrict execution of the predetermined performance.

According to the above configuration, although switching between the first game mode and the second game mode can be performed freely, if the restriction condition is satisfied, the predetermined performance is restricted even when switching to the second game mode. By doing so, while allowing free switching between both game modes, it is possible to notify the player when switching from the first game mode to the second game mode is not appropriate.

Feature H12. In the normal gaming state in the first gaming mode, a plurality of gaming states (normal gaming state, first to third RT states) are set in which the lottery result by the lottery means has a different probability of winning a predetermined combination,
The second game mode is set as a mode in which a game imitating the game in the first game mode can be executed,
A setting means for setting the second game mode (a function for executing a specific mode switching process by the display control device 81),
The setting means may be set to start the current second gaming mode from one of a plurality of gaming states in the first gaming mode. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to play the second game mode as a pseudo trial version mode of the first game mode without increasing or decreasing the amount of game media. In performing this simulated experience, the setting means allows setting from which of the game states in the first game mode the experience is to be performed, thereby improving the playability of the second game mode.

Feature H13. A penalty means (a function of executing penalty processing by the main control device 101) capable of carrying out specific processing disadvantageous to the player when a specific operation of the stop operation means that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed. Prepare,
The penalty means performs the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the first gaming mode, and performs the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the second gaming mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H12, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to perform a process that reduces the disadvantage of the player if the specific process is not performed or if the specific process is performed.

According to the above configuration, when a specific operation that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed in the first game mode, a specific process that is disadvantageous to the player is performed as a penalty. If applied uniformly to game modes, it may be inconvenient to use the second game mode, which is a so-called practice mode. In other words, in the first place, the above-mentioned penalty is given for the act of intentionally trying to obtain game media in the first game mode, but the second game mode is a mode in which no increase or decrease in game media is expected. This is because if the above-mentioned penalty is also given to the second gaming mode, it would go against the purpose of the second gaming mode.

Feature H14. comprising a specific notification execution unit (a function for executing penalty notification by the display control device 81) capable of specific notification that the specific process is performed by the penalty unit based on the specific operation;
The specific notification execution means performs the specific notification when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode, and also provides the specific notification when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. The gaming machine according to feature H13, which performs the following.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of feature H13, although no penalty is given in the second gaming mode, specific notification is performed. As a result, even in the second game mode, if a specific operation is performed, it is possible to make the user understand that the operation would have been given a penalty in the first game mode, and it is a practice mode. It can improve the meaning of things.

Feature H15. Feature H14, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is configured to be able to execute content notification indicating the content of the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when a specific operation is performed in the second specific mode, a penalty is not given, but content notification indicating the content of the penalty (the content of the specific process) is performed. This lets people know the fear of the penalty that will be imposed if a specific operation is performed in the first game mode, and prevents the user from performing a specific operation, and also makes sure that the second game mode is a practice mode. It becomes possible to improve the meaning.

Feature H16. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Acceptance means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal input slot 45, credit input switches 56 to 58, 69);
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main controller 101 functions) and
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. functions) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit (a function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants the player a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a game mode,
a first game mode (normal game mode) set in such a way that the number of bets set by the bet number setting means can be increased or decreased by playing a game;
a second game mode (specific mode) in which the number of game media is not increased or decreased from the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means by playing the game;
is set,
Penalty means capable of carrying out specific processing that is disadvantageous to the player when a specific operation of the stop operation means that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed (a function for executing penalty processing by the main control device 101)
Equipped with
The penalty means performs the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the first gaming mode, and performs the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the second gaming mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to perform a process that reduces the disadvantage of a player if the specific process is not performed or if the specific process is performed.

According to the above configuration, since the first game mode is set so that the number of game media can be increased or decreased, and the second game mode is set so that the number of game media cannot be increased or decreased, one A plurality of game modes can be executed in a game machine, and games can be diversified. In particular, since the second game mode does not increase or decrease the amount of game media, it can be used, for example, as a practice game mode or a performance game mode, making it possible to create a novel game machine that has not existed before. .

Furthermore, when a specific operation that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed in the first game mode, specific processing that is disadvantageous to the player is performed as a penalty. Here, if the configuration of such specific processing is uniformly applied to the second game mode, it may be inconvenient to use the second game mode, which is a so-called practice mode. In other words, in the first place, the above-mentioned penalty is given for the act of intentionally trying to obtain game media in the first game mode, but the second game mode is a mode in which no increase or decrease in game media is expected. This is because if the above-mentioned penalty is also given to the second gaming mode, it would go against the purpose of the second gaming mode. Therefore, by having the above configuration, it becomes possible to suitably execute the second game mode which is a mode for practice.

Regarding the "second gaming mode", for example, it may be expressed as "a second gaming mode in which increase or decrease of gaming media is unlikely to occur", or as "a second gaming mode that makes it possible to maintain the current status of gaming media". You may.

Regarding the "first gaming mode" and the "second gaming mode", for example, "a first gaming mode in which the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means, and a first gaming mode in which the first number of bets is set by the number of bets setting means"; It may be expressed as "a second game mode in which a second number of bets different from the number of bets is set".

The inventions shown in Feature Groups I to O below are as follows: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. There are machines equipped with an auxiliary tank for accommodating the auxiliary tank (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-323750). This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A casing (casing 11) that is open to the front;
a door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing;
a hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage section (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area parallel to the hopper device in the housing and that stores surplus gaming media in the storage section;
Equipped with
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end,
a first engaging portion (right side flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
a second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided within the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion;
The auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area in a first orientation (upward orientation) with the opening facing upward and the bottom facing downward, and in a second orientation different from the first orientation. It is possible and
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engaging part and the second engaging part are not engaged, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation. The gaming machine is characterized in that the first engaging part and the second engaging part are engaged with each other when the auxiliary tank is in the auxiliary tank.

From the viewpoint of preventing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored in the housing. However, when manually collecting game media stored in an auxiliary tank in a game machine, it is necessary to take out the auxiliary tank from the housing, so it is required to store the auxiliary tank in a free state without fixing it. Therefore, if the game machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank moves within the housing and collides with surrounding hopper devices, door bodies, etc., causing damage.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation with the opening facing upward and the bottom facing downward, the first engaging part and the second engaging part are not engaged, The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are configured to engage when the auxiliary tank is installed in a second orientation different from the first orientation. When the game medium from the storage section is to be stored in the auxiliary tank, it is assumed that it will be used in the first orientation, so in such a case, the auxiliary tank can be left in a free state, allowing removal from the housing. It becomes possible to do so. On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, each of the engaging portions engages with each other, thereby restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank within the housing. By installing the auxiliary tank in the second orientation when transporting the game machine, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the auxiliary tank during transport, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed. That is, according to the present invention, it is possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank during transportation, etc., while allowing the operation of taking out the auxiliary tank when the gaming machine is in operation, thereby significantly improving convenience.

Moreover, in the present invention, since the direction of the auxiliary tank corresponds to switching between the engaged state and the disengaged state, the appearance of the auxiliary tank changes depending on whether it is in the engaged state or the disengaged state. It can be made different. For example, if the engaged point is a blind spot for an employee of the game hall (the worker who takes out the auxiliary tank), they may forcefully take out the tank without noticing that it is in the engaged state. There is a risk of damaging the first engaging portion, the second engaging portion, etc. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the difference in the appearance of the auxiliary tank makes it possible to notice the difference in condition at a glance. In this case, for example, if the operator is notified in advance that the auxiliary tank is engaged or not depending on its orientation, it will be easy to tell which of the above states it is in without having to check the engagement location. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary removal operations.

In addition, with this configuration, when installing the auxiliary tank in the second orientation, the auxiliary tank can be installed by utilizing the installation area for installing in the first orientation. This eliminates the need to secure a dedicated space for transportation, etc., and minimizes the expansion of the installation space, making it a configuration suitable for gaming machines where the installation area for mounted components is limited. can do.

Feature I2. The door body is rotatably connected to the housing at one side of the game machine, and the door body and the housing are connected to the side opposite to the one side of the game machine. A locking device is installed to lock the
The predetermined installation area is set within the housing at a location closer to the opposite side,
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein upward movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by engagement between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion.

In the above configuration, by providing the locking device on the side opposite to the rotation axis of the door body, it is possible to prevent the door body from opening under the locked state, and also to prevent the door body from opening in the locked state. The installation area is set closer to the side opposite to the rotation axis of the door body, making it easier to take in and take out the auxiliary tank. However, in a configuration where the locking device and the auxiliary tank installation area are placed on the same side, if the auxiliary tank moves upwards when transporting the game machine, the auxiliary tank may get caught in the interference position with the locking device, and it may become damaged later. There is a possibility that the lock cannot be unlocked even if the unlocking operation is performed. In this regard, in the above configuration, the upward movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the engagement between the first engaging part and the second engaging part, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the second orientation is an orientation in which the auxiliary tank is upside down with respect to the first orientation.

According to this configuration, the size of the space occupied in the installation area can be made not to be significantly different between when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation and when it is installed in the second orientation. Therefore, the auxiliary tank can be installed in the second orientation by utilizing the installation area for installation in the first orientation, and expansion of the installation area can be suppressed.

Feature I4. The size of the tank overlapping area on the tank installation surface of the installation area is different depending on whether the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction or the second direction. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the tank overlapping area is larger when installed in the second orientation.

When transporting the gaming machine, the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing in the second orientation. In such a case, the motion of the gaming machine itself will generate a force on the auxiliary tank depending on the orientation of the casing, etc., but if the auxiliary tank is engaged with the casing side and the tank overlap area on the tank installation surface is large. This allows the auxiliary tank to be maintained in a stable state. In addition, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the tank overlap area on the tank installation surface is small, so considering that the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction while the gaming machine is in operation, the auxiliary tank This can be an advantageous configuration for avoiding interference between the housing and the engaging part (second engaging part) on the housing side.

Feature I5. The first engaging part and the second engaging part match in height when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, wherein the mutual positional relationship is set so that the height positions do not match when there are two players.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the first engaging part and the second engaging part are unintentionally engaged, and the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature I6. In the auxiliary tank, at least a part of the peripheral edge of the opening is provided with an outwardly projecting portion (right flange portion 571c);
The game according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the first engaging part is constituted by the projecting part, and the second engaging part is provided on the tank installation surface of the installation area. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the first engagement part and the second engagement part are properly engaged, and when the auxiliary tank is turned upside down, the first engagement part is engaged with the second engagement part. The height position of the section can be changed significantly. As a result, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of the first engaging part and the second engaging part unintentionally engaging and restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank. Become.

Feature I7. The projecting portion is provided at a peripheral portion of the opening that extends in a direction that is the front and back direction of the gaming machine when the auxiliary tank is installed in the installation area,
The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged and disengaged by sliding the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine within the housing. The gaming machine according to feature I6.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, it is possible to engage the auxiliary tank inside the housing by using the overhang provided at the periphery of the opening of the auxiliary tank. can. Furthermore, considering that the hopper device and the auxiliary tank are provided side by side within the housing, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the overhanging portion allows the auxiliary tank to be attached to the hopper device and the wall of the housing. location is regulated. Therefore, even if the auxiliary tank is not engaged in the first direction, it is possible to control the displacement of the auxiliary tank.

Feature I8. comprising accommodation state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b, and main controller 101) for detecting the accommodation state of game media in the auxiliary tank;
The storage state detection means includes insertion members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod) inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 505a, lower sensor insertion hole 505b) provided in the auxiliary tank. a sensor rod 16b);
A plurality of the insertion holes are provided vertically,
In either of the cases where the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation and the case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the insertion member is inserted into any one of the plurality of insertion holes. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I7, characterized in that the gaming machine is insertable.

According to the above configuration, the insertion member of the containment state detection means is positioned inside the tank body in both cases where the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation. can be done. This makes it possible to detect the storage state of game media regardless of the vertical orientation of the auxiliary tank, and provides a configuration suitable for installing the auxiliary tank upside down.

Feature I9. The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged and disengaged by sliding the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine within the housing,
comprising accommodation state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b, and main controller 101) for detecting the accommodation state of game media in the auxiliary tank;
The storage state detection means includes insertion members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod) inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 505a, lower sensor insertion hole 505b) provided in the auxiliary tank. a sensor rod 16b);
The insertion member is configured to extend in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine and in the same direction as the tank installation surface of the installation area in the height direction,
The game according to any one of features I3 to I8, wherein the insertion member can be inserted into and removed from the insertion hole by sliding the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the game machine within the housing. Machine.

When the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing in the first orientation and the game media is stored in the auxiliary tank, the auxiliary tank is relatively heavy, so when the auxiliary tank is taken out by the operator, It is thought that the auxiliary tank is pulled out of the housing by sliding it on the tank installation surface from the front opening side of the housing. In this case, since the auxiliary tank is slid, the insertion member inserted into the insertion hole of the auxiliary tank is pulled out without receiving excessive force from the auxiliary tank.

On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing in the second orientation, the auxiliary tank is empty and its weight is relatively light. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank is taken out by the worker, it is conceivable that the auxiliary tank is pulled out of the housing while being lifted toward the front. In this case, there is a concern that the insertion member inserted into the insertion hole of the auxiliary tank may receive excessive force from the auxiliary tank. In this regard, by sliding the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the game machine, the first engaging part and the second engaging part are engaged and disengaged, so that the insertion member is connected to the auxiliary tank. It is possible to suppress excessive force from being received. In other words, the insertion member can be protected.

Feature I10. Among the side walls of the auxiliary tank that stand up from the peripheral edge of the bottom so as to surround the bottom, the side wall that faces the second engaging part when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction ( Features I3 to I9 are characterized in that the left side wall portion 501e) has an inclined shape in which the distance between the left side wall portion 501e and the opposing side wall portion (right side wall portion 501d) increases upwardly. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is in the first orientation, the side wall portion that faces the second engaging portion has an inclined shape in which the distance between the opposing side wall portions increases upwardly. For this reason, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, it becomes easy to secure a space between the auxiliary tank and the second engaging portion, and interference between the two can be suppressed.

Feature I11. A bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) is provided in the bottom plate portion of the casing, and it is possible to discharge gaming media to the outside of the gaming machine through the bottom plate opening.
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the bottom plate opening is covered by the auxiliary tank, and the first engaging part and the second engaging part are engaged with each other on the outside of the auxiliary tank. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I10, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that a match is made.

When transporting the gaming machine, etc., insert a foreign object or hand into the bottom plate opening from the outside of the gaming machine, release the engagement between the first engaging part and the second engaging part, and remove the auxiliary tank to remove the inside of the gaming machine. It is assumed that an attempt is made to gain unauthorized access to. According to the above configuration, the bottom plate opening is covered by the auxiliary tank, and the engagement relationship between the first engagement part and the second engagement part is established outside the auxiliary tank, so that the engagement part and the bottom plate opening are A wall portion of the auxiliary tank may be interposed between the auxiliary tank and the auxiliary tank. This makes it difficult to access the engagement portion through the bottom plate opening, thereby making it possible to suppress the above-mentioned fraudulent activity.

Feature I12. A bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) is provided in the bottom plate portion of the casing, and it is possible to discharge gaming media to the outside of the gaming machine through the bottom plate opening.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I11, wherein the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be opened and closed by an opening/closing means (bottom lid 514) provided at the bottom.

According to the above configuration, by opening the bottom of the auxiliary tank, game media from the storage section can be directly guided to the bottom plate opening. This makes it possible to automatically collect the auxiliary tank while it is installed inside the housing, making it unnecessary to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, and reducing the risk of losing the auxiliary tank. .

Feature I13. The opening/closing means is configured to open the bottom part by moving inside the auxiliary tank,
The gaming machine according to feature I12, wherein the auxiliary tank includes a holding means for holding the opening/closing means in a closed position.

According to the above configuration, since the holding means for holding the opening/closing means in the closed position is provided, it becomes possible to transport the gaming machine with the bottom of the auxiliary tank closed.

Feature I14. The auxiliary tank is provided with a display section on which predetermined information is displayed,
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the predetermined information becomes visible or easily visible in the first mode, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the predetermined information The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I13, wherein the second mode is invisible or difficult to see compared to the first mode.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is oriented in the second direction, the predetermined information becomes visible or easily visible, thereby alerting the operator who is performing the removal operation, and preventing forced removal. Operation can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank is in the first orientation, the predetermined information becomes invisible or difficult to see, which prevents the worker from being confused by the display of the predetermined information, and causes a hindrance to the work of collecting the game media. can be suppressed.

The prescribed information includes information that explains how to release the engaged state, information that calls for caution when removing the auxiliary tank, information that suggests or clearly indicates that the auxiliary tank is fixed, and information that indicates that the auxiliary tank is fixed. Possible information may include information that suggests or indicates that the tank is at the bottom of the tank, information that indicates or indicates the raw material or forming material of the auxiliary tank, etc. Note that the predetermined information does not necessarily have to be text, and may be composed of colors, shapes, patterns, and the like.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A casing (casing 11) that is open to the front;
a door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing;
a hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage section (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area parallel to the hopper device in the housing and that stores surplus gaming media in the storage section;
Equipped with
A bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging game media inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine is provided in the bottom plate portion of the casing;
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening at the upper end and a bottom at the lower end,
The bottom part is provided with an opening/closing means (bottom lid 514) that allows the bottom part to be opened and closed,
The auxiliary tank has a first orientation (upward orientation) in which the opening is on the upper side and the bottom part is on the lower side in the predetermined installation area, and a second orientation (upward orientation) in which the opening is on the lower side and the bottom part is on the upper side. It can be installed in both directions (downward posture),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a switching mechanism that brings the opening/closing means into a closed state in the first orientation and brings the opening/closing means into an open state in the second orientation.

According to the above configuration, since the tank bottom can be opened and closed, the auxiliary tank can be made compatible with manual collection by closing the bottom, while it can be made compatible with automatic collection by opening the bottom. As a result, the auxiliary tank can be installed within the housing even during automatic collection, making it unnecessary to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, and making it possible to prevent loss of the auxiliary tank.

In addition, with the above configuration, the bottom can be opened when the auxiliary tank is turned upside down from the first orientation to the second orientation, thereby simplifying the switching operation to the open state. Moreover, in this configuration, since the opening and closing of the bottom corresponds to the orientation of the auxiliary tank, it is easy to understand which mode it is in. For example, in the case of a device that only switches between opening and closing in the first direction, it is difficult to determine which state it is in unless you look into the auxiliary tank. As a result, there is a risk that the device may be used in an incorrect manner, such as being used in an open state when it should be used in a closed state. In this regard, with the present configuration, the appearance of the auxiliary tank can be made different between the closed state and the open state, making it possible to notice the difference in state at a glance. In particular, since it is configured to be in an open state when the bottom is on the upper side, it becomes easier to notice that the bottom is empty, and it is possible to prevent incorrect use.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area in the second direction when the gaming media are automatically collected.

By setting the auxiliary tank in the second orientation, the bottom of the auxiliary tank is switched to the open state, which makes it possible to prevent forgetting to open the bottom when used in conjunction with automatic collection.

Feature J3. The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support part 504), and opens the bottom part by being rotated inside the auxiliary tank,
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, wherein when the auxiliary tank is in the second orientation, the opening/closing means is rotated and opened by its own weight.

According to the above configuration, since the opening/closing means rotates under its own weight and the bottom part is opened, the bottom part of the auxiliary tank can be opened when the auxiliary tank is set in the second direction, and there is no need to forget to open the bottom part. It can be suppressed. In this case, there is no need for a drive unit that rotates the opening/closing means to open the bottom or a control configuration that controls the drive unit depending on the attitude of the auxiliary tank, making it possible to simplify the configuration and reduce costs. It becomes possible.

Feature J4. The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support part 504), and opens the bottom part by being rotated inside the auxiliary tank,
According to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein when the auxiliary tank is in the second orientation, at least the support side base end of the opening/closing means is covered from above by the bottom of the auxiliary tank. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the game media from the storage portion from colliding with the support side base end portion of the opening/closing means, thereby preventing support from being hindered. In this case, by utilizing the bottom part of the auxiliary tank as a covering part that covers the supporting side proximal end part, there is no need to provide special parts, and the configuration of the auxiliary tank can be simplified.

Feature J5. The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support part 504), and opens the bottom part by being rotated inside the auxiliary tank,
The auxiliary tank includes rotation limiting means (protrusion 535) that limits the rotation range of the opening/closing means,
The upper limit angle of rotation (predetermined rotation angle α) by the rotation limiting means is an angle at which the opening/closing means rotates toward the closing side by its own weight when the auxiliary tank is in the first orientation. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is in the first orientation, the opening/closing means rotates under its own weight and the bottom part is closed. can be closed, and forgetting to close it can be suppressed. In this case, there is no need for a drive unit that rotates the opening/closing means to close the bottom or a control configuration that controls the drive unit depending on the attitude of the auxiliary tank, making it possible to simplify the configuration and reduce costs. It becomes possible.

Feature J6. Feature J5 characterized in that when the opening/closing means is rotated to the upper limit rotation angle with the auxiliary tank in the first orientation, the opening/closing means is inclined toward the closing side. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, by setting the auxiliary tank in the first direction, the opening/closing means collapses under its own weight toward the closing side, and it becomes possible to close the bottom of the auxiliary tank naturally.

This feature is defined as ``When the opening/closing means is rotated to the upper limit angle of rotation with the auxiliary tank in the first orientation, the center of gravity of the opening/closing means crosses the rotation axis of the opening/closing means. It may be said that the structure is located on the closed side with respect to the imaginary vertical line passing therethrough.

Feature J7. The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support part 504), and opens the bottom part by being rotated inside the auxiliary tank,
In the auxiliary tank, there is a rotation limiter that corresponds to the opening/closing means rotated to the open side when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, and that limits the rotation angle of the opening/closing means on the opening side. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, characterized in that members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) are provided.

According to the above configuration, when an attempt is made to open the bottom of the auxiliary tank by allowing a foreign object or the like to enter through the bottom plate opening during transportation of the game machine, the rotation limiting member can prevent this. This prevents the bottom of the auxiliary tank from completely opening, making it difficult for unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine.

Feature J8. comprising storage state detection means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b, main controller 101) for detecting the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank,
The storage state detection means includes insertion members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod) inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 505a, lower sensor insertion hole 505b) provided in the auxiliary tank. a sensor rod 16b);
The gaming machine according to feature J7, wherein the rotation limiting member is constituted by the insertion member.

According to the above configuration, the rotation of the opening/closing member can be restricted by utilizing the accommodation state detection means without providing a dedicated member as a rotation restriction member. Additionally, when transporting the game machine, if you install an auxiliary tank with the insertion member inserted into the tank, you can restrict the rotation of the opening/closing means, but you can remove the restriction by removing the auxiliary tank from the housing. . In other words, it is possible to switch between restrictions depending on the situation, improving convenience.

Feature J9. a first engaging portion (right side flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
a second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided within the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion;
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engaging part and the second engaging part are not engaged, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation. Features J1 to J8 are characterized in that the first engaging part and the second engaging part are engaged with each other when the auxiliary tank is in use, and the movement of the auxiliary tank is regulated by the engagement. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to support automatic collection while engaging the first engaging part and the second engaging part. This makes it possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from shifting even if a shock is applied, such as when a player hits the game machine, and allows game media from the storage section to be properly guided to the bottom plate opening. . Furthermore, if the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation when transporting the game machine, movement of the auxiliary tank within the housing can be restricted, and rattling of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed. This can prevent the auxiliary tank from colliding with surrounding members within the casing and causing damage.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A casing (casing 11) that is open to the front;
a door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing;
a hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage section (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) installed in a predetermined installation area within the housing and accommodating surplus game media in the storage section;
Equipped with
A bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging game media inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine is provided in the bottom plate portion of the casing;
The auxiliary tank is
It has a bottomed shape with an opening at the upper end and a bottom at the lower end,
an opening/closing means (bottom lid 514) provided on the bottom and capable of opening and closing the bottom;
Supporting means (supporting part 607) that supports the opening/closing means in an openable/closable manner;
a biasing device (coil spring 617) that biases the opening/closing device toward the closing side;
Equipped with
The auxiliary tank has a first orientation (upward orientation) in which the opening is on the upper side and the bottom part is on the lower side in the predetermined installation area, and a second orientation (upward orientation) in which the opening is on the lower side and the bottom part is on the upper side. It can be installed in both directions (downward posture),
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the game medium from the storage section is placed on the opening/closing means, so that the opening/closing means is opened by the weight of the game medium. A gaming machine characterized by the following configuration.

According to the above configuration, the bottom of the tank can be opened and closed, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the bottom of the tank can be opened depending on the weight of the game medium on the opening/closing means. By installing it in the correct direction, it can be automatically collected. As a result, the auxiliary tank can be installed within the housing even during automatic collection, making it unnecessary to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, and making it possible to prevent loss of the auxiliary tank. Moreover, since the opening/closing means is biased toward the closing side by the biasing means, it is possible to prevent the bottom of the tank from remaining open, thereby preventing foreign objects or hands from entering through the bottom plate opening and causing unauthorized access inside the gaming machine. Acts of attempting to access can be suppressed.

Feature K2. The auxiliary tank includes an opening regulating means (a surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602) that restricts the opening and closing means from opening to the outside of the tank by coming into contact with the opening and closing means from outside the tank when the opening and closing means is in a closed state. The gaming machine according to feature K1.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the tank bottom can be prevented from opening even if the opening/closing means is pushed up from below. As a result, if the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation when transporting the game machine, the bottom of the tank will be difficult to open even if a foreign object or hand enters through the bottom plate opening, and the inside of the game machine will be able to enter through the bottom plate opening. Acts of attempting unauthorized access can be suppressed.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, characterized in that the bottom portion is provided with an enclosure portion (standing portion 608) that extends in the height direction of the auxiliary tank and surrounds the opening/closing means.

It is assumed that a foreign object or the like that has entered through the opening of the bottom plate gets caught in the opening/closing means, causing the bottom of the tank to open and allowing unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine. In this regard, in this configuration, since the opening/closing means is surrounded by the enclosure, it is possible to prevent foreign objects from getting caught in the opening/closing means, and the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to feature K3, wherein the height of the enclosure is larger than the thickness of the opening/closing means.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to make it more difficult for foreign objects to be caught on the opening/closing means.

Feature K5. Upward movement regulating means (right flange portion 571c, engaging portion 574) for regulating upward movement of the auxiliary tank when the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area in the second direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4.

According to the above configuration, by installing the auxiliary tank in the second direction when transporting the game machine, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from floating up, and the auxiliary tank and surrounding members may collide with each other during transport. Damage is suppressed. Furthermore, even if a foreign object or the like enters through the bottom plate opening and pushes up the auxiliary tank, it is possible to make it difficult to form a gap between the auxiliary tank and the tank installation surface, or to make it difficult to enlarge the gap. This makes it possible to suppress attempts to gain unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine through the gap. Not only that, but when used in conjunction with automatic collection, it also prevents the auxiliary tank from bouncing inside the housing when a player hits the game machine or hits it with impact. . As a result, displacement of the auxiliary tank due to impact is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that game media from the storage section are not guided to the bottom plate opening.

Feature K6. The upward movement regulating means is
a first engaging portion (right side flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
a second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided within the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion;
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engaging part and the second engaging part are not engaged, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation. Feature K5 is characterized in that the first engaging part and the second engaging part are engaged with each other when the auxiliary tank is present, and the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the engagement. gaming machines.

According to the above structure, it becomes possible to realize the structure of the feature K5 in a practically preferable manner. In addition, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion do not engage with each other, allowing movement of the auxiliary tank. Therefore, when used in conjunction with manual collection, the auxiliary tank can be easily taken out from within the housing.

Feature K7. In the auxiliary tank, the opening/closing means is provided with a size that allows opening and closing of a part of the bottom area,
Guiding means (slanted part 604) for guiding game media from the storage section toward the opening/closing means when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction at a location different from the opening/closing means on the bottom part; The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, characterized by comprising:

For example, if the bottom of the tank does not open due to a delay in the response of the opening/closing means when game media are supplied from the storage section, there is a risk that the game media will accumulate on the bottom and gradually spill out and be scattered inside the casing. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the game media are collected in the opening/closing means, the weight of the game media can be concentrated on the opening/closing means. This makes it possible to improve the opening responsiveness of the opening/closing means.

Feature K8. The guiding means is a guiding inclined part (slanted part 604) provided at a different part from the opening/closing means at the bottom,
Feature K7 characterized in that the guiding inclined part is inclined downward toward the opening/closing means when the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area in the second direction. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the game medium can be guided along the slope, and the game medium from the storage section can be suitably brought to the opening/closing means.

Feature K9. The support means rotatably supports the opening/closing means,
A bottom opening (lower opening 603) is provided in the bottom,
The opening/closing means opens the bottom opening by being rotated inside the auxiliary tank,
The gaming machine according to feature K7 or K8, characterized in that the bottom side opening is arranged closer to the rotating tip side of the opening/closing means.

In the above configuration, the opening/closing means is exposed to the outside of the tank through the bottom opening, and the bottom opening is arranged closer to the rotating tip of the opening/closing means. For this reason, it becomes easier to place game media from the storage section at a location spaced apart from the rotation axis of the opening/closing means, and it becomes possible to improve the opening responsiveness of the opening/closing means.

Feature K10. The support means rotatably supports the opening/closing means,
The auxiliary tank is characterized in that it includes a guide means (back surface 606b of the bottom cover 606) that guides the game medium placed on the opening/closing means toward the rotating tip side of the opening/closing means. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K9.

According to the above configuration, since the game medium is guided toward the rotating tip side of the opening/closing means, it becomes easier to concentrate the weight of the game medium away from the rotation axis of the opening/closing means, thereby improving the opening response of the opening/closing means. It becomes possible to increase the

Feature K11. The guiding means includes a guiding slope provided on the opening/closing means,
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the guide slope portion is provided on a predetermined surface of the opening/closing means on the side on which the game medium is placed, and is directed toward the rotating tip side. The gaming machine according to feature K10, characterized in that the gaming machine has a downwardly sloping shape.

According to the above configuration, the game medium on the opening/closing means can be guided along the slope, and the game medium from the storage section can be suitably brought to the rotating tip side.

Feature K12. The opening/closing means opens the bottom part by being rotated inside the auxiliary tank against the urging force of the urging means,
Features K1 to K1 characterized in that, in a state where the bottom portion is closed by the opening/closing means, the surface on which the gaming medium is placed in the opening/closing means is inclined downward toward the rotating tip side of the opening/closing means. The gaming machine according to any one of K11.

When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the opening/closing means of the auxiliary tank is opened due to the weight of the game medium, and the game medium enters the inside of the tank. In this case, when the game medium enters the tank and its weight is reduced, the opening/closing means returns to the closed position due to the urging force of the urging means. In such a case, if there are game media remaining on the opening/closing means, there is a concern that the momentum of the closing of the opening/closing means will cause them to be blown out of the auxiliary tank and the game media may be scattered inside the housing.

In this regard, in the above configuration, since the surface on which the game medium is placed in the opening and closing means is inclined downward toward the rotating tip side when the opening and closing means is in the closed state, the inconvenience of the game medium being blown away is suppressed. In other words, if the surface on which the game medium is placed is inclined downward toward the rotating tip side, the game medium will be guided into the tank even if the amount of opening of the opening/closing means is relatively small. Therefore, when the opening/closing means is closed due to a decrease in the amount of game media on the opening/closing means, the amount of rotation required for closing is reduced, and it is possible to suppress the game media from being thrown away.

In addition, in this feature, "the opening/closing means is inclined so that, when the bottom part is closed by the opening/closing means, the tip side is located inside the tank in the vertical direction than the part supported by the supporting means." It can also be read as

Feature K13. In the auxiliary tank, the bottom portion has a receiving portion (bottom plate portion 602, bottom lid 606) that receives game media supplied from the storage portion when the auxiliary tank is installed in the downward position;
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K12, wherein the bottom portion is provided with a standing portion (bottom plate protruding portion 605) that stands up from the bottom portion in a region surrounding the receiving portion. .

When the auxiliary tank is installed in a downward position, the opening/closing means of the auxiliary tank is opened due to the weight of the game medium, and the game medium enters the inside of the tank. In this case, when the game medium enters the tank and its weight is reduced, the opening/closing means returns to the closed position due to the urging force of the urging means. In such a case, if there are game media remaining on the opening/closing means, there is a concern that the momentum of the closing of the opening/closing means will cause them to be blown out of the auxiliary tank and the game media may be scattered inside the housing. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the raised part is provided at the bottom of the auxiliary tank around the receiving part, even if the game media is thrown away, the game media will not reach the outside of the auxiliary tank. It can prevent you from putting it away.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A casing (casing 11) that is open to the front;
a door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing;
a hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage section (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area parallel to the hopper device in the housing and that stores surplus gaming media in the storage section;
Equipped with
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end,
a first engagement part (bottom side through hole 720, engagement upright part 836) provided in the auxiliary tank;
a second engaging portion (engaging portion 721, lower sensor portion 801) provided within the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion;
switching means (bottom lids 704, 802) for switching between an engaged state and a non-engaged state between the first engaging section and the second engaging section according to the accommodation state of game media in the auxiliary tank; ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

From the viewpoint of preventing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored in the housing. However, when manually collecting game media stored in an auxiliary tank in a game machine, it is necessary to take out the auxiliary tank from the housing, so it is required to store the auxiliary tank in a free state without fixing it. Therefore, if the game machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank moves within the housing and collides with surrounding hopper devices, door bodies, etc., causing damage.

In this regard, the present configuration includes a first engaging part provided in the auxiliary tank and a second engaging part provided in the housing, and the engagement between the two is determined according to the state of accommodation of game media in the auxiliary tank. It is configured to switch between the presence and absence of the Therefore, by keeping the first engaging part and the second engaging part in an engaged state when transporting the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank and to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. Become. On the other hand, when collecting the game media stored in the auxiliary tank, the first engaging part and the second engaging part can be switched to a non-engaging state according to the amount of game media accumulated in the auxiliary tank, It becomes possible to allow the auxiliary tank to be taken out from within the housing.

Feature L2. The switching means brings the first engaging part and the second engaging part into an engaged state when no game medium is stored in the auxiliary tank, and the game medium is stored in the auxiliary tank. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the first engaging part and the second engaging part are brought into a non-engaging state.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is not expected to contain game media, the movement of the auxiliary tank is regulated by the first engaging part and the second engaging part, while the movement of the auxiliary tank is regulated by the first engaging part and the second engaging part. In this case, the auxiliary tank is naturally allowed to be taken out in response to game media being stored in the auxiliary tank. This not only eliminates the need for switching operations by the operator and contributes to eliminating the hassle, but also prevents the inconvenience of damage to the first engagement part and the second engagement part caused by performing the removal operation without remembering to switch. .

Feature L3. Feature L1 or The gaming machine described in L2.

In the above configuration, since the release operation part is provided, even if no game media is stored in the auxiliary tank and the first engaging part and the second engaging part are in the engaged state, By operating the release operation part, the engagement between the first engagement part and the second engagement part can be released, and the auxiliary tank can be taken out as appropriate. Thereby, it is possible to improve the convenience of using the auxiliary tank while suppressing rattling during transportation of the gaming machine.

Feature L4. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the first engaging part and the second engaging part are provided in an engaging relationship with each other in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the movement of the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the game machine is regulated by the engagement of the first engagement part and the second engagement part. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the auxiliary tank moving within the housing and hitting the door when the gaming machine is being transported.

Feature L5. One of the first and second engaging parts is a movable part (engaging protrusion 723, engagement upright part 836), and the movable part is connected to the other engaging part (bottom). It is movable between an engaged position and a non-engaged position with respect to the side through hole 720 and the lower sensor part 801),
Any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the switching means moves the movable part from the engagement position to the non-engagement position based on the fact that game media is stored in the auxiliary tank. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the configurations of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be simplified, and can be a practically preferable aspect for realizing the configuration of any one of the features L1 to L4.

Feature L6. The first engaging portion is a hole (bottom side through hole 720) provided at the bottom of the auxiliary tank,
The second engaging part is the movable part (engaging protrusion 723) that can move in and out of the hole,
The switching means includes a movable bottom plate (bottom lid 704) that is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank and is displaced downward by the weight of the game medium when the game medium is stored in the auxiliary tank. death,
The game machine according to feature L5, wherein the movable portion moves from the engagement position to the non-engagement position as the movable bottom plate is displaced downward due to the weight of the game medium.

In the above configuration, the auxiliary tank is provided with a movable bottom plate. Since this movable bottom plate is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, it can efficiently receive the weight of the game media stored in the auxiliary tank. Since the movable part is moved using the displacement of the movable bottom plate, the responsiveness of the movable part to changes in the storage state of game media can be increased, and the switching to the disengaged state is delayed and the removal of the auxiliary tank is This makes it possible to prevent problems from occurring.

Feature L7. The movable bottom plate is
It is rotatably supported by a support means (support part 705),
The gaming machine according to feature L6, further comprising a pushing part (pushing protrusion 733) that pushes the movable part and moves it from the engagement position to the non-engagement position on the rotating tip side.

According to the above configuration, the engagement between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is released by pushing the movable portion using the movable bottom plate. In this case, the configuration can be simplified because the downward displacement of the movable bottom plate can be used as it is to push the movable part.

Feature L8. The movable bottom plate is rotatable within the casing with the back side in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine serving as a rotation tip;
The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the first engaging part and the second engaging part are provided on the back side in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine within the housing.

When the auxiliary tank is pulled out from within the housing by an operator, it is conceivable that the front side of the auxiliary tank is lightly lifted, and in this state it is slid toward the front along the bottom plate of the housing. In this case, for example, if the rotating tip of the movable bottom plate is on the front side of the casing and a push-in part is provided on the front side, as the auxiliary tank is lifted, the push-in of the movable part by the push-in part is released. , it is conceivable that the disengaged state is unintentionally switched to the engaged state due to this. There is a concern that this may obstruct the withdrawal of the auxiliary tank.

In this regard, since the first engaging part and the second engaging part are provided on the back side in the longitudinal direction of the game machine within the housing, it is easier to maintain the pushing of the movable part by the pushing part, which prevents unintentional damage. Switching from the engaged state to the engaged state can be suppressed. This makes it possible to smoothly draw out the auxiliary tank.

Feature L9. The first engaging part is the movable part (engaging standing part 836) that can be displaced in the vertical direction,
The second engaging part is an engaged part (lower sensor part 801) provided at a position that can be engaged with the movable part,
The switching means includes a movable bottom plate (lid main body 835) that is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank and that is displaced downward by the weight of the game medium when the game medium is stored in the auxiliary tank. death,
The game machine according to feature L5, wherein the movable portion moves from the engagement position to the non-engagement position as the movable bottom plate is displaced downward due to the weight of the game medium.

In the above configuration, the auxiliary tank is provided with a movable bottom plate. Since this movable bottom plate is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, it can efficiently receive the weight of the game media stored in the auxiliary tank. Since the movable part is moved using the displacement of the movable bottom plate, the responsiveness of the movable part to changes in the storage state of game media can be increased, and the switching to the disengaged state is delayed and the removal of the auxiliary tank is This makes it possible to suppress inconveniences that may occur.

Feature L10. The second engaging portion is inserted into the tank from outside the tank via insertion holes (lower sensor insertion hole 831, lid sensor insertion hole 837) provided in the auxiliary tank,
The gaming machine according to feature L9, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are configured to be engageable inside the auxiliary tank.

With the above configuration, the engagement relationship between the first engagement part and the second engagement part can be established inside the auxiliary tank. Therefore, there is no need to secure a space for engagement around the outside of the auxiliary tank, and in the installation area for the auxiliary tank (predetermined installation area), dead spaces that do not contribute to the storage of game media can be kept small, and dead spaces can be minimized. can be suppressed.

Feature L11. comprising accommodation state detection means (lower sensor section 801, main controller 101) for detecting the accommodation state of game media in the auxiliary tank;
The storage state detection means includes an insertion member (lower sensor section 801) inserted into the insertion hole,
The gaming machine according to feature L10, wherein the second engaging portion is constituted by the insertion member.

According to the above configuration, since the second engaging portion is configured by utilizing the storage state detection means for detecting the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank, an increase in the number of parts is required to realize the configuration of feature L10. It becomes possible to suppress. In addition, since the accommodation state detection means is generally made of metal, it can be configured to be preferable in terms of suppressing damage to the second engaging portion.

Feature L12. A bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging game media inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine is provided in the bottom plate portion of the casing;
The gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L11, wherein the movable bottom plate is configured to be able to open and close the bottom of the auxiliary tank.

According to the above configuration, since the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be opened and closed by the movable bottom plate, by opening the movable bottom plate, the game media from the storage section can be directly guided to the bottom plate opening. This makes it possible to automatically collect the auxiliary tank while it is installed inside the housing, making it unnecessary to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, and reducing the risk of losing the auxiliary tank. .

Feature L13. When the movable bottom plate is in an open state, guide means (extending plate 751, recess 754 ) The gaming machine according to feature L12.

If the movable bottom plate is in the open state, it will not be able to properly bear the weight of the game media, and there is a risk that switching from the engaged state to the non-engaged state will be inconvenient. In this regard, in this configuration, when the movable bottom plate is in the open state, the installation position of the auxiliary tank is guided to a position where the first engaging part and the second engaging part do not face each other, so the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is avoided. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature L14. accommodation state detection means (lower sensor section 801, main controller 101) for detecting the accommodation state of game media in the auxiliary tank;
external signal output means (main controller 101) that outputs a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the detection result of the accommodation state detection means is a predetermined result;
Equipped with
The switching means is characterized in that the first engaging part and the second engaging part are brought into a disengaged state before the predetermined signal is outputted by the external signal outputting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L13.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to allow the auxiliary tank to be taken out before the recovery of game media (removal of the auxiliary tank) is prompted through the predetermined signal. As a result, it is possible to respond with sufficient time to the timing of taking out the auxiliary tank, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems in recovering the game media.

Feature L15. comprising accommodation state detection means (upper sensor rod 16a, main controller 101) for detecting the accommodation state of game media in the auxiliary tank;
The accommodation state detection means has an insertion member (upper sensor rod 16a) that is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through an insertion hole (upper sensor insertion hole 505a) provided in the auxiliary tank,
When the insertion member is inserted into the insertion hole, the peripheral edge of the insertion hole and the insertion member come into contact with or approach each other in a direction crossing the insertion direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L14.

According to the above configuration, the movement of the auxiliary tank can be restricted by the peripheral edge of the insertion hole and the insertion member coming into contact with or approaching each other. Thereby, in addition to the engagement of the first engaging part and the second engaging part, the movement of the auxiliary tank can be restricted, and it becomes possible to strengthen the suppression of rattling of the auxiliary tank. At that time, since the accommodation state detection unit is utilized, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A casing (casing 11) that is open to the front;
a door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing;
a hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage section (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area parallel to the hopper device in the housing and that stores surplus gaming media in the storage section;
Equipped with
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end,
a first engaging portion (right side flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
a second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided within the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion;
By sliding the auxiliary tank on the tank installation surface (bottom plate 11a) in the predetermined installation area, the first engagement part and the second engagement part are engaged and disengaged. A gaming machine characterized in that a relative positional relationship between the two is set.

From the viewpoint of preventing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored in the housing. However, if the auxiliary tank of a gaming machine is stored freely inside the casing, if the gaming machine is tilted or vibrated during transport, the auxiliary tank will move within the casing, damaging surrounding hopper devices, door bodies, etc. This has the disadvantage of causing damage due to collision.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the first engaging part provided on the auxiliary tank and the second engaging part provided within the casing are provided, and by engaging these, the inside of the casing is The movement of auxiliary tanks can be regulated. This prevents the auxiliary tank from moving within the housing and colliding with surrounding members, making it possible to prevent damage to the auxiliary tank and surrounding members during transportation.

In this case, in this configuration, by sliding the auxiliary tank on the tank installation surface, it is possible to engage and disengage the first engagement part and the second engagement part. . Therefore, it is possible to engage the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion without directly operating the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion. In addition, with this configuration, the degree of freedom in layout can be improved, such as making it possible to place the first engaging part and the second engaging part in places that are difficult for the operator to reach. This configuration is advantageous in gaming machines where the installation space for mounted components is limited. In addition, when closing the door body, it is essential to push the auxiliary tank to the rear of the game machine (towards the back of the housing) so that the door body and the auxiliary tank do not interfere with each other. The pushing operation and the engaging operation of the first engaging part and the second engaging part can be completed in one operation, and it becomes possible to improve work efficiency.

Feature M2. The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the first engaging part and the second engaging part are provided so as to be engaged with each other in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the movement of the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the game machine is regulated by the engagement of the first engagement part and the second engagement part. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the auxiliary tank moving within the housing and hitting the door when the gaming machine is being transported. In addition, when installing the auxiliary tank inside the housing, the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the engagement of the first engaging part and the second engaging part, so that the auxiliary tank can be placed within a predetermined installation area within the housing. You can see that the slide has moved up to.

Feature M3. The first engaging portion is a hole (bottom side through hole 720) provided at the bottom of the auxiliary tank,
The second engaging part is a movable part (engaging protrusion 723) that can move in and out of the hole,
The movable part is biased by biasing means (coil spring 729) so as to protrude from the tank installation surface of the predetermined installation area,
A guide portion (engaging inclined portion 745, arcuate portion 746) for guiding the movable portion under the bottom of the auxiliary tank is provided at the back end of the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2.

According to the above configuration, the movable part can be inserted into the hole by the urging force of the urging means, and the first engaging part and the second engaging part can be appropriately engaged. However, the movable part may protrude from the tank installation surface, and there is a risk that the auxiliary tank and the movable part may interfere with each other during the process of sliding the auxiliary tank. In this regard, in this configuration, the movable part is guided under the bottom of the auxiliary tank by the guide part provided at the back end of the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the game machine. This can prevent the parts from getting caught. Thereby, it becomes possible to smoothly slide the auxiliary tank to a position where the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion engage. Further, damage to the first engaging portion and the like due to installation of the auxiliary tank can also be suppressed.

Feature M4. The guide portion includes an inclined portion (engaging inclined portion 745) that intersects diagonally with respect to the sliding direction of the auxiliary tank and comes into contact with the movable portion when the auxiliary tank is slid.
The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the inclined portion has an inclined shape that pushes the movable portion downward as the sliding movement progresses.

According to the above configuration, the movable part can be guided under the bottom of the auxiliary tank along the slope of the slope part, and this can be a practically preferable aspect for realizing the configuration of the feature M3.

Feature M5. comprising a guide means (right side plate 11c) for guiding the auxiliary tank so that the auxiliary tank passes through a predetermined specific route when the auxiliary tank is slid on the tank installation surface;
Features M1 to M4 characterized in that the relative positional relationship between the first engaging part and the second engaging part is set so that the first engaging part and the second engaging part engage when the auxiliary tank passes through the specific route. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the above configuration, by sliding the auxiliary tank according to the guide of the guide means, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be easily engaged. Therefore, for example, even if the engagement point is in a blind spot or difficult to see from the perspective of the worker installing the auxiliary tank, it can be easily engaged, and the workability of the engagement work can be improved. It is possible to increase it.

<Characteristics N group>
Feature N1. A casing (casing 11) that is open to the front;
a door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing;
a hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage section (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area parallel to the hopper device in the housing and that stores surplus gaming media in the storage section;
Equipped with
A bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging game media inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine is provided in the bottom plate portion of the casing;
The auxiliary tank is
A tank body (tank body 701) having a bottomed shape having an opening at the upper end and a bottom at the lower end;
An opening/closing means (bottom lids 704, 802) that allows the bottom to be opened and closed;
Equipped with
The opening/closing means opens the bottom by rotating inside the tank body, and in the open state, the end on the rotating tip side is located above the tank body,
A game characterized in that a contact member (guiding plate 52a) that contacts the opening/closing means in an open state at a predetermined open position is provided at a position above the tank body within the housing. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the tank bottom can be opened and closed, the auxiliary tank can be made compatible with manual collection by closing the bottom, while it can be made compatible with automatic collection by opening the bottom. As a result, the auxiliary tank can be installed within the housing even during automatic collection, making it unnecessary to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, and making it possible to prevent loss of the auxiliary tank.

However, when the tank is used with the bottom open, if shock or vibration is applied, for example, by a player hitting the game machine, there is a risk that the opening/closing means will tilt and the bottom will close. In this case, if the player does not notice that the game has been closed and continues playing the game, not only will the game media not be collected, but the game media will overflow from the auxiliary tank and be scattered inside the case. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if the opening/closing means is tilted due to impact or vibration, the rotation of the opening/closing means can be restricted by the contact member, and unintended closing of the tank bottom can be prevented.

Feature N2. The abutting member is a guiding part (guiding plate 52a) that guides game media from the storage part to the auxiliary tank, or a member provided at a position on the side where the rotation angle of the opening/closing means is larger than the guiding part. The gaming machine according to feature N1.

According to the above configuration, when the rotation of the opening/closing means is restricted by the abutting member, the opening/closing means does not block the discharge port of the game medium in the guiding part, or the opening/closing means is interposed between the guiding part and the tank bottom. It is suppressed that As a result, the game media from the storage section can be continuously guided to the bottom plate opening, and the recovery of the game media can be prevented from being delayed.

Feature N3. The gaming machine according to feature N2, wherein the opening/closing means is rotatably provided at the bottom portion toward the front of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, by rotating the opening/closing means in the closed state toward the front of the game machine, the opening/closing means in the open state becomes the open state, and in this case, the opening/closing means in the open state can be positioned on the door body side with respect to the guiding part. can. Thereby, it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as the game media supplied from the guiding part to the auxiliary tank hitting the opening/closing means and flying toward the door body and hitting the door body. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent game media from entering between the door body and the tank body.

Feature N4. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the opening/closing means has an elongated shape and is rotatably supported on the short side of the bottom.

According to the above configuration, the end of the rotating tip of the opening/closing means can be positioned above the upper end of the tank body in the open state, while the tank body is deepened to a certain extent to ensure an appropriate tank capacity. becomes possible.

Feature N5. The game according to feature N4, wherein the opening/closing means is rotatably supported at a short side that is on the front side of the game machine when the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing with the tank bottom opened, the opening/closing means can be located on the front side. It becomes easier to support the opening/closing means by hand when pushing in the auxiliary tank, making installation work easier.

Feature N6. comprising storage state detection means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b, main controller 101) for detecting the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank,
The accommodation state detection means is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 731a, lower sensor insertion hole 731b) provided in the back side wall (rear wall 701c) of the auxiliary tank. It has an insertion member (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) that can be inserted,
The gaming machine according to feature N5, wherein the contact member is provided at a position where the opening/closing means and the insertion member can come into contact with the opening/closing means in a non-contact state.

According to the above configuration, when the opening/closing means is tilted, rotation of the opening/closing means is regulated by the contact member before contact with the insertion member. As a result, even if the opening/closing means is accidentally tilted, collision with the insertion member can be suppressed.

Feature N7. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, wherein at least a part of a portion located above the tank body when the opening/closing means is in an open state is transparent. .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to visually see the inside of the casing and tank body through the opening/closing means, and even though the opening/closing means is partially protruding and the height of the auxiliary tank tends to be large, This makes it possible to suppress adverse effects on visibility inside the tank body.

Feature N8. The game machine according to any one of features N1 to N7, characterized in that at least one of the opening/closing means and the abutting member is provided with a buffer means at a contact point between the opening/closing means and the abutting member. .

According to the above configuration, damage to the opening/closing means and the like due to impact when the opening/closing means contacts the abutting member is suppressed.

<Characteristics Group O>
Feature O1. A casing (casing 11) that is open to the front;
a door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing;
a hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage section (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area parallel to the hopper device in the housing and that stores surplus gaming media in the storage section;
Equipped with
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end,
a first engaging portion (bottom side through hole 720) provided in the auxiliary tank;
a second engaging portion (engaging portion 721) provided within the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion;
an engagement operation means (a coil spring 729, an engagement drive section 761) that brings the first engagement part and the second engagement part into an engaged state or a non-engaged state;
Equipped with
The engagement operation means disengages the first engagement part and the second engagement part when the gaming machine is in a predetermined power supply state, and when the gaming machine is not in the predetermined power supply state. , A gaming machine characterized in that the first engaging part and the second engaging part are in an engaged state.

From the viewpoint of preventing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored in the housing. However, when manually collecting game media stored in an auxiliary tank in a game machine, it is necessary to take out the auxiliary tank from the housing, so it is required to store the auxiliary tank in a free state without fixing it. Therefore, if the game machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank moves within the housing and collides with surrounding hopper devices, door bodies, etc., causing damage.

In this regard, the present configuration includes a first engaging part provided in the auxiliary tank and a second engaging part provided in the casing, and these are not activated when the gaming machine is in a predetermined power supply state. It is configured to be in an engaged state, and to be in an engaged state when it is not in a predetermined power supply state. Therefore, when the game machine is being transported and the power supply is not being supplied, the first engaging part and the second engaging part can be brought into the engaged state, but when the game machine is installed in the game hall and the power supply is not being supplied. If so, it can be set to a disengaged state. In other words, according to this configuration, while restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the game machine, it is possible to allow the operation of taking out the auxiliary tank when the game machine is in operation, and convenience is greatly improved.

Feature O2. The engagement operation means operates the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion based on the fact that the predetermined power supply state is present and the amount of game media stored in the auxiliary tank is less than or equal to a predetermined value. The gaming machine according to feature O1, further comprising means for bringing the two into an engaged state.

Even if the power line is connected to a game machine installed in a game hall, etc., if the auxiliary tank is empty during inspection or game settings before the hall opens or after the hall closes, the auxiliary tank There is no need to move the auxiliary tank, and it is desirable for the auxiliary tank to remain stationary due to work convenience. In this respect, the first engaging part and the second engaging part are brought into the engaged state based on the fact that the game machine is in a predetermined power supply state and the amount of game media stored in the auxiliary tank is below a predetermined value. Therefore, when it is unnecessary to move the auxiliary tank, unnecessary movement can be suppressed, and an advantageous configuration for work etc. can be realized.

Feature O3. comprising storage state detection means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b, main controller 101) for detecting that the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank is a predetermined state (full state),
The engagement operation means operates the first engagement part and the second engagement part based on the fact that the predetermined power supply state is present and the predetermined state is detected by the accommodation state detection means. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for setting the disengaged state.

According to the above configuration, when the power supply line is connected to the gaming machine, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged in response to the accommodation state of the gaming medium reaching a predetermined state (for example, a full state). The parts can be brought into a disengaged state. This makes it possible to allow movement of the auxiliary tank in accordance with the timing of taking out the auxiliary tank.

Feature O4. comprising storage state detection means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b, main controller 101) for detecting the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank,
The accommodation state detection means includes:
first means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) capable of detecting that the accommodation state is a first state (full state);
a second means capable of detecting that the accommodation state is a second state in which the accommodation capacity is smaller than the first state;
Equipped with
The engagement operation means operates the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion based on the fact that the predetermined power supply state is present and the second state is detected by the second means. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for setting the disengaged state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to allow the auxiliary tank to be taken out before the storage state of the game media reaches the first state (for example, a full state), and the timing for taking out the auxiliary tank can be handled with sufficient time. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature O5. One of the first and second engaging parts is a movable part (engaging protrusion 723), and the movable part is connected to the other engaging part (bottom through hole 720). movable between an engaged position and a disengaged position;
The engagement operation means is
a drive unit (a drive source of the engagement drive unit 761) that moves the movable part between the engagement position and the non-engagement position;
The game machine according to any one of features O2 to O4, further comprising a drive control means (main control device 101) that controls drive of the drive unit based on the amount of game media stored in the auxiliary tank. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the power line is connected to the game machine, it is possible to switch between the engaged state and the non-engaged state according to the amount of game media stored in the auxiliary tank, and feature O2 This can be a practically preferred embodiment for realizing any of the configurations from O4 to O4.

Feature O6. The engagement operation means includes biasing means (coil spring 729) that biases the movable part toward the engagement position,
The gaming machine according to feature O5, characterized in that when the drive section is in a non-driven state, the movable section is held at the engagement position by the urging force of the urging means.

According to the above configuration, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be brought into the engaged state during transportation of the gaming machine where the power line is not connected to the gaming machine. This makes it possible to suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank during transportation and the like.

Note that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of other feature A groups to feature O groups to each of the configurations of feature A groups to feature O groups described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: an operating means (game ball firing handle 341) operated by a player, a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 410) that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a It is equipped with a ball path (guiding rail 400) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part (nail 369, etc.) arranged in the game area (play area PE), and among these game parts, the predetermined part A gaming machine that provides a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a passing section (general prize opening 361, etc.).

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball (reel-type game machine using a ball): Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, The game is played with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started, and the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to a player is generated, and the invention further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a loading process for taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a feeding device that performs a loading process for taking in game balls from the ball tray, and dispensing game balls into the ball tray. 1. A gaming machine comprising a payout device that performs the start operation, and configured such that the operation of the starting operating means becomes effective when game balls are thrown in by the throwing device.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10...Slot machine as a gaming machine, 11...Casing, 15...Medal discharge hole as a bottom plate opening, 32...Reel as a rotating body, 41...Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44...Stop operation means 52...Storage tank as a storage unit, 54...Auxiliary tank, 64...Speaker forming an auxiliary effect unit, 65...Auxiliary display unit forming an auxiliary effect unit, 81...Display control as a sub-control board Apparatus, 101... Main control device as a main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means, 501, 601, 701... Tank body, 504, 607, 705... As support means Support part, 514, 606, 704, 802... Bottom cover as opening/closing means, 571c... Right flange part as first engaging part, 574... Engaging part as second engaging part, 617... As urging means Coil spring 720...Bottom side through hole as first engagement part, 721...Engagement part as second engagement part, 801...Lower sensor part as first engagement part, 836...Second engagement part Standing part as a joint.

Claims (1)

a plurality of orbiting bodies with plural kinds of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
an accepting means for accepting gaming media or virtual gaming media;
a bet number setting unit that grasps that the gaming media or virtual gaming media have been accepted by the accepting unit and sets the number of bets for the game with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
a starting operation means that, when operated, causes each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting;
a lottery means that performs a lottery to decide whether or not to give a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
a stop operation means that stops the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
drive control means for causing each of the orbiting bodies to start orbiting when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media as a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
The lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result corresponding to shifting to a specific state in which the probability of winning a predetermined role in the lottery by the lottery means changes compared to before the transition, and a transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific state when the symbol combination is stopped;
A gaming machine comprising:
The number of bets set by the number of bets setting means includes a first number of bets and a second number of bets that is different from the first number of bets,
a first control means for controlling the progress of the game;
a second control means that performs control so that a performance corresponding to the processing result of the first control means is executed;
Equipped with
The first control means is configured to satisfy a specific condition that can be satisfied without winning the transition result in a game played in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets. comprising a condition determining means for determining whether or not the
The gaming machine is
A predetermined number of bets in a game played in a situation in which the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not satisfied, and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. a first performance means capable of executing a first specific performance using the performance means;
In a game that is played in a situation where the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means and the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the second number of bets. a second performance means capable of executing a second specific performance different from the first specific performance using a predetermined performance means;
means capable of notifying a specific notification that the specific condition has been met using the predetermined presentation means;
In a situation where the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means, the game can be executed in a situation where the number of bets set by the number of bets setting means is the first number of bets. A gaming machine with special features.

Images